SERVICE MANUAL

MULTIFUNCTIONAL DIGITAL SYSTEMS

e-STUDIO2523A/2523AD/
2323AM/2823AM
e-STUDIO2329A/2829A

Model: DP-2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM/2329A/2829A
Publish Date: July 2019
File No. SME19000200
R190221V6700-TTEC
Ver00 F_2019-07
 Trademarks
• FLOIL® is a registered trademark of Kanto Kasei., Ltd.
• MOLYKOTE® is a registered trademark of Dow Corning Corporation.
• ALVANIA® is a registered trademark of Shell Brands International AG.
• e-STUDIO, e-BRIDGE, and TopAccess are trademarks of Toshiba Tec Corporation.
• Other company names and product names in this manual are the trademarks of their respective
companies.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

Under the copyright laws, this manual cannot be reproduced in any form without prior written
permission of Toshiba Tec Corporation.
 GENERAL PRECAUTIONS REGARDING THE SERVICE FOR
THIS EQUIPMENT
The installation and service shall be done by a qualified service
technician.

1. Transportation/Installation
- When transporting/installing the equipment, employ at least two persons, take off the drawer
from it and be sure to hold the positions as shown in the figure. The equipment is quite heavy
and weighs approximately 24.4 kg (53.79 lb.), therefore pay full attention when handling it.
* To ensure the space to hold the equipment securely, take off the drawer as shown in the
figures (A) and (B).

(A) (B)

- Be sure not to hold the movable parts or units (e.g. the ADU or RADF) when transporting the
equipment.
- Be sure to use a dedicated outlet with AC AC 110V / 15A, 120 V / 12 A, 220-240 V / 8A for its
power source.
- The equipment must be grounded for safety.
- Select a suitable place for installation. Avoid excessive heat, high humidity, dust, vibration and
direct sunlight.
- Provide proper ventilation since the equipment emits a slight amount of ozone.
- To insure adequate working space for the copying operation, keep a minimum clearance of 80
cm (32”) on the left, 80 cm (32”) on the right and 10 cm (4”) on the rear.
- The equipment shall be installed near the socket outlet and shall be accessible.
- Be sure to fix and plug in the power cable securely after the installation so that no one trips over
it.
- When the equipment is used after the option is removed, be sure to install the parts or the covers
which have been taken off so that the inside of the equipment is not exposed.
- Do not use an ozone generator near the MFP. Or, place any ozone generator as far away from
the MFP as possible.
- Do not use an ultrasonic humidifier near the MFP. Components such as chlorinate and mineral
will be atomized by an ultrasonic humidifier and they will adhere to electric parts in the MFP. This
could cause malfunctions.
2. General Precautions at Service
- Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service (except for the service
should be done with the power turned ON).
- After the power cable is disconnected, an electric charge may remain in the boards of the
equipment. Therefore, be sure to disconnect or connect the connectors when about 1 minute
(e.g.: the time for taking off the rear cover) has passed after the power cable is disconnected.
- The fuse could be in the neutral. The mains supply shall be disconnected to de-energize the
phase conductors.
- Unplug the power cable and clean the area around the prongs of the plug and socket outlet once
a year or more. A fire may occur when dust lies on this area.
- When the parts are disassembled, reassembly is the reverse of disassembly unless otherwise
noted in this manual or other related documents. Be careful not to install small parts such as
screws, washers, pins, E-rings, star washers in the wrong places.
- Basically, the equipment should not be operated with any parts removed or disassembled.
- The PC board must be stored in an anti-electrostatic bag and handled carefully using a wristband
since the ICs on it may be damaged due to static electricity.

Caution: Before using the antistatic wrist strap, unplug the power cable of the
equipment and make sure that there are no charged objects which are not
insulated in the vicinity.
- Avoid exposure to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver
on the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
- Be sure not to touch high-temperature sections such as the fuser unit, damp heater and areas
around them.
- Be sure not to touch high-voltage sections such as the chargers, transfer roller, developer, high-
voltage transformer and power supply unit. Especially, the board of these components should not
be touched since the electric charge may remain in the capacitors, etc. on them even after the
power is turned OFF.
- Make sure that the equipment will not operate before touching potentially dangerous places (e.g.
rotating/operating sections such as gears, belts pulleys, fans and laser beam exit of the laser
optical unit).
- Be careful when removing the covers since there might be the parts with very sharp edges
underneath.
- When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
- Use designated jigs and tools.
- Use recommended measuring instruments or equivalents.
- Return the equipment to the original state and check the operation when the service is finished.
- Do not leave plastic bags where children can get at them. This may cause an accident such as
suffocation if a child puts his/her head into a bag. Plastic bags of options or service parts must be
brought back.
- There is a risk of an electric shock or fire resulting from the damage to the harness covering or
conduction blockage. To avoid this, be sure to wire the harness in the same way as that before
disassembling when the equipment is assembled/disassembled.

3. General operations
- Check the procedures and perform them as described in the Service Manual.
- Make sure you do not lose your balance.
- Avoid exposure to your skin and wear protective gloves as needed.
4. Important Service Parts for Safety
The breaker, door switch, fuse, thermostat, thermofuse, thermistor, batteries, IC-RAMs including
lithium batteries, etc. are particularly important for safety. Be sure to handle/install them properly. If
these parts are short-circuited and their functions become ineffective, they may result in fatal
accidents such as explosion or fire. Avoid short-circuiting and do not use the parts not
recommended by Toshiba Tec Corporation.
5. Cautionary Labels
During servicing, be sure to check the rating label and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power
cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION. LASER BEAM”,
etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[1] Cautionary label for laser unit

[2] Warning for high temperature area (fuser unit)
[3] Explanatory label
[4] Rating label
[5] Service label
6. Disposal of the Equipment, Supplies and Packing Materials
Regarding the recovery and disposal of the equipment, supplies, packing materials, follow the
relevant local regulations or rules.

7. Batteries and IC RAMs including lithium batteries etc.

CAUTION:
RISK OF EXPLOSION IF BATTERY IS REPLACED BY AN INCORRECT TYPE.
DISPOSE OF USED BATTERIES ACCORDING TO THE RELEVANT LOCAL REGULATIONS OR
RULES.
 ALLGEMEINE SICHERHEITSMASSNAHMEN FÜR DIESES
GERÄT
Die Installation und die Wartung sind von einem qualifizierten Service-
Techniker durchzuführen.

1. Transport/Installation
- Zum Transportieren/Installieren des Systems mit 2 Personen arbeiten, die Kassette entfernen
und das System nur an den abgebildeten Stellen halten. Das System ist relativ schwer und wiegt
etwa 24.4 kg, daher behutsam vorgehen.
* Damit genug Platz zum sicheren Halten des Systems geschaffen wird, muss die Kassette
gemäß gemas den Abb. (A) und (B) entfernt werden.

(A) (B)

- Beim Transportieren des Geräts nicht an den beweglichen Teilen oder Einheiten (z.B. die
Duplexeinheit oder die automatische Dokumentenzuführung) halten.
- Eine spezielle Steckdose mit Stromversorgung von AC 120 V / 12 A, 220-240 V / 8A als
Stromquelle verwenden.
- Das Gerät ist aus Sicherheitsgründen zu erden.
- Einen geeigneten Standort für die Installation wählen. Standorte mit zuviel Hitze, hoher
Luftfeuchtigkeit, Staub, Vibrieren und direkter Sonneneinstrahlung sind zu vermeiden.
- Für ausreichende Belüftung sorgen, da das Gerät etwas Ozon abgibt.
- Um einen optimalen Kopierbetrieb zu gewährleisten, muss ein Abstand von mindestens 80 cm
links, 80 cm rechts und 10 cm dahinter eingehalten werden.
- Das Gerät ist in der Nähe der Steckdose zu installieren; diese muss leicht zu erreichen sein.
- Nach der Installation muss das Netzkabel richtig hineingesteckt und befestigt werden, damit
niemand darüber stolpern kann.
- Falls der Auspackungsstandort und der Installationsstandort des Geräts verschieden sind, die
Bildqualitätsjustierung (automatische Gammajustierung) je nach der Temperatur und
Luftfeuchtigkeit des Installationsstandorts und der Papiersorte, die verwendet wird, durchführen.
- Betreiben Sie keinen Ultraschall-Luftbefeuchter in der Nähe des MFP.
Chlorat- und mineralhaltige Komponenten werden von einem Ultraschallbefeuchter zerstäubt
und die Partikel können sich an den elektrischen Teilen innerhalb des MFP anlagern. Dies kann
zu Fehlfunktionen führen.
2. Allgemeine Sicherheitsmassnahmen in bezug auf die Wartung
- Während der Wartung das Gerät ausschalten und das Netzkabel herausziehen (ausser Wartung,
die bei einem eingeschalteten Gerät, durchgeführt werden muss).
- Das Netzkabel herausziehen und den Bereich um die Steckerpole und die Steckdose die
Umgebung in der Nähe von den Steckerzacken und der Steckdose wenigstens einmal im Jahr
reinigen. Wenn Staub sich in dieser Gegend ansammelt, kann dies ein Feuer verursachen.
- Die Sicherung kann eingeschaltet bleiben. Der Stromstecker sollte jedoch gezogen werden,
damit die internen Leiter von der Phase getrennt sind.
- Wenn die Teile auseinandergenommen werden, wenn nicht anders in diesem Handbuch usw
erklärt, ist das Zusammenbauen in umgekehrter Reihenfolge durchzuführen. Aufpassen, dass
kleine Teile wie Schrauben, Dichtungsringe, Bolzen, E-Ringe, Stern-Dichtungsringe,
Kabelbäume nicht an den verkehrten Stellen eingebaut werden.
- Grundsätzlich darf das Gerät mit enfernten oder auseinandergenommenen Teilen nicht in
Betrieb genommen werden.
- Das PC-Board muss in einer Anti-elektrostatischen Hülle gelagert werden. Nur Mit einer
Manschette bei Betätigung eines Armbandes anfassen, sonst könnte es sein, dass die
integrierten Schaltkreise durch statische Elektrizität beschädigt werden.

Vorsicht: Vor Benutzung der Manschette der Betätigung des Armbandes, das Netzkabel
des Gerätes herausziehen und prüfen, dass es in der Nähe keine geladenen
Gegenstände, die nicht isoliert sind, gibt.
- Setzen Sie sich während der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus. Dieses Gerät ist mit
einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den Laserstrahl zu
blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in den Pfad des
Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten sämtliche reflektierenden Metallgegenstände, wie
Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochtemperaturbereiche, wie die Fixiereinheit, die Heizquelle und die
umliegenden Bereiche, berühren.
- Auf keinen Fall Hochspannungsbereiche, wie die Ladeeinheiten, die Transferwalze, die
Entwicklereinheit, den Hochspannungstransformator, und das Netzgerät, berühren.
Insbesondere sollten die Platinen dieser Komponenten nicht berührt werden, da die
Kondensatoren usw. auch nach dem Ausschalten des Geräts noch elektrisch geladen sein
können.
- Vor dem Berühren potenziell gefährlicher Bereiche (z. B. drehbare oder betriebsrelevante
Bereiche, wie Zahnräder, Riemen, Riemenscheiben, Lüfter und die Laseraustrittsöffnung der
optischen Lasereinheit) sicherstellen, dass das Gerät sich nicht bedienen lässt.
- Beim Entfernen von Abdeckungen vorsichtig vorgehen, da sich darunter scharfkantige
Komponenten befinden können.
- Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
- Ausschließlich vorgesehene Werkzeuge und Hilfsmittel verwenden.
- Empfohlene oder gleichwertige Messgeräte verwenden.
- Nach Abschluss der Wartungsarbeiten das Gerät in den ursprünglichen Zustand zurück
versetzen und den einwandfreien Betrieb überprüfen.
- Bewahren Sie Kunststofftüten kindersicher auf. Es besteht Erstickungsgefahr, wenn sich Kinder
beim Spielen eine Kunststofftüte über den Kopf ziehen. Bitte nehmen Sie die Kunststofftüten von
Optionen oder Serviceparts wieder zurück.
- Wenn der Schutzmantel eines Kabels oder die Steckerisolierung beschädigt werden, besteht
Brandgefahr oder die Gefahr eines elektrischen Schlags. Um dies zu vermeiden, sollten Kabel in
der gleichen Weise verlegt werden, wie sie vor der Demontage/dem Transport verlegt waren.

3. Allgemeine Sicherheïtsmassnahmen
- Die Verfahren sind zu überprüfen und wie im Wartungshandbuch beschrieben durchzuführen.
- Vorsichtig, dass Sie nicht umfallen.
- Um Aussetzung zur Haut zur vermeiden, tragen Sie wenn nötig Schutzhandschuhe.
4. Sicherheitsrelevante Wartungsteile
Der Leistungsschutzschalter, der Türschalter, die Sicherung, der Thermostat, die Thermosicherung,
der Thermistor, der Akkus, die IC-RAMs einschließlich der Lithiumakkus usw. sind besonders
sicherheitsrelevant. Sie müssen unbedingt korrekt gehandhabt und installiert werden. Wenn diese
Teile kurzgeschlossen und funktionsunfähig werden, kann dies zu schwerwiegenden Schäden,
einer Explosion oder wie einem Abbrand, führen. Kurzschlüsse sind zu vermeiden, und es sind
ausschließlich Teile zu verwenden, die von der Toshiba Tec Corporation empfohlen sind.
5. Warnetiketten
Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen [z. B. „Unplug the power cable during service“ („Netzkabel vor Beginn der
Wartungsarbeiten abziehen“), „CAUTION. HOT“ („VORSICHT, HEISS“), „CAUTION. HIGH
VOLTAGE“ („VORSICHT, HOCHSPANNUNG“), „CAUTION. LASER BEAM“ („VORSICHT, LASER“)
usw.], um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät angebracht sind.
[1]

[2]

[3]

[4]

[5]

[1] Laser-Warnetikett
[2] Warnung fur Bereiche mit hohen Temperaturen (Fixiereinheit)
[3] Erklarungsetikett
[4] Erkennungsetikett
[5] Dienstaufschrift
6. Entsorgung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und Verpackungsmaterialien
In Bezug auf die Entsorgung und Wiederverwertung des Geräts, der Verbrauchs- und
Verpackungsmaterialien, sind die einschlägigen nationalen oder regionalen Vorschriften zu
befolgen.

7. Akkus und IC RAMs einschließlich Lithiumakkus etc.

VORSICHT:
ES BESTEHT EXPLOSIONSGEFAHR; WENN DER AKKU DURCH DEN FALSCHEN TYP
ERSETZT WIRD.
ENTSORGEN SIE GEBRAUCHTE AKKUS ENTSPRECHEND DER EINSCHLÄGIGEN
REGIONALEN BESTIMMUNGEN UND VORSCHRIFTEN.
Laseremissionseinheit

Diese Einheit besteht aus der Laserdiode, dem Fokussierungsobjektiv, der Blende und dem
Zylinderobjektiv.

• Laserdiode
Diese Laserdiode zeichnet sich durch eine geringe Regeldifferenz, eine kleine Laservariation und
einen niedrigen Schwellenstrom aus.
Die Blende der Laseremissionseinheit ist unter dem Fokussierobjektiv angeordnet, um die Form der
Laserstrahlen in der primären und sekundären Scanrichtung festzulegen.
Die Laserdiode gibt Laserstrahlen als Reaktion auf die Signale der Laseremissionssteuerung (ein/
aus) von der Lasertreiber-PC-Platine (LDRS) aus. Die durch das Fokussierobjektiv geführten
Laserstrahlen werden auf die Trommeloberfläche fokussiert.

• Vorsichtsmaßnahmen im Zusammenhang mit Lasern

Dieses Gerät enthält eine Laserdiode, die einen unsichtbaren Laserstrahl emittiert.
Da man diesen Laserstrahl nicht sehen kann, ist bei der Handhabung der Komponenten der
optischen Lasereinheit, bei der Durchführung von Arbeiten und bei der Justierung des Laserstrahls
äußerste Vorsicht geboten. Arbeiten dürfen niemals anhand anderer als den vorgeschriebenen
Anleitungen durchgeführt werden; andernfalls kann es zu einer Schädigung Exposition durch
Laserstrahlung kommen.
Die Lasereinheit ist vollständig mit einer Schutzabdeckung versiegelt. Solange ausschließlich die
Arbeitsschritte der vorgeschriebenen Anleitungen durchgeführt werden, tritt der Laserstrahl nicht
aus, und es besteht keine Gefahr, der Laserstrahlung ausgesetzt zu werden.

Das folgende Laserwarnetikett ist am Gehäuse sichtbar, wenn die Abdeckung auf der rechten Seite
und die Tonerzufuhrabdeckung geöffnet sind.
Warnhinweise:
• Setzen Sie sich während der Wartungsarbeiten nicht dem Laserstrahl aus.
Dieses Gerät ist mit einer Laserdiode ausgestattet. Es ist unbedingt zu vermeiden, direkt in den
Laserstrahl zu blicken. Keine reflektierenden Teile oder Werkzeuge, wie z. B. Schraubendreher, in
den Pfad des Laserstrahls halten. Vor den Wartungsarbeiten sämtliche reflektierenden
Metallgegenstände, wie Uhren, Ringe usw., entfernen.
• Bei Wartungsarbeiten am eingeschalteten Gerät dürfen keine unter Strom stehenden, drehbaren
oder betriebsrelevanten Bereiche berührt werden. Nicht direkt in den Laserstrahl blicken.
• Im Rahmen der Wartung unbedingt das Leistungsschild und die Etiketten mit Warnhinweisen
überprüfen [z. B. „Unplug the power cable during service“ („Netzkabel vor Beginn der
Wartungsarbeiten abziehen“), „CAUTION. HOT“ („VORSICHT, HEISS“), „CAUTION. HIGH
VOLTAGE“ („VORSICHT, HOCHSPANNUNG“), „CAUTION. LASER BEAM“ („VORSICHT, LASER“)
usw.], um sicherzustellen, dass sie nicht verschmutzt sind und korrekt am Gerät angebracht sind.
 CONTENTS
1. FEATURES ................................................................................................................... 1-1
1.1 Main Feature (The changed point from the conventional model)...................................... 1-1
2. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES ................................... 2-1
2.1 Specifications .................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.1.1 General .............................................................................................................. 2-1
2.1.2 Copy .................................................................................................................. 2-4
2.1.3 Print ................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.1.4 Scan................................................................................................................... 2-7
2.2 Accessories....................................................................................................................... 2-8
2.3 Options.............................................................................................................................. 2-9
2.4 System List...................................................................................................................... 2-10
2.4.1 <2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM> ............................................................... 2-10
2.4.2 <2329A/2829A>............................................................................................... 2-11
2.5 Supplies .......................................................................................................................... 2-12
3. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE ....................................................................................... 3-1
3.1 Sectional View................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2 Electric Parts Layout ......................................................................................................... 3-4
3.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components ............................................................ 3-12
3.3.1 Motors.............................................................................................................. 3-12
3.3.2 Sensors and switches ...................................................................................... 3-12
3.3.3 Electromagnetic clutches................................................................................. 3-13
3.3.4 PC boards........................................................................................................ 3-13
3.3.5 Lamps and heaters .......................................................................................... 3-14
3.3.6 Thermistors and thermostats ........................................................................... 3-14
3.3.7 Others .............................................................................................................. 3-15
3.4 Copy Process.................................................................................................................. 3-16
3.4.1 General Description of Copying Process ......................................................... 3-16
3.5 Comparison with e-STUDIO2303A/2303AM/2803AM/2309A/2809A series ................... 3-17
3.6 General Operation........................................................................................................... 3-19
3.6.1 Overview of Operation ..................................................................................... 3-19
3.6.2 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-19
3.6.3 Detection of Abnormality.................................................................................. 3-22
3.7 Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 3-25
3.7.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-25
3.7.2 Items shown on the display panel.................................................................... 3-27
3.8 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 3-28
3.8.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-28
3.8.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-28
3.8.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-29
3.8.4 Description of Operation .................................................................................. 3-30
3.9 Laser Optical Unit............................................................................................................ 3-31
3.9.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-31
3.9.2 Laser precautions ............................................................................................ 3-32
3.10 Drive System................................................................................................................... 3-33
3.10.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-33
3.10.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-34
3.10.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-34
3.11 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 3-35
3.11.1 General Descriptions ....................................................................................... 3-35
3.11.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-36
3.11.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-37
3.11.4 Operation ......................................................................................................... 3-38
3.12 Drum Related Section ..................................................................................................... 3-43
3.12.1 Configuration ................................................................................................... 3-43
© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A
CONTENTS
1
 3.12.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-44
3.12.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-45
3.13 Development System ...................................................................................................... 3-47
3.13.1 Configuration ................................................................................................... 3-47
3.13.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-48
3.13.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-49
3.14 Fuser / Exit Unit............................................................................................................... 3-54
3.14.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-54
3.14.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-55
3.14.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-56
3.14.4 Operation ......................................................................................................... 3-57
3.14.5 Heater Control Circuit ...................................................................................... 3-58
3.15 Automatic Duplexing Unit................................................................................................ 3-62
3.15.1 General Description ......................................................................................... 3-62
3.15.2 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-63
3.15.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 3-63
3.15.4 Drive of ADU.................................................................................................... 3-64
3.15.5 Description of Operations ................................................................................ 3-65
3.16 Power Supply Unit........................................................................................................... 3-66
3.16.1 Composition ..................................................................................................... 3-66
3.16.2 Operation of DC Output Circuits ...................................................................... 3-67
3.16.3 Output Channel................................................................................................ 3-68
4. DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT........................................................................ 4-1
4.1 Disassembly and Replacement of Covers ........................................................................ 4-1
4.1.1 Left cover ........................................................................................................... 4-1
4.1.2 Inner tray............................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.3 Right front cover ................................................................................................ 4-2
4.1.4 Left front cover................................................................................................... 4-4
4.1.5 Toner supply cover ............................................................................................ 4-4
4.1.6 Tray front cover.................................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.7 Tray rear cover .................................................................................................. 4-5
4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD> ....................................................................... 4-6
4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only> ........................................................................... 4-6
4.1.10 PS-FAN (M8) <NAD/TWD Only> ....................................................................... 4-7
4.1.11 Right rear cover ................................................................................................. 4-8
4.1.12 Right lower cover ............................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.13 Right cover......................................................................................................... 4-8
4.1.14 Top cover......................................................................................................... 4-10
4.2 Control Panel .................................................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.1 Control panel unit............................................................................................. 4-11
4.2.2 Control panel PC board (HPNL) ...................................................................... 4-12
4.2.3 LED panel ........................................................................................................ 4-12
4.2.4 USB cable........................................................................................................ 4-13
4.3 Scanner........................................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.1 Original glass ................................................................................................... 4-15
4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor unit (CIS) ..................................................................... 4-15
4.3.3 CIS case .......................................................................................................... 4-17
4.3.4 Scan motor (M1) .............................................................................................. 4-18
4.3.5 Platen sensor (S7) <2329A/2829A> ................................................................ 4-21
4.3.6 Automatic original detection sensor-1 (S9) <2329A/2829A> /
Automatic original detection sensor-2 (S10) <2329A/2829A NAD only>......... 4-22
4.4 Writing Section ................................................................................................................ 4-23
4.4.1 Laser optical unit.............................................................................................. 4-23
4.5 Drive System................................................................................................................... 4-25
4.5.1 Main motor (M3) .............................................................................................. 4-25
4.5.2 Toner motor (M2) ............................................................................................. 4-25
4.5.3 Paper exit unit.................................................................................................. 4-27
4.5.4 Upper drive unit ............................................................................................... 4-27
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
CONTENTS
2
 4.5.5 Lower drive unit ............................................................................................... 4-28
4.6 Paper Feeding System.................................................................................................... 4-29
4.6.1 Bypass tray ...................................................................................................... 4-29
4.6.2 Bypass feed clutch (CLT3) .............................................................................. 4-30
4.6.3 Duct unit........................................................................................................... 4-32
4.6.4 Lower bypass feed guide................................................................................. 4-33
4.6.5 Bypass feed roller ............................................................................................ 4-35
4.6.6 Bypass paper sensor (S6) ............................................................................... 4-36
4.6.7 Drawer feed roller ........................................................................................... 4-37
4.6.8 Drawer separation pad ................................................................................... 4-37
4.6.9 Drawer feed clutch (CLT2)............................................................................... 4-38
4.6.10 Registration roller clutch (CLT1) ...................................................................... 4-39
4.6.11 Registration roller (metal) ................................................................................ 4-40
4.6.12 Registration roller (rubber) ............................................................................... 4-41
4.6.13 Registration sensor (S2) .................................................................................. 4-42
4.6.14 Paper empty sensor (S5) ................................................................................. 4-44
4.6.15 Drawer detection switch (SW6) ....................................................................... 4-46
4.7 Process Related Section................................................................................................. 4-47
4.7.1 Process unit ..................................................................................................... 4-47
4.7.2 Drum cleaner unit ............................................................................................ 4-49
4.7.3 Drum ............................................................................................................... 4-50
4.7.4 Drum cleaning blade ....................................................................................... 4-51
4.7.5 Recovery Blade ............................................................................................... 4-51
4.7.6 Drum separation finger .................................................................................... 4-52
4.7.7 Main charger.................................................................................................... 4-53
4.7.8 Main charger grid ............................................................................................ 4-54
4.7.9 Main charger cleaner ....................................................................................... 4-54
4.7.10 Needle electrode.............................................................................................. 4-55
4.7.11 Transfer roller ................................................................................................. 4-55
4.7.12 Separation needle............................................................................................ 4-56
4.7.13 Ozone filter ...................................................................................................... 4-57
4.7.14 Suction fun (M5) .............................................................................................. 4-57
4.7.15 Temperature/humidity sensor (S1) .................................................................. 4-58
4.7.16 Developer unit.................................................................................................. 4-59
4.7.17 Removing developer material .......................................................................... 4-59
4.7.18 Filling developer unit with developer material ................................................. 4-61
4.7.19 Auto-toner sensor (S4) .................................................................................... 4-61
4.7.20 Doctor blade .................................................................................................... 4-62
4.7.21 Mixer ................................................................................................................ 4-62
4.7.22 Replacement of oil seal ................................................................................... 4-65
4.7.23 Developer sleeve ............................................................................................. 4-65
4.7.24 Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF) ...................................................... 4-68
4.7.25 Developer cartridge detection switch (SW5).................................................... 4-69
4.8 Fuser/Exit Unit................................................................................................................. 4-70
4.8.1 Fuser unit......................................................................................................... 4-73
4.8.2 Exit sensor (S3) ............................................................................................... 4-74
4.8.3 Fuser unit cover/Fuser unit guide .................................................................... 4-76
4.8.4 Center heater lamp (LAMP1) .......................................................................... 4-79
4.8.5 Side heater lamp (LAMP2) .............................................................................. 4-81
4.8.6 Base unit.......................................................................................................... 4-82
4.8.7 Pressure roller ................................................................................................. 4-83
4.8.8 Separation finger ............................................................................................. 4-84
4.8.9 Fuser roller/Fuser roller bushing ...................................................................... 4-85
4.8.10 Fuser center thermostat (THMO1) / Fuser front thermostat (THMO2) ............ 4-87
4.8.11 Center thermistor (THMS1) / Side thermistor (THMS2) /
Edge thermistor (THMS3) ................................................................................ 4-88
4.8.12 Exit roller .......................................................................................................... 4-91
4.9 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU) ...................................................................................... 4-94

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

CONTENTS
3
 4.9.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)....................................................................... 4-94
4.9.2 ADU sensor (S8).............................................................................................. 4-95
4.9.3 Fuser guide unit ............................................................................................... 4-95
4.9.4 Paper exit motor (M6) ...................................................................................... 4-96
4.9.5 ADU clutch (CLT4)........................................................................................... 4-97
4.9.6 ADU fan duct unit............................................................................................. 4-97
4.9.7 ADU lower transport roller ............................................................................... 4-98
4.9.8 ADU upper transport roller ............................................................................... 4-99
4.9.9 ADU transport roller ....................................................................................... 4-100
4.10 Installation and Replacement of Options ...................................................................... 4-101
4.10.1 Reversing Auto Document Feeder (RADF) ................................................... 4-101
4.10.2 Paper feed unit (PFU) .................................................................................... 4-102
5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES .......................................................................................... 5-1
5.1 Overview ........................................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Input Check (Test Mode 03) ............................................................................................. 5-5
5.3 Output Check (Test Mode 03)........................................................................................... 5-6
5.4 Test Print Mode (Test Mode 04) ....................................................................................... 5-7
5.5 Operation Procedure in Adjustment Mode (05)................................................................. 5-8
5.6 Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)..................................................................... 5-10
5.7 Operation Procedure in Setting Mode (08) ..................................................................... 5-11
5.8 Assist Mode (3C)............................................................................................................. 5-13
5.8.1 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-13
5.8.2 Operating Procedure of Assist Mode ............................................................... 5-14
5.9 List Print Mode (9S) ........................................................................................................ 5-15
5.9.1 Operation procedure ........................................................................................ 5-15
5.9.2 List printing ...................................................................................................... 5-16
5.10 Flash Memory Clear Mode (6C)...................................................................................... 5-28
5.10.1 General description.......................................................................................... 5-28
5.10.2 Operation procedure ........................................................................................ 5-28
5.10.3 Functions ......................................................................................................... 5-28
5.11 Flash Memory Backup/Restore Mode (59) ..................................................................... 5-30
5.11.1 General description.......................................................................................... 5-30
5.11.2 Backup files ..................................................................................................... 5-30
5.11.3 Backup procedure............................................................................................ 5-31
5.11.4 Restore procedure ........................................................................................... 5-31
5.12 PM support mode related code ....................................................................................... 5-33
5.12.1 Setting.............................................................................................................. 5-33
5.12.2 Restrictions for the PM counter-related self-diagnosis codes.......................... 5-37
6. SETTING / ADJUSTMENT............................................................................................ 6-1
6.1 Adjustment Order .............................................................................................................. 6-1
6.2 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor..................................................................................... 6-2
6.3 Image Dimensional Adjustment ........................................................................................ 6-4
6.3.1 General description............................................................................................ 6-4
6.3.2 Light volume adjustment of scanner LED .......................................................... 6-5
6.3.3 Paper alignment at the registration roller ........................................................... 6-6
6.3.4 Printer related adjustment.................................................................................. 6-8
6.3.5 Scanner related adjustment ............................................................................. 6-15
6.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)................................................................ 6-24
6.4.1 Automatic gamma adjustment ......................................................................... 6-24
6.4.2 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 6-25
6.4.3 Background adjustment ................................................................................... 6-26
6.4.4 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 6-26
6.4.5 Gamma balance adjustment ........................................................................... 6-27
6.4.6 Adjustment of image density............................................................................ 6-28
6.4.7 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF ................................................... 6-29
6.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)................................................................. 6-30
6.5.1 Adjustment of image density............................................................................ 6-30

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

CONTENTS
4
 6.5.2 Gamma balance adjustment ............................................................................ 6-31
6.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function).............................................................. 6-32
6.6.1 Gamma balance adjustment ............................................................................ 6-32
6.6.2 Density adjustment .......................................................................................... 6-33
6.6.3 Sharpness adjustment ..................................................................................... 6-34
6.6.4 Background adjustment ................................................................................... 6-34
6.6.5 Fine adjustment of black density ..................................................................... 6-35
6.6.6 RGB conversion method selection .................................................................. 6-35
6.6.7 Adjustment of saturation .................................................................................. 6-35
6.7 Adjustment of the Scanner Section................................................................................. 6-36
6.7.1 CIS unit ............................................................................................................ 6-36
6.7.2 Adjustment of Start Timing for Original Detection <2329A/2829A only> ......... 6-36
6.8 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System....................................................................... 6-37
6.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding (Drawer only) ................. 6-37
6.9 Adjustment of Developer Unit ......................................................................................... 6-38
6.9.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap ....................................................................................... 6-38
6.10 Adjustment of the RADF ................................................................................................. 6-40
6.10.1 Tray volume adjustment .................................................................................. 6-40
6.10.2 Adjustment of Skew ......................................................................................... 6-41
6.10.3 Adjustment of the leading edge position.......................................................... 6-44
6.10.4 Adjustment of horizontal position ..................................................................... 6-46
6.10.5 Adjustment of copy ratio .................................................................................. 6-47
7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)............................................................................ 7-1
7.1 General Description .......................................................................................................... 7-1
7.2 PM Support Mode (6S) ..................................................................................................... 7-2
7.2.1 General description............................................................................................ 7-2
7.2.2 Operational flow and operational screen .......................................................... 7-2
7.3 EPU Mode ([FUNCTION CLEAR] + [START] Buttons)..................................................... 7-6
7.3.1 General description............................................................................................ 7-6
7.3.2 Operational flow................................................................................................. 7-6
7.3.3 Counters to be cleared ...................................................................................... 7-8
7.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist .................................................................................... 7-9
7.4.1 Scanner ........................................................................................................... 7-10
7.4.2 Feed unit.......................................................................................................... 7-11
7.4.3 Bypass feed unit .............................................................................................. 7-13
7.4.4 Main charger.................................................................................................... 7-14
7.4.5 Transfer / Separation charger section ............................................................. 7-15
7.4.6 Drum/Cleaner related section .......................................................................... 7-16
7.4.7 Developer unit.................................................................................................. 7-18
7.4.8 Fuser / Paper exit unit...................................................................................... 7-19
7.4.9 Automatic duplexing unit ................................................................................. 7-21
7.4.10 RADF ............................................................................................................... 7-22
7.4.11 PFU.................................................................................................................. 7-23
7.4.12 PFP.................................................................................................................. 7-24
7.5 PM KIT ............................................................................................................................ 7-25
7.6 Maintenance Part List ..................................................................................................... 7-26
7.7 Grease List...................................................................................................................... 7-27
7.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies............................................................... 7-28
7.8.1 Precautions for storing Toshiba supplies ......................................................... 7-28
7.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum ............................................ 7-29
7.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade ............................................... 7-30
7.8.4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller ............................... 7-30
7.8.5 Checking and replacing the transfer roller ....................................................... 7-31
7.9 Operational Items in Machine Refreshing ....................................................................... 7-32
8. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING ................................................................ 8-1
8.1 General Descriptions......................................................................................................... 8-1
8.1.1 If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting. ..................... 8-2

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

CONTENTS
5
 8.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device ..................................................... 8-3
8.1.3 Traceability label................................................................................................ 8-5
8.2 Error Code List .................................................................................................................. 8-7
8.2.1 Jam .................................................................................................................... 8-7
8.2.2 Service call ........................................................................................................ 8-9
8.2.3 Error in E-mail / Scanning Function ................................................................. 8-10
8.2.4 Error history ..................................................................................................... 8-11
8.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code ............................................................ 8-13
8.3.1 Check item ....................................................................................................... 8-13
8.3.2 Paper exit jam .................................................................................................. 8-14
8.3.3 Paper transport jam ......................................................................................... 8-15
8.3.4 Paper misfeeding ............................................................................................. 8-23
8.3.5 Cover open jam ............................................................................................... 8-29
8.3.6 Other jam ......................................................................................................... 8-32
8.3.7 RADF jam ........................................................................................................ 8-37
8.3.8 Drive system related service call ..................................................................... 8-39
8.3.9 Paper feeding system related service call ....................................................... 8-40
8.3.10 Scanning system related service call............................................................... 8-42
8.3.11 Process related service call ............................................................................. 8-44
8.3.12 Laser optical unit related service call ............................................................... 8-46
8.3.13 Fuser unit related service call .......................................................................... 8-47
8.3.14 Circuit related service call ................................................................................ 8-50
8.3.15 Communication related service call ................................................................. 8-52
8.3.16 Other service call ............................................................................................. 8-53
8.3.17 Error in E-mail / Scanning Function ................................................................. 8-54
8.4 Troubleshooting for the Image ........................................................................................ 8-58
8.4.1 Abnormality of image density / Gray balance .................................................. 8-58
8.4.2 Background fogging ......................................................................................... 8-59
8.4.3 Moire/lack of sharpness ................................................................................... 8-60
8.4.4 Toner offset...................................................................................................... 8-61
8.4.5 Blurred image .................................................................................................. 8-62
8.4.6 Poor fusing....................................................................................................... 8-63
8.4.7 Blank copy ....................................................................................................... 8-64
8.4.8 Solid copy ........................................................................................................ 8-65
8.4.9 White banding or white void (in the feeding direction) ..................................... 8-66
8.4.10 White banding (at right angle with the feeding direction) ................................. 8-68
8.4.11 Skew (inclined image)...................................................................................... 8-69
8.4.12 Black banding (in the feeding direction)........................................................... 8-70
8.4.13 Black banding (at right angle with the feeding direction) ................................. 8-71
8.4.14 White spots ...................................................................................................... 8-72
8.4.15 Poor image transfer ......................................................................................... 8-73
8.4.16 Uneven image density ..................................................................................... 8-74
8.4.17 Faded image (low density, abnormal gray balance), The exit paper surface
feels rough like sand is adhering to it (carrier offset) ....................................... 8-75
8.4.18 Image dislocation in feeding direction.............................................................. 8-77
8.4.19 Jittering image ................................................................................................. 8-78
8.4.20 Poor cleaning ................................................................................................... 8-79
8.4.21 Uneven light distribution .................................................................................. 8-80
8.4.22 Blotched image ................................................................................................ 8-81
8.4.23 Toner scattering at the trailing edge on the back side of the paper ................. 8-82
8.5 Other Errors .................................................................................................................... 8-84
8.5.1 When “SET FUSER UNIT” is displayed........................................................... 8-84
8.5.2 Countermeasure to “BIOS MODE” displayed on Control Panel ...................... 8-84
8.5.3 Precautions for image missing width on the paper trailing edge at
enlargement copying ....................................................................................... 8-85
8.5.4 Precautions for incorrect Operation of Automatic Original Size Detection ...... 8-85
8.5.5 When the error code “F014” is displayed......................................................... 8-87
8.5.6 When “FAX Error” is displayed ........................................................................ 8-87

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

CONTENTS
6
9. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS............................................................................... 9-1
9.1 Disassembly and Replacement of PC Boards .................................................................. 9-1
9.1.1 MAIN board (MAIN) ........................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.2 Switching regulator (LVPS)................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.3 High-voltage transformer (HVPS) ...................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing MAIN Board ................................... 9-5
9.3 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing the Flash Memory.......................... 9-8
10. REMOTE SERVICE..................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1 Service Notification ......................................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Outline ............................................................................................................. 10-1
10.1.2 Setting.............................................................................................................. 10-2
10.1.3 Items to be notified .......................................................................................... 10-4
10.2 Supply Notice .................................................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.1 Outline ............................................................................................................. 10-6
10.2.2 Setting.............................................................................................................. 10-6
11. FIRMWARE UPDATING ............................................................................................. 11-1
11.1 General Description ........................................................................................................ 11-1
11.2 Firmware Updating with USB Device .............................................................................. 11-2
11.3 Firmware Updating with PC Update Tool........................................................................ 11-5
11.3.1 General description.......................................................................................... 11-5
11.3.2 System requirements....................................................................................... 11-5
11.3.3 Preparation ...................................................................................................... 11-5
11.3.4 Update procedure ............................................................................................ 11-6
11.3.5 When firmware updating fails .......................................................................... 11-8
11.4 Firmware Updating with BIOS Mode............................................................................... 11-9
11.4.1 General description.......................................................................................... 11-9
11.4.2 System requirements....................................................................................... 11-9
11.4.3 Preparation ...................................................................................................... 11-9
11.4.4 Update procedure ............................................................................................ 11-9
11.4.5 When firmware updating fails ........................................................................ 11-12
11.5 Confirmation of the updated data.................................................................................. 11-13
12. EXTERNAL COUNTERS ............................................................................................ 12-1
12.1 Outline............................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2 Signal .............................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.2.1 Pin Layout........................................................................................................ 12-1
12.2.2 Details of the signals........................................................................................ 12-2
12.3 Notices ............................................................................................................................ 12-3
12.3.1 Setting code..................................................................................................... 12-3
12.3.2 Setting value change and restrictions when using the coin controller ............. 12-3
12.3.3 Installation of External Counter........................................................................ 12-3
12.3.4 Restrictions when installing the coin controller ................................................ 12-3
13. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS ........................................................... 13-1
13.1 AC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................ 13-1
13.2 DC Wire Harness ............................................................................................................ 13-3
13.3 Electric Parts Layout ....................................................................................................... 13-4
14. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE) ......................................................... 14-1
14.1 Input check (Test mode 03) ............................................................................................ 14-1
14.2 Output check (test mode 03)........................................................................................... 14-6
14.3 Test print mode (test mode 04) ....................................................................................... 14-8
14.4 Adjustment Mode (05) Codes ......................................................................................... 14-9
14.5 Setting Mode (08) Codes .............................................................................................. 14-25
APPENDIX .............................................................................................................................. 1
REVISION RECORD............................................................................................................... 1

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

CONTENTS
7
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
CONTENTS
8
1. FEATURES

1.1 Main Feature (The changed point from the conventional 1

model)
• The layout of the control panel has been changed. (The [SETTINGS] button has been
removed.)
• The optional PFP has been changed to KD-1039-B. (The connection connector differs from
that for current models.)
• The optional PFU has been changed to MY-1043-B.
• The optional Fax unit has been changed to GD-1380.
• The optional Wireless LAN Module has been changed to GN-1160.
• The material of the bypass separation pad has been changed. (Color: Gray)
• A grounding coil spring has been added to the rear side of the 1st drawer and the optional
PFU drawer.

Notes:
In this document, a model name is replaced with an alias as follows:

Model name Alias

e-STUDIO2523A 2523A

e-STUDIO2523AD 2523AD

e-STUDIO2323AM 2323AM

e-STUDIO2823AM 2823AM

e-STUDIO2329A 2329A

e-STUDIO2829A 2829A

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FEATURES
1-1
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
FEATURES
1-2
2. SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES

2.1 Specifications
Notes:
In this document, a model name is replaced with an alias as follows: 2

Model name Alias

e-STUDIO2523A 2523A

e-STUDIO2523AD 2523AD

e-STUDIO2323AM 2323AM

e-STUDIO2823AM 2823AM

e-STUDIO2329A 2329A

e-STUDIO2829A 2829A

2.1.1 General

Type Desktop type

Original glass Fixed type (the left rear corner used as guide to place originals)

Copy process Indirect electrophotographic process (dry)

Fixing method Halogen lamp (2 pieces)

Photosensor type OPC drum

Original scanning sensor Contact Image sensor (CMOS Line sensor)

Scanning light source LED

Reproduction ratio Actual ratio: 100±0.5%

Zooming: 25 to 400% in increments of 1%

Resolution Scanning 600 dpi x 600 dpi

Printing Equivalent to 2400 dpi x 600 dpi

Gradation 256 steps

Paper feeding <2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM>

1 drawer + Bypass feeding + PFU (optional)
<2329A/2829A>
1 drawer + Bypass feeding + PFU (optional) + PFP (optional)

Paper supply Standard drawer Stack height 28 mm: equivalent to 250 sheets; 80 g/m2 (20 lb. Bond):
Depends on destinations or versions.

Bypass feeding Stack height 11 mm: equivalent to 100 sheets; 80 g/m2 (20 lb. Bond)
PFU (Option) Stack height 28 mm: 250 sheets; 80 g/m2 (20 lb.Bond)
PFP (Option) Stack height 60.5 mm: 550 sheets; 80 g/m2 (20lb.Bond)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-1
 Paper size Drawer A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, LD, LG, LT,
LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5”
(Non-standard sizes are not available)

Bypass feeding A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, LD, LG, LT,
LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5"x8.5”, Custom, Envelope (DL,
COM10, Monarch, CHO-3, YOU-4)
(Non-standard sizes are available)

PFU (optional) A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, LD, LG, LT,
PFP (optional) LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13”LG, 8.5”x8.5”
(Non-standard sizes are not available)

Paper type Drawers Plain paper

PFU (optional) (Tracing paper, OHP films, sticker labels, envelopes and punched paper
PFP (optional) are not available)

Bypass feeding Plain paper, Thin paper, Thick paper, Tracing paper, OHP film, Sticker
labels, Envelope (DL, COM10, Monarch, CHO-3, YOU-4)

Paper weight Drawers 64 - 80 g/m2 (17 - 20 lb. Bond)

PFU (optional)
PFP (optional)

Bypass feeding 52 - 216 g/m2 (14 lb. Bond - 80 lb. Index) (for single feed)
Plain paper: 64 - 80 g/m2 (17 - 20 lb. Bond)
Thin paper: 52 - 63 g/m2 (14 - 17 lb. Bond)
Thick: 81 - 105 g/m2 (21.5 - 28 lb. Bond)
Thick 1: 106 - 163 g/m2 (28 lb. Bond - 43 lb. Index)
Thick 2: 164 - 216 g/m2 (44 lbs - 80 lbs)

64 - 80 g/m2 (17 lb. Bond - 20 lb. Index) (for continuous feed)

Automatic Stackless, Uses an exclusive switchback mechanism
duplexing unit Switchback type

Acceptable paper A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, FOLIO, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, LD, LG, LT,
size LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5"

Acceptable paper 64 - 80 g/m2 (17 - 20 lb. Bond)

weight

Interface Standard <2523A/2523AD>

USB 2.0 (High Speed)
<2323AM/2823AM/2329A/2829A>
USB 2.0 (High Speed), Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
Option <2329A/2829A>
Wireless LAN (Wireless LAN (IEEE 802.11b/g/n)

Toner supply Toner cartridge refill method

Toner density control Magnetic auto-toner method

Memory (RAM) Main memory

<2523A/2523AD> 256MB (Incl. page memory)
<2323AM/2823AM/2329A/2829A>512MB (Incl. page memory)

Warming-up time Approx. 15 sec. (temperature: 20°C)

Power requirements AC 120 V, 220-240 V (50/60 Hz), AC 110 V (60 Hz)

* The acceptable value of each voltage is ±10%.

Power consumption 1.5 kW or less

Sleep mode: 1 W or less (When the damp heater is OFF)
* The electric power is supplied to the RADF, ADU and PFU through
the equipment.

Total counter Electronical counter

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-2
 Dimensions of the equipment See the figure below W575 x D565 (base is 540) x H 402 (mm)

565

402

575

Fig. 2-1

Weight <2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM> Approximately 23.4 kg (51.59 lb.)

(excluding developer material and drum)
<2329A/2829A> Approximately 24.4 kg (53.79 lb.) (excluding developer
material and drum)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-3
2.1.2 Copy

Reversing automatic Original scanning Fixed scanning system by feeding the original (the center used
document feeder system as guide to place originals)
(Option) Original type Sheets (carbon, bounded or stapled originals cannot be
accepted)
Original size A3, A4, A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, 8K, 16K, 16K-R, LD, LG, LT,
LT-R, ST-R, COMPUTER, 13"LG, 8.5" x 8.5"
Original paper weight 64 g/m2 ~ 104g/m2
Original capacity Max. 50 sheets (80 g/m2) (Stack height 9.5 mm)
Accepted originals Sheet and book.
Maximum size: A3/LD
Eliminated portion Leading edge: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm
(copy)
Leading edge: 3.0±2.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 2.0±2.0 mm
(print)
Multiple copying Up to 999 copies; Key in set numbers
First copy time Approx. 6.4 sec. or less (Manually placed original, A4, 1st
Drawer, 100%, 1 set non-sort copy)
Approx. 6.5 sec. or less (Manually placed original, LT, 1st
Drawer, 100%, 1 set non-sort copy)

Copy speed (Copies/min.)

<2323AM/2329A>

Bypass feed PFP

Paper size Drawer Size Size not PFU
Upper Lower
specified specified
A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R 23 23 14 23 23 23
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 19 19 14 19 19 17
B4, LG, FOLIO, 16 16 14 16 16 14.5
COMPUTER
A3, LD 14 14 14 14 14 13

<2523A/2523AD>

Bypass feed
Paper size Drawer Size Size not PFU
specified specified
A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R 25 25 14 25
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 19 19 14 19
B4, LG, FOLIO, 16 16 14 16
COMPUTER
A3, LD 14 14 14 14

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-4
<2823AM/2829A>

Bypass feed PFP

Paper size Drawer Size Size not PFU
Upper Lower
specified specified
A4, B5, A5-R, LT, ST-R 28 28 14 25 25 24
2
A4-R, B5-R, LT-R 19 19 14 19 19 17
B4, LG, FOLIO, 16 16 14 16 16 14.5
COMPUTER
A3, LD 14 14 14 14 14 13
* The copy speed in the above table are available when originals are manually placed for single side,
multiple copying.

System copy speed A4/LT (Unit: Second)

A4 (Reproduction ratio 100%) LT (Reproduction ratio 100%)

Model Copy mode
1 sheet 5 sheets 10 sheets 1 sheet 5 sheets 10 sheets
2323AM/2329A Single-sided originals
↓ 74.36 93.79 96.31 76.36 93.79 96.31
Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals
↓ 65.15 88.39 91.93 65.15 88.39 91.93
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
↓ 36.66 90.69 93.23 36.66 90.69 93.23
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
↓ 35.51 96.27 - 35.51 96.27 -
Single-sided copies
2523A/2523AD Single-sided originals
↓ 73.15 92.17 96.09 73.15 92.17 96.09
Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals
↓ 60.17 83.34 86.67 60.17 83.34 86.67
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
↓ 31.65 85.05 87.64 31.65 85.05 87.64
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
↓ - - - - - -
Single-sided copies
2823AM/2829A Single-sided originals
↓ 65.95 91.71 95.85 65.95 91.71 95.85
Single-sided copies
Single-sided originals
↓ 53.56 74.35 77.32 53.56 74.35 77.32
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
↓ 28.05 76.17 78.45 28.05 76.17 78.45
Double-sided copies
Double-sided originals
↓ 29.20 93.83 - 29.20 93.83 -
Single-sided copies

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-5
* The system copy speed, including scanning time, is available when 10 sheets of A4/LT size original
are set on RADF and one of the copy modes in the above table is selected. The period of time from
pressing [START] to the paper exit completely out of the equipment based on the actually measured
value.
* Setting: when in the Text/Photo mode with Automatic density and APS/AMS set to OFF, or when in
the sort mode with paper fed from the 1st drawer.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-6
2.1.3 Print

2523A/2523AD 2323AM/2823AM 2329A/2829A

Page Description Language GDI GDI PCL6,
(Printer Driver) PostScript3 (*1)
Page Description Language (RIP) - - PCL6, PCL5e, 2
PCL5c,
PostScript3 (*1)
Supported OS Windows Server 2008 SP2 / Windows Server 2008 R2 SP1 /
Windows Server 2012 / Windows Server 2012 R2 / Windows
Server 2016 / Windows 7 SP1 / Windows 8.1 / Windows 10
Mac OS X 10.11 to macOS 10.14
Resolution 600 dpi × 600 dpi, 300 dpi × 300 dpi
Eliminated portion Leading edges: 5±3.0 mm, Side/trailing edges: 5±3.0 mm
Interface Standard USB 2.0 (High Ethernet (10Base-T/100Base-TX)
Speed) USB 2.0 (High Speed)
Option - Wireless LAN
(IEEE 802.11b/g/n)
Remarks:
*1 : When the GA-1350L or GA-1350H/HC (option) is installed, PostScript3 can be added.

2.1.4 Scan

Image mode Black Gray scale Full color

Resolution / Scanning speed (Sheets/min.)
2523A/2523AD/2323AM/ 600 dpi x 600 dpi 25 20 7
2823AM 400 dpi x 400 dpi 25 23 7
300 dpi x 300 dpi 25 23 18
200 dpi x 200 dpi 25 23 24
150 dpi x 150 dpi 25 23 24
2329A/2829A 600 dpi x 600 dpi 25 22 7
400 dpi x 400 dpi 25 23 7
300 dpi x 300 dpi 25 23 18
200 dpi x 200 dpi 25 23 24
150 dpi x 150 dpi 25 23 24
File formats TIFF (Single/Multi) JPEG JPEG
PDF (Single/Multi) TIFF (Single/Multi) TIFF (Single/Multi)
PDF (Single/Multi) PDF (Single/Multi)
Original mode Text, Text/Photo, Text, Text/Photo, Text, Text/Photo,
Photo Photo Photo
* Measuring condition of the scanning speed: Scanning single-sided A4/LT originals in the Text/Photo
mode with 100% reproduction ratio using the RADF.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-7
2.2 Accessories

Unpacking/setup instruction 1 set

Operator’s manual 1 set
• Quick Guide: 1 manual (SYS V1.0)
• Safety Information: 1 manual (SYS V1.0)
DVD User Documentation / Client Utilities DVD: 1 pc. (SYS V1.0)
Power cable 1 pc.
Drum (installed inside of the equipment) 1 pc.
Toner cartridge 1 pc.
Developer material 1 pc. (Cartridge type)
Warranty sheet 1 pc. (for NAD, MJD and CND)
Setup report 1 set (for NAD and MJD)
CS card 1 pc. (for MJD)
USB cable 1 pc. (for CND)
Approval sheet 1 pc. (for CND)
Packing list 1 pc. (for CND)
Original cover 1 set (for MJD: 2323AM/2823AM, for CND: 2523A/2323AM/2823AM)
Machine version
• NAD: North America
• ARD: Argentina and 220-volt South America
• ASD: Hong Kong
• MJD: Europe
• CND: China
• TWD: Taiwan
Notes:
Check that the above accessories are correctly co-packed at the time of unpacking.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-8
2.3 Options

Options Models 2523A 2523AD 2323AM 2823AM 2329A 2829A

Original Cover KA-2507PC Y Y Y (*2) Y (*2) Y Y
KA-2507PC-C*1 Standard Standard Standard Standard - Y 2
Reversing Automatic MR-3032 Y Y Y Y Y Y
Document Feeder
MR-3032C*1 Y Y Y Y - Y
(RADF)
Automatic Duplexing Unit MD-0107 Y Standard Y (*3) Standard Standard Standard
MD-0107C*1 Y Standard Standard Standard - Standard
Paper Feed Unit (PFU) MY-1043 Y Y Y Y Y Y
MY-1043C*1 Y Y Y Y - Y
Paper Feed Pedestal KD-1039 - - - - Y Y
(PFP)
KD-1039C*1 - - - - - Y
Drawer Module MY-1044 - - - - Y Y
MY-1044C*1 - - - - - Y
Harness Kit GQ-1131 - - Y Y Y Y
Fax Unit GD-1380 - - - - Y Y
GD-1380C*1 - - - - - Y
Desk MH-2507 Y (*4) Y (*4) Y (*4) Y (*4) Y (*4) Y (*4)
Wireless LAN Module GN-1160 - - - - Y Y
GN-1160C*1 - - - - - Y
PostScript Kit GA-1350L - - - - Y -
GA-1350H - - - - - Y
GA-1350HC*1 - - - - - Y

*1 CND model
*2 Standard for MJD
*3 Option for MJD
*4 Option for AUD/MJD

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2-9
2.4 System List

2.4.1 <2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM>
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
Original Cover (RADF)
KA-2507PC MR-3032/C

Automatic
Duplexing Unit
Harness Kit (ADU)
GQ-1131 MD-0107/C

Paper Feed Unit

(PFU)
MY-1043/C

Desk
MH-2507
Fig. 2-2

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2 - 10
2.4.2 <2329A/2829A>
Reversing Automatic
Document Feeder
Original Cover (RADF)
KA-2507PC MR-3032/C
2

Wireless LAN
Module
GN-1160/C
PostScript kit
Harness Kit
GA-1350L
GQ-1131
GA-1350H/HC
Fax unit
GD-1380/C

Paper Feed Unit

(PFU)
MY-1043/C

Drawer Module
MY-1044/C
Paper Feed
Pedestal
Desk (PFP)
MH-2507 KD-1039/C
Fig. 2-3

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2 - 11
2.5 Supplies

Drum OD-2505
Developer D-2309 (Cartridge type)

D-2505 (Except for China)

D-2505C
Toner cartridge PS-ZT2323TS(1)*1
PS-ZT2323E(1)*1
PS-ZT2323U(1)*1
PS-ZT2323P(1)*1
PS-ZT2323PS(1)*1
PS-ZT2323C(1)*1
PS-ZT2323CS(1)*1
PS-ZT2323C(12)*1
PS-ZT2323CS(12)*1
*1 E: Europe, TS: Taiwan, U: North America, Argentina/220-volt South America, P: Asia (including
Australia), PS: Asia, C: China, CS: China

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SPECIFICATIONS / ACCESSORIES / OPTIONS / SUPPLIES
2 - 12
3. OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE

3.1 Sectional View

1. Front side
A3 A2 A4 A6 A1 A5

K5 3
J7
K1 K2 J9
J3
J1
K4 J8 J4
B1 F4 F1
J6 L1
B2
J5 J2 L3
H2 H3 H6
F2 H4
H5
F3
H1
I4 G1
I7 I3 I1
L2
K4 I6
K3 I8 I2C6 C7
E1 E3
E4

C4

E2
C3
C1 C5
Fig. 3-1

2. Rear side

M1

M6

M2 M7
M5

CLT4
CLT1

M3

M8

CLT3 CLT2

Fig. 3-2

A1 Original glass
A2 RADF original glass
A3 Contact image sensor unit (CIS)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-1
 A4 Platen sensor S7 <2329A/2829A only>
A5 Automatic original detection sensor-1 S9 <2329A/2829A only>
A6 Automatic original detection sensor-2 S10 <2329A/2829A only>
B1 Laser optical unit
B2 Polygonal motor M4
C1 Drawer feed roller
C3 Drawer separation pad
C4 Paper empty sensor S5
C5 Registration sensor S2
C6 Registration roller (metal)
C7 Registration roller (rubber)
E1 Bypass feed roller
E2 Bypass separation pad
E3 Bypass paper sensor S6
E4 Bypass tray
F1 Needle electrode
F2 Main charger
F3 Main charger grid
F4 Toner cartridge
G1 Transfer roller
H1 Drum
H2 Discharge LED
H3 Drum cleaning blade
H4 Recovery blade
H5 Drum separation finger
H6 Toner recovery auger
I1 Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller)
I2 Mixer-1
I3 Mixer-2
I4 Doctor blade
I6 Auto-toner sensor S4
I7 Drum thermistor THMS4
I8 Drum damp heater DH1
J1 Fuser roller
J2 Pressure roller
J3 Separation finger
J4 Heater lamp LAMP1
J5 Side heater lamp LAMP2
J6 Center thermistor / side thermistor / edge thermistor THMS1/2/3
J7 Fuser center thermostat / Fuser front thermostat THMO1/THMO2
J8 Exit roller
J9 Exit sensor S3
K1 Toner supply cover opening/closing switch SW4
K2 Toner supply cover opening/closing interlock switch SW3
K3 Temperature/humidity sensor S1
K4 Switching regulator

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-2
 K5 Right cover opening/closing interlock switch SW2
L1 Upper transport roller
L2 Lower transport roller
L3 ADU sensor S8
M1 Scan motor
M2 Toner motor
M3 Main motor
3
M5 Suction fan
M6 Exit motor
M7 ADU fan
M8 PS-FAN <2329A/2829A only>
CLT1 Registration roller clutch
CLT2 Drawer feed clutch
CLT3 Bypass feed clutch
CLT4 ADU clutch

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-3
3.2 Electric Parts Layout
1. Scanner unit, control panel

S9 M1
S10

S7 HPNL

CIS

Fig. 3-3

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-4
2. Power supply

LVPS
SW2
M8

HVPS

SW1
SW3

SW4

Fig. 3-4

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-5
3. Laser unit, fuser unit, toner cartridge

CTIF
S3
M2 LAMP1

LAMP2

CTRG

LDRS
THMS3
THMO1

THMS1

M4 THMO2
THMS2

Fig. 3-5

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-6
4. Developer unit

THMS4 SW5 ERS

M5

FUS

DH1
THMO3
S4

Fig. 3-6

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-7
5. Drive unit

M3

CLT1

MAIN
CLT2

S1
S2

Fig. 3-7

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-8
6. Bypass feed unit

S6

Fig. 3-8

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3-9
7. Drawer unit

SW6 S5

Fig. 3-9

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 10
8. Automatic duplexing unit, bypass unit

M6 CLT4

S8

CLT3

M7

Fig. 3-10

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 11
3.3 Symbols and Functions of Various Components
The column “P-I” shows the page and item number in the parts list.

3.3.1 Motors

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

M1 SCAN-MOT Driving the CIS P. 3-4 7-1

Scan motor

M2 TNR-MOT Supplying the toner P. 3-6 5-22

Toner motor

M3 MAIN-MOT Driving the drum, developer unit, fuser P. 3-8 10-1

Main motor unit, registration roller, feed roller,
cleaner unit

M4 M/DC-POL Driving the polygonal mirror P. 3-6 3-15

Polygonal motor

M5 SUC-FAN-MOT Exhausting ozone and cooling down the P. 3-7 9-2

Suction fan equipment inside

M6 EXIT-MOT Driving the exit roller P. 3-6 23-13

Exit motor

M7 ADU-FAN Exhausts air near ADU P. 3-11 9-2

ADU fan

M8 PS-FAN Cooling down the switching regulator P. 3-5 1-26

Switching regulator cooling fan
(NAD/TWD only)

3.3.2 Sensors and switches

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

S1 TEMP/HUMI-SNR Detecting the temperature and humidity P. 3-8 5-44

Temperature/humidity sensor inside the equipment

S2 RGST-SNR Detecting paper transportation at the P. 3-8 12-5

Registration sensor registration roller section

S3 EXIT-SNR Detecting paper transportation at the P. 3-6 18-2

Exit sensor exit section

S4 ATTNR-SNR Detecting the toner density in the P. 3-7 16-9

Auto-toner sensor developer unit

S5 EMP-SNR Detecting presence/absence of paper in P. 3-10 6-6

Paper empty sensor the drawer

S6 SFB-SNR Detecting presence/absence of paper P. 3-9 8-14

Bypass paper sensor on the bypass tray

S7 PLTN-SNR Detecting the opening/closing status of P. 3-4 7-28

Platen sensor the original cover or the RADF <2329A/
2829A only>

S8 ADU-TR-SNR Detecting paper transportation in the P. 3-11 8-14

ADU sensor automatic duplexing unit

S9 APS-R Detecting the original size P. 3-4 7-29

Automatic original detection sensor- <2329A/2829A only>
1

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 12
 Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

S10 APS-C Detecting the original size (for LT size) P. 3-4 7-29
Automatic original detection sensor- <2329A/2829A only> <NAD only>
2

SW1 MAIN-SW Turning the power of the equipment ON/ P. 3-5 3-9
Main switch OFF

SW2 SIDE-COV-INTLCK-SW Supplying or shutting off the 24V voltage P. 3-5 4-14
Right cover opening/closing according to the opening/closing status 3
interlock switch of the right cover

SW3 FRNT-COV-INTLCK-SW Supplying or shutting off the 24V voltage P. 3-5 4-14
Toner supply cover opening/closing according to the opening/closing status
interlock switch of the toner supply cover

SW4 FRNT-COV-SW Detecting the opening/closing status of P. 3-5 4-12

Toner supply cover opening/closing the toner supply cover
switch

SW5 DEV-SW Detecting the installation of the P. 3-7 5-32

Developer cartridge detection developer cartridge
switch

SW6 DRW-SW Detecting the installation of the drawer P. 3-10 3-35

Drawer detection switch

3.3.3 Electromagnetic clutches

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

CLT1 RGST-CLT Driving the registration roller P. 3-8 17-8

Registration roller clutch

CLT2 CST-L-FEED-CLT Driving the paper feed roller P. 3-8 10-24

Drawer feed clutch

CLT3 SFB-CLT Driving the bypass feed roller P. 3-11 8-18

Bypass feed clutch

CLT4 ADU-CLT Driving the transport roller of the P. 3-11 10-24

ADU clutch automatic duplexing unit

3.3.4 PC boards

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

MAIN PWA-F-MAIN Controlling the whole system and image P. 3-8 5-27
Main PC board (MAIN board) processing

CTIF PWA-F-CTIF Interface for detecting the toner P. 3-6 5-13

Toner cartridge interface PC board cartridge
(CTIF board)
CTRG PWA-F-CTRG Storing the status of the toner cartridge P. 3-6 -
Toner cartridge PC board (The CTRG board is installed in the
(CTRG board) toner cartridge.)

FUS PWA-F-FUS Supplying the power to the damp heater P. 3-7 5-26
Fuse PC board (FUS board)

HPNL PWA-F-HPNL Detecting the button entry and P. 3-4 2-1

Control panel PC board (HPNL controlling the LED and the LCD on the
board) control panel

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 13
 Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

LDRS PWA-F-LDRS Driving the laser diode P. 3-6 3-15

Laser driving PC board (LDRS
board)

3.3.5 Lamps and heaters

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

LAMP1 HTR-LAMP Heating the center section of the fuser P. 3-6 17-22
Center heater lamp roller

LAMP2 SIDE-LAMP Heating both sides of the fuser roller P. 3-6 17-33
Side heater lamp

ERS LP-ERS Removing the residual charge from the P. 3-7 13-2
Discharge LED drum surface

DH1 DRM-DH Preventing condensation of the drum P. 3-7 6-11

Drum damp heater * ARD/AUD/ASD/TWD model only

3.3.6 Thermistors and thermostats

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

THMS1 THMS-C-HTR Detecting the surface temperature at the P. 3-6 17-23

Center thermistor center of the fuser roller (for controlling
the temperature of the center heater
lamp)

THMS2 THMS-S-HTR Detecting the surface temperature at the P. 3-6 17-23

Side thermistor rear side of the fuser roller (for
controlling the temperature of the side
heater lamp)

THMS3 THMS-EDG-HTR Detecting the surface temperature at the P. 3-6 17-23

Edge thermistor edge of the rear side of the fuser roller
(for preventing overheating)

THMS4 THMS-DRM Detecting the temperature on the drum P. 3-7 5-30

Drum thermistor surface

THMO1 THRMO-FSR-C Preventing overheating in the fuser unit P. 3-6 17-6

Fuser center thermostat

THMO2 THRMO-FSR-F Preventing overheating in the fuser unit P. 3-6 17-35

Fuser front thermostat

THMO3 THRMST-CS-L Preventing overheating in the drum P. 3-7 6-17

Drum damp heater thermostat damp heater

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 14
3.3.7 Others

Symbol Name Function Remarks P-I

CIS CIS Reading originals P. 3-4 7-9

Contact image sensor unit

LVPS PS-ACC Generating DC voltage and supplying it P. 3-5 3-2

Switching regulator to each section of the equipment
3
HVPS PS-HVT Generating high-voltage and supplying it P. 3-5 4-21
High-voltage transformer to the following sections
• Needle electrode
• Main charger grid
• Developer bias
• Transfer bias
• Separation bias
• Transfer supporting bias

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 15
3.4 Copy Process

3.4.1 General Description of Copying Process

Paper exit

(8) Fusing
Lamp heating method
(9)

(10) Cleaning
(2) Data reading(scanning) Discharging
Blade method
CIS Discharge LED (red)

(1) Charging

Image processing

(3) (7) Separation

Data writing
Semiconductive laser

(6) Transfer

(5)
Transfer bias
(4) Development
Magnetic roller Bypass feeding
Toner
(100 sheets)
Carrier Drawer feeding
(250 sheets)
PFU
(250 sheets)
PFP *
(550 sheets)

* 2329A/2829A only

Fig. 3-11

(1) Charging: Applies negative charge on the (7) Separation: Separates paper with the toner
surface of the photoconductive drum. image from the photoconductive drum.
↓ ↓
(2) Data reading: The images on the original (8) Fusing: Fuses the toner image onto the
are converted into electrical signals. paper by applying heat and pressure.
↓ ↓
(3) Data writing: The electrical signals are (9) Cleaning: Scrapes off the residual toner
converted into light signal (laser emission) from the drum.
which exposes the surface of the ↓
photoconductive drum. (10) Discharging: Eliminates the residual
↓ negative charge from the surface of the
(4) Development: Negatively-charged toner photoconductive drum.
adheres to the photoconductive drum and
forms visible image.
↓
(5) Transfer bias: Improves transfer efficiency.
↓
(6) Transfer: Transfers the visible toner image
on the photoconductive drum onto paper.
↓

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 16
3.5 Comparison with e-STUDIO2303A/2303AM/2803AM/2309A/
2809A series

e-STUDIO2303A/2303AM/2803AM/ 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/
Process
2309A/2809A 2823AM/2329A/2829A

1. Photoconductive drum

• Model OD-2505 (OPC ø30) ← 3

• Sensitivity Highly sensitized/durable drum ←

2. Charging Scorotron method ←

3. Data writing

• Light source Semiconductor laser (Adjustment not ←

required)

4. Development

• Magnetic roller One magnetic roller ←

• Auto-toner Magnetic bridge-circuit method ←

• Toner supply Toner cartridge ←

• Toner-empty Density detection method ←

detection

• Toner PS-ZT2309TS(1) PS-ZT2323TS(1)

PS-ZT2309E(1) PS-ZT2323E(1)

PS-ZT2309U(1) PS-ZT2323U(1)

PS-ZT2309P(1) PS-ZT2323P(1),

PS-ZT2309PS(1), PS-ZT2323PS(1)

PS-ZT2309C(1) PS-ZT2323C(1)

PS-ZT2309CS(1) PS-ZT2323CS(1)

PS-ZT2309C(12) PS-ZT2323C(12)

PS-ZT2309CS(12) PS-ZT2323CS(12)

• Developer D-D2309: Cartridge type ←

material
D-D2505, D-D2505C: Pouch type ←

• Developer bias DC- Adjustable output (during printing) ←

AC (Adjustment not required, during ←

printing)

No DC+ (positive) output ←

5. Transfer

• Method Scorotron transfer method ←

• Output Adjustable output (Constant current) ←

6. Separation

• Method Needle separation method ←

7. Discharge

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 17
 e-STUDIO2303A/2303AM/2803AM/ 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/
Process
2309A/2809A 2823AM/2329A/2829A

• Discharging Exposure after cleaning ←

position

• Discharge LED Red LED ←

8. Cleaning

• Method Cleaning blade ←

• Recovered toner Reuse (There is the recovered toner ←

supply mechanism.)

9. Fusing

• Method Long-life fuser roller method ←

• Fuser roller ←

Thin roller coated with fluoroplastic ←

(ø23)

• Pressure roller ←

PFA tube roller (ø22) ←

• Heater Heater lamp ←

Turned ON/OFF by thermistor ←

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 18
3.6 General Operation

3.6.1 Overview of Operation

Operation of equipment Operation during initializing, pre-running and ready
Drawer feed copying by [START] button
Copying operation Bypass feed copying
3

3.6.2 Description of Operation

[ 1 ] Warming-up
1. Initialization
Power ON
→ Heater lamp ON
→ “Please wait” is displayed
→ Fan motors ON
→ Initialization of scanning system
- The CIS unit moves to the home position.
- The CIS unit moves to the peak detection position.
- The LED of CIS is turned ON.
- Peak detection (white color is detected by the shading correction plate)
- The LED of CIS is turned OFF.
- The CIS unit moves to the home position.
→ “READY” is displayed

2. Pre-running operation (Only when the temperature is at fixed temperature)

The pre-running operation is started when the temperature of the fuser roller surface reaches a
certain temperature.
→ The main motor is turned ON
- Fuser roller rotated.
- Drum rotated.
→ Pre-running operation stops after specified time

3. When the surface temperature of the fuser roller becomes sufficient for fusing,
→ “READY” is displayed

[ 2 ] Ready state (ready for copying)

Buttons on the control panel enabled
→ When no button is pressed for a certain period of time,
- Equipment returns to the normal ready state.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 19
[ 3 ] Drawer feed copying (1st drawer paper feeding)
1. Press the [START] button
→ “READY” → “COPYING”
→ CIS LED ON
→ Scan motor ON → CIS unit move forward
→ Polygonal motor rotates
→ Main motor ON
- The drum, fuser unit, developer unit and exit roller are driven.

2. Drawer paper feeding

→ Main charger, developer bias and discharge LED ON. Fans are rotated in high speed. Drawer
feed clutch ON.
- Paper feed roller start to rotate.
→ Paper reaches the registration roller
- The registration sensor is turned ON and aligning is performed.
→ Drawer feed clutch OFF

3. After the scanning operation:

→ Registration roller clutch ON after a certain period of time → paper is transported to the transfer
area
→ Copy counter operates

4. After the registration roller clutch is turned ON:

→ Transfer charger ON after a certain period of time
→ Copy counter operates

5. Completion of scanning
→ Scan motor OFF
→ CIS LED OFF
→ Registration roller clutch OFF (after the trailing edge of the paper passed the registration roller)
→ Ready state

6. Paper exit
→ Exit sensor detects the trailing edge of the paper
→ Main charger, developer bias and discharge LED OFF
→ Polygonal motor, main motor OFF
→ Drum, fuser unit and developer unit stop
→ Fans return to the ready rotation
→ “READY” is displayed and the equipment enters the ready state

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 20
[ 4 ] Bypass feed copying
1. Insert a sheet of paper into the bypass tray.
→ Bypass paper sensor ON
- Bypass feed priority state.

2. Press the [START] button

→ “READY” → “COPYING”
→ CIS LED ON
→ Scan motor ON → CIS unit move forward 3
→ Polygonal motor rotates
→ Main motor ON
- The drum, fuser unit, developer unit and exit roller are driven.

3. Bypass feeding
→ Main charger, developer bias and discharge LED ON. Fans are rotated in high speed.
→ Bypass feed clutch
- The bypass feed roller start to rotate.
→ Paper reaches the registration roller
→ Aligning operation
→ After a certain period of time, the bypass feed clutch OFF

4. Hereafter, the operation 3. through 6. of  P. 3-20 “[ 3 ] Drawer feed copying (1st drawer paper
feeding)” is repeated.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 21
3.6.3 Detection of Abnormality
When something abnormal has occurred in the equipment, the symbols corresponding to the type of
abnormality are displayed.

[ 1 ] Types of abnormality
1. Abnormality which can be cleared even if the power is not turned off by the door switch
(A) Add paper

2. Abnormality which can be cleared if the power is turned off by the door switch
(B) Pick-up failure in bypass
(C) Misfeed in equipment
(D) Replace the toner cartridge
(E) Developer unit not installed properly

3. Abnormality which can be cleared if the power is turned off by the main switch
(F) Call for service

[ 2 ] Description of abnormality
(A) Add paper

[In cases of the equipment drawer] (When drawer is not installed)

• Drawer empty sensor detects the presence or absence of paper.
No drawer detected
↓
“Add paper” is displayed
The LED on the control panel corresponding to the drawer blinks
↓
[START] button disabled

[In cases of the equipment drawer] (When the drawer is installed)

Drawer detected
↓
Paper empty sensor OFF
↓
“Add paper” is displayed
The LED on the control panel corresponding to the drawer blinks
↓
[START] button disabled

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 22
(B) Pick-up failure in bypass

• During bypass feeding

Bypass feed clutch ON
↓
Registration sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time
↓
3
“Misfeed in bypass” is displayed: E120
↓
Copying operation is disabled
↓
Solution: Remove the paper from the bypass tray and open and close the right cover.

(C) Misfeed in equipment

• Exit sensor detects jamming of the leading edge of paper.

↓

Registration roller clutch ON ON

↓ Less than regulation time Registration roller
clutch
Exit sensor ON ON
Exit sensor
If the exit sensor is not turned ON after
regulation time
Timer
↓ 0 Regulation time

Paper jam (E010)→ The copying operation is

stopped. Paper jam (E010)
Fig. 3-12

• Exit sensor detects jamming of the tailing edge of paper.

↓

Registration roller clutch OFF Registration roller

clutch OFF
↓ Less than regulation time
Exit sensor
Exit sensor OFF ON
If the exit sensor is not turned OFF after
regulation time
Timer
↓
0 Regulation time
Paper jam (E020)→ The copying operation is
stopped.
Paper jam (E020)
Fig. 3-13

• Immediately after the power ON

↓

Any of all sensors on paper transport path detects paper (ON)

↓

Paper jam (E030)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 23
 • Toner supply cover is opened during copying
↓

Paper jam (E410)

• Registration sensor detects jamming of the leading edge of paper:

Registration sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the feeding starts.
↓

Paper jam (E120, E130 and E210)

• During paper feeding from ADU:

Registration sensor is not turned ON in a fixed period of time after the ADU motor is turned ON.
↓

Paper jam (E110)

• During paper transporting from ADU:

ADU entrance/exit sensors do not detect the paper at the fixed timing
↓

Paper jam (E510)

(D) Replace the toner cartridge

• Toner density becomes low

↓
Auto-toner sensor detects the absence of the toner
↓
Control circuit → Displays the message: the copying operation disabled
Solution: Open the toner supply cover and replace the toner cartridge with a new one.
Toner is supplied → copying operation enabled.

(E) Developer unit not installed properly

• Disconnection of the connectors of the developer unit

↓
“Set process unit” is displayed.
[START] button disabled.
Solution: Connect the connectors of the developer unit and close the right cover.

(F) Call for service

Check the error code displayed on the control panel when “Call for service” appears, and deal with
the abnormality referring to the error code table.
 P. 8-7 “8.2 Error Code List”

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 24
3.7 Control Panel

3.7.1 General Description

The control panel consists of button switches to operate the equipment and select various modes, and
LEDs and an LCD to display codes, values and the states (including each mode) of the equipment. The
button switches, the LEDs and an LCD are mounted on the control panel PC board (HPNL) and are
installed the inside of the control panel.
When the operator’s attention is required, graphic symbols appear with messages explaining the 3
condition of the equipment in the LCD panel.

<2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM>
For NAD and ARD, AUD

Fig. 3-14

For other models

Fig. 3-15

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 25
<2329A/2829A>
For NAD and ARD, AUD

Fig. 3-16

For other models

Fig. 3-17

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 26
3.7.2 Items shown on the display panel

[ 1 ] Display
1. Basic display
Displays messages.
Ready

AUTO EXPOSURE 3
TEXT

Fig. 3-18

2. Paper jam display

When paper jam occurs, the error code and position of the jammed paper will be displayed.
Pressing the right button shows the jam releasing guidance.
[►]

[►]

MISFEED E410
OPEN SIDE COVER
OF THE COPIER.
[►]
[►]

MISFEED E410
REMOVE ANY MISFEED
PAPER.
[►]
[►]

MISFEED E410
CLOSE SIDE COVER
OF THE COPIER.
[►]
[►]

Fig. 3-19

3. Service call display

Displays error code and service call message.

CALL FOR SERVICE C 010

Fig. 3-20

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 27
3.8 Scanner

3.8.1 General Description

In the scanning section, this equipment uses a CIS (Contact Image Sensor) for scanning the image.
The surface of an original is irradiated with light from the LED array mounted on the CIS unit and the
reflected light is scanned by the CMOS sensor where the optical image data are converted into an
analog electrical signal, and then transmitted to the MAIN board. After the binarization and the various
image processing operations necessary for image formation are performed on the MAIN board, the
data are transmitted to the writing section.

[1] [7] [2] [6]

[3]

[5] [4]

Fig. 3-21

[1] RADF original glass

[2] Original glass
[3] CIS
[4] Scan motor (M1)
[5] Platen sensor (S7) <2329A/2829A only>
[6] Automatic original detection sensor-1 (S9) <2329A/2829A only>
[7] Automatic original detection sensor-2 (S10) <2329A/2829A only>

3.8.2 Composition

Scanning section
Original glass Original glass
RADF Original glass
CIS unit (CIS) CMOS
RGB light guiding tube (two lights)
Rod-lens array
Drive section Scan motor (M1)
Other Platen sensor (S7) <2329A/2829A only>
Automatic original detection sensor-1 <2329A/2829A only>
Automatic original detection sensor-2 <2329A/2829A only>

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 28
3.8.3 Functions

• Original glass
This is a glass for placing original. Original (image) placed on the original glass is scanned by the
CIS.
The RADF original glass is used when original is read with the Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder. Original is transported on the RADF original glass by the Reversing Automatic Document
Feeder, and the transported original is read under the RADF original glass by the CIS. Do not use
such solvents as alcohol when cleaning the surface of the RADF original glass, because it is coated 3
so as not to be scratched by originals.

• CIS unit (CIS)

The CIS unit (CIS) is a sensor unit which consists of an LED array, lens array and CMOS sensor
array of the same length as that of the original width in the primary scanning direction closely
attached and unified. The original is irradiated at one time with the LED light source which consists
of LEDs of RGB colors (one for each color), light guiding tube to lead each light to the original, and
then the reflected light is scanned by the CMOS sensor.
In the CCD method (reduction optical method), the reflected light of the exposure lamp is led
through mirrors, lens and slit to the CCD where the optical-to-electrical conversion for scanned data
is performed. In contrast, in the CIS method (close-contact sensor method), those operations are
processed only by the CIS unit. The CIS has characteristics of shallow depth of focus and high light-
sensitivity.

[2] [3]
[4]
[5]
[1]

[7] [6]

Fig. 3-22

[1] CIS unit

[2] RADF original glass
[3] Rod-lens array
[4] Shading correction plate
[5] Original glass
[6] RGB light guiding tube
[7] CMOS sensor

- CMOS sensor
Scans the light reflected from an original and converts it to an electrical signal.
In order to realize the same-to-scale optical system of A3 width and 7344 image pixels, the
equipment uses 17 CMOS sensors (each CMOS sensor has 432 image pixels per line) to make
up a CMOS sensor of 600 x 600 dpi resolution for scanning.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 29
 - RGB light guiding tube
A light from the LED array mounted on the CIS unit (CIS) goes through the original glass and
lights the original. Then, the reflected light from the original is scanned by the CMOS sensor. By
adjusting each amount of R, G and B-LED light, it is possible to attain a light color which has
nearly the same color effect as that of the YG xenon light for the light sensitivity of the CMOS
sensor.

• Scan motor (M1)

This is a pulse motor which drives the CIS unit (CIS). The rotation of the motor is transmitted to the
CIS unit through the timing belt to move the unit in the secondary scanning direction.

• Platen sensor (S7)

This sensor detects opening/closing of the RADF cover.

• Automatic original detection sensor-1 / -2 (S9/S10)

The size of an original placed on the glass is instantly detected using the APS sensors fixed on the
base frame.

3.8.4 Description of Operation

[ 1 ] Scanning operation
• Scanning an original on the original glass
During the scanning operation, the rotation of the scan motor (M1) is transmitted to the timing belt to
move the CIS unit (CIS).
The CIS unit (CIS) makes the position of the shading correction plate, attached to the inside of the
top cover, move left-to-right to carry out the initialization.
At this time, the CIS unit (CIS) detects the black mark position on the shading correction plate and
thus the home position is determined.
When the [START] button is pressed, the CIS unit (CIS) starts scanning the originals.
When scanning is finished, the CIS unit (CIS) carries out the initialization, returns to its home
position and then stops.

• Scanning an original on the RADF

When originals are scanned from the RADF, the CIS unit (CIS) moves to the position of the RADF
original glass and then stops.
The originals transferred from the RADF are scanned while they pass through the upper surface of
the RADF original glass where the CIS unit (CIS) has stopped.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 30
3.9 Laser Optical Unit

3.9.1 General Description

The laser optical unit radiates the laser beam onto the photoconductive drum responding to the digital
image signals transmitted from the MAIN board to create the latent image. Image signal is converted
into the light emission signal of the laser diode on the laser driving PC board (LDRS), then radiated on
the drum through the optical elements such as cylindrical lens, polygonal mirror and fθ lens.
These parts are adjusted very precisely using specialized devices. If the adjustment is disrupted, they 3
cannot be readjusted in the field. They must also be handled very carefully, because fingerprints, dirt, or
dust on them will distort the image.

[1]

Fig. 3-23

[1] Polygonal motor

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 31
3.9.2 Laser precautions
A laser diode is used for this equipment and radiates an invisible laser beam.
Since it is not visible, be extremely careful when handling the laser optical unit components, performing
operations or adjusting the laser beam. Also make sure you perform work according to the procedures
specified in manuals because you could be exposed to laser radiation.
The laser optical unit is completely sealed with a protective cover. As long as you only perform the
operations specified in this manual, the laser beam does not leak and you are in no danger of being
exposed to laser radiation.
The following cautionary label for the laser is attached to the frame which you can see when opening
the right cover.

The following laser warning label is on the frame visible when the right cover and the toner supply cover
are opened.

Fig. 3-24

Cautions:
• Avoid exposure to laser beam during service. This equipment uses a laser diode. Be sure not to
expose your eyes to the laser beam. Do not insert reflecting parts or tools such as a screwdriver on
the laser beam path. Remove all reflecting metals such as watches, rings, etc. before starting
service.
• When servicing the equipment with the power turned ON, be sure not to touch live sections and
rotating/operating sections. Avoid exposing your eyes to laser beam.
• During servicing, be sure to check the rating plate and cautionary labels such as “Unplug the power
cable during service”, “CAUTION. HOT”, “CAUTION. HIGH VOLTAGE”, “CAUTION. LASER BEAM”,
etc. to see if there is any dirt on their surface and if they are properly stuck to the equipment.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 32
3.10 Drive System

3.10.1 General Description

The main motor (M3) drives the drum, developer unit, cleaner unit, fuser unit and transport rollers which
transport paper (bypass feed roller, registration roller and paper feed roller).
The main motor (M3) is a brushless motor and is installed in the drive unit. The drive unit consists of
gears and clutch, and transmits the driving force of the main motor (M3) to each unit. The toner motor
(M2) which drives the toner cartridge is also installed in the drive unit. 3
The exit roller is driven by the main motor (M3). However, when the automatic duplexing unit is
installed, it is driven by the exit motor (M6).

[11] [11]

[5]

[3] [10]

[6]

[7]

[1]

[2]

[4]

[9] [8]

Fig. 3-25

[1] Main motor (M3)

[2] For mixer
[3] Toner motor (M2)
[4] Drive unit
[5] For fuser roller
[6] For toner cartridge auger
[7] For drum
[8] For bypass feed roller
[9] For paper feed roller
[10] Exit motor (M6)
[11] Exit roller

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 33
3.10.2 Composition

Unit to be driven Drive transmission

Main motor (M3) Drum Gears
Developer unit (Mixer) Gears
Cleaner unit (Toner recovery auger) Gears
Fuser unit (Fuser roller) Gears
Rollers (Paper feed roller and Bypass feed roller) Gears, clutch
Toner motor (M2) Toner cartridge Gears

3.10.3 Functions

• Main motor (M3)

The main motor is a DC brushless motor which is controlled by control signals output from the MAIN
board. The driving force of the main motor is transmitted to the drum, developer unit, cleaner unit,
fuser unit and the rollers which transport the paper, via gears and clutch.

• Toner motor (M2)

The toner motor is a DC brush motor which is controlled by control signals output from the MAIN
board. The driving force of the toner motor is transmitted to the toner cartridge via gears.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 34
3.11 Paper Feeding System

3.11.1 General Descriptions

The purpose of this system is to pick up a sheet of paper from the drawer or bypass tray and transport
it to the transfer position. The paper feeding system mainly consists of the paper feed roller, registration
roller, bypass paper sensor, paper empty sensor, registration sensor and the drive system for these
components.
3

[8]

[7]
[5]

[4]
[3]

[1]
[6]

[2]

Fig. 3-26

[1] Drawer feed roller

[2] Drawer separation pad
[3] Paper empty sensor
[4] Bypass feed roller
[5] Bypass paper sensor
[6] Bypass separation pad
[7] Registration sensor
[8] Registration roller

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 35
3.11.2 Composition

Paper feeding system

Drawer Drawer feed roller Periodic replacement part
Drawer separation pad Periodic replacement part
Drawer feed clutch (CLT2)
Paper empty sensor (S5)
Bypass unit Bypass feed roller
Bypass separation pad
Bypass paper sensor (S6)
Bypass feed clutch (CLT3)
Registration roller
Registration roller clutch (CLT1)
Registration sensor (S2)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 36
3.11.3 Functions

• Drawer feed roller

Draws out paper on the paper feed drawer one by one and conveys to the registration roller.
One sheet of paper is transported to the registration roller each time the drawer feed roller
completes one rotation.

• Drawer feed clutch (CLT2)

This is an electromagnetic clutch which drives the drawer feed roller. When the drawer feed clutch 3
(CLT2) is turned ON, the driving force from the main motor (M3) is transmitted to the drawer feed
roller in the drawer to rotate it.

• Paper empty sensor (S5)

This is a transmissive-type sensor and detects the availability of paper in the drawer. When there is
no paper in the drawer, the actuator blocks the light path of the sensor, and the sensor determines
that there is no paper.

• Bypass feed roller

Transports the paper from the bypass feed roller to the registration roller.

• Bypass separation pad

When two or more sheets of paper are transported from the bypass feed roller, since the resistance
force of the bypass separation pad is larger than the frictional force between the sheets, the lower
sheets are not transported any further.

• Bypass paper sensor (S6)

Detects whether paper is set in the bypass tray or not. When paper is set in the bypass tray, bypass
feeding is performed in preference to drawer feeding. And it also detects whether paper has been
transported from the bypass tray or not (i.e. whether the leading/trailing edge of the paper has
passed the bypass feed roller or not.). The sensor is also used to detect jams such as paper
missending in the bypass unit.

• Bypass feed clutch (CLT3)

This is an electromagnetic clutch which drives the bypass feed roller. When the bypass feed
clutch(CLT3) is turned ON, the drive is transmitted from the main motor (M3) to rotate the bypass
feed roller.

• Registration roller
Paper transported from the drawer feed roller or bypass feed roller is pushed against the registration
roller which aligns the leading edge of the paper. Then, the registration rollers rotate to transport the
paper to the transfer position.

• Registration roller clutch (CLT1)

This is an electromagnetic clutch which drives the registration roller. When the registration roller
clutch (CLT1) is turned ON, the drive is transmitted from the main motor (M3) to rotate the
registration roller.

• Registration sensor (S2)

It is used to detect that the leading edge of the paper has reached the registration roller and to
control the aligning amount of the paper (the amount of the paper bend before it is transported to the
registration roller). Also, it is used to detect the trailing edge of the paper has passed the registration
roller.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 37
3.11.4 Operation

[ 1 ] Drawer

[A] Operation of the drawer feed roller

When the drawer is inserted into the equipment, the lock located in the center of the drawer is released,
and the tray in the drawer is lifted up by the spring. This makes the paper in the tray contact the drawer
feed roller when it is rotated.
The driving force of the main motor (M3) is transmitted through the drawer feed clutch (CLT2) to the
drawer feed roller. The drawer feed roller is rotated by this driving force to pull out a sheet of paper from
the drawer. When multiple sheets of paper are fed, the drawer feed clutch is turned ON at each rotation.
One rotation of the feed roller can transport a sheet of paper to the registration roller.
This feeding system has no mechanism specific for detecting the transported paper. Therefore, whether
the paper has been transported to the registration sensor (S2) within a specified period of time or not is
substituted for the paper jam detection.

[1]

[2]

Fig. 3-27

[1] Drawer feed clutch

[2] Drawer feed roller

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 38
[B] Paper separation
This model is equipped with a drawer separation pad which works to prevent multiple paper feeding.
The drawer separation pad is pushed to the drawer feed roller by the spring force.
When two or more sheets of paper are fed, since the friction between two sheets of paper is smaller
than that between a sheet and the drawer separation pad, the lower sheets are not transported any
further while the uppermost one is transported by the drawer feed roller.

[1] 3

B [2]

Fig. 3-28

[1] Drawer feed roller

[2] Drawer separation pad

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 39
[ 2 ] Bypass tray

[A] Operation of bypass feed roller

When the paper is set on the bypass tray, the bypass paper sensor (S6) detects it and judges that there
is paper on the bypass tray, and the bypass feeding is performed in preference to drawer feeding.
When the bypass feed clutch turns ON, the bypass feed roller rotates and transports the paper on the
bypass tray to the registration roller.

[1]

[2] [3]

Fig. 3-29

[1] Bypass feed clutch

[2] Bypass separation pad
[3] Bypass feed roller

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 40
[B] Paper separation
This model separates the paper fed by the bypass feed roller using the bypass separation pad. The
bypass separation pad is pressed again the bypass feed roller by the spring. When more than two
sheets of paper are transported from the bypass feed roller, since the friction between the two sheets of
paper is smaller than between a sheet and bypass separation pad, only the uppermost paper is
transported by the bypass feed roller, and the paper below it are not transported due to the friction of
the bypass separation pad.
The paper transported by the bypass feed roller arrives at the registration roller. After it is aligned by the
registration roller, the bypass feed roller stops. 3

[1]
[3]

[2]

[4]
[3]

Fig. 3-30

[1] Bypass feed clutch

[2] Bypass separation pad
[3] Bypass feed roller
[4] Spring

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 41
[ 3 ] General operation

[A] From power ON to standby status

• When the equipment is turned ON, if the paper empty sensor (S5) is turned OFF (L), it is judged
that there is no paper in the drawer. With the sensor (S5) being ON (H), it is judged that there is
paper in the drawer.
• If either of the sensors; registration sensor (S2) or exit sensor (S3) is ON (meaning there is paper
on the transport path) when the equipment is turned ON, it is determined that a paper jam has
occurred and no operation is enabled until the jammed paper is removed.

[B] Standby status

After the availability of paper is checked as described above, the equipment enters the standby state.

[C] Drawer feeding

• When the drawer feed clutch (CLT2) is turned ON, the driving force of the main motor (M3) is
transmitted to rotate the paper feed roller. A sheet of paper is then fed and transported to the
registration roller.
• The leading edge of the paper turns ON the registration sensor (S2), and then the paper stops at
the registration roller.
• The registration roller clutch (CLT1) is turned ON and the paper aligned by the registration roller
is transported to the transfer unit.

[D] Bypass feeding

• The bypass paper sensor (S6) detects the availability of paper.
• The drive from the main motor (M3) is transmitted to the paper feed clutch to rotate the bypass
feed clutch.
• Feeding starts and a sheet of paper is transported to the registration roller. The leading edge of
the paper turns ON the registration sensor (S2), and then the paper stops at the registration
roller.
• The registration roller clutch (CLT1) is turned ON and the paper aligned by the registration roller
is transported to the transfer unit.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 42
3.12 Drum Related Section

3.12.1 Configuration
This chapter explains about the area around the drum, drum itself, image processing, their parts and
control circuits.

[3] [5] [7]

[1]
[2] [4] [6] 3
[8]

[9]

[12]

[10]

[14] [11]

[13]

[15]
Fig. 3-31

[1] Toner motor

[2] Main charger
[3] Discharge LED
[4] Cleaning blade
[5] Toner recovery auger
[6] Recovery blade
[7] Separation finger
[8] Suction fan
[9] Ozone filter
[10] Separation needle
[11] Transfer roller
[12] Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF board)
[13] Drum
[14] Drum thermistor
[15] Temperature/Humidity sensor

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 43
3.12.2 Composition

Drum related section

Drum cleaner unit Drum Periodic replacement part
Drum separation finger
Cleaning blade Periodic replacement part
Recovery blade
Transfer roller unit Transfer roller Periodic replacement part
Separation needle
Main charger Needle electrode
Grid Periodic replacement part
Other High-voltage transformer
Temperature/humidity sensor (S1)
Suction fan (M5)
Ozone filter
Discharge LED
Drum thermistor (THMS4)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 44
3.12.3 Functions
• Drum
The drum is made of a cylindrical aluminum base coated with thin film of organic photoconductive
substance.
The photoconductive object becomes insulative (the electrical resistance is high) when it is not
exposed to the light and electrically conductive (the electrical resistance is low) when it is exposed to
the light. This object is called a photoconductor.

• Main charger 3
The main charger in this equipment consists of a metal rod with U-shaped section, insulated blocks
at both ends of the rod and a needle electrode attached between them.
When a high voltage is applied to the needle electrode, the air around it is charged (ionized). The
ionized air then flows into the drum causing it to be charged. This phenomenon is called “corona
discharge”. At the same time, a control bias is applied to the main charger grid to control the
charging amount.
In a dark place, negative charge is evenly applied onto the drum surface by the corona discharge
and this grid. In addition, a cleaner is installed to clean up the dust attached on the needle electrode.
- Needle electrode
The needle electrode has aligned needles and their points perform the corona discharge. These
points (electrodes) discharge toward the drum in one direction to realize the more efficient
discharging comparing to the charger wire which discharges in a radial direction. Therefore, the
needle electrode enables to reduce the ozone amount.

Main charger

Needle electrode

Charge

Fig. 3-32

• Drum cleaner
- Cleaning blade
This blade is pressed against the drum surface and scrapes off the residual toner from the drum
surface.
- Recovery blade
This blade catches the toner scraped off by the cleaning blade.
- Toner recovery auger
This auger carries the residual toner scraped off to the developer unit and reuses the toner.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 45
• Transfer roller unit
- Transfer supporting bias
Positive bias is applied to the registration rollers and the pressure roller in the fuser unit so as to
prevent the transfer ability from lowering under high humidity environments.
- Transfer roller (transfer charger)
A transfer roller is used as the transfer charger for this equipment.
With the transfer roller, dots are reproduced more clearly because the electric charge is
concentrated on a contact point between the paper and the drum surface, and thus toner is less
scattered at the time of transfer. Therefore user maintenance such as the cleaning of the main
charger wire of the existing models adopting the corona discharge method can be omitted.
- Separation needle (separation charger)
This needle requires a smaller capacity of the high-voltage transformer than the existing charger
wire does. This needs to be cleaned with a brush at PM.

• Discharge LED (ERS)

Discharging is a process to decrease or eliminate the electrical potential of the drum surface.
The electrical resistance of the photoconductive layer is decreased by the light irradiation, and the
residual charge on the drum surface is neutralized and eliminated. The electrical potential of the
drum surface is fixed to a certain amount before the drum is charged.

• Drum thermistor (THMS4)

The drum surface temperature is detected by the drum thermistor to control the rotation speed of the
suction fan when the equipment is in the ready status.

• High-voltage transformer (HVPS)

This is a board to generate the output control voltage of the main charger, main charger grid,
transfer charger, separation charger, developer bias and transfer supporting bias.

• Temperature/humidity sensor (S1)

This sensor and drum thermistor detect the temperature and humidity inside of the equipment since
the drum, developer material and paper are affected by environmental elements such as
temperature or humidity. Thus the main charger grid, transfer/separation output, transfer guide bias,
developer bias, laser output and auto-toner output are controlled to be at their optimum states.

• Suction fan (M5)

The suction fan cools down the inside of the equipment. The air to exhaust includes the ozone
generated by the corona discharge, and this ozone is removed by the ozone filter. The suction fan
also helps the paper separation by absorbing the paper to post-transfer guide.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 46
3.13 Development System

3.13.1 Configuration
Development is the process of converting electrostatic latent images into visible images. The developer
material is supplied onto the photoconductive drum surface by the developer sleeve (magnet roller).
Then the toner in the developer material adheres to this drum surface to form images. This process is
performed in the developer unit.
This chapter explains about the units, parts and control circuits related to development. 3
The developer unit in this equipment has a recovered toner supply mechanism which recycles the
recovered toner scraped off by the drum cleaning blade. The developer unit is driven by the main motor
(M3) to rotate the mixers and the developer sleeve.

[7], [8] [2]

[1]

[6] [5] [4] [3]

Fig. 3-33

[1] Doctor blade

[2] Drum
[3] Developer sleeve
[4] Mixer-1
[5] Auto-toner sensor
[6] Mixer-2
[7] Toner cartridge PC board (CTRG)
[8] Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 47
3.13.2 Composition

Development system

Developer unit Developer material Periodic replacement part

Mixers-1 and -2

Developer sleeve (Magnet roller)

Doctor blade

Auto-toner sensor (S4)

Toner cartridge Toner cartridge PC board (CTRG)

Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF)

Toner motor (M2)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 48
3.13.3 Functions

[ 1 ] General description
• Toner cartridge installation detection mechanism (IC chip)
The toner cartridge is filled with toner. The toner motor drives the cartridge to supply the toner to the
developer unit.
The IC chip detects whether a toner cartridge is installed.

• Developer unit 3
- Developer material
The developer material is made of a mixture of the carrier and toner.
The carrier is an electrical conductive ferrite whose size is approx 44 µm. The toner is a resin
particle whose size is approx 8.5 µm.
The developer material needs periodic replacement since its quality is deteriorated by long use.

- Mixers-1 and -2
Friction is generated by mixing the developer material. The carrier is charged to (+) and the toner
to (–), and the image is formed on the drum surface by the static electricity caused by the friction.

- Developer sleeve (Magnetic roller)

This is an aluminum roller with a magnet inside. The magnet works to absorb the developer
material and forms the magnetic brush. The magnet is fixed and only the sleeve around is
rotated. This rotation makes the magnetic brush of the developer sleeve sweep over the drum
surface and perform development.

- Doctor blade
Doctor blade controls the amount of the developer material transported by the developer sleeve
so that the magnetic brush of the developer material contacts with the drum surface properly.

- Auto-toner sensor
The carrier and the toner (toner density) in the developer material should be always fixed to a
certain ratio to output normal images. The auto-toner sensor detects the inclusion ratio of the
toner in the developer material by using a magnetic bridge circuit. When the quantity of toner
becomes insufficient, the toner motor is driven to supply the toner from the toner cartridge.

- Recovered toner supply mechanism

The toner scraped off by the drum cleaning blade is transported by the toner recovery auger and
returned to the developer unit to be recycled.

• Toner cartridge
This is filled with the toner and this supplies the toner to the developer unit by the drive of the toner
motor (M2). The toner cartridge in this equipment mounts the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG), and
the data identifying recommended Toshiba toner cartridges and the counter values determining that
the cartridge is nearly empty are written in this board. These data are read out by the toner cartridge
interface PC board (CTIF) in this equipment, and data related to toner supply are also written in the
toner cartridge PC board (CTRG). The toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF) also detects
whether the toner cartridge is installed or not.

• Toner motor (M2)

 P. 3-34 “3.10.3 Functions” •Toner motor (M2)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 49
[ 2 ] Functions of the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG)
An IC chip is embedded in this board. Data such as identification information for the recommended
Toshiba toner cartridge, thresholds to determine if the cartridge is nearly empty, and controlling data
for the image quality to be optimal according to the toner characteristics are written in this chip.
To measure the amount of toner remaining in the cartridge, when the value of the counter for the period
of the toner cartridge rotation time is updated, this equipment writes the updated value into the toner
cartridge PC board (CTRG).

These data written in the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG) enable the functions below, and accordingly
this equipment operates as shown below.
Data reading is performed every time when the power is turned ON, the toner supply cover is closed
and the equipment has recovered from the sleep mode.

(1) Data read by the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG)

• Data to identify recommended Toshiba toner cartridges
• Thresholds to determine if the toner cartridge is nearly empty
• Value of the counter for the period of the toner cartridge rotation time
• Data for optimizing image quality
• Threshold of toner remaining displays

(2) Functions
• Cartridge detecting function
This function checks whether the toner cartridge is inserted correctly or not, and whether the
recommended toner cartridge is used or not.
• Toner remaining check function
This function notifies the user of the near-empty status of toner. Normally, the message (Toner
is low) is displayed when the toner is running out, and (Toner empty) when the toner cartridge
is empty.
• Toner remaining check notification function
Upon detecting the near-empty status of toner, this function automatically notifies your service
representative.
• Image optimization function
This function controls the quality of images to be optimal according to the characteristics of
the toner used.
• Toner remaining display function
This function displays the remaining toner amount from 0% to 100%.

(3) Operations
A sign indicating that the toner cartridge is nearly empty appears in the following cases:
• The counter value for the toner cartridge rotation time has exceeded the threshold previously
written in the toner cartridge PC board (CTRG). (Related code: 08-5155)
• The remaining amount of toner is equal to or less than the set amount (percentage or number
of sheets). (Related code: 08-5155, 08-5810)

When a used cartridge refilled with new toner is used, a sign indicating that the toner cartridge is
empty appears because information for determining the empty status is already written in the
toner cartridge PC board (CTRG).
When a non-recommended toner cartridge is used, “Toner not recognized” appears on the
control panel, and then the equipment may stop normal operations. The toner remaining display
function, the toner remaining check function, the automatic remote supply order to Toshiba sales
representatives and the image optimization function may also be disabled.

The self-diagnosis codes to adjust the timing for displaying the toner near-empty status are as
follows.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 50
 • Toner near-empty status threshold setting (08-5155)
<Setting value>
0: The period from the appearance of the toner near-empty sign to the actual complete
consumption of the toner is set to long.
1: Normal (Default)
2: The period from the appearance of the toner near-empty sign to the actual complete
consumption of the toner is set to short.
3: The sign of the status that the cartridge is nearly empty does not appear.
4: Toner near-empty status threshold value: (%) 3
• Toner near-empty status threshold value setting (%) (08-5810)
Use this code to specify the threshold value (unit: %) for displaying the toner near-empty
status. This code is used when the value of 08-5155 is set to “4”.

• Fine adjustment of threshold value for displaying the toner remaining amount / toner near-
empty (08-5156)
Performs fine adjustment of the threshold value for displaying the toner remaining amount
and toner near-empty.
Display threshold value = Default threshold value x setting value/100 (Unit: %)

(4) Toner near-empty / toner empty display adjustment

The toner empty appears when the auto-toner sensor in the developer unit detects that the level
amount of toner in the developer unit has actually become low. The toner remaining amount is
displayed by means of calculating it by counting the value of the counter for the period of the
toner motor rotation time. Then the toner near-empty appears when the calculated toner
remaining amount has reached the specified value (the toner amount which can print approx.
1,000 sheets of paper when an image whose print ratio is 6% is printed with the A4/LT equivalent
paper size).
The relationship between the period of the toner motor rotation time and the actual toner
consumption amount varies depending on the printed images and usage conditions. Therefore,
the displaying of the toner remaining amount can be adjusted by the codes shown below.
However, it is recommended to handle the toner remaining amount as the reference since the
printed images and usage conditions are always unstable and there will be variations in the
systems.

1. Fine adjustment of the toner remaining amount display

When the displayed toner remaining amount is decreased more quickly than that for the
actual toner (when “1%” is being displayed for a long time), set a value in 08-5156 larger than
the default one. When the displayed toner remaining amount is decreased more slowly than
that for the actual toner (when the toner near-empty appears before “1%” is displayed), set a
value in 08-5156 than smaller the default one.

2. Toner near-empty setting change

- Setting change of the period from the toner near-empty to the toner empty
When the period is made longer, set “0” in 08-5155. When the period is made shorter, set “2” in
08-5155.

- Setting change of the toner near-empty threshold value

When the threshold value (default: printing approx. 1,000 sheets of paper is available when an
image whose print ratio is 6% is printed with the A4/LT equivalent paper size) used to designate
toner near-empty is changed, perform the following setting change.

When the change is made by using the toner remaining amount (%), set “4” in 08-5155 and
exchange the value of 08-5810. In order to designate the toner near-empty while the toner
remaining amount is greater than the default value, set a larger value in 08-5810.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 51
 08-5156 (Set a smaller value.)
08-5156 (Set a larger value.)
08-5155=4 / 08-5810

08-5155=1 (Default)
Toner remaining amount display (%)

08-5155=0

08-5155=2
100

50

0
Approx 1,000 sheet Number of print sheets

Toner empty
Toner near empty

Fig. 3-34

Notes:
• Do not perform the change operations 1 (Fine adjustment of the toner remaining amount display) and 2
(Toner near-empty setting change) simultaneously. Otherwise, the desired results may not be obtained.
If the change is required by the combination of the operations 1 (Fine adjustment of the toner remaining
amount display) and 2 (Toner near-empty setting change), only perform either of them first. Then
change the setting for another one while checking the results.
• The values of the toner remaining amount and the number of print sheets are the reference. They will
vary depending on the printed images and usage conditions.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 52
[ 3 ] Recovered toner supply mechanism
The toner scraped off by the drum cleaning blade is transported by the toner recovery auger and
returned to the developer unit to be recycled. When returned to the developer unit, the recovered toner
is mixed with the developer material by the mixer-1 and mixer-2 in the developer unit.
On the other hand, the fresh toner transported to the developer unit from the toner cartridge is stirred by
the mixer-2, then mixed with the recovered toner, and then further stirred and transported to the
developer sleeve.

3
Drum cleaner

Mixer-1
Mixer-2

Toner recovery auger

Toner cartridge

Fresh toner
Recovered toner

Fig. 3-35

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 53
3.14 Fuser / Exit Unit

3.14.1 General Description

In the fuser unit, toner is fused by applying heat and pressure on the transferred image on the
transported paper. The paper is then transported to the inner tray after the completion of fusing. The
fuser/exit unit is driven by the main motor (M3), and the fuser roller and exit roller are rotated by the
main motor (M3).
When the automatic duplexing unit (ADU) is installed, it is driven by the exit motor (M6).
Other than the above rollers, the fuser/exit unit consists of the heater lamps, separation fingers,
thermistors (THMS1/THMS2/THMS3), thermostats (THMO1/THMO2), paper transport guide and the
exit sensor which detects the status of the paper transport, etc.

[1]
[5]

[6]

[2]

[3]

[4] [7]

Fig. 3-36

[1] Exit roller

[2] Fuser roller
[3] Fuse center thermostat / fuser front thermostat
[4] Center thermistor / side thermistor / edge thermistor
[5] Fuser separation finger
[6] Exit sensor
[7] Pressure roller

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 54
3.14.2 Composition

Fuser / exit unit

Fuser unit Pressure roller PFA tube sponge roller (Ф22)
Exit sensor (S3)
Fuser roller PFA coated roller (Ф23)
Heater lamp (LAMP1, LAMP2) 600W+600W
3
Thermistor (THMS1, THMS2, THMS3)
Thermostat (THMO1, THMO2) Non-contact type
Separation finger
Exit roller

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 55
3.14.3 Functions
• Pressure roller
The pressure roller is a sponge roller which assures the nip amount of the fuser roller. The pressure
from the spring presses the paper onto the fuser roller to fuse toner onto the paper efficiently.

• Exit sensor (S3)

The exit sensor detects if the leading or trailing edge of the paper is passing through the pressure
roller and the fuser roller. This sensor is used for the detection of paper jams in the fuser/exit unit as
well.

• Fuser roller
The fuser roller applies heat onto the paper and is heated by the heater lamps installed inside of the
fuser roller. The heat from this roller fuses toner onto the paper. The fuser roller in this equipment is
a thin roller which enhances heat conduction, and thus the warming-up time is shortened.

• Heater lamp (LAMP1/LAMP2)

The heater lamps are halogen lamps to apply heat to the fuser roller. The fuser unit in this
equipment has 2 heater lamps (600W+600W) and each of them has different functions. One has a
coil wound up on its center and this part generates heat. The other one has coils wound up on its
both ends and these parts generate heat. The one with a coil on its center is called the center heater
lamp (LAMP1) and the one with coils on its both ends is called the side heater lamp (LAMP2).
The heater lamps are fixed on the inside of the fuser roller to heat it up. The heater lamps do not
rotate even when the fuser roller is rotating.

• Center thermistor (THMS1) / Side thermistor (THMS2)

This thermistor detects the temperature of the fuser roller to maintain it in a certain temperature
range between the lower limit causing the poor fusing and the upper limit causing the high
temperature offsetting. When the temperature of the fuser roller is lower than the preset
temperature, it turns ON the power supply to the heater lamps, and when it is higher than the preset
temperature, it cuts off the supply.
The center thermistor (THMS1) detects the temperature of the center part of the fuser roller, and the
side thermistor (THMS2) detects the temperature of one side of fuser roller and control the both
sides.

• Edge thermistor (THMS3)

Both the ends of the fuser roller may be overheated without heat absorption by the paper since it
does not pass through this area. The edge thermistor (THMS3) detects any temperature
abnormality of this area caused by overheating of the fuser roller. Therefore this thermistor is not
used for temperature control of the fuser roller.

• Fuser center thermostat (THMO1) / fuser front thermostat (THMO2)

The thermostats (THMO1/THMO2) cut off the power supply to the heater lamps (LAMP1/LAMP2) by
opening itself if the fuser roller becomes abnormally hot as a result of the problem such as
thermistor malfunction. The thermostats (THMO1/THMO2) for this equipment are used to prevent
abnormal operation. When the thermostats (THMO1/THMO2) detect any abnormality, these must be
replaced as well as the other damaged parts in the fuser unit.

• Separation finger
Five separation fingers are installed above the fuser roller, in order to separate paper adhering to
each roller.

• Exit roller
The exit roller transports the paper from the fuser unit to the inner tray. This roller is driven by the
exit motor.

• Exit motor (M6)

The exit motor is a stepping motor which drives the exit roller. This motor rotates the exit roller
reversely to perform a switchback when the paper is transported to the ADU.
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 56
3.14.4 Operation
The fuser roller is pressed by the pressure roller with the spring force. The fuser roller is rotated by the
main motor drive, and the pressure roller is rotated by the rotation of the fuser roller. In addition, the
heater lamps in the fuser roller do not structurally rotate.
2 heater lamps having different functions are installed; one applies heat to the center part of the fuser
roller and the other applies heat to both ends of the roller. In this equipment, the surface temperature of
the fuser roller at any paper size can be maintained by controlling the turning ON/OFF of the 2 heater
lamps. The thermistors control the temperature of the fuser roller and detect temperature abnormalities.
If the temperature becomes excessively high, the thermostat is opened to stop the power supply to the 3
heater lamps.
Then the paper transported to the fuser unit is held between the fuser roller and pressure roller, and
toner is fused on the paper with heat and pressure. After this, the separation fingers separate the paper
from the fuser roller. Then the paper is transported to the inner tray through the exit roller. The paper
transport status of the fuser/exit unit is detected by the exit sensor.

When the power is turned ON, the warming up of the fuser unit is started: the heater lamps are turned
ON. If the temperature of the fuser roller does not reach or exceeds a specified temperature within a
specified period of time, it is judged that the heater is abnormal. When the specified temperature has
been reached normally, the equipment goes into the ready state.
When printing is not performed within a specified period of time during ready, the equipment enters the
Auto Power Save Mode and turns the heater lamp. OFF or lowers the control temperature to save
power consumption. And if printing is not performed within another specified period of time after the
equipment has entered the Auto Power Save Mode, the equipment then enters the Auto Shut Off mode
to turn OFF the heater lamp.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 57
3.14.5 Heater Control Circuit

[ 1 ] Configuration
In this equipment, the surface temperature of the fuser roller is controlled by turning ON/OFF the 2
heater lamps (center and side) which have different heat-generating positions with the command from
the engine-CPU on the MAIN board.
The surface temperature of the fuser roller is detected by 3 thermistors (center, side and edge) and
then the information of the temperature is transmitted to the engine-CPU and each control circuit.
Based on the detected temperature, the engine-CPU transmits the control signal of the heater lamp to
the control circuit (TRC: Triac) of each heater lamp on the switching regulator via the temperature
control circuit. The power supply to the fuser roller is thus controlled by driving TRC. The temperature
control circuit detects the overheating of the fuser roller. In case that the surface temperature of the
fuser roller has exceeded the specified temperature, the temperature control circuit turns the heater
lamp OFF. If the temperature control circuit does not function for some reason and the fuser roller is
abnormally overheated as the result, a relay OFF circuit transmits a relay OFF signal to turn off the
relay, and to turn the power OFF forcibly.
If the temperature control circuit does not function for some reason and the fuser roller is abnormally
overheated as the result, a forcible power-OFF circuit transmits a reset signal to the power switch to
turn the power OFF forcibly. In addition, if these control circuits do not function with thermistor
abnormality or other reasons and the fuser roller is abnormally overheated as the result, 2 thermostats
(front and center ones in the fuser unit) shut off the power supply to the heater lamps to protect the
equipment.

Fuser unit Switching regulator (LVPS)

Fuser front Fuser center
thermostat thermostat
(THMO2) (THMO1)
L
Front Rear
Noise
Fuser roller filter N
Center heater lamp (LAMP1)
Center heater lamp
control circuit (TRC1)

Side heater lamp (LAMP2)

Side heater lamp Main switch
control circuit (TRC2) (SW1)

Edge Center Side

Center heater lamp
lamp control signal

thermistor thermistor thermistor Relay

(THMS3) (THMS1) (THMS2)
control signal
Side heater

A/D
converter
CPU ASIC

Temperature control circuit

AC line
DC line
Relay OFF signal
Relay OFF circuit
MAIN board (MAIN)

Fig. 3-37

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 58
[ 2 ] Temperature detection section
To maintain the surface temperature of the fuser roller at a certain level, 3 thermistors (center, side and
edge) detect the surface temperature of the fuser roller to turn ON/OFF and control 2 heater lamps
(center and side).

1. Fuser unit error status counter control

- To enhance the safety of the fusing section unit, SoC provides the following protection: When the
second [C411] error has occurred after one consecutive [C411] error, the heater lamp is not
turned ON and error [C412] is displayed immediately even if an operator turns OFF the power 3
and back ON. However, if the equipment goes into a ready state normally with the fuser unit error
status counter “1” or below, the counter is cleared to “0”.

- If the error codes [C411] to [C452] are displayed and still not cleared even though the thermistor,
thermostat and heater lamp have been repaired (and the power ON/OFF does not clear the
error), check the Setting Mode (08-2002) to set the fuser unit error status counter to “0”.

Remarks:
• If the heater lamp does not turn ON and the service call [C411] is displayed immediately after the power
is ON, confirm if the fuser unit error status counter is “2” or over. If it is “2” or over, be sure to check the
thermistor, thermostat and heater lamp. Reset the counter to “0” after repairing them, then turn ON the
power.

• If the fuser unit error status counter is “20” or over (e.g., 31), the data in the memory * or the memory
itself may possibly have been ruined due to causes such as leakage from the chargers. Check the bias,
high-voltage transformers and charge wires to see if any of them is defective, and also look through all
the data in the memory.

* 2523A/2523AD/2323AM2823AM: IC10, 2329A/2829A: IC11

• When the thermistors detect overheating, the SoC decides the error code and counter value of the fuser
unit error status, and turns OFF each output (the heater lamp, control panel display, motors and so on)
to protect the fuser unit.

Error code: [C449]

Counter value of the fuser unit error status: 08-2002

Thermistors continue detecting the abnormal temperature even after the error codes and
counter values are decided. Even if the power is turned ON immediately, the heater lamp is
automatically turned OFF again when the surface temperature of the fuser roller is still higher
than the abnormal temperature detected.
Wait until the surface temperature of the fuser roller is lowered enough, and turn ON the
power to check the counter value. After confirming that it is the fuser unit abnormality, correct
the abnormality and reset the counter value (08-2002) to “0” to start up the equipment
normally.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 59
2. Temperature detection configuration
Thermistor is a device whose resistance decreases as it detects a higher temperature. Thus its input
voltage to A/D converter changes and then SoC judges whether this change is normal or abnormal.
If one of the fuser roller thermistors is open circuited, the control circuit judges that the fuser roller
temperature is extremely low and keeps turning the heater lamp ON. As a result, the fuser roller
temperature rises, and possibly activates the thermostat which is a safety protection device. To
prevent this in advance, SoC works to detect whether each thermistor is open circuited or not.
Also, the thermistors constantly check the temperature of heater lamp to prevent it from excessive
heating by MAIN circuit abnormality or thermistor abnormality. The thermistors automatically turn
OFF the power when the temperature of heater lamp exceeds the specified temperature.

3. Abnormality detection by the thermistors

The following table shows the conditions judging the fuser roller temperature abnormality and
detecting timing.

Evaluation temperature
Error Check
Operating state Error counter Center Side Edge
code timing
thermistor thermistor thermistor
240ºC≤ - -
When power When
C449 9 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
ON power ON
- - 240ºC≤
240ºC≤ - -
Constantly
C449 19 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
detected
- - 240ºC≤
When 40ºC
1 40ºC≤ - - C40
detected C411
unconfirmed - 40ºC≤ - S40
40ºC≤ - - C40
C412 2 confirmed
- 40ºC≤ - S40
240ºC≤ - -
Constantly
C449 21 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
Power ON When 100ºC detected
- - 240ºC≤
Ready detected
100ºC≤ - - C100
C413 3 confirmed
- 100ºC≤ S100
240ºC≤ - -
Constantly
C449 22 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
detected
- - 240ºC≤
Ready
Center 70ºC -
Ready temperature
temperature C452 62 confirmed
Ready
detected Center 70ºC -
temperature C-Ready
Ready S-Ready
- -
temperature
C414 4 confirmed
Ready
- -
temperature

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 60
 Evaluation temperature
Error Check
Operating state Error counter Center Side Edge
code timing
thermistor thermistor thermistor
240ºC≤ - -
Constantly
C449 23 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
detected
- - 240ºC≤
Ready
40ºC≤ - -
Constantly
C447 7 confirmed - 40ºC≤ -
detected
- - 40ºC≤ 3
240ºC≤ - -
Constantly
C449 25 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
detected
- - 240ºC≤
40ºC≤ - -
Constantly
C447 24 confirmed - 40ºC≤ -
detected
- - 40ºC≤
Low
During temperature
During WAIT
printing - -
operations/ control 1
Self- min. or
diagnosis above Constantly
mode C415 5 confirmed
Low detected
temperature
WAIT
- -
control 1
min. or
above
240ºC≤ - -
During Constantly
C449 27 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
preheat detected
- - 240ºC≤
240ºC≤ - -
When Constantly
C449 29 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
jammed detected
- - 240ºC≤
240ºC≤ - -
During self- Constantly
C449 45 confirmed - 240ºC≤ -
diagnosis detected
- - 240ºC≤

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 61
3.15 Automatic Duplexing Unit

3.15.1 General Description

The Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU) of this equipment is a unit to transport the paper, which is
switchbacked at the paper exit section/ reverse section and transported reversed, to the registration
roller again.

[9] [5]

[1]
[10]

[11] [3]

[2]

[8]

[6]

Fig. 3-38

[1] Guide
[2] ADU sensor
[3] ADU upper transport roller
[5] ADU motor
[6] ADU lower transport roller
[8] ADU clutch
[9] Exit roller
[10] Paper exit section
[11] Fuser section

Notes:
ADU: Option for 2523A/2323AM

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 62
3.15.2 Composition

Automatic Duplexing Unit (ADU)

ADU clutch CLT4
ADU sensor S8
ADU upper transport roller
ADU lower transport roller
Exit motor M6 3

3.15.3 Functions
• Main motor (M3)
Drives the ADU upper transport roller and the ADU lower transport roller.

• ADU clutch (CLT4)

Transmits the drive from the main motor (M3) to the ADU lower transport roller.

• ADU sensor (S8)

Detects the paper transported in the ADU.

• ADU upper transport roller, ADU lower transport roller

Transports the paper inside the ADU.

• ADU fan (M7)

Cooling down the process unit and the toner cartridge.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 63
3.15.4 Drive of ADU
When the main motor (M3) rotates in the direction A and the ADU clutch (CLT4) is turned ON, the ADU
upper transport roller and the ADU lower transport roller are rotated with the drive of the gears and the
belt.

[3]
[1]

[4]

[2]

Fig. 3-39

[1] ADU upper transport roller

[2] ADU lower transport roller
[3] ADU clutch (CLT4)
[4] Main motor (M3)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 64
3.15.5 Description of Operations
The back side printing (recording data of the back side of paper) is performed first by selecting duplex
printing mode and pressing the [START] button.
When the paper passed the exit sensor, the exit roller switchbacks to transport the paper into the ADU.

The switchbacked paper is transported with acceleration. The transportation decelerates in front of the
ADU sensor. The front side printing (recording data of the front side of paper) is performed at the
registration section. The paper passes through the exit gate again and is transported to the inner tray to
complete duplex printing. 3

There are two methods of judging a paper jam: (1) whether the ADU sensor is turned ON or not in a
specified period of time after the switchback to the ADU started (E510). (2) whether the registration
sensor is turned ON or not in a specified period of time after the paper feeding from the ADU to the
equipment (E110).

If the ADU is opened during duplex printing, the ADU motor and ADU clutch are stopped, namely, ADU
open jam occurs (E430).

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 65
3.16 Power Supply Unit

3.16.1 Composition
The power supply unit consists of the AC filter, insulation type DC output circuit and heater lamp control
circuit.

• AC filter
Eliminates noise from the outside and prevents the noise generated by the equipment from leaking
to the outside.

• DC output circuits
Converts AC voltage input from outside to DC voltage and supplies it to each electric part. The DC
voltage is divided into the following two lines.

a. Power switch line: Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process.
Two kinds of voltage (+24VS, +24VA) are output when the power switch of the equipment is turned
ON.

b. Door switch line: Power supply used in the entire equipment during image forming process, being
supplied via the interlock switch. One kind of voltage (+24VD) is output only when the power switch
of the equipment is turned ON and two doors (toner supply cover and right cover) are closed.
+5VD is generated for MAIN board.

• Heater lamp control circuit

TRC (Triac) is driven by the heater control signal from the MAIN board and then AC power is
supplied to each heater lamp in the fuser unit.

Notes:
The power supply unit does not supply the power to the damp heater. The power is supplied to
the damp heater from the FUS board. The harness from the inlet is connected to the FUS board.
The power is supplied to the FUS board via this harness.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 66
3.16.2 Operation of DC Output Circuits
• Starting line output
When the power switch of the equipment is turned ON, voltage is applied to all the lines. However,
for the door switch system, voltage is applied only when two doors, the toner supply cover and the
right cover, are closed.

• Stopping line output

When the main switch of the equipment is turned OFF, the PWR-DN signal is outputted after the
instantaneous outage insurance time elapses and then the supply of each voltage stops. 3
To prevent this, the supply of these voltages stops after the PWR-DN signal is output and the
minimum retaining time elapses.

• Output protection
Each output system includes an overcurrent and overvoltage protection circuits, fuses and internal
protection circuits. This system is to prevent defective issues (such as damage to a secondary
circuit or malfunction) which may be caused by an overcurrent due to a short circuit or an
overvoltage due to a short circuit between different voltages. If the protection circuit is activated
(except in the case the fuse is blown out), remove the causes such as the short circuiting. Turn ON
the power again to clear the overcurrent protection.

• Recovering from super sleep mode (normal starting)

When the [ENERGY SAVER] button on the control panel is pressed during the super sleep mode, a
super sleep mode shifting/recovering signal (SYS-EN) is output from the MAIN board and then
voltage starts being supplied to all the lines, if no error was detected.

• Shifting to super sleep mode (normal stopping)

When the [ENERGY SAVER] button on the control panel is being pressed for more than one
second, a super sleep mode shifting/recovering signal (SYS-EN) is output from the MAIN board
after the initialization is finished and then all lines for the output voltage except +5VS are closed.

The Super sleep mode is disabled under the following conditions:

When operation is being performed in the self-diagnosis mode (Disabled until the power switch is
turned OFF)

• State of the power supply

- Power OFF
The power switch of the equipment is turned OFF. Since DC voltage is not supplied to each
board, the equipment is not operable.

- Normal state (including Energy saving mode)

The power switch of the equipment is turned ON and DC voltage is supplied to each board.
When the cover of the equipment is closed, 24V DC voltage is supplied and the equipment
enters into the ready/printing state.

- Sleep mode
Since +24VS and +24VA DC voltage is supplied to the MAIN board and +24VD DC voltage is not
supplied, the machine enters the power saving mode.

- Super Sleep mode

Only +5VS DC voltage is outputted from the power supply unit and the [ENERGY SAVER] button
is monitored and turned on. The machine is in the sleep state at this time.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 67
3.16.3 Output Channel
The outputs below are not linked with the door switch.

+24V

+24VS : CN107 Pin 1

Output to the MAIN board
+24VA : CN107 Pin 4
Output to the MAIN board
+24VD : CN107 Pin 8
Output to the MAIN board
+24VD : CN107 Pin 9
Output to the MAIN board

The outputs below are linked with the door switch.

+24V

+24VD-OUT : CN109 Pin 1

Output to the MAIN board
+24VD-IN : CN109 Pin 3
Output to the MAIN board

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

OUTLINE OF THE MACHINE
3 - 68
4. DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT

4.1 Disassembly and Replacement of Covers

Notes:
Be careful of the torque when tightening self-tapping screws. Also, do not use a power
screwdriver.

Fig. 4-1

4.1.1 Left cover

(1) Remove 2 screws and take off the left cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-2

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-1
4.1.2 Inner tray

(1) Take off the left cover.

 P. 4-1 “4.1.1 Left cover”
(2) Take off the inner tray [1].

[1]

1
2

Fig. 4-3

Notes:
Raise 2 exit levers and install the inner tray.

Fig. 4-4

4.1.3 Right front cover

(1) Take off the drawer.

(2) Open the toner supply cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-5

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-2
 (3) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-6

(4) Open the right cover [2].

(5) Release 3 latches and then take off the right front cover [3].

[2]

Fig. 4-7

[3]

Fig. 4-8

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-3
4.1.4 Left front cover

(1) Take off the right front cover.

 P. 4-2 “4.1.3 Right front cover”
(2) Take off the inner tray.
 P. 4-2 “4.1.2 Inner tray”
(3) Remove 5 screws and then take off the left front cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-9

4.1.5 Toner supply cover

(1) Take off the right front cover.

 P. 4-2 “4.1.3 Right front cover”
(2) Take off the left front cover.
 P. 4-4 “4.1.4 Left front cover”
(3) Take off the toner supply cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-10

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-4
4.1.6 Tray front cover

(1) Take off the inner tray.

 P. 4-2 “4.1.2 Inner tray”
(2) Take off the right front cover.
 P. 4-2 “4.1.3 Right front cover”
(3) Take off the tray front cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-11

4.1.7 Tray rear cover

(1) Take off the inner tray.

 P. 4-2 “4.1.2 Inner tray”
(2) Take off the tray rear cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-12

Notes:
When installing the tray rear cover, hook the hole of the tray rear cover on the hook of the frame.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-5
4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>

(1) Remove 3 screws and take off the rear cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-13

Notes:
When attaching the rear cover, be sure to insert the two hooks on its right side before tightening
the screws.

4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>

(1) Remove 1 screw and take off the connector cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-14

(2) Disconnect 1 connector.

Fig. 4-15

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-6
 (3) Remove 3 screws and take off the rear cover [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-16

Notes:
When attaching the rear cover, be sure to insert the two hooks on its right side before tightening
the screws.

4.1.10 PS-FAN (M8) <NAD/TWD Only>

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Release 2 clamps [1].
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the fan guard [2] and the PS-FAN [3].

[2]

[3]

[1]

[1]
Fig. 4-17

Notes:
When the PS-FAN is replaced, remove 2 washers and peel off 2 pieces of the double-sided tape.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-7
4.1.11 Right rear cover

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the right rear cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-18

4.1.12 Right lower cover

(1) Pull the drawer.

(2) Release 2 latches and then take off the right lower cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-19

4.1.13 Right cover

(1) Take off the right lower cover.

 P. 4-8 “4.1.12 Right lower cover”
(2) Take off the rear cover.
 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(3) Take off the right rear cover.
 P. 4-8 “4.1.11 Right rear cover”

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-8
 (4) Disconnect 2 connectors [1].
Remove 1 screw [2] and disconnect the ground wire.

[1]

[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-20

(5) Disconnect 1 connector [1].

Remove 1 screw [2] and disconnect the ground wire.
2523A/2323AM MJD only

[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-21

(6) Remove the shaft [3] and take off the right cover [4].

[4]

[3]

Fig. 4-22

Notes:
Pull out a shaft while supporting the right cover by hand so that it will not fall.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4-9
4.1.14 Top cover

(1) Take off the original cover or RADF.

(2) Open the right cover.
(3) Take off the control panel unit.
 P. 4-11 “4.2.1 Control panel unit”
(4) Remove 7 screws and take off the top cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-23

Remarks:
• The original glass is attached to the top cover.
• Grease is applied to the back side of the original glass. So, when the top cover is taken off, be careful
not to let the grease adhere to other portions or not to wipe it off mistakenly.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 10
4.2 Control Panel

4.2.1 Control panel unit

(1) Insert a flathead screwdriver. Release the latch and remove the dummy cover [1] while sliding it
to the right side of the equipment.

[1]

Fig. 4-24

(2) Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-25

(3) Release the 5 latches and take off the control panel unit [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-26

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 11
 (4) Disconnect 1 connector [3] on the bottom of the control panel unit.

[3]

Fig. 4-27

4.2.2 Control panel PC board (HPNL)

(1) Take off the control panel unit.

 P. 4-11 “4.2.1 Control panel unit”
(2) Remove 6 screws and take off the control panel PC board [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-28

4.2.3 LED panel

(1) Take off the control panel PC board.

 P. 4-12 “4.2.2 Control panel PC board (HPNL)”
(2) Release 2 latches and take off the LED panel cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-29

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 12
 (3) Disconnect 2 connectors and release 2 latches. Take off the LED panel [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-30

4.2.4 USB cable

(1) Take off the control panel unit.

 P. 4-11 “4.2.1 Control panel unit”
(2) Remove the top cover.
 P. 4-10 “4.1.14 Top cover”
(3) Take off the rear cover.
 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(4) Remove the USB cable [2] from the MAIN board [1].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-31

(5) Remove 4 screws, lift the scanner unit [3] a little and then remove the USB cable [4].

[3]

[4]

Fig. 4-32

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 13
 (6) Release the latch [5] and remove the USB cable [7] from the cable hook [6].

[5]

[6] [7]

Fig. 4-33

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 14
4.3 Scanner

4.3.1 Original glass

The original glass is pasted on the top cover.

 P. 4-10 “4.1.14 Top cover”

4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor unit (CIS)

(1) Take off the top cover. 4

 P. 4-10 “4.1.14 Top cover”
(2) Move the CIS unit to the center position.

Fig. 4-34

(3) Lift up the CIS unit [1], disconnect 1 connector [2] on the bottom of the CIS unit, and then take off
the CIS unit.

[2]
[1]

[4]

[3]

Fig. 4-35

Notes:
• Take care not to contaminate the CIS unit surface with fingerprints, dust or such.
• Do not place the removed CIS unit upside down.
• Be sure to perform “05-3219” with the original cover or the RADF closed after replacing the CIS unit.
• Be sure to unlock the connector before disconnecting it.
• If the springs come off, attach the black one [3] to the front side and the brown one [4] to the rear side.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 15
 • When installing the CIS unit, be sure to pass the flat harness through the harness holder of the CIS
case.

Fig. 4-36

• After installing the CIS unit, move it to the left edge of the equipment.

Fig. 4-37

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 16
4.3.3 CIS case

(1) Take off the CIS unit.

 P. 4-15 “4.3.2 Contact Image Sensor unit (CIS)”
(2) Remove the tension spring [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-38

(3) Take off 1 pulley [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-39

Notes:
When replacing the pulley, apply Molykote (EM-30L) between the tensioner and pulley shaft.

(4) Take off the CIS case [3].

Notes:
If the springs come off, attach the black one [5] to the front side and the brown one [6] to the rear
side.

[6]

[3]

[5]

Fig. 4-40

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 17
 (5) Remove the CIS unit drive belt [4].

[4]

Fig. 4-41

4.3.4 Scan motor (M1)

(1) Take off the rear cover.
 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1] from the MAIN board (CN6).

[1]

Fig. 4-42

(3) Take off the CIS case.

 P. 4-17 “4.3.3 CIS case”
(4) Remove the clip [2] and take off the gears [3].

[2]

[3]

Fig. 4-43

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 18
 (5) Remove 2 screws and take off the motor bracket [4].

[4]

Fig. 4-44

(6) Release the harness from the harness guide, and take off the scan motor [5].

[5]

Fig. 4-45

Notes:
• When installing the scan motor, tighten the bracket fixing screw and the ground wire together.

Fig. 4-46

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 19
 • When installing the scan motor, wire the harness as shown in the figure.

Fig. 4-47

Fig. 4-48

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 20
4.3.5 Platen sensor (S7) <2329A/2829A>

(1) Remove the top cover.

 P. 4-10 “4.1.14 Top cover”
(2) Remove actuator [1] and remove 1 connector [2].

[2]

4
[1]

Fig. 4-49

(3) Release 2 latches and then remove the platen sensor [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-50

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 21
4.3.6 Automatic original detection sensor-1 (S9) <2329A/2829A> /
Automatic original detection sensor-2 (S10) <2329A/2829A NAD
only>

(1) Take off the original glass.

 P. 4-15 “4.3.1 Original glass”
(2) Remove the 1 connector [1], release 2 latches and the automatic original detection sensor-1 (S9)
[2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-51

(3) Remove the 1 connector [3], release 2 latches and the automatic original detection sensor-2
(S10) [4].

[4]

[3]

Fig. 4-52

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 22
4.4 Writing Section

4.4.1 Laser optical unit

(1) Take off the inner tray.

 P. 4-2 “4.1.2 Inner tray”
(2) Remove the ADU fan duct unit.
 P. 4-97 “4.9.6 ADU fan duct unit”
Notes:
Only when having equipped with ADU.
4
(3) Disconnect 2 connectors [1].

[1]

[1]

Fig. 4-53

Notes:
• Connect the flat harness to the LDRS board with its electrode side inside the equipment.
• Pull out the connector for the polygonal motor slantwise to the front side of the equipment. Be careful, if
you forcefully pull it out to the rear side of the equipment, you may break it.

Fig. 4-54

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 23
 (4) Remove 2 screws and raise the laser optical unit [2] to take it off.

[2]

Fig. 4-55

Notes:
• Be careful not to touch the LDRS board of the laser optical unit.
• Be careful not to subject the laser optical unit to shock or vibration because it is a precise apparatus.
• Place the removed laser optical unit in such a way that it does not become load to the polygonal motor.
• Do not disassemble the laser optical unit in the field because it is precisely adjusted and very sensitive
to dust and stain.
• It is difficult to remove dirt or scratches from the internal parts of the laser unit. Be careful not to let dirt
into the laser unit or to touch it through the laser output aperture [3].
• Do not allow dirt or foreign objects to touch the HSYNC mirror (interior) [4].
• Do not touch the HSYNC mirror (interior) [4] with your hand. If you have touched, clean it with a dry and
non-dirty cloth.

[3]

[4]

Fig. 4-56

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 24
4.5 Drive System

4.5.1 Main motor (M3)

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1] and remove 2 screws. Take off the main motor [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-57

4.5.2 Toner motor (M2)

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Remove the 1 screw and disconnect 1 connector [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-58

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 25
 (3) Take off the toner motor [2] with the bracket, and then remove 1 bushing [3] and 1 gear [4].

[2]
[4]

[3]

Fig. 4-59

(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the toner motor [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-60

Notes:
Pay attention to the size (length) of the screws. If incorrect ones are used, the motor could be
damaged.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 26
4.5.3 Paper exit unit

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
(2) Remove the 2 screws (M3 x 10) and then remove the paper exit unit [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-61

Notes:
Pay attention to the size (length) of the screws. If incorrect ones are used, the screw hole of
frame could be damaged.

4.5.4 Upper drive unit

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Take off the exit drive unit.
 P. 4-27 “4.5.3 Paper exit unit”
(3) Remove 3 screws (M3 x 10) and take off the upper drive unit [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-62

Notes:
Pay attention to the size (length) of the screws. If incorrect ones are used, the screw hole of
frame could be damaged.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 27
4.5.5 Lower drive unit
(1) Take off the process unit.
 P. 4-47 “4.7.1 Process unit”
(2) Take off the rear cover.
 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(3) Take off the drawer feed clutch.
 P. 4-38 “4.6.9 Drawer feed clutch (CLT2)”
(4) Take off the registration roller clutch.
 P. 4-39 “4.6.10 Registration roller clutch (CLT1)”
(5) Take off the main motor.
 P. 4-25 “4.5.1 Main motor (M3)”
(6) Remove 4 screws (M3 x 10) and take off the lower drive unit [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-63

Notes:
Pay attention to the size (length) of the screws. If incorrect ones are used, the screw hole of
frame could be damaged.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 28
4.6 Paper Feeding System

4.6.1 Bypass tray

(1) Take off the right cover.

 P. 4-8 “4.1.13 Right cover”
(2) Slide the bypass sub-tray [1] and then take off the screw.
[1]

Fig. 4-64

(3) Open the bypass tray, twist the stopper [2] (front) 90 degrees and then remove it.

[2]

Fig. 4-65

(4) Remove the 1 screw and then remove the link arm [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-66

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 29
 (5) Remove the bypass tray [4] in a downward slanting direction.

[4]

Fig. 4-67

4.6.2 Bypass feed clutch (CLT3)

(1) Take off the right cover.

 P. 4-8 “4.1.13 Right cover”
(2) Remove 2 screws.
When attaching the cover, wire the harness along the guides [6] as shown in the figure.

[6]

Fig. 4-68

Remarks:
If the ADU is attached, remove 3 screws.

[6]

Fig. 4-69

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 30
 (3) Remove the cover [1]. When the cover is removed, the bushing and the plate can be taken
together.

[1]

Fig. 4-70

(4) Remove the bypass feed clutch [4] and disconnect 1 connector [5].

[4]

[5]

Fig. 4-71

Notes:
When attaching the bypass clutch, align it to the clutch stopper [7].

[7]

Fig. 4-72

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 31
4.6.3 Duct unit

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) While releasing 2 latches, take off the duct unit [1].

1
2

1
[1]

Fig. 4-73

(3) Disconnect 1 connector [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-74

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 32
4.6.4 Lower bypass feed guide

(1) Take off the right cover.

 P. 4-8 “4.1.13 Right cover”
(2) Take off the bypass feed clutch.
 P. 4-30 “4.6.2 Bypass feed clutch (CLT3)”
(3) Remove 4 screws. Release 2 latches and remove the lower bypass feed guide [1]. When the
lower bypass feed guide is removed, the bypass separation pad [2] can be taken together.

[1]

[2]
Fig. 4-75

Notes:

When installing the separation pad [2], align the spring to the position indicated in the figure.

[1]
[2]

Fig. 4-76

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 33
 Notes:
When installing the lower bypass feed guide [1], align the springs to the position indicated in the
figure. Moreover, be careful that the bypass separation pad [2] does not come off.

[1]

Fig. 4-77

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 34
4.6.5 Bypass feed roller

(1) Take off the right cover.

 P. 4-8 “4.1.13 Right cover”
(2) Take off the bypass feed clutch.
 P. 4-30 “4.6.2 Bypass feed clutch (CLT3)”
(3) Take off the Lower bypass feed guide.
 P. 4-33 “4.6.4 Lower bypass feed guide”
(4) Take off the bypass tray.
 P. 4-29 “4.6.1 Bypass tray”
(5) Remove 2 clips [1] and then slide the shaft [2] to the rear side.
4

[2] [1]

Fig. 4-78

(6) Remove 1 bushing [3], and then take off the bypass feed roller [4].

[3]

[4]

Fig. 4-79

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 35
 Notes:
When attaching the bypass feed roller, align the shaft pin [5] with the groove on the feed roller
and then clip it on with the clip.

[5]

Fig. 4-80

4.6.6 Bypass paper sensor (S6)

(1) Take off the bypass feed roller.

 P. 4-35 “4.6.5 Bypass feed roller”
(2) Release 3 latches, take off the bypass paper sensor [1], and disconnect the connector.

[1]

Fig. 4-81

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 36
4.6.7 Drawer feed roller

(1) Take off the drawer.

(2) Remove each 1 clip [1] on both front and rear side, and slide the shaft [2] to the rear side.

[1]

[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-82

(3) Remove 1 clip [3] and take off the drawer feed roller [4].

[3]
[4]

Fig. 4-83

4.6.8 Drawer separation pad

(1) Take off the drawer feed roller.

 P. 4-37 “4.6.7 Drawer feed roller”
(2) Release 2 latches [1] on the bottom of the drawer and take off the drawer separation pad [2].

[1] [2]

Fig. 4-84

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 37
4.6.9 Drawer feed clutch (CLT2)

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].
(3) Remove 1 clip [4].

[4]

[1]

Fig. 4-85

(4) Remove 1 screw, release 1 latch [5] and then take off the clutch cover [2].

[2]

[5]

Fig. 4-86

(5) Take off the drawer feed clutch [3].

Notes:
When installing the drawer feed clutch [3], engage the arm of the clutch with the rotation stopper
of the lower drive unit.

[3]

Fig. 4-87

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 38
4.6.10 Registration roller clutch (CLT1)

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-88

(3) Remove 1 clip [2] and take off the registration roller clutch [3].

[3]

[2]

Fig. 4-89

Notes:
When installing the registration roller clutch [3], engage the arm of the clutch with the rotation
stopper of the lower drive unit.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 39
4.6.11 Registration roller (metal)

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the process unit.
 P. 4-47 “4.7.1 Process unit”
(3) Take off the registration roller clutch.
 P. 4-39 “4.6.10 Registration roller clutch (CLT1)”
(4) Remove 1 clip [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-90

(5) Slide the registration roller (metal) [2] to the rear side, and take it off.

[2]

Fig. 4-91

Notes:
One bushing is attached to each front and rear sides of the registration roller (metal). Take care
not to drop the bushings while removing the registration roller (metal).

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 40
 (6) Remove 1 E-ring [3] and 1 gear [4].

[3]

[4] 4

Fig. 4-92

4.6.12 Registration roller (rubber)

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the duct unit.
 P. 4-32 “4.6.3 Duct unit”
(3) Remove 1 screw and the plate [1].
Release the rear side of the registration roller (rubber) and take it off while sliding it.

[2]

[1]

Fig. 4-93

(4) Remove 2 washers [3] and 1 gear [4].

[3]
[4]

Fig. 4-94

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 41
 Notes:
When installing the 2 washers [3], attach them to the positions shown in the figure.

[3]
[3]
[4]

Fig. 4-95

4.6.13 Registration sensor (S2)

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the duct unit.
 P. 4-32 “4.6.3 Duct unit”
(3) Take off the registration roller (metal).
 P. 4-40 “4.6.11 Registration roller (metal)”
(4) Remove 1 screw and then slide the registration guide [1] towards the rear and remove it.

[1]

Fig. 4-96

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 42
 Notes:
When installing the registration guide, insert the latch at the rear side into the damp heater
bracket [2], slide it to the front side, and then insert the two bosses into the damp heater bracket.

[2]

Fig. 4-97

(5) Remove the actuator [3] and the springs [4] and then release the 3 latches to remove the
registration sensor [5].
(6) Disconnect 1 connector [6].

[3]
[4]

[6]
[5]

Fig. 4-98

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 43
4.6.14 Paper empty sensor (S5)

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the drawer.
(3) Take off the duct unit.
 P. 4-32 “4.6.3 Duct unit”
(4) Take off the registration roller (metal)
 P. 4-40 “4.6.11 Registration roller (metal)”
(5) Remove 1 screw and then slide the registration guide [1] towards the rear and remove it.

[1]

Fig. 4-99

Notes:
When installing the registration guide, insert the latch at the rear side into the damp heater
bracket [2], slide it to the front side, and then insert the two bosses into the damp heater bracket.

[2]

Fig. 4-100

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 44
 (6) Remove 1 screw and then take off the damp heater unit or dummy plate [3] while sliding it to the
rear and lifting it down.

4
[3]

Fig. 4-101

(7) Turn over the damp heater unit or dummy plate.

(8) Disconnect 1 connector [4], release 3 latches. Take off paper empty sensor [5].

[5]

[4]

Fig. 4-102

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 45
4.6.15 Drawer detection switch (SW6)

(1) Remove the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Take out the drawer.
(3) Release 2 latches.

1 1

Fig. 4-103

(4) Remove the drawer detection switch [2] and disconnect the connector [1].

[2]
[1]

Fig. 4-104

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 46
4.7 Process Related Section

4.7.1 Process unit

Notes:
• Immediately after power OFF, the fuser unit entrance guide is very hot and can cause burns. Wait for it
to cool down before starting work.
• Make sure to perform “05-2390” and take off the process unit before the developer material is replaced.

(1) Pull out the toner cartridge.

(2) Open the right cover.
(3) Disconnect 1 connector [1]. 4

[1]

Fig. 4-105

Notes:
When holding the process unit, do not touch the conveyance guide of the developer unit.
Pushing the guide too strongly may damage the drum.

(4) Push the lever [2] and release the lock.

[2]

Fig. 4-106

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 47
 Notes:
Check the marked lines and push the lever to the position shown in the figure.

Fig. 4-107

(5) Holding the positions shown in the figure, pull out the process unit [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-108

Notes:
• Take care not to drop the process unit.
• Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface.
• Avoid direct light. Place the drum in a dark place immediately after taking off.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 48
4.7.2 Drum cleaner unit

(1) Take off the process unit.

( P. 4-47 “4.7.1 Process unit”).
(2) Release 1 latch and remove the front side stopper [1].
(3) Remove the rear side stopper [3] and the plate [2].

4
[1] [3]

[2]

Fig. 4-109

Notes:
When removing the front/rear stopper, make sure that the drum cleaner unit and developer unit
do not move from their positions as this may damage the drum. Remove the front/rear stopper
while holding the drum cleaner unit so that it does not move.

(4) Take off the drum cleaner unit [4].

[4]

Fig. 4-110

Notes:
• Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface.
• Avoid direct light. Place the drum in a dark place immediately after taking off.
• Place the removed drum cleaner unit facing the direction shown in the figure.
• Care must be taken when the drum cleaner unit is removed since toner may fall out.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 49
4.7.3 Drum

(1) Take off the drum cleaner unit.

 P. 4-49 “4.7.2 Drum cleaner unit”
(2) Pull out the drum shaft [1] and then take off the drum [2].

[2]

[3]

[1]

Fig. 4-111

Notes:
• Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface.
• Avoid direct light. Place the drum in a dark place immediately after taking off.
• Be careful not to touch or scratch the edge of the cleaning blade.
• When reinstalling the drum, eject the toner inside the drum cleaner unit first.
• Be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum when it is replaced or it is
installed/removed from the cleaner.
• When installing a new drum, apply conductive grease (Floil GE-334C) to the groove [3] of the drum
shaft. After installing the drum and drum shaft, wipe off any grease on the parts of the drum shaft
protruding outside (front and rear edges).

Fig. 4-112

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 50
4.7.4 Drum cleaning blade

(1) Take off the drum.

 P. 4-50 “4.7.3 Drum”
(2) Remove 2 screws and then take off the drum cleaning blade [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-113

Notes:
• Be careful not to touch or scratch the edge of the drum cleaning blade.
• Be sure to apply patting powder (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum when the drum cleaning
blade is replaced or it is cleaned.

4.7.5 Recovery Blade

(1) Take off the drum cleaner unit.

 P. 4-49 “4.7.2 Drum cleaner unit”
(2) Take off the Drum.
 P. 4-50 “4.7.3 Drum”
(3) Peel off the recovery blade [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-114

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 51
 Notes:
• When attaching the recovery blade, clean the surface of the frame first. Be careful not to deform the
blade.
• When attaching the recovery blade, use the stepped area [2] at the rear of the cleaner unit as the
reference for pasting the recovery blade in the front/ rear directions. Push the recovery blade forward to
this stepped area and paste it. As for the left/ right directions, make sure that the recovery blade does
not project out to the drum separation finger side.

[2]

Fig. 4-115

• Press the stuck part with your finger to attach the blade securely.

4.7.6 Drum separation finger

(1) Take off the drum.

 P. 4-50 “4.7.3 Drum”
(2) Take off 2 drum separation fingers [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-116

Notes:
• When replacing the drum separation fingers, make sure that the drum has been taken off first since the
fingers may scratch the drum surface.
• When the drum separation fingers have been replaced, check if the pressure movement is normal by
moving them with your hands.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 52
4.7.7 Main charger

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the process unit.
 P. 4-47 “4.7.1 Process unit”
(3) Holding (A) of the main charger [1], slide it to the front, and then pull out the rear side.
(4) After removing the rear side first, tilt the main charger, and pull out the cleaning rod from the front
side.

A A

A A

1 [1]

Fig. 4-117

Notes:
• When installing/removing the main charger, do not touch the fuser unit as it may be hot.
• When installing/removing the main charger, do not touch the mesh area of the grid.
• When installing, insert the main charger cleaner into the hole at the front of the frame first.

Fig. 4-118

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 53
4.7.8 Main charger grid

(1) Take off the main charger.

 P. 4-53 “4.7.7 Main charger”
(2) Release the latch of the tensioner and take off the main charger grid [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-119

Notes:
Do not touch the mesh area of the grid.

4.7.9 Main charger cleaner

(1) Take off the main charger.

 P. 4-53 “4.7.7 Main charger”
(2) Release the latch of the cleaning shaft [1]. Then rotate the shaft at 90º to take it off.

[1]

Fig. 4-120

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 54
4.7.10 Needle electrode

(1) Take off the main charger.

 P. 4-53 “4.7.7 Main charger”
(2) Take off the main charger cleaner.
 P. 4-54 “4.7.9 Main charger cleaner”
(3) Release the tensioner [1] and remove 2 springs [2]. Take off the needle electrode [3].

[1]
[2]
[3] 4

Fig. 4-121

Notes:
• Do not touch the needle electrode directly with bare hands.
• Make sure not to hold or bend the needle electrode.

4.7.11 Transfer roller

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Remove the gear [1], 2 bushings [2] and the transfer roller [3].

[1]

[3]
[2]

[2]

Fig. 4-122

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 55
4.7.12 Separation needle

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the duct unit.
 P. 4-32 “4.6.3 Duct unit”
(3) Take off the registration roller (rubber).
 P. 4-41 “4.6.12 Registration roller (rubber)”
(4) Take off the transfer roller unit [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-123

(5) Peel off the separation needle protection sheet [2].

(6) Take off the separation needle [3], making sure you do not deform it.

[3]

[2]

Fig. 4-124

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 56
4.7.13 Ozone filter

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the duct unit.
 P. 4-32 “4.6.3 Duct unit”
(3) Take off the ozone filter [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-125

4.7.14 Suction fun (M5)

(1) Open the right cover.

(2) Take off the duct unit.
 P. 4-32 “4.6.3 Duct unit”
(3) Release the harness from the harness guide.
(4) Release 1 latch [1] and then take off the suction fun [2].

[2] [1]

Fig. 4-126

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 57
4.7.15 Temperature/humidity sensor (S1)

(1) Take off the left cover.

 P. 4-1 “4.1.1 Left cover”
(2) While pressing the lever [1], take off the temperature/humidity sensor [2] with the holder.

[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-127

(3) Disconnect 1 connector [3] and 2 latches [4] and take off the temperature/humidity sensor [5].

[4]
[5]

[3]

Fig. 4-128

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 58
4.7.16 Developer unit
(1) Take off the process unit.
 P. 4-47 “4.7.1 Process unit”
(2) Take out the drum cleaner unit [1] from the process unit so that only the developer unit [2] will be
left in it.
 P. 4-49 “4.7.2 Drum cleaner unit”
Notes:
• Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface.
• Avoid direct light. Place the drum in a dark place immediately after taking off.
• Place the removed drum cleaner unit facing the direction shown in the figure.

[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-129

4.7.17 Removing developer material

(1) Take off the developer unit.

 P. 4-59 “4.7.16 Developer unit”
(2) Release 2 latches and then take off the developer unit upper cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-130

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 59
 Notes:
• When installing the developer unit upper cover, make sure that the side seal comes between the
developer unit upper cover and rubber seal on the cover.

[2]

[3]

[1]

Fig. 4-131

[1] Side seal

[2] Developer unit upper cover
[3] Rubber seal

• Do not touch the developer sleeve directly with bare hands.

(3) Remove the developer material from rear side.

Fig. 4-132

Notes:
When removing the developer material, be careful not to drop the developer material on the
gears of the developer unit.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 60
4.7.18 Filling developer unit with developer material

(1) Rotate the gear on the rear side of the developer unit to the direction of the arrow while filling the
developer unit with the developer material. Spread out the developer material over the developer
sleeve.

Fig. 4-133

Remarks:
Filling the developer material by replacing with the cartridge is also available.

4.7.19 Auto-toner sensor (S4)

(1) Remove the developer material.

 P. 4-59 “4.7.17 Removing developer material”
(2) Place the developer unit upside down.
Release the harness from the harness guide and then take off the auto-toner sensor [1] by
rotating it.

[1]

Fig. 4-134

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 61
4.7.20 Doctor blade

(1) Remove the developer material.

 P. 4-59 “4.7.17 Removing developer material”
(2) Remove 1 spring [1] and 1 screw [2], and then take off the doctor blade [3].

[1] [2]

[3]

Fig. 4-135

4.7.21 Mixer

(1) Remove the developer material.

 P. 4-59 “4.7.17 Removing developer material”
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the polarity adjustment lever [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-136

Notes:
Make a note of the position where the polarity adjustment lever is pointing. (Mark the position if
needed.) When reassembling, match the polarity adjustment lever with the previously marked
position on the scale.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 62
 (3) Release 1 latch and take off the recovered toner supply unit [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-137

(4) Release 2 latches and take off the holder [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-138

(5) Take off 2 mixers [4].

[4]

Fig. 4-139

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 63
 (6) Remove 2 oil seals [5] from the holder.
(Replacement of Oil Seal:  P. 4-65 “4.7.22 Replacement of oil seal”)

[5]

Fig. 4-140

(7) Remove 2 screws and take off the gear box [6].
Remove 3 gears [7].

[7]

[7]

[6]

Fig. 4-141

(8) Remove 2 bushings [8] and 2 oil seals [9].

(Replacement of Oil Seal:  P. 4-65 “4.7.22 Replacement of oil seal”)

[9]

[9]
[8]

Fig. 4-142

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 64
4.7.22 Replacement of oil seal

(1) Insert a fine screwdriver into the depression of the oil seal to take it out.
(2) Push in a new oil seal parallel to the frame or bushing. (Refer to Fig. 4-143.)
(3) Apply the grease (Alvania No.2; amount of 2 rice grains) on entire surface of the oil seal evenly.

Inside Outside

4
Grease

Oil seal

Fig. 4-143

Notes:
Wipe off the excessive grease.

4.7.23 Developer sleeve

(1) Remove the developer material.

 P. 4-59 “4.7.17 Removing developer material”
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the polarity adjustment lever [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-144

Notes:
Make a note of the position where the polarity adjustment lever is pointing. (Mark the position if
needed.) When reassembling, match the polarity adjustment lever with the previously marked
position on the scale.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 65
 (3) Release 1 latch and take off the recovered toner supply unit [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-145

(4) Release 2 latches and take off the holder [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-146

(5) Remove the leaf spring [4].

[4]

Fig. 4-147

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 66
 (6) Remove 2 screws and take off the gear box [5].
Remove 1 gear [6].

[6]
4

[5]

Fig. 4-148

(7) Remove 2 gears [7].

[7]

[7]

Fig. 4-149

(8) Remove 1 bushing [8] on the front side.

[8]

Fig. 4-150

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 67
 (9) Remove 1 spring [9] and 1 screw [10], and take off the doctor blade [11].

[9] [10]

[11]

Fig. 4-151

(10) Take off the gear [12] on the rear side and then take off the developer sleeve [13].

[13]

[12]

Fig. 4-152

4.7.24 Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF)

(1) Take off the toner motor.

 P. 4-25 “4.5.2 Toner motor (M2)”
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1].
(3) Release latches and take off the toner cartridge interface PC board [2].

[1]

[2]

Fig. 4-153

Notes:
When installing be careful not to bend the leaf spring.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 68
4.7.25 Developer cartridge detection switch (SW5)

(1) Remove the ADU fan duct unit.

 P. 4-97 “4.9.6 ADU fan duct unit”
(2) Remove the toner motor.
 P. 4-25 “4.5.2 Toner motor (M2)”
(3) Release 1 clamp [1] and then the harness.
(4) Disconnect 1 connector [2] and release 2 latches.

[1]
4

[2]

Fig. 4-154

(5) Take off the developer cartridge detection switch [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-155

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 69
4.8 Fuser/Exit Unit
Notes:
• Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable during service.
• When disassembling the fuser unit or replacing any parts in it, be sure that the wire harness is correctly
set, and also be careful not to catch it between other parts.
a. Route the harnesses of the thermostat so that they are hooked on the frame as shown below.
b. Route the harnesses of the thermistor so that they are hooked on the housing as shown below.

Fig. 4-156

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 70
 c. Route the AC harnesses so that they are hooked on the housing as shown below.

c AC harnesses AC harnesses

Fig. 4-157

d. When installing the cover of the fuser unit, make sure that the connector (harness) is not caught.
e. Route the harnesses of the fuser unit so that they are hooked on the frame as shown below.

Fig. 4-158

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 71
 • The fuser guide unit [1] is attached to the fuser unit other than for 2523A, 2323AM MJD.

[1]

Fig. 4-159

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 72
4.8.1 Fuser unit
Notes:
As the fuser unit is hot, power OFF and make sure that the fuser unit has cooled down
sufficiently before removing.
If removing it while still hot, use gloves.

(1) Take off the right rear cover.

 P. 4-8 “4.1.11 Right rear cover”
(2) Disconnect 3 connectors [1] and release the harness from the harness guide.

[1]

Fig. 4-160

(3) Remove 2 screws.

M3 x 6 M3 x 10

Fig. 4-161

Notes:
Note that the front side and rear side screws are different from each other. Install the screws in
their proper locations.
Front side: Shoulder screw M3 x 6
Rear side: M3 x 10

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 73
 (4) Take off the fuser unit [2].
Notes:
• Take note that the fuser unit is hot. Particularly, the metal sheet of the entrance guide below the fuser
unit is hot.
• When removing the fuser unit, hold the positions shown in the figure.

[2]

Fig. 4-162

• When installing the fuser unit, hold the positions shown in the figure.

Fig. 4-163

4.8.2 Exit sensor (S3)

(1) Take off the fuser unit.

 P. 4-73 “4.8.1 Fuser unit”
(2) Open the fuser unit guide [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-164

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 74
 (3) Remove 1 screw and take off the guide [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-165

(4) Take off the actuator [3] and spring [4].

[4]

[3]

Fig. 4-166

Notes:
When installing the actuator, hook the spring as shown in the figure.

Fig. 4-167

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 75
 (5) Release 3 latches and take off the exit sensor [5].
(6) Disconnect the connector.

[5]

Fig. 4-168

4.8.3 Fuser unit cover/Fuser unit guide

(1) Take off the fuser unit.

 P. 4-73 “4.8.1 Fuser unit”
(2) Place the fuser unit upside down.
Remove 1 screw and release the latch, take off the bias plate [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-169

(3) Remove 2 screws and then take off entrance guide [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-170

Notes:
• When removing the entrance guide, be careful not to scratch the fuser roller and pressure roller with the
entrance guide edge.
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 76
 • When installing the entrance guide, make sure that the part of the entrance guide shown in the figure is
outside the fuser unit cover.

Fig. 4-171

• Use the screw hole shown in the figure to attach the entrance guide.

Fig. 4-172

(4) Release 1 clamp [3] and remove the harness.

[3]

Fig. 4-173

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 77
 (5) Release 3 clamps [4] and remove the harness.

[4]

[4]

Fig. 4-174

(6) Place the fuser unit facing the original direction, and remove the 2 screws.

Fig. 4-175

(7) Release 2 latches and then take off the fuser unit cover [5] and the fuser unit guide [6].

[5]
[6]

Fig. 4-176

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 78
4.8.4 Center heater lamp (LAMP1)

(1) Take off the fuser unit cover/fuser unit guide

 P. 4-76 “4.8.3 Fuser unit cover/Fuser unit guide”
(2) Disconnect 2 faston terminals [1].

M3x8

[1]

[1]

M3x5

Fig. 4-177

Notes:
Do not remove the faston terminal by force, but pull it out while pressing its lock.

Fig. 4-178

(3) Remove 2 screws.

Front side: M3x5
Rear side: M3x8

M3x5 M3x8

Fig. 4-179

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 79
 (4) Take off the center heater lamp [2] from the rear side.

[2]

Fig. 4-180

Notes:
• When removing the center heater lamp, hold the center heater lamp terminals.
• Be careful that the glass surface of the center heater lamp has no fingerprints or dirt on it.
• When installing the center heater lamp, face the side with the notch on the terminal to the rear side.

Rear side

Fig. 4-181

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 80
4.8.5 Side heater lamp (LAMP2)

(1) Remove the fuser cover fuser unit guide.

 P. 4-76 “4.8.3 Fuser unit cover/Fuser unit guide”
(2) Remove 2 installation screws.
Front side: M3x5
Rear side: M3x8

4
M3x8

M3x5

Fig. 4-182

(3) Remove the side heater lamp [2] from the rear.

[2]

Fig. 4-183

Notes:
• Hold the connector of the side heater lamp while you remove it.
• Be careful that the glass surface of the side heater lamp has no fingerprints or dirt on it.
• When attaching the heater lamp, align the plug with the notch of the dowel plate.

Front side

Fig. 4-184

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 81
4.8.6 Base unit

(1) Take off the Center heater lamp.

 P. 4-79 “4.8.4 Center heater lamp (LAMP1)”
(2) Take off the Side heater lamp.
 P. 4-81 “4.8.5 Side heater lamp (LAMP2)”
(3) Take off the center thermistor, side thermistor, and edge thermistor.
 P. 4-88 “4.8.11 Center thermistor (THMS1) / Side thermistor (THMS2) / Edge thermistor
(THMS3)”
(4) Place the fuser unit upside down.
Remove 2 screws.

Fig. 4-185

(5) Place the fuser unit facing the original direction, and then take off the base unit [1] from the front
side.

[1]

Fig. 4-186

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 82
4.8.7 Pressure roller

(1) Take off the base unit.

 P. 4-82 “4.8.6 Base unit”
(2) Remove 2 springs [1].
(3) Take off 2 pressure levers [2].

[2]

[1] 4

[2]
[1]

Fig. 4-187

(4) Take off 2 arms [3].

[3]

[3]

Fig. 4-188

(5) Release 2 bushings [4], and take off the pressure roller [5].

[5]
[4]

[4]

Fig. 4-189

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 83
4.8.8 Separation finger

(1) Take off the base unit.

 P. 4-82 “4.8.6 Base unit”
(2) Remove the spring [1].
[1]

Fig. 4-190

(3) Take off 5 separation fingers in the following order.

[1] Lift the separation finger upward, and then slide it forward.
[2] Slide the separation finger to the front side, and then rotate it in a twisted manner.
[3] Remove the separation finger from the groove.

[1]

[2] [3]

Fig. 4-191

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 84
 Notes:
When attaching the separation fingers, set them to the groove in the following order.

[1] Insert the separation finger to the groove at front side.

[2] Rotate the separation finger in a twisted manner, and then insert it to the groove at rear side.
[3] Slide the separation finger to the depth side, and then press it down.

[3]

4
[1] [2]

Fig. 4-192

4.8.9 Fuser roller/Fuser roller bushing

(1) Take off the pressure roller.

 P. 4-83 “4.8.7 Pressure roller”
(2) Take off the separation fingers.
 P. 4-84 “4.8.8 Separation finger”
(3) Remove 1 gear [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-193

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 85
 (4) Remove 2 C-rings [2] and 1 gear [3].

[2]

[3]

[2]

Fig. 4-194

(5) Remove 2 fuser roller bushings [4].

[4]

[4]

Fig. 4-195

(6) Take off the fuser roller [5].

[5]

Fig. 4-196

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 86
4.8.10 Fuser center thermostat (THMO1) / Fuser front thermostat
(THMO2)

(1) Take off the fuser unit.

 P. 4-73 “4.8.1 Fuser unit”
(2) Release 3 latches and take off the harness cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-197

(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser center thermostat (THMO1) [2].
(4) Remove 2 screws and take off the fuser front thermostat (THMO2) [3].

[2] [3]

Fig. 4-198

Notes:
• Do not remove 4 screws shown in the figure.

Fig. 4-199

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 87
 • When attaching the fuser thermostat, place the round terminal of the cable above the thermostat
terminal, and attach in the direction shown in the figure.

Fig. 4-200

4.8.11 Center thermistor (THMS1) / Side thermistor (THMS2) / Edge

thermistor (THMS3)

(1) Take off the fuser unit.

 P. 4-73 “4.8.1 Fuser unit”
(2) Release 3 latches and take off the harness cover [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-201

(3) Remove the screw from each thermistor [2]. Release the harnesses from the harness guides and
then remove the thermistors [2].

[2] [2]

Fig. 4-202

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 88
 Notes:
• When installing the thermistors, do not mix up the installation positions of the center thermistor, the side
thermistor and the edge thermistor by telling them apart by the length of their harnesses.
• The thermistors have different front and back sides. When installing them, face the shiny side inside and
insert the boss into the attaching fixture and install them.

Edge thermistor

4
Center thermistor

Side thermistor

Fig. 4-203

• Check if the thermistors are deformed. If so, do not use them.

Fig. 4-204

• Make sure that the installation direction of the thermistors is correct.

Fig. 4-205

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 89
 • Be sure to install the thermistors so that their bosses are securely inserted into the frames.

Fig. 4-206

• After the thermistors are installed in the fuser unit, check that their gauge heads (indicated by the red
arrow) contact the fuser roller. If there are gaps between them or the thermistors are tilted, reinstall
them.

[1] Center/Side thermistor

[2] Edge thermistor

[1] [2]

Fig. 4-207

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 90
4.8.12 Exit roller

(1) Take off the tray rear cover.

 P. 4-5 “4.1.7 Tray rear cover”
(2) Release 2 exit levers [1].

2
1 [1]
4

Fig. 4-208

(3) If the paper exit guide [2] is attached, remove it.

[2]

Fig. 4-209

Notes:
When the paper exit guide [2] is attached, insert the spring [3] into the groove.

[3]

[2]

Fig. 4-210

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 91
 (4) Remove 1 clip [4] and take off 1 bushing [5].

[5] [4]

Fig. 4-211

(5) Remove the grounding spring [6].

[6]

Fig. 4-212

(6) Slide the exit roller [7] to the rear side, and remove the bushing [8] from the frame.

[8] [7]

Fig. 4-213

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 92
 (7) Remove 2 springs [9].

4
[9] [9]

Fig. 4-214

(8) Take off the exit roller [7].

[7]

Fig. 4-215

(9) Remove 1 E-ring [10] and then take off 1 gear [11], 1 grounding spring [6] and 1 bushing [8].

[8]
[11]

[10]

[6]

Fig. 4-216

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 93
4.9 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)

4.9.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)

(1) Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cable from the outlet.
(2) Open the right cover.
(3) Remove the duct unit.
 P. 4-32 “4.6.3 Duct unit”
(4) Unplug 1 connector [1] of the ADU.

[1]

Fig. 4-217

(5) Remove 1 screw.

Run the ground wire around the guide [2] as shown in the figure.

[2]

Fig. 4-218

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 94
 (6) Remove 2 screws and remove the ADU [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-219

4.9.2 ADU sensor (S8)

(1) Remove the ADU.

 P. 4-94 “4.9.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)”
(2) Unplug 1 connector and release 3 latches and remove the ADU sensor [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-220

4.9.3 Fuser guide unit

(1) Remove 1 screw and remove the fuser guide unit [1] that is attached to the fuser.

[1]

Fig. 4-221

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 95
4.9.4 Paper exit motor (M6)

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Disconnect 1 connector [1], remove 4 screws and take off the exit motor bracket [2].

[2]

[1]
Fig. 4-222

(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the exit motor (M6) [3].

[3]

Fig. 4-223

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 96
4.9.5 ADU clutch (CLT4)

(1) Remove 1 connector and 2 screws and then remove the ADU clutch (CLT4) [2].

[2]

Fig. 4-224

Notes:
Be sure that the bush is securely in the hole during installation.

4.9.6 ADU fan duct unit

(1) Remove the inner tray.

 P. 4-2 “4.1.2 Inner tray”
(2) Remove the ADU fan duct [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-225

(3) Remove 1 connector [2] and remove the ADU fan duct unit [3].

[2]

[3]

Fig. 4-226

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 97
4.9.7 ADU lower transport roller

(1) Remove the automatic duplexing unit (ADU).

 P. 4-94 “4.9.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)”
(2) Remove 2 E-rings [1], 1 pulley [2], and 1 pin [3].

[1]

[1] [2]

[3]

Fig. 4-227

(3) Remove 2 bushings [5] and then remove the ADU lower transport roller [6].

[5]

[6]
[5]

Fig. 4-228

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 98
4.9.8 ADU upper transport roller

(1) Remove the automatic duplexing unit (ADU).

 P. 4-94 “4.9.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)”
(2) Remove the ADU lower transport roller.
 P. 4-98 “4.9.7 ADU lower transport roller”
(3) Remove 4 E-rings [1], 2 gears [2], 2 pins [3], 2 pulleys [4], 2 bushings [5], 1 timing belt [6], and
the ground plate [7], and then remove the transport upper roller [8].

[1] [5] [8]

[3]
4
[5]

[6]
[4]
[2]
[1]

[7]
[4] [1]

Fig. 4-229

Notes:
Be careful of the orientation of the gears [9] when assembling them.

[9]

Fig. 4-230

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 99
4.9.9 ADU transport roller

(1) Remove the automatic duplexing unit (ADU).

 P. 4-94 “4.9.1 Automatic duplexing unit (ADU)”
(2) Remove 2 springs [1] and then remove 2 ADU transport rollers [2].

[1]

[2]

[2]

Fig. 4-231

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 100
4.10 Installation and Replacement of Options
Important:
Be sure to turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable before installing and removing of
options.

4.10.1 Reversing Auto Document Feeder (RADF)

(1) Turn the power OFF and unplug the power cable.
(2) Remove 1 screw and take off the connector cover [1].
4

[1]

Fig. 4-232

(3) Disconnect 2 connectors [2].

(4) Disconnect 1 connector [3]. <NAD/TWD only>

[2]

[3]

[2]

Fig. 4-233

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 101
 (5) Take off the RADF [4].
[4]

Fig. 4-234

4.10.2 Paper feed unit (PFU)

(1) Turn off the main power switch and unplug the power cable from the outlet.
(2) Remove the drawer.
(3) Take off the rear cover.
 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(4) Remove 3 screws and remove the PFU gear unit [1].

[1]

Fig. 4-235

(5) Release 2 clamps [2] and disconnect 1 connector [4] from the MAIN board [3].
(6) Disconnect 1 connector [5].
(7) Remove 1 screw and the ground wire [6].

[3]
[4]
[2]

[5]

[6]

Fig. 4-236

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 102
 (8) Remove the upper drawer and the lower drawer (PFU drawer).
(9) Remove 1 screw and remove 1 front left fixing bracket [7].

[7]

Fig. 4-237

(10) Remove 1 screw and remove 1 front right fixing bracket [8].

[8]

Fig. 4-238

(11) Remove 1 screw and remove 1 rear left fixing bracket [9].

[9]

Fig. 4-239

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 103
 (12) Remove 1 screw and remove 1 rear right fixing bracket [10].

[10]

Fig. 4-240

(13) Lift the main unit and remove the PFU.

Fig. 4-241

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

DISASSEMBLY AND REPLACEMENT
4 - 104
5. SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES

5.1 Overview
[A] Starting each mode
To enter into the desired mode, turn the power ON while pressing the two digital keys designated to
each mode (e.g. [0] and [5]) simultaneously, and then hold those keys until the LED of the [ENERGY
SAVER] button is lit.

On the authentication screen displayed after starting up each mode, enter the service password, and
then press [OK]. The password is not set by default.

[B] Exiting from each mode

5
Turn off the main switch to exit the self diagnosis mode.

[C] List of modes

Model
2523A/
Mode For start Contents For exit Display 2523AD/ 2329A/
2323AM/ 2829A
2823AM
Control [0] + [1] + All LEDs on the [POWER] All the LCD pixels Y Y
panel [POWER] control panel are lit, OFF/ON blink.
check and all the LCD
mode pixels blink.
Test mode [0] + [3] + Checks the status [POWER] TEST_MODE_C Y Y
[POWER] of input/output OFF/ON MC=
signals.
Test print [0] + [4] + Outputs the test [POWER] TEST_MODE_P Y Y
mode [POWER] patterns. OFF/ON ENTER THE CODE
DRAWER
PAPER TYPE
Adjustment [0] + [5] + Adjusts various [POWER] TEST_MODE_A Y Y
mode [POWER] items. OFF/ON MC=
Setting [0] + [8] + Sets various items. [POWER] TEST_MODE_D Y Y
mode [POWER] OFF/ON MC=
Assist [3] + [CLEAR] + When replacing the [POWER] FIWMWARE ASSIST Y Y
mode [POWER] MAIN circuit board, OFF/ON MODE
the assistance CLEAR SRAM
mode can be used ERASE SRAM
to configure SECURELY
memory clear and
memory safe
delete.
List print [9] + [START] + Prints various lists. [POWER] TEST_MODE_L Y Y
mode [POWER] OFF/ON ENTER THE CODE
DRAWER
PM support [6] + [START] + Clears each [POWER] PM SUPPORT MODE Y Y
mode [POWER] counter. OFF/ON ENTER THE CODE
Flash [6] + [CLEAR] + Mode for clearing [POWER] SRAM CLEAR MODE Y Y
memory [POWER] the Flash memory OFF/ON SET SERIAL
clear mode and setting the MFP NUMBER
Serial No. CLEAR SRAM
ENGINE SPEED INIT.
Flash [5] + [9] + Backup and restore [POWER] SRAM COPY MODE Y Y
memory [POWER] the flash memory OFF/ON BACKUP SRAM
backup/ data to USB device. DATA
restore RESTORE SRAM
mode DATA

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-1
 Model
2523A/
Mode For start Contents For exit Display 2523AD/ 2329A/
2323AM/ 2829A
2823AM
Firmware [4] + [9] Performs firmware [POWER] FW Update Mode Y Y
update +[POWER] update with USB OFF/ON SYSTEM FW
mode device. ENGINE FW
ALL
Password [4] + [8] + [9] + Resets the [POWER] PASSWORD RESET Y Y
reset mode [POWER] administrator OFF/ON MODE
password and RESET
service password. PASSWORD=OK
FAX clear [1]+[*] Initialization of the [POWER] TEST_MODE CL - Y
mode +[POWER] various memory OFF/ON MC=
areas (user
registration area,
system setting area,
image data area)
Job clear [1]+[7] Clear all the jobs [POWER] No special display. - Y
mode +[POWER] stored in this OFF/ON After clearing, normal
equipment. screen will be
displayed.
BIOS [OK] + [POWER] Starts the [POWER] *BIOS MODE* Y Y
mode equipment with the OFF/ON 20XX/XX/XX V0.XX
BIOS mode.
EPU mode [FC] + [START] Performs a series of [POWER] EPU MODE Y Y
+ [POWER] operations from the OFF/ON OPEN FRONT
auto toner initial COVER
adjustment, REMOVE
supplying of the DEV. CARTRIDGE
developer material
to the automatic
gamma adjustment.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-2
[D] State transition diagram of self-diagnosis modes

[POWER]
Normal Self-diagnosis
ON
mode

Authentication
Warming up
screen
*3

Ready Each mode

*2
5
[POWER]
OFF

*1

To user

Fig.5-1

*1 Turn OFF the power after using the self-diagnosis modes, and leave the equipment to the user.
*2 Mode shown in the table “[C] List of modes”
*3 If a password has been set to log into the following self-diagnostic modes in 08-8919, enter it after
the startup.
Test mode (03), Test print mode (04), Adjustment mode (05), Setting mode (08), Fax clearing mode
(*1), Fax function mode (13), Assist mode (3C), Firmware update mode (49), Flash memory backup /
restore mode (59), PM support mode (6S) and List print mode (9S)

[E] About each mode

• Control panel check mode (01)

Operation procedure

[0][1]
(LCD blinking) [START] (Button check) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)

Notes:
• The mode can be canceled by [POWER] OFF/ON.
• Button Check
Press the buttons to display the message on the control panel.

• Test mode (03)

Refer to the following.
 P. 5-5 “5.2 Input Check (Test Mode 03)”
 P. 5-6 “5.3 Output Check (Test Mode 03)”

• Test print mode (04)

Refer to the following.
 P. 5-7 “5.4 Test Print Mode (Test Mode 04)”

• Adjustment mode (05)

Refer to the following.
 P. 5-8 “5.5 Operation Procedure in Adjustment Mode (05)”

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-3
• Setting mode (08)
Refer to the following.
 P. 5-11 “5.7 Operation Procedure in Setting Mode (08)”

• Assist mode (3C)

Refer to the following.
 P. 5-13 “5.8 Assist Mode (3C)”

• List print mode (9S)

Refer to the following.
 P. 5-15 “5.9 List Print Mode (9S)”

• Flash memory clear mode (6C)

 P. 5-28 “5.10 Flash Memory Clear Mode (6C)”.

• PM support mode (6S)

Refer to the following.
 P. 7-2 “7.2 PM Support Mode (6S)”

Operation procedure
[CANCEL]
[6][START]
(Code) [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
1: Auto-toner adjustment (Operation started) (Exit)
2: PM Support Screen

• Flash memory backup/restore mode (59)

Refer to the following.
 P. 5-30 “5.11 Flash Memory Backup/Restore Mode (59)”

• Firmware update mode (49)

Refer to the following.
 P. 11-1 “11. FIRMWARE UPDATING”

• Password reset mode (489)

This mode resets the administrator password and service password.
The user data is erased when resetting the passwords.

Operation procedure

[4][8][9] [OK] [POWER] OFF/ON

[POWER] (Operation started) (Exit)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-4
5.2 Input Check (Test Mode 03)
The status of each input signal can be checked by pressing the digital keys in the test mode (03).

Operation procedure

[0][3]
[START] [Digital keys] (LCD ON) [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)
[CLEAR/STOP] [CLEAR/STOP]
[CANCEL]

TEST MODE C
MC= 1 5

Fig.5-2 Example of display during input check

For details about the items to be checked and the highlighted display of the letters from [A] to [H], see
 P. 14-1 “14. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-5
5.3 Output Check (Test Mode 03)
Status of the output signals can be checked by inputting in the codes in the test mode 03.

Operation procedure
Procedure 1
[CLEAR/STOP] [CLEAR/STOP]

[0][3] Operation Stop Operation [POWER] OFF/ON

(Code) [START] [START]
[POWER] ON code OFF (Exit)

[CANCEL]

Procedure 2

[0][3] Operation [POWER] OFF/ON

(Code) [START] One direction [CANCEL]
[POWER] (Exit)

Procedure 3

[0][3] [POWER]
(Code) [START] Operation [START] Operation [CANCEL] OFF/ON
[POWER] ON OFF (Exit)

Refer to “ P. 14-1 “14. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)”” in this manual for the codes
available in the test mode 03.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-6
5.4 Test Print Mode (Test Mode 04)
The embedded test pattern can be printed out by keying in the codes in the test print mode (04).

Operation procedure

[CANCEL]
[CANCEL] [CANCEL]
[0][4] (Test Printing)
Select [OK] (Code) [START] [POWER] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Exit)
“ENTER
THE CODE”
using the
arrow button.
(Select)

Notes: 5
• When service call or a paper jam related error occurs, it is possible to check the error code in the top
screen by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button, but no recovery operation is performed. Turn OFF the
power and then back ON to clear the error.
• During test printing, the [CLEAR/STOP] button is disabled when “Wait adding toner” is displayed.

Remarks:
Select the paper type for test printing and a drawer.
<Procedure>
Example: Selecting the paper type
1. [0]+[4]+[POWER]
2. Use the [Arrow] button to select “PAPER TYPE” and then press [OK].
3. Use the [Arrow] button to select a paper type (“PLAIN” or “THICK”) and then press [OK].

Refer to “ P. 14-1 “14. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)”” in this manual for the
codes available in the test print mode.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-7
5.5 Operation Procedure in Adjustment Mode (05)
Operation procedure
Procedure 1

(Test copy)
[START]

[TEMPLATE] [CLEAR/STOP]
[0][5] [POWER]
(Code) [START] [Digital key] [OK] OFF/ON
[POWER] (Key in a value) (Stores value) (Exit)
[CANCEL]

Procedure 2
(Test copy)
[START]

[TEMPLATE]

[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] ( Value
displayed ) [OK]
(Value unchangeable)
[POWER]
OFF/ON
(Exit)

Procedure 3
(Test copy)
[START]

[TEMPLATE]
[UP] [POWER]
[0][5] [START] or
(Code) [OK] OFF/ON
[POWER] [DOWN] (Stores value) (Exit)
(Adjust a value)
[CANCEL]

Procedure 4
(Test copy)
[STAR T] [CANCEL]

[TEMPLATE] [CANCEL] [CANCEL] [CLEAR/STOP]

[0][5] [START] [Digital key] [START] [Digital key] [POWER]
(Code) [OK]
[POWER] (Sub code) (Key in a value) OFF/ON
Stores value
( in RAM ) (Exit)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-8
Procedure 6
(Test copy)
[STAR T]

[TEMPLATE]
Automatic [POWER]OFF/ON
[0][5]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] ( adjustment ) [OK]
(Exit)
*[CANCEL]

* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed. Return to “TEST
MODE A” screen by pressing the [CANCEL] button.

Procedure 7
(Test copy)
[STAR T] 5
[TEMPLATE]
Select “Yes”
[0][5] Automatic [POWER]
[POWER]
(Code) [START] ( adjustment ) or “No” using
the arrow button
[OK]
OFF/ON
(Select) (Exit)
*[CANCEL]

* When the automatic adjustment ends abnormally, error message is displayed. Return to “TEST
MODE A” screen by pressing the [CANCEL] button.

Procedure 10
(Test copy)
[START]

[TEMPLATE]
[POWER]
[0][5] [Digital key] Value
[POWER] (Code) [START]
(Sub code)
[START] ( displayed ) OFF/ON
(Exit)
[OK]
(Value unchangeable)

Procedure 17

(Test copy)
[START] [CLEAR/STOP]

[TEMPLATE] [UP]
[0][5] [OK] [POWER]
or OFF/ON
[POWER] (Code) [START]
[DOWN] Stores value
(Exit)
(Adjust a value)

* The automatic adjustment starts when 2 minutes have passed after the [START] button is pressed.

Notes:
The fuser roller temperature control at the adjustment mode is different from that at the normal
state.
Therefore, a failure in the fusing performance may occur when test copying is performed in the
adjustment mode. In that case, turn ON the power normally, leave the equipment for approx. 3
minutes after it has become ready state and then start up the adjustment mode again.
Remarks:
When an error has occurred while Adjustment Mode (05) is performed, its error code can be
confirmed by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5-9
5.6 Test print pattern in Adjustment Mode (05)
The test print pattern is printed by inputting the following code in adjustment mode (05) and then
pressing the [SETTINGS] button and then the [START] button.

Code Types of test pattern Remarks

1 Grid pattern Refer to  P. 6-8 “6.3.4 Printer related
adjustment”.
3 Grid pattern (Duplex printing) Refer to  P. 6-8 “6.3.4 Printer related
adjustment”.
6 Copier gamma confirmation pattern For confirming the reproduction of gradation.
10 Copier gamma adjustment pattern Refer to  P. 6-24 “6.4.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment”.
20 Copier gamma adjustment pattern (Black; binary For confirming the reproduction of gradation.
dithering) (05-7167)
Refer to  P. 6-24 “6.4.1 Automatic gamma
adjustment”.

Remarks:
Select DRAWER (DRAWER1/BYPASS) and then you can print.
<Procedure>
1. [0]+[5]+[POWER].
2. Input the code.
3. Press [TEMPLATE].
4. Use the [Arrow] buttons to select “Paper Source” and then press [START].

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 10
5.7 Operation Procedure in Setting Mode (08)

Procedure 1 and 12

[CANCEL]

[0][8] [Digital key] [OK] [POWER] OFF/ON

(Code) [START]
[POWER] Sets or (Stores value (Exit)
changes value in RAM)
[CLEAR/STOP]
[CLEAR/STOP]
(Corrects value)

5
Procedure 2

[CLEAR/STOP]

[0][8] [Digital key] [OK] [POWER]OFF/ON

[START]
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
Adjustment value
cannot be changed

Procedure 3

[CANCEL]

[0][8] [POWER] OFF/ON

(Code) [START] [OK] [OK]
[POWER] (Exit)
(Execute
initializing)
[CLEAR/STOP]

Procedure 4

[CANCEL]

[POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key] [OK]
[POWER] (Code) [ST ART] (Sub-code)
[START] [Digital key] OFF/ON
Sets or (Stores value ) (Exit)
changes value

[CLEAR/STOP] [CLEAR/STOP]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 11
Procedure 9

[CLEAR/STOP]

[0][8] [Digital key] [OK] [POWER]OFF/ON

[START] Select “Paper
[POWER] (Code) (Exit)
Size” using the Adjustment value
arrow button. cannot be changed
(Select)

Procedure 10

[CANCEL]
[POWER]
[0][8] [Digital key]
(Code) [START] [START] [Digital key] [OK] OFF/ON
[POWER] (1st setting)
(2nd setting) (Stores value) (Exit)
[CLEAR/STOP]
[CLEAR/STOP] [CLEAR/STOP]
(Corrects value) (Corrects value)

Procedure 11

[CANCEL]
[POWER]
[0][8] [OK]
(Code) [START] Enter the characters OFF/ON
[POWER]
(Exit)

[CLEAR/STOP]
[CLEAR/STOP]
(Corrects characters)

Procedure 14

[CANCEL]
[0][8] [Digital key] [OK] [POWER]
(Code) [START] [START]
[POWER] (Sub-code) OFF/ON
Adjustment value
cannot be changed (Exit)
[CLEAR/STOP] [CLEAR/STOP]
(Corrects value)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 12
5.8 Assist Mode (3C)

5.8.1 Functions
This equipment has the Assist Mode to enable the following functions.

1. Memory data format (CLEAR SRAM)

When the memory * is replaced with a new one, abnormal values may be written in the new memory.
Memory data must be formatted with this function for such case.

* 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: IC10, 2329A/2829A: IC11

Notes:
This function is required only when a new memory is installed.
Do not perform this function in cases other than the installation of a new memory because all 5
data in the memory will be deleted with this function.

2. Memory securely erasing (ERASE SRAM SECURELY)

This function is used before discarding the MAIN board.
It overwrites all the used areas on the memory * with the selected data, and makes it unusable.
Immediately after selecting this function, the processing starts and is completed.

* 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: IC10, 2329A/2829A: IC11

Remarks:

FIWMWARE ASSIST MODE

CLEAR SRAM
ERASE SRAM SECURELY

Though the menu includes an "SRAM" item, the machine

is actually equipped with Flash memory, not SRAM.

3. When an F014 error has occurred, it can be removed with this function.

Notes:
When the memory has been cleared in the Assist Mode (3C), check the items below and change
the value of the following codes accordingly:
08-9063 (Installation of the fax function)
0: Not installed
1: Installed

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 13
5.8.2 Operating Procedure of Assist Mode
Procedure: SRAM Clear
[CANCEL]

[3][C] [POWER]OFF/ON
Select “CLEAR [OK] [OK]
[POWER] (Exit)
SRAM ” using the
arrow button.
(Select)

Procedure: Erase SRAM Securely

[CANCEL]

[3][C] [POWER]OFF/ON
Select “ERASE [OK] [OK]
[POWER] (Exit)
SRAM SECURELY ”
using the
arrow button.
(Select)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 14
5.9 List Print Mode (9S)

5.9.1 Operation procedure

Print output
[9][START] Select
[POWER] “Enter the code” [OK] (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] [POWER]
Key in the start Key in the end List starts to OFF/ON
using the arrow code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)
button.(Select)

101: Adjustment mode (05)

102: Setting mode (08)
403: 13 code list
(Code)
103: PM support mode 5
106: Error history (Maximum 30 items)
108: Firmware update log (Maximum 5 items)
111: Version list
114: Total counter list
400: Protocol trace list
401: Service data list

You can select the drawer from which to print a list.

<Procedure>
1. [9]+[START]+[POWER].
2. Use the [Arrow] buttons to select “DRAWER” and then press [OK].
3. Use the [Arrow] buttons to select “DRAWER 1” and then press [OK].

CSV output (USB)

[9][START]
[POWER] Connect (Code) [START] [Digital keys] [START] [Digital keys] [START] Disconnect [POWER]
USB Key in the first Key in the last List starts to USB OFF/ON
code to be printed code to be printed be printed (Exit)

201: Adjustment mode (05)

202: Setting mode (08)
503: 13 code list
(Code)
203: PM support mode
206: Error history (Maximum 30 items)
208: Firmware update log (Maximum 5 items)
211: Version list
214: Total counter list
500: Protocol trace list
501: Service data list
300: All CSV files

Remarks:
When an error has occurred while List Print Mode (9S) is performed, its error code can be
confirmed by pressing the [ENERGY SAVER] button.
Notes: Precautions when storing information into USB device
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB device, be sure to obtain permission
from a user in advance.
• When storing the setting information of the equipment into a USB device, the information is printed out in
a CSV format. Handle and manage the information with extra care.
• Do not lose or leak the setting information of the equipment.
• Do not use the setting information of the equipment for purposes other than maintenance or product
services.
• Provide the information promptly if a user requires so.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 15
 • The buttons on the control panel keep blinking while data are being stored in the USB device. Do not
disconnect the USB device while data are being stored.
Remarks:
In the USB storage procedure above, lists are stored in a CSV format. The names of the CSV
files are shown below.
201: ADJUSTMENT_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
202: SETTING_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
203: PM_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
206: ERROR_LOG_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
208: FW_UPGRADE_LOG_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
211: VERSION_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
214: TOTAL_COUNTER_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
500: PROTOCOL_MONITOR_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).pdf
501: SERVICE_DATA_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).pdf
503: 13CODE_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv
300: TOTAL_COUNTER_LIST_serial number_date and time(YYYYMMDDHHMMSS).csv

DD-MM-YYYY HH:MM is displayed for the date and time on the header in a CSV file.

5.9.2 List printing

Lists below are output in the list print mode.
Printing can be done on A4, A4-R, LT, and LT-R sizes of paper. This section introduces a sample of
each list.
Starting the list print mode: [9] + [START] + [POWER]

List code Model

Lists 2523A/2523AD/
Printout CSV file output 2329A/2829A
2323AM/2823AM

Adjustment mode (05) 201 Y Y

101
data list

Setting mode (08) data 202 Y Y

102
list

PM support mode list 103 203 Y Y

Error history list 106 206 Y Y

(Maximum 30 items) (Maximum 30 items)

Firmware upgrade log 108 208 Y Y

(Maximum 5 items) (Maximum 5 items)

Version list 111 211 Y Y

Total counter list 114 214 Y Y

Protocol trace list 400 500 - Y

Service data list 401 501 - Y

13 code list 403 503 - Y

Output all CSV files - 300 Y Y

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 16
• Adjustment mode (05)

05 ADJUSTMENT MODE DATA LIST

S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999

CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA

2000 128 3860 88 4830 128 5920 128

Fig.5-3

The selected adjustment codes and the current adjustment value for each code are output in a list.
See the following page for the adjustment code (05):
 P. 14-9 “14.4 Adjustment Mode (05) Codes”

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 17
• Setting mode (08)

08 SETTING MODE DATA LIST

S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999

CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA

2010 2 2880 12 3040 0 3070 0

Fig.5-4

The selected setting codes and the current setting value for each code are output in a list. See the
following page for the setting code (08):
 P. 14-25 “14.5 Setting Mode (08) Codes”

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 18
• PM support mode

PM SUPPORT CODE LIST

S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx

UNIT OUTPUT PAGES PM OUTPUT PAGES DRIVE COUNTS PM DRIVE COUNTS

DEVELOP COUNTS DEVELOP COUNTS
DRUM 18 70000 11735 170000
DRUM BLADE 18 70000 11735 170000
SEPARATION FINGER(DRUM) 18 70000 11735 170000
GRID 18 70000 11735 170000
DEVELOPER 0 70000 11735 170000
OZONE FILTER 18 70000 8625 170000
FUSER ROLLER
PRESS ROLLER
18
18
70000
70000
8625
8625
170000
170000
5
SEPARATION FINGER(FUSER) 18 70000 8625 170000

Fig.5-5

The number of pages currently output (OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the recommended
number of output pages for PM (PM OUTPUT PAGES/DEVELOP COUNTS), the current drive count
(DRIVE COUNTS) and the recommended drive count for PM (PM DRIVE COUNTS) are output
together with PM units. Use this list for confirming the PM units to be replaced at each PM. See the
following page for PM:
Refer to  P. 7-1 “7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 19
• Error history

ERROR HISTORY LIST S/N : xxxxxxxxx TOTAL : 2146

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIO XXXX DF TOTAL : 1213

CODE COUNTER DATE TIME

E721 99999999 2003-06-19 14:46:50

E020 99999999 2003-06-19 18:12:01
E020 99999999 2003-06-20 10:35:51
E860 99999999 2003-06-20 13:49:30
E731 99999999 2003-06-20 13:50:26
E030 99999999 2003-06-20 14:11:10
E020 99999999 2003-06-23 11:25:40
E020 99999999 2003-06-24 11:25:24
E020 99999999 2003-06-24 16:21:02
E725 99999999 2003-06-24 16:34:59
E724 99999999 2003-06-24 16:34:59
E731 99999999 2003-06-24 16:34:59
E731 99999999 2003-06-24 16:35:10
E860 99999999 2003-06-24 16:37:35
E020 99999999 2003-06-24 16:41:38

Fig.5-6

The error history is output.

See the following page for the parameters for each error:
Refer to  P. 8-11 “8.2.4 Error history”.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 20
• Firmware update log

FW UPGRADE LOG S/N : xxxxxxxxx TOTAL : 2146

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIO XXXX DF TOTAL : 1213

UNPACKING DATE 2007-04-17

ROM/VERSION DATE TOTAL COPY(B) PRINT(B) LIST FAX STATUS

-------------- --------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------- -------
T160SF0W0050 2011-08-19 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 OK
T160HD0W0040 2011-08-19 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 OK
T160MWW004 2011-08-22 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 99999999 OK

Fig.5-7

Firmware upgrade logs are output.

- The MANUFACTURE field shows the date of manufacture. The UNPACKING field shows the
date that the equipment was unpacked.
- Only displayed if updated using USB device.

Item Contents

STATE Version name of ROM downloaded

DATE Date that the ROM was downloaded

TOTAL Total counter data when the ROM was downloaded

COPY (B) Copier counter data (black) when the ROM was downloaded

PRINT (B) Printer counter data (black) when the ROM was downloaded

LIST List print counter data when the ROM was downloaded

STATUS Result of download

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 21
• Version list

VERSION LIST S/N : xxxxxxxxx TOTAL : 2146

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOXXXX DF TOTAL : 1213

SYSTEM FIRMWARE ROM VERSION : Txxxxxxxxxxx

SYSTEM FIRMWARE INTERNAL ROM VERSION : Vx.x.x.xx.xx
PRINTER ROM VERSION : xxM-xxx
MEMORY SIZE : 512 MB

Fig.5-8

The list of versions is output.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 22
• Total counter list

TOTAL COUNTER LIST S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL : 9999999

20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL : 9999999

PRINT COUNTER

COPY FAX PRINTER LIST TOTAL

SMALL 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
LARGE 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999
TOTAL 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999 999999999

SCAN COUNTER
TOTAL
5
FUL COLOR BLACK TOTAL
COPY 999999999 999999999 999999999
FAX 999999999 999999999 999999999
NETWORK 999999999 999999999 999999999

TOTAL 999999999 999999999 999999999

COPY
BLACK TOTAL
SMALL 999999999 999999999
LARGE 999999999 999999999
TOTAL 999999999 999999999

FAX
BLACK TOTAL
SMALL 999999999 999999999
LARGE 999999999 999999999
TOTAL 999999999 999999999

NETWORK
FULL COCOR BLACK TOTAL
SMALL 999999999 999999999 999999999
LARGE 999999999 999999999 999999999
TOTAL 999999999 999999999 999999999

Fig.5-9

The list of total counter is output.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 23
• Protocol trace list

<Transmission list>

TOTAL COUNTER LIST

Fig.5-10

The list of protocol trace is output.

The output report is changed due to last-minutes FAX communication status.

List Contents
DATE Communication date
TIME Communication start time
DESTINATION Remote destination
TYPE TX
DURATION Communication time
PAGES Page number
STATUS Communication result
FILE NO File number
MODE Communication speed and EMC mode

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 24
 TOTAL COUNTER LIST

Fig.5-11

The list of protocol trace is output.

The output report is changed due to last-minutes FAX communication status.

List Contents
DATE Communication date
TIME Communication start time
DESTINATION Remote destination
TYPE RX
DURATION Communication time
PAGES Page number
STATUS Communication result
FILE NO File number
MODE Communication speed and EMC mode
RING (RX only) Title for ON/OFF time
DATA (RX only) Ring on/off data

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 25
• Service data list

Service Data List

Page 001
Date 001
Name Name Fax Kit
Fax Number 12345678901234567890

Common Setting Function Setting

User Name TIS Resolution 203x98
User Fax number 4733507 Quick Memory TX ON
Memory RX Mode ON-0000-20:00-08:00
ALL Day Sat-Sun
Data and Time 2013/XX/XX XX:XX Setting Mon-Tue-Wed-Thu-Fri
Time Zone +08:00
Daylight Save Time OFF Printing Setting
Start Time Fax Printing BW-RAW-600x600
End Time Reduction ON-90
Discard ON-10
Buzzer
Line Monitor - Volume OFF
Line Monitor - Stage B Report
RBT 3 Activity Report ON
Completed Fax Comm 2 TX Result Report ONERROR- With image
T.30 Protocol OFF
Communication
TX Mode Direct Redial ON-4-2
Line Mode PBX-25
Header ON
Dial Mode PULSE-20PPS
No. of Ring 5
Footer OFF
Caller ID OFF
RX Mode FAXTEL-6-10-DISCONNECT
Call Transfer OFF

Service Setting
Region Code 26 00 20 80 0C 00 00 07 61 00 81
Paper Size A3 00 80 10 00 01 03 00 00 68 00
Fax Max. Resolution 406x393 80 06 00 00 00 28 00 A7 14 68
Image Start Position LEFTTOP-5-5 00 00 C0 82 10 8A 00 C1 00 08
TX Max. Speed V34-33.6 00 00 00 04 00 06 00 89 01 00
RX Max. Speed V34-33.6 00 00 00 00 B0 00 00 00 00 00
TX Level -5dBm 21 0F 00 80 00 00 00 00 00 00
DTFM High Freq. Level -7dBm 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
FTMF Low Freq. Level -9dBm 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
CNG Level -4dBm 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00 00
CED Level -5dBm
ECM ON
Coding Scheme JBIG

Fig.5-12

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 26
• 13 code list

13 MODE DATA LIST

S/N: xxxxxxxxx TOTAL: 9999999
20xx-xx-xx xx:xx TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx DF TOTAL: 9999999

CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA CODE DATA

100 0 271 0 587 0

Fig.5-13

The list of 13 code is output.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 27
5.10 Flash Memory Clear Mode (6C)

5.10.1 General description

This function (6C mode) is a mode that can be used without entering the service technician's password.
For example, when the memory IC fails or is replaced, if it is not possible even to login in 3C mode, in
6C mode it is possible to initialize by using “CLEAR SRAM”.
The process of the “CLEAR SRAM” in the 6C mode is the same as the “CLEAR SRAM” in the 3C
mode.

Functions
• Sets the serial number of this equipment.
• Clears flash memory data when the 3C mode cannot be used.
• When an F014 error has occurred, it can be removed with this function.

5.10.2 Operation procedure

Procedure: Set Serial Number

[6][C] Select ”SET SERIAL [POWER]OFF/ON

[OK] [Digital Key] [OK]
[POWER] NUMBER ”using the (Exit)
(Serial Number)
arrow button.
(Select)

Procedure: Clear SRAM

[OK]
[NO]

[6][C] [POWER]
Select “CLEAR SRAM” [►] [YES] [OK] “COMPLETED”
[POWER] OFF/ON
using the arrow button. (Exit)
(Select)

5.10.3 Functions

[A] Set Serial Number

When replacing MAIN board, select this to set the serial number of the equipment since it must be done
in advance of recovery from flash memory backup data.
• Clear flash memory first and then set the serial number in this mode.

[B] Clear SRAM

Select this to clear all flash memory data when replacing the Main board flash memory.
• Replace the MAIN board and then clear the flash memory data.
• After clearing the flash memory data, initialize flash memory following its replacement procedure.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 28
 Remarks:

Though the menu includes an "SRAM" item, the machine

is actually equipped with Flash memory, not SRAM.
Notes:
When the memory has been cleared in the Assist Mode (6C), check the items below and change 5
the value of the following codes accordingly:
08-9063 (Installation of the fax function)
0: Not installed
1: Installed

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 29
5.11 Flash Memory Backup/Restore Mode (59)

5.11.1 General description

This is a mode to backup and restore the setting value and counter value in the flash memory. This
function backs up or restores the data of the same equipment (same serial number), which is used
when the data in the old flash memory are backed up in a USB device and they are restored in the new
flash memory.

Important:
• The USB device for the backup/restore must meet the following conditions. A backup/restore operation
with any devices other than the following will not be guaranteed.
- A combination USB device with a flash memory (to be connected directly to the USB port)
and its capacity is 1GB or more.
- A device compliant with the following specifications established by USB-IF (USB
implementers Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
The USB device should be formatted in the FAT or FAT32. (Correct operation cannot be
guaranteed if it is formatted in NTFS/exFAT.)
- Most of the common USB devices are compliant with the above specifications and are
therefore applicable to this backup/restore. However, most of these devices were originally
developed to be used in an environment for PCs (e.g. Windows or Macintosh) and thus
operations exclusively with this equipment have not been fully guaranteed. Therefore, the
user must thoroughly check in advance whether there will be any problem in operating
with this equipment when adopting one of these devices.
• A USB device compliant with both USB 1.1 and USB 2.0 can be used for this backup/restore.
• Backup/restore with any storage devices other than a flash memory (e.g. USB-connectable memory
card reader, CD/DVD drive, hard disk) will never be guaranteed. Therefore never use them for this
operation.
• Be sure to unplug the LAN cable and Fax line before data are backed up / restored. Also, do not use the
RADF and open the cover, drawer, etc. during the backup/restore.
• Data can be backed up / restored only for the same model and version. If the version is different, update
the firmware and backup / restore data in the same version.
• Restore data to any equipment which has the same options as when the data are backed up.
• Delete the backed up data in the USB device after backup/restore.

5.11.2 Backup files

The following files are saved in the root directory of the USB device by backing up.

File name Remarks

Product code_Serial number_Year-Month-Day_Hour- E.g.: TT01_CPLH00123_2019-07-01_17-00
Minute Product code:
TT01: 2523A/2523AD
TT02: 2323AM/2823AM
TT03: 2329A/2829A

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 30
5.11.3 Backup procedure

[ 1 ] Backup procedure
(1) Turn the power OFF.
(2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] buttons simultaneously.
(4) Enter the password set in 08-8919, and then press the [OK] button. (If the password is not set,
skip this step.)
(5) When “SRAM_COPY MODE” appears on the LCD screen, select “BACKUP SRAM DATA” and
press the arrow button.
(6) Enter a password (max. 12 characters) and press the [OK] button.
Notes:
This password will be used for restoring.
(7) When “START BACKUP=OK” appears, press the [OK] button. 5
(8) “WAIT” appears.
(9) When “BACKUP SUCCESSFULLY” and “RESTART THE MFP” appear, turn the power OFF.
(10) Disconnect the USB device.

[ 2 ] Confirmation of errors
If the data have not been properly backed up, the following messages will appear on the LCD screen. In
this case, turn the power OFF, and then check the items below. After confirming and solving the
problem, back up the data again.

Display contents Error contents Measures

USB DEVICE NOT DETECTED A USB device has not been Reconnect the USB device.
connected.

BACKUP NOT_CREATED Creating the backup file of the flash Perform the backup procedure
memory has failed. again.

MFP SERIAL_NUMBER NOT SET No serial number has been set. Set the correct serial number.

5.11.4 Restore procedure

[ 1 ] Restore procedure
(1) Turn the power OFF.
(2) Connect the USB device to the USB port.
(3) Turn the power ON while pressing the [5] and [9] button simultaneously.
(4) Enter the password set in 08-8919, and then press the [OK] button. (If the password is not set,
skip this step.)
(5) When “SRAM_COPY MODE” appears on the LCD screen, select “RESTORE_ SRAM DATA”
and press the arrow button.
(6) Enter a password (max. 12 characters) and press the [OK] button.
Notes:
This password was used for backing up.
(7) Enter the serial number and press the [OK] button.
(8) When “START RESTORE=OK” appears, press the [OK] button.
(9) “WAIT” appears.
(10) When “RESTORE SUCCESSFULLY” and “RESTART THE MFP” appear, turn the power OFF.
(11) Disconnect the USB device.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 31
[ 2 ] Confirmation of errors
If the data have not been properly restored, the following messages will appear on the LCD screen. In
this case, turn the power OFF, and then check the items below. After confirming and solving the
problem, restore the data again from the beginning.

Display contents Error contents Measures

USB DEVICE NOT DETECTED A USB device has not been Reconnect the USB device.
connected.

INVALID BACKUP FILE No backup file is stored in the USB Check the USB device and
device. perform the backup procedure
again.

INVALID MFP SERIAL NUMBER The entered serial number is not Check if the serial number is
the same as that of the backup correct.
data.

NO BACKUP FILE EXISTS The backup data (product code) in Check the backup data (product
the USB device are not the same as code) and the model name.
the model.

BACKUP FILE CORRUPTED The backup file has been damaged. Perform the backup procedure
again.

INVALID PASSWORD The entered password differs from Check if the password is correct.
that for the backup.

RESTORE FAILED RESTART THE Restoring the data has failed. Perform the restore procedure
MFP again.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 32
5.12 PM support mode related code
The management items at PM support mode can also be operated at setting mode (08).
The following items are displayed or set by using sub-codes at PM management setting in the table
below.

5.12.1 Setting

Sub-codes
0: Present number of output pages
Means the present number of output pages.

1: Recommended number of output pages for replacement

Means the recommended number of output pages for replacement.
5
2: Number of output pages at the last replacement
Means the number of output pages at the last replacement.

3: Present driving counts

Means the present drive counts (1 count = 2 seconds).

4: Recommended driving counts to be replaced

Means the recommended drive counts for replacement (1 count = 2 seconds).

5: Driving counts at the last replacement

Means the drive counts at the last replacement.

6: Present output pages for control

Means the present number of output pages for controlling.

7: Present driving counts for control

Means the present drive counts for controlling (1 count = 2 seconds).

8: Number of times replaced

Counts up when clearing the counter of each unit in the PM Support Mode Screen.

Notes:
• Sub-code 3 is equivalent to sub-code 7.
When the value of sub-code 3 is changed, the value of sub-code 7 is also updated and vice versa.
• When “0” is set at one of sub-codes 0, 3, 6 and 7, the rest of them are automatically updated to “0”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 33
 PM management setting Date of previous
Items <Procedure 4> replacement Remarks
*Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>
Photoconductive drum 6250-0 to 8 6251 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 59,000
2523A/2523AD: 61,000
2823AM/2829A: 64,000
Sub-code 4: 115,000
Drum cleaning blade 6258-0 to 8 6259 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 59,000
2523A/2523AD: 61,000
2823AM/2829A: 64,000
Sub-code 4: 115,000
Drum separation finger 6272-0 to 8 6273 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 177,000
2523A/2523AD: 183,000
2823AM/2829A: 192,000
Sub-code 4: 345,000
Charger grid 6274-0 to 8 6275 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code1:
2323AM/2329A: 59,000
2523A/2523AD: 61,000
2823AM/2829A: 64,000
Sub-code 4: 115,000
Charger (Needle) 6282-0 to 8 6283 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code1:
2323AM/2329A: 177,000
2523A/2523AD: 183,000
2823AM/2829A: 192,000
Sub-code 4: 345,000
Ozone filter 6298-0 to 8 6299 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code1:
2323AM/2329A: 177,000
2523A/2523AD: 183,000
2823AM/2829A: 192,000
Sub-code 4: 345,000
Developer material 6300-0 to 8 6301 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 59,000
2523A/2523AD: 61,000
2823AM/2829A: 64,000
Sub-code 4: 115,000
Transfer (roller) 6314-0 to 8 6315 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 59,000
2523A/2523AD: 61,000
2823AM/2829A: 64,000
Sub-code 4: 115,000
Fuser roller 6346-0 to 8 6347 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 177,000
2523A/2523AD: 183,000
2823AM/2829A: 192,000
Sub-code 4: 345,000

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 34
 PM management setting Date of previous
Items <Procedure 4> replacement Remarks
*Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>
Pressure roller 6350-0 to 8 6351 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 177,000
2523A/2523AD: 183,000
2823AM/2829A: 192,000
Sub-code 4: 345,000
Fuser roller separation 6368-0 to 8 6369 < Default values>
finger Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 177,000
2523A/2523AD: 183,000
2823AM/2829A: 192,000
Sub-code 4: 345,000 5
Pickup roller (RADF) 6382-0,1,2,8 6383 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code1: 150,000
Paper feed roller 6384-0,1,2,8 6385 < Default values>
(RADF) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code1: 150,000
Separation roller 6386-0,1,2,8 6387 < Default values>
(RADF) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code1: 150,000
Paper feed roller 6398-0,1,2,8 6399 < Default values>
(1st drawer) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Paper feed roller 6400-0,1,2,8 6401 < Default values>
2nd drawer (PFU) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Paper feed roller 6420-0,1,2,8 6421 < Default values>
3rd drawer (PFP) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Paper feed roller 6422-0,1,2,8 6423 < Default values>
4th drawer (PFP) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Separation pad 6406-0,1,2,8 6407 < Default values>
(1st drawer) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code1: 80,000
Separation pad 6408-0,1,2,8 6409 < Default values>
2nd drawer (PFU) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Separation roller 6412-0,1,2,8 6413 < Default values>
3rd drawer (PFP) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Separation roller 6414-0,1,2,8 6415 < Default values>
4th drawer (PFP) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Separation pad 6416-0,1,2,8 6417 < Default values>
(Bypass unit) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 50,000
Feed roller 6424-0,1,2,8 6425 < Default values>
(Bypass unit) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code1: 50,000
Pickup roller 6428-0,1,2,8 6429 < Default values>
3rd drawer (PFP) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000
Pickup roller 6430-0,1,2,8 6431 < Default values>
4th drawer (PFP) Sub-codes 0, 2, 8: 0
Sub-code 1: 80,000

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 35
 PM management setting Date of previous
Items <Procedure 4> replacement Remarks
*Indicated in 8 digits <Procedure 2>
Recovery blade 6436-0 to 8 6437 < Default values>
Sub-codes 0, 2, 3, 5, 6, 7, 8: 0
Sub-code 1:
2323AM/2329A: 177,000
2523A/2523AD: 183,000
2823AM/2829A: 192,000
Sub-code 4: 345,000

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 36
5.12.2 Restrictions for the PM counter-related self-diagnosis codes
As for the following PM counter-related self-diagnosis codes, when their sub code 0 (present number of
output pages) is initialized from the setting mode (08), the numbers of sub code 8 (number of times
replaced) are not counted up.

<PM counter-related self-diagnosis codes>

• 08-6250: Photosensitive drum (K)
• 08-6258: Drum blade cleaner (K)
• 08-6272: Drum separation finger
• 08-6274: Charger grid (K)
• 08-6282: Charger (wire/needle) (K)
• 08-6298: Ozone filter
• 08-6300: Developer (K)
• 08-6314: Transfer (Wire/Belt/Roller)
• 08-6346: Fuser roller
5
• 08-6350: Press roller
• 08-6368: Fuser roller separation finger
• 08-6382: Pickup roller (RADF)
• 08-6384: Paper feed roller (RADF)
• 08-6386: Separation roller (RADF)
• 08-6398: Paper feed roller (1st CST)
• 08-6406: Separation roller (1st CST)
• 08-6408: Separation pad (2nd CST)
• 08-6416: Separation pad (SFB)
• 08-6424: Paper feed roller (SFB)
• 08-6428: Pickup roller (3rd CST)
• 08-6430: Pickup roller (4th CST)
• 08-6436: Drum recovery blade
• 08-6470: Fuser roller bushing

[Procedure to be restricted]
The below procedure is described taking the PM counter for the developer material (08-6300) as an
example.
1. Confirm the value of the sub code 8 of 08-6300.
2. Replace the developer material.
3. Restart the equipment with the setting mode (08) and set “0” in the sub code 0 of 08-6300.

[Countermeasure]
Clear the PM counter in the PM support mode (6S).

<Procedure>
(1) Start the equipment with the PM support mode (6S).
 P. 7-2 “7.2 PM Support Mode (6S)”
(2) Key in “2” and press the [START] button.
(3) Select the part to be replaced and press the [Right] arrow button.
(4) Select “RESET” listed in the lowest part of the menu and press the [Right] arrow button.
(5) Press the [OK] button.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 37
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS MODES
5 - 38
6. SETTING / ADJUSTMENT

6.1 Adjustment Order

This chapter mainly explains the procedures for image related adjustment. When replacing
components which have other specified instructions for adjustment, those specified instructions are to
be obeyed in priority. In the following diagram, the solid lines with arrow lead to essential adjustments,
while the dotted lines lead to adjustments to be performed if necessary.

Parts to be replaced
Developer material Photoconductive drum Laser optical unit
Transfer roller Drum cleaning blade
Main charger grid

Item to be adjusted Code in mode 05

6.2 Adjustment of the auto-toner sensor 2000
6

6.3 Image dimensional adjustment

Code in mode 05
Order Items 2523A/2523AD/ 2329A/2829A
2323AM/2823AM
1 6.3.2 Light volume adjustment of scanner LED 3219
2 6.3.3 Paper
. alignment at the registration roller 4100, 4101, 4102, 4103, 4104,
4105, 4106, 4107, 4108, 4109,
4110, 4112, 4405
3 6.3.4 [A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 4001
4 Printer [B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position
related 4006
adjustment Drawer sideways deviation 4018
5 [C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction 4009
6 [D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position 4058, 4061, 4058, 4459,4060,
4062 4061, 4062
7 [E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position
4019
at duplexing.
8 6.3.5 [A] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary
scanning direction 4000
Scanner
9 related [B] Image position adjustment of the primary scanning
adjustment 3030
direction
10 [C] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary
scanning direction 3032
11 [D] Image position adjustment of the secondary
3031
scanning direction
12 [E] Top margin 4050
13 [F] Left margin 4051
14 [G] Right margin 4052
15 [H] Bottom margin 4053

Item to be adjusted Code in mode 05

6.4.1 Automatic gamma adjustment 7165, 7167

Adjust the image quality if necessary. (Chapter 6.3, 6.4, 6.5, 6.6, 6.7 )

END
Fig.6-1

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-1
6.2 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor
When the developer material is replaced, adjust the auto-toner sensor in the following procedure.

<Procedure> (Adjustment Mode (05-2000))

(1) Install the developer unit into the equipment.

(2) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
The following message will be displayed.

TEST MODE A
[0][5]
MC=
[POWER]

Fig.6-2

(3) Key in code [2000] and press the [START] button.

The display changes as follows.

TEST MODE A
MC=2000
[2000] [START]
230 WAIT
B

Fig.6-3

Notes:
B indicates the output voltage of the auto-toner sensor (2.30 V in the above case).
The drum, developer unit, etc. are in operation.

(4) After about two minutes, the value B automatically starts changing.

TEST MODE A
MC=2000
245 128 B

Fig.6-4

Notes:
A indicates the controlled value of the auto-toner sensor output. Press the Up or Down button to
change the value.

(5) Check if the value B is within the range of 234 to 246 (the output voltage range of the auto-toner
sensor is 2.34 V to 2.46 V).

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-2
 (6) If the value B is not within the range of 234 to 246, press the Up or Down button to adjust the
value manually.
Notes:
The relation between the button and the values A and B is as follows.

Button to be pressed Value A Value B

Up Increased Increased

Down Decreased Decreased

(7) Press the [OK] button.

The drum, developer unit, etc. are stopped and the following is displayed.

TEST MODE A
MC=
[OK] 6

Fig.6-5

(8) Turn the power OFF.

(9) Install the toner cartridge.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-3
6.3 Image Dimensional Adjustment

6.3.1 General description

There are several adjustment items in the image dimensional adjustment, as listed below. When
adjusting these items, the following adjustment order should strictly be observed.

Code in mode 05
Item to be adjusted 2523A/2523AD/
2329A/2829A
2323AM/2823AM

1 Light volume adjustment of scanner LED 3219 3219

2 Paper alignment at the registration roller 4100, 4101, 4100, 4101,

4102, 4103, 4102, 4103,
4104, 4105, 4104, 4105,
4107, 4110, 4107, 4108,
4405 4109, 4110,
4405

3 Printer related (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 4001 4001
adjustment (Fine adjustment of image writing frequency/
PRT)

(b) Primary scanning data laser writing start position 4006 4006
Drawer sideways deviation 4018 4018

(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning 4009 4009

direction
(Fine adjustment of main motor rotation speed)

(d) Secondary scanning data laser writing start 4058, 4059, 4058, 4059,
position 4061, 4062 4060, 4061,
4062

(e) Primary scanning data laser writing start position 4019 4019
at duplexing

4 Scanner related (a) Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction 4000 4000
adjustment
(b) Image location of primary scanning direction 3030 3030
(c) Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning 3032 3032
direction

(d) Image location of secondary scanning direction 3031 3031

(e) Top margin 4050 4050

(f) Left margin 4051 4051

(g) Right margin 4052 4052

(h) Bottom margin 4053 4053

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-4
[Procedure to key in adjustment values]
In accordance with the procedure described below, make adjustment of each adjustment item so that
the measured values obtained from test copies satisfy the specification. By pressing the [SETTINGS]
button, immediately after starting the Adjustment Mode (05), single-sided test copying can be
performed (normal copy mode).
<Operation keys> <Display>

0 5 TEST MODE A
MC=
POWER
1
Digital keys : Enter codes. TEST MODE A
MC=

4000 Code No.

START TEST MODE A

MC=4000

128 Default value

6
Digital keys : Enter adjustment TEST MODE A TEST MODE A
MC=4000 CLEAR/STOP MC=4000
values.
( CLEAR/STOP Use to make corrections) 130

TEST MODE A
OK Value130 is stored, MC=
overwriting value 128.

Test
SETTINGS 1
100 % 1 A4
Test copy AUTO EXPOSURE

START TEXT

If the test copy does not

satisfy the specified values,
return to step 1 and
repeat the adjustment
procedure.

Power OFF/ON : Exit the Adjustment Mode.

Fig.6-6

6.3.2 Light volume adjustment of scanner LED

Perform the light volume adjustment of scanner LED according to the following procedure.

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.
(2) Key in a code “3219” and press the [START] button. The automatic adjustment starts. When the
adjustment is completed, “COMPLETED” appears.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-5
6.3.3 Paper alignment at the registration roller
The aligning amount is adjusted by using the following codes in Adjustment Mode (05).

PFP
PFP lower
upper
Bypass 2nd drawer drawer
Paper type Weight 1st drawer ADU drawer
feed (PFU) <2329A/
<2329A/
2829A>
2829A>

Plain paper 64 - 80 g/m2 4100 (*1) 4103 (*1) 4110 (*1) 4101 (*1) 4108 (*1) 4109 (*1)
17 - 20 lb. Bond

Thick paper 81 - 105g/m2 - 4104 (*1) - - - -

21 - 28 lb. Bond

Thick paper 1 106 - 163g/m2 - 4105 (*1) - - - -

29 lb. Bond - 60
lb. Cover

Thick paper 2 164 - 216 g/m2 - 4106 (*1) - - - -

61 lb. Cover -
80 lb. Cover

Thin paper 52 - 63 g/m2 - 4102 (*2) - - - -

OHP - - 4107 (*3) - - - -

Envelope - - 4405 (*4) - - - -

Sub-code
(*1) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size
(*2) 0: Long size 1: Middle size 2: Short size 3: Post card
(*3) 0: Long size of OHP film 1: Middle size of OHP film 2: Short size of OHP film
(*4) 0: Long size of Envelope 1: Middle size of Envelope 2: Short size of Envelope

Notes:
Long size: 330 mm or longer (13.0 inches or longer)
Middle size: 220-239 mm (8.7-12.9 inches)
Short size: 219 mm or shorter (8.6 inches or shorter)

<Procedure>

(1) Perform the test print according to the following procedure.

[0][5] Current value

(Code) [START] (Sub Code) [START]
[Power] displayed

Enter new [OK] [1] (*5) [TEMPLATE]

value (Stored in memory) (Test print)

(Select the paper source) [STRAT]

(*5) 1: Single-sided grid pattern, 3: Double-sided grid pattern

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-6
 (2) Check if any transfer void is occurring. If there is a transfer problem, try the values in descending
order as “31” → “30” → “29”··· until the transfer void disappears. At the same time, confirm if any
paper jam occurs. Also, when the aligning amount has been increased, this may increase the
scraping noise caused by the paper and the film sheet as it is transported by the registration
roller. If this scraping noise is annoying, try to decrease the value.

Transfer void

mm
00
-1
mm
50 6
Fig.6-7

(3) Perform the same procedure for all paper sources.

Notes:
When paper thinner than specified is used, paper jams may occur frequently at the registration
section. In this case, it is advisable to change (or reduce) the aligning amount.
However, if the aligning amount is reduced too much, this may cause the shift of leading edge
position. So, when adjusting the aligning amount, try to choose the appropriate amount while
confirming the leading edge position is not shifted.
* As a tentative countermeasure, the service life of the feed roller can be extended by
increasing the aligning amount.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-7
6.3.4 Printer related adjustment
The printer related adjustment is performed by using the printed out grid pattern.

1 21
A
6
B, E

2
D
5
30
Feeding direction

C
10

Fig.6-8 Grid pattern

Adjustment
Detail of adjustment
Tolerance
A 200 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-9 “[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of
image writing frequency/PRT)”
B 52 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-10 “[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position / Drawer
sideways deviation”
C 200 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-12 “[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine
adjustment of main motor rotation speed (Copier/Printer))”
D 52 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-13 “[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position”
E 52 ± 0.5mm  P. 6-14 “[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing”

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-8
[A] Reproduction ratio of primary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of image writing
frequency/PRT)
Notes:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→ Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen)

→ [1] → [TEMPLATE] → [START] (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)

(4) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance A from the 1st line
to the 21st line of the grid pattern.
6
(5) Check if the distance A is within 200±0.5 mm.

(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.

(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [4001]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ Press [1] → Press [TEMPLATE] → [START] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance A becomes (approx. 0.1 mm/step).

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6-9
[B] Primary scanning data laser writing start position / Drawer sideways deviation
Notes:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

[B-1] Primary scanning data laser writing start position

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→ Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen)

→ [1] → [TEMPLATE] → [START] (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)

(4) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge
of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.

(5) Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.

(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.

(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [4006]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ Press [1] → Press [TEMPLATE] → [START] → (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).
(7) After the adjustment for the code 4006 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 4005.

(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [4005]) → [START]

→ (Key in the same value in the step 6 above)
→ Press [OK] (Stored in memory).

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 10
[B-2] Drawer sideways deviation
This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. (If there is no paper source, skip this step.)
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and
acceptable values.

Order for Acceptable

Paper source Code Paper size Remarks
adjustment value

0 Upper drawer 4018-0 A3/LD 0 to 255

1 Bypass feed 4018-5 A3/LD 0 to 255

2 Lower drawer (PFU) 4018-1 A3/LD 0 to 255

3 PFP1 (Upper drawer) 4018-2 A3/LD 0 to 255 <2329A/2829A>

4 PFP2 (Lower drawer) 4018-3 A3/LD 0 to 255 <2329A/2829A>

<Procedure>
6
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select the paper source → Set
the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in the drawer.

(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen)

→ [1] → [TEMPLATE] → Select the paper source → [START] (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares
is printed out.)

(4) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance B from the left edge
of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.

(5) Check if the distance B is within 52±0.5 mm.

(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.

(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [4018]) → [START] → (Key in the sub code) →[START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory).
→ Press [1] → [TEMPLATE] →Select the paper source →[START]
→ (A grid pattern is printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance B becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 11
[C] Reproduction ratio of secondary scanning direction (Fine adjustment of main motor
rotation speed (Copier/Printer))

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment mode)

(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→ Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen)

→ [1] → [TEMPLATE] → [START] (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out.)

(4) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance C from the 10th
line at the tail end of the paper to the 30th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.

(5) Check if the distance C is within 200±0.5 mm.

(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.

(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [4009]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ Press [1] → Press [TEMPLATE] → Select [DRAWER1] → [START] → (A grid pattern is printed
out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance C becomes (approx. 0.14 mm/
step).

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 12
[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position
This adjustment has to be performed for each paper source. (If there is no paper source, skip this step.)
The following table shows the order of the paper source to be adjusted, code, paper size and
acceptable values.

Order for Acceptable

Paper source Code Paper size Remarks
adjustment value

1 Upper drawer 4058 A3/LD 0 to 40

2 Bypass feed 4061 A3/LD 0 to 15

3 Lower drawer (PFU) 4059 A3/LD 0 to 15

4 PFP 4060 A3/LD 0 to 15 <2329A/2829A>

5 Duplexing 4062 A3/LD 0 to 15

Notes:
Since the laser writing start position for Bypass feed is determined on basis of the one for Upper
drawer, the adjustment for Upper drawer must be performed beforehand.
6

<Procedure>

• Upper drawer, Lower drawer (PFU), PFP, Bypass feed

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select the paper source → Set
the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD paper in the drawer.
(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen)
→ [1] → [TEMPLATE] → Select the paper source → [START] (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares
is printed out.)
(4) Check the grid pattern on the test chart printed out and measure the distance D from the leading
edge of the paper to the 5th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(5) Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code shown above) → [START]
→ (Key in an acceptable value shown above)
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ Press [1] → Press [TEMPLATE] → Select the paper source → [START] → (A grid pattern is
printed out.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the shorter the distance D becomes and the blank area
becomes narrower (approx. 0.54 mm/step).

• Duplexing
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)
(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select the paper source → Set
the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in the drawer.
(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen)
→ [3] → [TEMPLATE] → Select the paper source → [START] (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares
is printed out on both sides of the paper.)
(4) Check the grid pattern printed on the reverse side of test chart and measure the distance D from
the leading edge of the paper to the 5th line of the grid pattern.
* Normally, the 1st line of the grid pattern is not printed.
(5) Check if the distance D is within 52±0.5 mm.
(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.
(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [4062]) → [START]
→ (Key in an acceptable value shown above)
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ Press [3] → Press [TEMPLATE] → Select the paper source → [START] → (A grid pattern is
printed out on both sides of the paper.)
© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A
SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 13
 * The larger the adjustment value is, the shorter the distance D becomes and the blank area
becomes narrower (approx. 0.54 mm/step).

[E] Primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing

Notes:
Make sure the first line of the grid pattern is printed out since the line is occasionally vanished.

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→ Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen)

→ [3] → [TEMPLATE] → [START] (A grid pattern with 10 mm squares is printed out on both sides
of the paper.)

(4) Check the grid pattern printed on the reverse side of test chart and measure the distance E from
the left edge of the paper to the 6th line of the grid pattern.

(5) Check if the distance E is within 52±0.5 mm.

(6) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.

(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in code [4019]) → [START] → [0] → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ Press [3] → [TEMPLATE] →[START].→(A grid pattern is printed out on both sides of the
paper.)
* The larger the adjustment value is, the longer the distance E becomes (approx. 0.05 mm/
step).

(7) After the adjustment for the code 4019-0 is completed, apply the same adjustment value for the
code 4019-1.

(Adjustment Mode) → (Key in the code [4019]) → [START] → [1] → [START]

→ (Key in the same value in the step 6 above) → Press [OK] (Stored in memory).

<Adjustment procedure summarization for A to E>

When the value is 1.

[0] [5] [Power ON] → [1] ([3](05-4062, 4019) for duplexing) → [TEMPLATE] →Select [DRAWER1]
→[START]
A: 05-4001 (Upper drawer, A3/LD) → 200±0.5 mm (0.1 mm/step)
B: [B-1] 05-4006 (Upper drawer, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
→ Key in the same value for 05-4005.
[B-2] 05-4018-1 (PFU, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
05-4018-2 (PFP1, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
05-4018-3 (PFP2, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
05-4018-5 (Bypass feed, A3/LD) → 52±0.5 mm (0.04 mm/step)
C: 05-4009 (Upper drawer, A3/LD) → 200±0.5 mm (0.14 mm/step)
D: 05-4058 (Upper drawer, A3/LD), →52±0.5 mm (0.54 mm/step)
05-4059 (PFU, A3/LD),
05-4060 (PFP, A3/LD)
05-4061 (Bypass feed, A3/LD),
05-4062 (Duplexing, A3/LD)
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 14
 E: 05-4019-0 (Upper drawer, A3/LD) →52±0.5 mm (0.05 mm/step)
→ Key in the same value for 05-4019-1.

6.3.5 Scanner related adjustment

[A] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary scanning direction

<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Place a ruler on the original glass (along the direction from the rear to the front of the equipment).

(3) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(4) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.
6
(5) Measure the distance A from 10 mm to 270 mm of the copied image of the ruler.

(6) Check if the distance A is within the range of 260±0.5 mm.

(7) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance A again.
[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [4000]) → [START]
→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the higher the reproduction ratio and the longer the
distance A become (approx. 0.15 mm/step).

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 15
 250
200
Copied image of the ruler

150

A
100
50

Feeding direction

Fig.6-9

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 16
[B] Image position adjustment of the primary scanning direction
<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the rear side and its side
along the original scale on the left.

(3) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(4) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.

(5) Measure the distance B from the left edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the ruler.

(6) Check if the distance B is within the range of 10±0.5 mm.

6
(7) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance B again.

[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [3030]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The smaller the adjustment value is, the more the image is shifted to the left and the distance
B becomes narrower (approx. 0.04 mm/step).

Copied image of the ruler

200
150
100
50

Feeding direction

Fig.6-10

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 17
[C] Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary scanning direction
<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.

(3) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(4) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.

(5) Measure the distance C from 200 mm to 400 mm of the copied image of the ruler.

(6) Check if the distance C is within the range of 200±0.5 mm.

(7) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance C again.

[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [3032]*) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The smaller the adjustment value is, the lower the reproduction ratio becomes (approx. 0.06
mm/step).
* 05-3032: For 2323AM/2823AM, perform the adjustment within a range between 0 to 177.

Copied image of the ruler

50 100 150 200 250 300 350 400

Feeding direction

Fig.6-11

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 18
[D] Image position adjustment of the secondary scanning direction
<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Place a ruler on the original glass with its leading edge pushed against the original scale on the
left.

(3) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]

→Set the paper size to A3/LD. → [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(4) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.

(5) Measure the distance D from the leading edge of the paper to 10 mm of the copied image of the
ruler.

(6) Check if the distance D is within the range of 10±0.5 mm. 6

(7) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance D again.

[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [3031]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the more the image is shifted to the trailing edge (approx.
0.13 mm/step).

Copied image of the ruler

10 20 30 40

Feeding direction

Fig.6-12

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 19
[E] Top margin
<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Open the original cover or RADF.

(3) [TEMPLATE] → Set the density to the largest value and the original mode to Text.

(4) [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] →Select [DRAWER1] →

→ [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(5) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.

(6) Measure the blank area E at the leading edge of the copied image.

(7) Check if the blank area E is within the range of 3±0.5 mm.

(8) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance E again.

[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [4050]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area becomes (approx. 0.04 mm/
step).

Feeding direction

Fig.6-13

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 20
[F] Left margin
<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Open the original cover or RADF.

(3) [TEMPLATE] → Set the density to the largest value and the original mode to Text.

(4) [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] →Select [DRAWER1] → Set the paper size to A3/
LD.
→ [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(5) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.

(6) Measure the blank area F at the left side of the copied image.
6
(7) Check if the blank area F is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.

(8) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance F again.

[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [4051]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the left side becomes (approx.
0.04 mm/step).

Feeding direction

Fig.6-14

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 21
[G] Right margin
<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Open the original cover or RADF.

(3) [TEMPLATE] → Set the density to the largest value and the original mode to Text.

(4) [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] →Select [DRAWER1] → Set the paper size to A3/
LD.
→ [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(5) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.

(6) Measure the blank area G at the right side of the copied image.

(7) Check if the blank area G is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.

(8) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance G again.

[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [4052]) → [START]

→ (Key in a value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the right side becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).

Feeding direction

Fig.6-15

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 22
[H] Bottom margin
<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → (Adjustment Mode)

(2) Open the original cover or RADF.

(3) [TEMPLATE] → Set the density to the largest value and the original mode to Text.

(4) [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] →Select [DRAWER1] → Set the paper size to A3/
LD.
→ [OK] → Set A3/LD for the paper in upper drawer.

(5) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START]
to make copies.

(6) Measure the blank area H at the trailing edge of the copied image.
6
(7) Check if the blank area H is within the range of 2±1.0 mm.

(8) If not, use the following procedure to change values and measure the distance H again.

[TEMPLATE] → (Key in the code [4053]) → [START]

→ (Key in value (acceptable values: 0 to 255))
→ [OK] (Stored in memory)
→ [TEMPLATE] → Select the upper drawer by pressing [DRAWER]. → Press [START] to make
copies.
* The larger the adjustment value is, the wider the blank area at the trailing edge becomes
(approx. 0.04 mm/step).

Feeding direction

Fig.6-16

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 23
6.4 Image Quality Adjustment (Copying Function)

6.4.1 Automatic gamma adjustment

When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, it can be corrected by performing this automatic
gamma adjustment. At the parts replacement and in case the gradation reproduction of the image is not
satisfactory, make this adjustment as described below.

(1) When unpacking or any of the following parts has been replaced, be sure to make this
adjustment:
• Photoconductive drum
• Developer material
• Laser optical unit
• Transfer roller
• Drum cleaning blade
• Main charger grid
• Memory IC*

* 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: IC10, 2329A/2829A: IC11

Code Item to be adjusted Contents

05-7165 Automatic gamma When the reproduction of gradation is not appropriate, it can be corrected by
adjustment performing this automatic gamma adjustment.
05-7167 Automatic gamma
adjustment (binary
dithering)

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON. → Adjustment Mode
(2) [TEMPLATE] → [USER FUNCTIONS] → Select [DRAWER] → Select [DRAWER1]
→ Set the paper size to A4/LT. → [OK] → Set A4/LT for the paper in upper drawer.
(3) [CANCEL] → [CANCEL] → [TEMPLATE] (Return to code entry screen.)
→ [10] → [TEMPLATE] → [START] (A gamma adjustment patch chart is printed out.)
(4) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (3) face down on the original glass. Place the
chart aligning its black side of the gradation pattern against the original scale.
(5) Key in a code “7165” and press the [START] button.
(6) If process finishes successfully, select “Yes” and press the [OK] button to apply the adjustments.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “Error” is shown.
Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the error display. Next, confirm that the patch chart is
oriented correctly on the platen and not at an angle, then do the process from step (4) again.
(7) Press [20] → Press [TEMPLATE] → Press [START].
Notes:
Compare with chart output in step (3), there should be no differences in patterns and no faint
colors.
(8) Place the patch chart for adjustment printed in step (7) face down on the original glass. Place the
chart aligning its black side of the gradation pattern against the original scale.
(9) Key in a code “7167” and press the [START] button.
(10) If process finishes successfully, select “Yes” and press the [OK] button to apply the adjustments.
(To cancel the reflection of adjustment results, press the [CANCEL] button.)
In the case of an abnormal ending, “Error” is shown. Press the [CANCEL] button to clear the
error display. Next, confirm that the patch chart is oriented correctly on the platen and not at an
angle, then do the process from step (9) again.
(11) Turn the power OFF.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 24
6.4.2 Density adjustment
The center density and the density variation controlled by density adjustment keys can be adjusted as
follows.

< Adjustment Mode (05) >

Original mode
Background Item to be
Remarks
Text/Photo Photo Text Erase adjusted

7114 7116 7115 7143 Manual The larger the value is, the darker the
density mode image becomes.
center value Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

7123 7125 7124 7142 Automatic The larger the value is, the darker the
density mode image becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)
6
Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3) Key in an adjustment value.

(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR/STOP] button.)

(4) Press the [OK] button to store the value. → The equipment goes back to the test mode A screen.

(5) Press the [TEMPLATE] button and then the [START] button. Then perform test copying.

(6) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (1) to (5).

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 25
6.4.3 Background adjustment
The density of the background can be adjusted as follows.

< Adjustment Mode (05) >

Original mode
Background Item to be
Remarks
Text/Photo Photo Text Erase adjusted

7033 7043 7034 7107 Automatic The larger the value is, the darker the
density mode background becomes.
Acceptable values:0 to 255
(Default: 128)

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

6.4.4 Sharpness adjustment

If you want to make copy images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment.

< Adjustment Mode (05) >

Original mode
Background Item to be
Remarks
Erase adjusted
Text/Photo Photo Text

7056 7058 7057 7063 Sharpness The larger the value is, the sharper the
adjustment image becomes; while the smaller the
value is, the softer the image becomes.
The smaller the value is, the less moire
tends to appear.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
(Default: 128)

Make a test copy and compare the image obtained with the current settings; if necessary, make
adjustment using the following procedure.

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 26
6.4.5 Gamma balance adjustment
The density is adjusted by adjusting the gamma balance. The adjustment is performed by selecting its
density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.

< Adjustment Mode (05) >

Language and screen

Background Item to be
Remarks
Text/Photo Photo Text Erase adjusted

7190-0 7192-0 7191-0 7195-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density of
the item to be adjusted becomes darker.
7190-1 7192-1 7191-1 7195-1 Medium Acceptable values: 0 to 255.
density (Default: 128)
7190-2 7192-2 7191-2 7195-2 High density

Notes:
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and 6
high density range will become slightly darker.

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2) Key in the code for an item to be adjusted and then press the [START] button.

(3) Key in a number for the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2), and then press the [START]
button.
0: Low density, 1: Medium density, 2: High density

(4) Key in an adjustment value.

(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR/STOP] button.)

(5) Press the [OK] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the test mode A
screen.

(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

(7) Press the [TEMPLATE] button and then the [START] button. Then perform test copying.

(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 27
6.4.6 Adjustment of image density
The image density level can be set at the following codes.

< Adjustment Mode (05) >

Code
Background Item to be
Remarks
Text/photo Text Photo Erase adjusted

7218-0 to 4 7219-0 to 4 7220-0 to 4 7223-0 to 4 Adjustment of When the value is decreased, text
image density becomes lighter.
Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
• Set not to reverse the large
and small number of the
setting value corresponding
to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density
level for 7218-0, 7218-1,
7218-2, 7218-3, and 7218-4
is assumed to be “A”, “B”,
“C”, “D”, and “E”
respectively, they should
have the following
correlation:
A B C D E
• Remember that the image
specifications and life span
of the replacing parts may
not meet the standard when
the setting value is changed
from the default value.

<Procedure>

(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3) Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.

(4) Key in an adjustment value.

(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR/STOP] button.)

(5) Press the [OK] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the test mode A
screen.

(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

(7) Press the [TEMPLATE] button and then select an original mode. Then press the [START] button
to perform test copying.

(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 28
6.4.7 Background offsetting adjustment for RADF
The background level for scanning originals with the RADF is adjusted when the background fogging at
the scanning of a manually-set original and an original used with the RADF is different. This is to adjust
the level of the background image removed when the scanning of the originals with the RADF is
performed.

< Adjustment Mode (05) >

Code Item to be adjusted Remarks

7025 Background offsetting adjustment The larger the value is, the darker the background
for RADF becomes.
(Black and white scan/copy) Acceptable values:0 to 255 (Default: 128)
7026 Background offsetting adjustment The larger the value is, the darker the background
for RADF becomes.
(Color scan) Acceptable values:0 to 255 (Default: 128)

<Procedure> 6
Procedure is same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 29
6.5 Image Quality Adjustment (Printing Function)

6.5.1 Adjustment of image density

The image density level can be set at the following codes.

< Adjustment Mode (05) >

PCL (Toner Item to be

Test Print PCL* Remarks
save) adjusted

7355-0 to 4 7350-0 to 4 7352-0 to 4 Adjustment of When the value is decreased, text becomes lighter.
image density Acceptable values: 0 to 10
Notes:
• Set not to reverse the large and small
number of the setting value corresponding
to the sub code.
Ex.) When the image density level for 7355-
0, 7355-1, 7355-2, 7355-3, and 7355-4 is
assumed to be “A”, “B”, “C”, “D”, and “E”
respectively, they should have the following
correlation:A B C D E
• Remember that the image specifications
and life span of the replacing parts may not
meet the standard when the setting value is
changed from the default value.
* PCL: 2329A/2829A only

<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3) Key in the sub code (0, 1, 2, 3 or 4), and press the [START] button.

(4) Key in an adjustment value.

(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR/STOP] button.)

(5) Press the [OK] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the test mode A
screen.

(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

(7) Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job.

(8) If the desired image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 30
6.5.2 Gamma balance adjustment
The density is adjusted by adjusting the gamma balance. The adjustment is performed by selecting its
density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Color Smooth Detail

Item to be adjusted Remarks
mode (PCL) (PCL)
Black 7317-0 7318-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density of the
(600dpi) 7317-1 7318-1 Medium density item to be adjusted becomes darker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7317-2 7318-2 High density (Default: 128)
Notes:
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.
6
<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2) Key in the codes to be adjusted screen and press the [START] button.

(3) Key in the value corresponding to the density area to be adjusted (0, 1 or 2) and press the
[START] button.
0: Low density 1: Medium density 2: High density

(4) Key in an adjustment value. (To correct the value once keyed in, press the [CLEAR/STOP]
button.)

(5) Press the [OK] button to store the value in memory. The equipment goes back to the test mode A
screen.

(6) For resetting the value, repeat step (2) to (5).

(7) Turn the power OFF and then back ON to perform printing job.

(8) If the image density has not been attained, repeat step (2) to (7).

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 31
6.6 Image Quality Adjustment (Scanning Function)

6.6.1 Gamma balance adjustment

The density is adjusted by adjusting the gamma balance. The adjustment is performed by selecting its
density area from the following: low density, medium density and high density.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Black
Item to be
Original mode Gray Scale Remarks
adjusted
Text/Photo Text Photo

7485-0 7486-0 7487-0 7488-0 Low density The larger the value is, the density of
the item to be adjusted becomes darker.
7485-1 7486-1 7487-1 7488-1 Medium density Acceptable values:
0 to 255 (Default: 128)
7485-2 7486-2 7487-2 7488-2 High density

Notes:
Changing the adjustment setting influences the adjacent density area slightly.
E.g.: When the value of the medium density is larger, the adjacent areas in the low density and
high density range will become slightly darker.

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of  P. 6-27 “6.4.5 Gamma balance adjustment”.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 32
6.6.2 Density adjustment
Adjusts the center density and the variation of density adjustment buttons.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Original mode
Color Item to be
Text Remarks
Mode Text Photo adjusted
/Photo

Color 8339 8340 8341 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the image
center value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Black
6
Original mode Gray Item to be
Remarks
Scale adjusted
Text/
Text Photo
Photo

7444 7445 7446 7447 Manual density The larger the value is, the darker the image
center value becomes.
Acceptable values: 0 to 255
7456 7457 7458 7459 Automatic (Default: 128)
density

<Procedure>
Procedure is same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 33
6.6.3 Sharpness adjustment
If you want to make scan images look softer or sharper, perform the following adjustment. The
adjustment can be made for each of the color modes and original modes independently.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code Color mode Original mode Contents

8335 Full Color Text The larger the value is, the sharper the image becomes; while
the smaller the value is, the softer the image becomes.
8336 Photo
The smaller the value is, the less moire tends to appear.
8354 Text/Photo The acceptable values are 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
7430 Black Text/Photo
7431 Text
7432 Photo
7433 Gray Scale -
Notes:
You have to make adjustment by balancing between moire and sharpness.

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

6.6.4 Background adjustment

The adjustment level of background center value is adjusted. The control value of background
adjustment button is automatically adjusted to the same level as the adjusted center value.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code Color mode Original mode Contents

05-8309 Color Text/Photo
05-8310 Text
05-8311 Photo
The larger the value is, the darker the background becomes.
05-8400 Black Text/Photo
Acceptable values:0 to 255 (Default: 128)
- Text
05-8402 Photo
05-8403 Gray Scale -

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 34
6.6.5 Fine adjustment of black density
The density of black side on scanned image is adjusted at color-scanning.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code Original mode Default Remarks

8314 Text / Photo 1 The larger the value is, the black side of the image becomes darker.
Acceptable values: 0 to 4
8315 Text 0
8316 Photo 0
Notes:
Be careful for the value not to be too large since the gradation is reproduced worse in darker
side.

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.
6
6.6.6 RGB conversion method selection
The color space conversion method of image is decided at color-scanning.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code Original mode Remarks

8319 Text /Photo 0: sRGB, 1: AppleRGB, 2: ROMMRGB, 3: AdobeRGB
(Default: 0)
8320 Text
8321 Photo

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

6.6.7 Adjustment of saturation

The saturation of the scanned image is adjusted for color-scanning.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code Original mode Remarks

8324 Text / Photo The larger the value is, the brighter the image becomes.
The smaller the value is, the duller the image becomes.
8325 Text
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 128)
8326 Photo

<Procedure>
The procedure is the same as that of  P. 6-25 “6.4.2 Density adjustment”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 35
6.7 Adjustment of the Scanner Section

6.7.1 CIS unit

[A] Replacing the CIS unit

• The CIS unit must not be readjusted and some part of its components must not be replaced in the
field since the unit is precisely adjusted. If any of the components is defective, replace the whole
unit.
• Handle the CIS unit with care not to contaminate the lens with fingerprints or such.
• Take off 2 original glass guides from the CIS unit, and then install a new CIS unit.
• Be sure to perform “05-3219” with the original cover or the RADF closed after replacing the CIS unit.

6.7.2 Adjustment of Start Timing for Original Detection <2329A/2829A

only>
The start timing of the original size detection at the closing of the original cover or the RADF is adjusted.

<Adjustment Mode (05)>

Code Item to be adjusted Remarks

3312 Original size detection The larger the value is, the start timing of the original size
Detection start timing adjustment detection becomes backward.
(This is effective when the original cover or the RADF is
closed slowly. It is recommended to adjust the value from
20 to 30 at a maximum.)
The smaller the value is, the start timing of the original size
detection becomes forward.
(This is effective when the original cover or the RADF is
closed quickly. It is recommended to adjust the setting
value to “0”.)
Acceptable values: 0 to 255 (Default: 10)

<Procedure>
(1) While pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously, turn the power ON.

(2) Key in a code and press the [START] button.

(3) Key in an adjustment value.

(To correct the keyed-in value, press the [CLEAR/STOP] button.)

(4) Press the [OK] button to store the value. → The equipment goes back to the test mode A screen.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 36
6.8 Adjustment of the Paper Feeding System
Adjustment for Drawer sideways deviation. (Refer to  P. 6-11 “[B-2] Drawer sideways deviation”)
If deviation still occurs, perform the following:

6.8.1 Sheet sideways deviation caused by paper feeding (Drawer only)

<Procedure>

The center of the printed image shifts to the front The center of the printed image shifts to the rear
side. → Move the drawer to the front side (Arrow side. → Move the drawer to the rear side (Arrow
(A) direction in the lower figure). (B) direction in the lower figure).

[Rear] [Rear]

6
Feeding direction Feeding direction
Center Center

[Front] [Front]

Fig.6-17 Fig.6-18

(1) Loosen the screw.

(2) Move the entire drawer to the front or rear side.
(3) Tighten the screw.

Fig.6-19

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 37
6.9 Adjustment of Developer Unit

6.9.1 Doctor-to-sleeve gap

(1) Perform the adjustment code “05-2390”
(2) Take out the process unit from the equipment.
 P. 4-47 “4.7.1 Process unit”
(3) Take out the drum cleaner unit from the process unit so that only the developer unit will be left in
it.
 P. 4-49 “4.7.2 Drum cleaner unit”
Notes:
• Be careful not to touch or scratch the drum surface.
• Avoid direct light. Place the drum in a dark place immediately after taking off.
• Place the removed drum cleaner unit facing the direction shown in the figure.

[1]

[2]

Fig.6-20

(4) Remove the developer material.

 P. 4-59 “4.7.17 Removing developer material”
(5) Turn the adjustment screw to widen the gap so that the jig can be inserted in it. (The front side of
the developer unit is fixed by means of the spring's weight.)

Spring

Fig.6-21

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 38
 (6) Insert the gauge with the thickness “0.45” of the doctor sleeve jig into the gap between the
developer sleeve and doctor blade after lifting up the toner scattering prevention sheet.
Adjust the screws with the doctor blade to push the doctor sleeve jig lightly.

Doctor sleeve jig

Screw

Toner scattering
prevention sheet
Fig.6-22
6
(7) Insert the gauge “0.40” of the doctor sleeve jig into the gap between the developer sleeve and
doctor blade. Confirm that the jig moves smoothly to the front and rear side, and the gauge “0.50”
cannot be inserted into the gap.

Doctor sleeve jig

Developer
sleeve

Fig.6-23

(8) Confirm that the side seals are attached on the toner scattering prevention sheet.

Toner scattering
prevention sheet

Side seal
Fig.6-24

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 39
6.10 Adjustment of the RADF

6.10.1 Tray volume adjustment

[A] General description

Perform this adjustment when the original tray (volume) or the RADF board is replaced.

[B] Adjustment Method

(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Minimize the width of the side guide of the tray.
(3) [3050] → [START]
The tray volume adjustment starts. When the adjustment is completed properly, the adjustment
value (100 or less) and “COMPLETED” are displayed.
Notes:
If the adjustment value is out of the appropriate range, “ERROR” is displayed on the screen. In
this case, press the [CANCEL] button and confirm that the width of the side guide is minimized.
Then reattempt the procedure from step (2).
(4) Press the [OK] button.
(5) Maximize the width of the side guide of the tray.
(6) [3051] → [START]
The tray volume adjustment starts. When the adjustment is completed properly, the adjustment
value (200 or more) and “COMPLETED” are displayed.
Notes:
If the adjustment value is out of the appropriate range, “ERROR” is displayed on the screen. In
this case, press the [CANCEL] button and confirm that the width of the side guide is maximized.
Then reattempt the procedure from step (5).
(7) Press the [OK] button.
(8) Turn the power OFF with the main power switch.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 40
6.10.2 Adjustment of Skew
Notes:
• Check if the image adjustment for the equipment has been performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.
(See the Service Manual of the applicable equipment.)
Also, the tray volume needs to be adjusted properly.
• After this adjustment is performed, be sure to carry out the leading edge position, horizontal position and
copy ratio adjustments.
• The skew volume sometimes does not become “0” even if this adjustment mechanism using the hinge is
adopted.
Moreover, a problem such as damage to parts may occur if an attempt to adjust the volume is made by
exceeding the recommended adjustment width of the hinge.

[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.

Fig.6-25

(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF and press
the [START] button.
(2) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the inclination of the copy image.

[B] Adjustment
(1) Turn the screw shown in the figure below to adjust the skew.

Fig.6-26

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 41
 (2) Turn the screw while checking the scale position of the label [1].

[1]

Fig.6-27

• 1 scale: 1.0 mm.

• Recommended adjustment range of the hinge: ±2.0 mm (when “a” is taken as a center).

-
a ±2.0 mm
+

1.0 mm
Fig.6-28

• The label position when the screw is turned by + or - 2.0 mm scales.

* The line [2] indicates the edge of the RADF cover.

+2.0mm 0.0mm -2.0mm

[2] [2] [2]

Fig.6-29

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 42
 (3) If the image skew is “C” as shown in the figure below, turn the screw in the direction of “-”, and if
“D”, turn it to “+”.

Fig.6-30 Fig.6-31
Turn the screw in the direction of “-”. Turn the screw in the direction of “+”. 6
Notes:
Turning the screw exceeding 1.5 scales or more in the “+” or “-” direction may cause a paper jam.

(4) When the adjustment is finished, reattach the platen sheet.

(5) After the RADF is closed, visually check that there is no gap between the top cover of the
scanner and the foot portions of the RADF.
If the gap is not appropriate, the adjustment range may be exceeded. In this case, turn the screw
in the “+” direction until the gap becomes appropriate.

Fig.6-32

Notes:
Be sure to reattach the platen sheet at any time after turning the screw.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 43
6.10.3 Adjustment of the leading edge position
Notes:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.

[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.

Simplex copy
(1) Place the chart on the RADF original tray with the image face up.
(2) Select [1 → 1 SIMPLEX] and press the [START] button.
(3) Place the copy on top of the chart, and check the displacement of the margin of the copied
image.

Duplex copy
(1) Place the chart on the RADF original tray with the image face down ( P. 6-44 “Fig.6-33 ”).
(2) Select [2 → 2 DUPLEX] and press the [START] button.
(3) Place the copy on top of the chart, and check the displacement of the margin of the copied
image.

Fig.6-33

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 44
[B] Adjustment

Simplex copy
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Press [3044] → [START] button.
When the margin of the copied image ( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-35 Copy”) is larger than that of the chart
( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-34 Chart (Original)”): Enter a value lower than the current one.
When the margin of the copied image ( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-35 Copy”) is smaller than that of the
chart ( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-34 Chart (Original)”): Enter a value larger than the current one.
* Changing the value by 1 point moves the margin by 0.2 mm.
(3) Press the [OK] button.

Duplex copy
(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [3045] → [START] → [CLEAR/STOP] button
When the margin of the copied image ( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-35 Copy” is larger than that of the chart
( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-34 Chart (Original)”): Enter a value lower than the current one.
When the margin of the copied image ( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-35 Copy”) is smaller than that of the 6
chart ( P. 6-45 “Fig.6-34 Chart (Original)”): Enter a value larger than the current one.
* Changing the value by 1 point moves the margin by 0.2 mm.
(3) Press the [OK] button.

E F

Fig.6-34Chart (Original) Fig.6-35Copy

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 45
6.10.4 Adjustment of horizontal position
Notes:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.

[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with a center line in the following procedure.

(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Fold the copy in half and check if the center line is misaligned.

[B] Adjustment

(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [3043] and then press the [START] button.
(3) Enter the value.
• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the front side of the equipment, enter a value
larger than the current one.
Notes:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.04 mm.

Fig.6-36

• If the center line of the copy image is shifted to the rear side of the equipment, enter a value
smaller than the current one.
Notes:
Changing one value shifts the copy image by 0.04 mm.

Fig.6-37

(4) Press the [OK] button.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 46
6.10.5 Adjustment of copy ratio
Notes:
Check if the image adjustment for the equipment is performed properly before this adjustment of
the RADF.

[A] Checking
Check the image using the chart (original) with vertical and horizontal lines in the following procedure.

(1) Place the chart provided as an original with its face up on the original tray of the RADF.
(2) Press the [START] button.
(3) Superimpose the chart on the copy and check the image dimension “I”.

[B] Adjustment

(1) Turn the power ON while pressing [0] and [5] simultaneously.
(2) Key in [3042] and then press the [START] button.
(3) Enter the value. 6
• If the copy image dimension “I” is larger than the chart dimension, enter a value smaller than the
current one.
• If the copy image dimension “I” is smaller than the chart dimension, enter a value larger than the
current one.

I
Fig.6-38

(4) Press the [OK] button.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 47
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
SETTING / ADJUSTMENT
6 - 48
7. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)

7.1 General Description

Perform the preventive maintenance in the following timing.
2323AM/2329A: every 59,000 sheets or 115,000 counts (drive count) have passed from the start
of use (Whichever comes earlier)
2523A/2523AD: every 61,000 sheets or 115,000 counts (drive count) have passed from the start
of use (Whichever comes earlier)
2823AM/2829A: every 64,000 sheets or 115,000 counts (drive count) have passed from the start
of use (Whichever comes earlier)

(1) Preparation
• Ask the user about the current conditions of the equipment and note them down.
• Before starting maintenance, make some sample copies and store them.
• Turn OFF the power and make sure to unplug the equipment.
(2) Perform a preventive maintenance using the following checklist and illustrations.
(3) Plug in the equipment after the maintenance has been finished. Then turn ON the power and
make some copies to confirm that the equipment is working properly.
(4) After preventive maintenance, set the value of 08-6194 (Current value of PM counter Display) or 7
08-6195 (Current value of PM drive counter Display) to “0”.
* This deletes the message “Time for maintenance”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-1
7.2 PM Support Mode (6S)

7.2.1 General description

The timing for the parts replacement usually depends on the number of output pages ever printed after
they were replaced before. However, the life span of them changes depending on the general use of
users and the environment in which the equipment is placed. Therefore, it is necessary to consider not
only the number of output pages but also the drive counts when deciding the timing for the parts
replacement in order to utilize the parts and materials effectively.
This equipment has a PM support mode, which displays information on the state of use (number of
pages printed, drive time) of each replacement part, and enables the counter to be cleared more
efficiently during replacement.
The replacement record can be printed out in the list printing mode (9S-103).

7.2.2 Operational flow and operational screen

[ 1 ] Operational flow

PM support mode activated

[6] + [START] + [POWER] ON

PM support mode:
[1] [START]
Select screen for the developer material type
Code input screen
Adjustment When a pouch type developer
Code input screen When a cartridge type
displayed. finished material is used (the material
developer material is used,
select "INSTALLED DEV" has already been installed in
as shown below. the developer unit), select
[CANCEL] pressed [2] [START] "NOT INSTALLED DEV"
as shown below.
Main Unit screen
Main unit list displayed

[ ] pressed Main unit chosen

[ ] pressed

Sub Unit screen

Sub unit list displayed

Sub unit chosen

[ ] pressed [ ] pressed

Counter Item screen

Counter item Auto-toner automatic

displayed. adjustment perfomed

Item chosen Adjustment

[ ] pressed [ ] pressed
finished

Counter value screen

Automatic gamma
Counter value
displayed. adjustment perfomed

Fig. 7-1

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-2
[ 2 ] Basic operation procedure
Example) Checking the Drum OUTPUT PAGE
1. Turn ON the power while pressing [START] and [6] simultaneously.
The screen for entering the code will be displayed.

PM SUPPORT MODE
ENTER THE CODE

Fig. 7-2

2. Press the [2] button and then the [START] button.

The Main Unit screen will be displayed.

PM SUPPORT MODE
CLEANER/DRUM
DEVELOPE 7
TRANSFER UNIT
Fig. 7-3

3. Select [CLEANER/DRUM] with the arrow button and press the button.
The Sub Unit screen will be displayed.

CLEANER/DRUM
DRUM
DRUM BLADE
GRID
Fig. 7-4

4. Select [DRUM] with the arrow button and press the button.
The Counter item screen will be displayed.

DRUM
OUTPUT PAGES
PM OUTPUT PAGES
DRIVER COUNTS
Fig. 7-5

5. Select [OUTPUT PAGES] with the arrow button and press the button.
The Drum OUTPUT PAGE will be displayed.

OUTPUT PAGES

Fig. 7-6
© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-3
[ 3 ] Counter reset procedure
1. Select [RESET] at the unit to be counter-reset or at one of the screens (Main Unit screen, Sub Unit
screen, or Counter item screen), and press the button.

RESET COUNTER

RESET COUNT=OK
Fig. 7-7

Remarks:
Select [RESET ALL COUNTER] on the main unit screen.

2. Press the [OK] button.

RESET COUNTER

COUNTERS CLEARED
Fig. 7-8

The counter of all the parts and items will be reset.

Remarks:
Press cancel the reset.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-4
[ 4 ] Menu list

2523A/
2523AD/ 2329A/
Main screen Sub screen Counter Item screen
2323AM/ 2829A
2823AM

CLEANER DRUM DRUM Y Y

DRUM BLADE Y Y

GRID Y Y

NEEDLE ELECTRODE Y Y

SEPARATION FINGER(DRUM) Y Y

RECOVERY BLADE Y Y

RESET Y Y

DEVELOPER DEVELOPER Y Y

TRANSFER UNIT TRANSFER ROLLER Y Y

FILTER OZONE FILTER Y Y 7

FUSER FUSER ROLLER Y Y

PRESS ROLLER Y Y

SEPARATION FINFER(FUSER) Y Y

FUSERROLLER BUSHING Y Y
OUTPUT PAGES
1st CST. MAIN FEED ROLLER(1st CST.) PM OUTPUT PAGES Y Y
DRIVER COUNTS
SEP PAD(1st CST.) PM DRIVER PAGES Y Y
RESET
2nd CST. MAIN FEED ROLLER(2nd CST.) Y Y

SEP PAD(2nd CST.) Y Y

SFB FEED ROLLER(SFB) Y Y

SEP PAD(SFB) Y Y

RADF PICK UP ROLLER(RADF) Y Y

FEED ROLLER(RADF) Y Y

SEP ROLLER(RADF) Y Y

3rd CST. PICK UP ROLLER(3rd CST.) - Y

FEED ROLLER(3rd CST.) - Y

SEP ROLLER(3rd CST.) - Y

4rd CST. PICK UP ROLLER(4th CST.) - Y

FEED ROLLER(4th CST.) - Y

SEP ROLLER(4th CST.) - Y

RESET ALL COUNTER Y Y

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-5
7.3 EPU Mode ([FUNCTION CLEAR] + [START] Buttons)

7.3.1 General description

As an ERU (Easy Replacement Unit), this equipment has an all-in-one drum clear unit and developer
unit (the EPUs), enabling easy removal and reinstallation.
In addition to this, the auto-fill function of the developer material with the cartridge is adopted.
This EPU mode allows smooth performance in the series of operations (from the counter reset for the
supply items in the EPUs, auto-toner sensor initial adjustment, developer material filling through
automatic gamma adjustment) required at the replacement of the unit.
Notes:
• Be sure to apply this mode only when the replacement is carried out with EPUs.
• Once this mode is carried out, the counters for the supply items in the EPUs are all reset. Therefore, do
not perform this mode when the supply items in the EPUs are replaced as single ones.
• If the supply items in the EPUs are replaced as single ones at PM (preventive maintenance) as usual,
perform the PM support mode (6S) described in this chapter to reset the life counter for each supply
item. If the developer material is replaced, perform auto-toner sensor adjustment and automatic gamma
adjustment.

7.3.2 Operational flow

The operation flow is shown below.

Advance preparation
A4/LT size paper needs to be placed in the drawer for automatic gamma adjustment to be performed.
Before executing the EPU mode, place A4/LT size paper and then set the paper size of the drawer.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-6
 Operation flow Display transition of control panel Behavior flow of equipment

Step 0 Load A4 or LT size paper into

 set the drawer
the drawer,
paper size, then turn OFF the
power.
Remove the used EPU from
the equipment. Set the new
EPU in the equipment, then
close the front cover.

Turn ON the power while

Step 1 pressing [Function clear] and
[START] buttons. Starts EPU mode

EPU MODE
OPEN FRONT COVER Automatic toner
When the authentication
REMOVE adjustment
screen appears, enter a service
password and press [OK]. DEV. CARTRIDGE

Clears counters of
consumables in the EPU
The authentication screen is EPU MODE 7
displayed. Press the [OK]. SET TONER
CARTRIDGE
CLOSE FRONT COVER
The developer material is filled
from the developer cartridge.
EPU MODE
PRESS [OK]

Step 2 Start auto-toner sensor

adjustment.
OK
Open the front cover, then
EPU MODE
set the toner cartridge.
SET A4/LT IN DRAWER
PRESS [OK]
Press [OK].
OK

EPU MODE

PRINTING
Step 3 Press [OK].
Prints the gamma chart
EPU MODE
SET TEST CHART
CLOSE COVER
PRESS [OK]

OK

EPU MODE
Step 4 Reads the gamma chart,
Place the printed gamma chart
on the original glass, then then performs automatic
press [OK]. WAIT gamma adjustment
EPU MODE
TURN OFF THE POWER
Step 5 Press the [ON/OFF] button Power off
for a few seconds.

Fig. 7-9

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-7
7.3.3 Counters to be cleared
• 08-6250: Drum counter
• 08-6258: Drum cleaning blade counter
• 08-6274: Main charger grid counter
• 08-6282: Needle electrode counter
• 08-6272: Drum separation finger counter
• 08-6436: Recovery blade counter
• 08-6300: Developer material counter
• 08-6194: PM counter current value
• 08-6195: PM drive counter current value
• 08-5568: Developer material-K PM counter current value
• 08-5569: Developer material-K PM time counter current value

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-8
7.4 Preventive Maintenance Checklist
The following is the check items of each unit at preventive maintenance.

Symbols/Values used in the checklist

Cleaning Lubrication/Coating Replacement Operation check

A: Clean with alcohol L: Launa 40 Value: Replacement ○: After cleaning or
B: Clean with soft pad, W1: White grease (Molykote cycle replacement, confirm there is
cloth or vacuum EM-30L) R: Replace if no problem.
cleaner W2: White grease (Molykote deformed or
HP-300) damaged
AV: Alvania No.2
FL: Floil (GE-334C)

[Preventive Maintenance checklist]

• Perform cleaning and lubricating in the following timing.
Exceptionally, the lubrication for the drum unit, main charger, developer unit and transfer unit must follow
the PM cycle of each unit.
2323AM/2329A: every 59,000 sheets or 115,000 counts (drive count)
2523A/2523AD: every 61,000 sheets or 115,000 counts (drive count)
2823AM/2829A: every 64,000 sheets or 115,000 counts (drive count) 7
• Value under “Replacement” indicates the replacement cycle.
• The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section is determined by the number of sheets fed
from each paper source.
• Be careful not to put oil on the rollers, belts and belt pulleys when lubricating.
• Page-Item (P-I) is described in the column of the Parts list.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7-9
7.4.1 Scanner

A2 A4 A1

A3
Fig. 7-10

Replacement Operation Parts list

Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>

A1 Original glass B or A 7-11 *a1

A2 RADF original glass B 7-11 *a1
A3 Slide guide B 7-43
A4 Original glass guide B R 7-17

* a1. Original glass / RADF original glass

Clean both sides of the original glass and RADF original glass.
Make sure that there is no dust after cleaning. Then install the original glass and RADF original
glass.

Notes:
• Make sure that there is no fingerprints or oil staining on part of the original glass on where the original
scale is mounted since the shading correction plate is located below the scale to be scanned.
• Grease is applied to the back side of the original glass. Therefore, when removing the original glass, be
careful not to have grease adhere to other portions and do not wipe it off.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 10
7.4.2 Feed unit

C5, C8

C5, C7

C3

C1, C4, C6

C2
Fig. 7-11

Replacement Operation Parts list

Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>

C1 Drawer feed roller A 80 19-12

C2 Drawer separation pad 80 19-10
C3 Paper guide B 12-15
C4 Drive gear W1 12-9 *c1
(tooth face and shaft)
C5 GCB bushing bearing L 12-8
C6 Plastic bushing W1 19-13
C7 Registration roller A R 12-11
(metal)
C8 Registration roller A R 9-16
(rubber)

* c1. Drive gears in the paper feeding section (teeth of gears and shafts)
Apply some white grease (Molykote EM-30L) to the teeth of gears and shafts of the drive gears.
When disassembling the driving section and applying grease at PM, follow the notes as below.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 11
Registration roller (metal)

Main motor
drive unit
Registration
roller clutch
Registration
Registration roller clutch roller clutch

C D

Registration roller (metal)

approx.
50mm

Fig. 7-12

A: Do not apply grease. Wipe off any grease.

B: Do not apply grease. Wipe off any grease.
C: Apply a blob of grease (the size of a rice grain) to the gear teeth of the registration roller clutch. Be
careful not to use too much.
D: Do not apply grease. Wipe off any grease.

Notes:
Make sure that oil is not running over or scattered around as the gear is rotated coming into the
clutch after applying Molykote to the gear which is located near the clutch. The quantity of
Molykote should be smaller than that to be applied to the other parts.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 12
7.4.3 Bypass feed unit

E3

E1, E4, E5 E2 7
Fig. 7-13

Replacement Operation Parts list

Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>

E1 Bypass Feed roller 80 8-19

E2 Bypass separation pad 50 8-10
E3 Bypass tray B 11-5
E4 GCB bushing bearing L 8-4
E5 Plastic bushing W1 8-6

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 13
7.4.4 Main charger

F2 F4 F5 F3

F1

Fig. 7-14

Replacement
Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication x1,000 x1,000 Remarks
check <P-I>
sheets drive count

F1 Main charger case B 13-6 *f1

F2 Needle electrode 177/183/ 345 13-15 *f1
192
F3 Contact point of B 13-7
terminals 13-8
F4 Main charger needle R O 13-10
electrode cleaner
F5 Main charger grid 59/61/64 115 13-14

* f1. Main charger case / Needle electrode

Clean the main charger case with a cloth soaked in water and squeezed tightly, and then wipe
them with a dry cloth.
Clean the needle electrode only with the main charger cleaner.
Replace the needle electrode with a new one if it is damaged regardless of the number of output
pages which have been made.

Notes:
Do not touch the needle electrode with your bare hand when attaching the needle electrode.
Remarks:
Values under “Replacement” indicate the replacement cycle for the 2323AM and 2329A / 2523A
and 2523AD / 2823AM and 2829A.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 14
7.4.5 Transfer / Separation charger section

G4 G3

G1
G2

Fig. 7-15

Replacement
x1,000 Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication x1,000 Remarks
drive check <P-I>
sheets
count

G1 Transfer roller case B 9-6

G2 Transfer roller 59/61/64 115 O 9-11 *g1
G3 Separation needle B 9-7
G4 Post-transfer guide B or A 9-4

* g1. Transfer roller

If there is damage on the roller, replace it even if the replacement time has not come.
Remarks:
Values under “Replacement” indicate the replacement cycle for the 2323AM and 2329A / 2523A
and 2523AD / 2823AM and 2829A.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 15
7.4.6 Drum/Cleaner related section

H2 H4 H3 H6 H5 H7

H8
H1
Fig. 7-16

Replacement
x1,000 Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication x1,000 Remarks
drive check <P-I>
sheets
count

H1 Photoconductive drum 59/61/64 115 15-20 Ch 7.8.2

H2 Discharge LED B 13-2
H3 Whole cleaner unit B 15-1
H4 Drum cleaning blade 59/61/64 115 15-5 *h1
H5 Drum separation finger 177/183/ 345 15-17 *h2
192
H6 Recovery blade B 177/183/ 345 15-6 *h3
192
H7 Ozone filter 177/183/ 345 9-3
192
H8 Drum Shaft FL 15-21

* h1. Drum cleaning blade

Since the edge of the blade is vulnerable and can be easily damaged by factors such as the
adherence of paper dust. Replace the cleaning blade with new ones if poor images are printed
due to the damaged blade regardless of the number of output pages if which have been made.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 16
* h2. Separation fingers for drum
The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the separation finger is damaged or deformed. If there
is any problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output
pages which have been made.
If any mark which was made by the finger appears on the printed image, clean the tip of the
finger.
Notes:
• Wipe the tip of the finger lightly with a dry cloth trying not to deform it.
Do not leave the lint on the tip.
• Apply patting powder to the tip of the fingers and drum surface after replacing or cleaning them to
reduce the load on the drum surface by the finger.

* h3. Recovery blade

Replace the recovery blade regardless the number of output pages if the edge of the blade get
damaged.

Remarks:
Values under “Replacement” indicate the replacement cycle for the 2323AM and 2329A / 2523A
and 2523AD / 2823AM and 2829A.
7

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 17
7.4.7 Developer unit

I3

I5

I1

I2
Fig. 7-17

Replacement
x1,000 Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication x1,000 Remarks
drive check <P-I>
sheets
count

I1 Whole developer unit B 16-1

I2 Developer material 59/61/64 115 16-3 *i1
16-4
I3 Front shield B R 16-23
I5 Side shield B R 16-1

* i1. Developer material

Make sure to perform “05-2390” and take off the process unit before the developer material is
replaced.
After replacing the developer material, be sure to perform the auto-toner adjustment.
 P. 6-2 “6.2 Adjustment of Auto-Toner Sensor”

Remarks:
Values under “Replacement” indicate the replacement cycle for the 2323AM and 2329A / 2523A
and 2523AD / 2823AM and 2829A.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 18
7.4.8 Fuser / Paper exit unit

J9
J3
J1, J8

J7

J6

7
J5

J5 J2
J4
Fig. 7-18

Replacement
x1,000 Operation Parts list
Items to check Cleaning Lubrication x1,000 Remarks
drive check <P-I>
sheets
count

J1 Fuser roller 177/183/ 345 17-11

192
J2 Pressure roller 177/183/ 345 17-17
192
J3 Fuser roller 177/183/ 345 17-15 *j1
separation finger 192
J4 Fuser unit entrance A 10-23
guide
J5 Thermistor (3 pcs.) A R 17-23 *j2
J6 Drive gear W2 R 10-24
(tooth face and shaft)
J7 Fuser roller gear R 17-12
J8 Fuser roller bushing 177/183/ 345 17-10
192
J9 Exit roller A R 14-5

* j1. Separation fingers for fuser roller

The paper jam may be caused if the tip of the finger is damaged or deformed. If there is any
problem with it, replace the finger with a new one regardless of the number of output pages
which have been made. Do not damage the tip of the finger during the cleaning. The finger may
be damaged if the toner adhering to the tip of it is scraped off forcibly. Replace the finger if the
toner is sticking to it heavily.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 19
* j2. Thermistor
Clean the thermistor with alcohol if the toner or dirt is sticking to it when the fuser roller is
replaced.
Do not deform or damage the thermistor during the cleaning. Replace the thermistor with a new
one if it is damaged or deformed regardless of degree.
Remarks:
Values under “Replacement” indicate the replacement cycle for the 2323AM and 2329A / 2523A
and 2523AD / 2823AM and 2829A.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 20
7.4.9 Automatic duplexing unit

K4

K2

K1

K2

K3

Fig. 7-19

Replacement Operation Parts list

Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>

K1 Transport roller (upper A R 1-7

and lower) 1-8
K2 One side of the GCB L 1-3
busing to which the
shaft is inserted
K3 One side of the plastic W1
busing to which the
shaft is inserted
K4 Paper guide B

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 21
7.4.10 RADF

L4 L3 L2 L1

L5 L6 L7

Fig. 7-20

Cleaning Replacement Operation Parts list

Items to check Lubrication Remarks
(30K) (x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>

L1 Pickup roller A 1-5

L2 Separation roller A 2-10
L3 Feed roller A 1-6
L4 Transport roller-1 A
L5 Transport roller-2 A
L6 Exit/reverse roller A
L7 Platen sheet A or B

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 22
7.4.11 PFU

M1 M2 M3

Fig. 7-21

Replacement Operation Parts list

Items to check Cleaning Lubrication Remarks
(x 1,000 sheets) check <P-I>

M1 Paper feed roller A 80 6-12 7

M2 Separation pad A 80 6-10
M3 Transport roller A 4-7

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 23
7.4.12 PFP
N1 N1

N2
N3

N2

N3

Fig. 7-22

Replace every 1K Parts list

Item to inspect Cleaning Coating Remarks
copies <P-I>

N1 Pickup roller (upper/lower) A 90 5-43

N2 Feed roller (upper/lower) A 90 5-39
N3 Separation roller (upper/ A AV 90 5-42 *n1
lower)
N4 Drive gears (tooth face) W1

* n1. Separation roller (upper/lower)

The replacement cycle of the parts in the feeding section is determined by the number of sheets
fed from each paper source.

Notes:
Apply the appropriate amount of the grease as specified in the figure below.

Separation roller
Apply the grease on the
inside entirely

Fig. 7-23

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 24
7.5 PM KIT
A PM kit is a package that includes replacement parts for each unit.

Item Product name Qty. P-I

DEV-KIT-2505-NEW Main charger grid 1 13-14

Drum cleaning blade 1 15-19
Developer material 1 102-2
FR_R-KIT-2809 Ozone filter 1 9-3
Drum separation finger 2 15-17
Recovery blade 1 15-6
Fuser roller bushing 2 17-10
Separation finger 5 17-15
Fuser roller 1 17-11
Pressure roller 1 17-17
Needle electrode 1 13-10
7

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 25
7.6 Maintenance Part List

Parts list
No. Item Purpose
Page Item

1 Door switch jig Lock of door switch 101 1

2 Brush Cleaning inside of the equipment 101 2
3 Doctor sleeve jig Measuring the gap between the development sleeve and 3
101
the doctor blade

1 2 3

Fig. 7-24

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 26
7.7 Grease List

Parts list
Grease name Volume Container
Page Item

L Launa 40 100cc Oiler 101 11

W2 White grease (Molykote HP-300) 10g Bottle 101 12

AV Alvania No.2 100g Tube 101 13

W1 White grease (Molykote EM-30L) 100g Tube 101 14

FL Floil (GE-334C) 20g Bottle 101 15

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 27
7.8 Precautions for Storing and Handling Supplies

7.8.1 Precautions for storing Toshiba supplies

• Toner/Developer
Toner and developer should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to
35°C (no condensation), and should also be protected against direct sunlight during transportation.

• Photoconductive drum
Like the toner and developer, photoconductive drum should be stored in a dark place where the
ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C (no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where
drums may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.

• Drum cleaning blade

This item should be stored in a flat place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C,
and should also be protected against high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.

• Fuser roller / Pressure roller

Avoid places where the rollers may be subjected to high humidity, chemicals and/or their fumes.

• Paper
Avoid storing paper in places where it may be subjected to high humidity. After a package is opened,
be sure to place and store it in a storage bag.

• Transfer roller
Transfer roller should be stored in a place where the ambient temperature is between 10°C to 35°C
(no condensation). Be sure to avoid places where transfer roller may be subjected to high humidity,
chemicals and/or their fumes.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 28
7.8.2 Checking and cleaning of photoconductive drum
• Use of gloves
If fingerprints or oil adhere to the drum surface, the property of the photoconductive drum may
degrade, affecting the quality of the print image. So, do not touch the drum surface with your bare
hands.

• Handling precautions
As the photoconductive drum surface is very sensitive, be sure to handle the drum carefully when
installing and removing it so as not to damage its surface.
Be sure to apply “patting powder” (lubricant) to the entire surface of the drum (including both ends of
the drum where OPC is not coated) when replacing the drum. When the drum has been replaced
with a new one, the drum counter (the Setting Mode 08-6250-0, 3, 6 and 7) must be cleared to 0
(zero).
Notes:
• Application of patting powder is for reducing the friction between the drum and cleaning blade. If the
application of patting powder is neglected, the drum and cleaning blade may be damaged.
• When paper fibers or thread adhere to the cleaning blade edge, they may reduce the cleaning efficiency
and, in addition, may damage the blade and the drum. Be sure to remove any fibers found adhering to
the blade.
7
• Installation of the equipment and storage of drum
Avoid installing the equipment where it may be subjected to high temperature, high humidity,
chemicals and/or their fumes.
Do not place the light drum in a location where it is exposed to direct sunlight or high intensity light
such as near a window. Otherwise the drum will fatigue, and will not produce sufficient image
density immediately after being installed in the equipment.

• Cleaning the drum

At preventive maintenance calls, wipe the entire surface of the drum clean using the designated
cleaning cotton. Use sufficiently thick cleaning cotton (dry soft pad) so as not to scratch the drum
surface inadvertently with your fingertips or nails. Also, remove your rings and wristwatch before
starting cleaning work to prevent accidental damage to the drum.
Do not use alcohol, selenium refresher and other organic solvents or silicon oil as they will have an
adverse effect on the drum.

• Scratches on photoconductive drum surface

If the surface is scratched in such a way that the aluminum substrate is exposed, no print image will
be produced on this area. In addition, the cleaning blade will be damaged so replacement with a
new drum will be necessary.

• Collecting used photoconductive drums

Regarding the recovery and disposal of used photoconductive drums, follow the relevant local
regulations or rules.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 29
7.8.3 Checking and cleaning of drum cleaning blade
• Handling precautions
Pay attention to the following points as the cleaning blade life is determined by the condition of its
edge:
- Do not allow hard objects to hit or rub against blade edge.
- Do not rub the edge with a cloth or soft pad.
- Do not leave oil (or fingerprints, etc.) on the edge.
- Do not apply solvents such as paint thinner to the blade.
- Do not allow paper fibers or dirt to contact the blade edge.
- Do not place the blade near a heat source.

• Cleaning procedure
Clean the blade edge with a cloth moistened with water and squeezed lightly.

7.8.4 Checking and cleaning of fuser roller and pressure roller

• Handling precautions
- Fuser roller
Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the fuser roller.
Be careful not to allow any hard object to hit or rub against the fuser roller, or it may be damaged,
possibly resulting in poor cleaning.

- Pressure roller
Do not leave any oil (fingerprints, etc.) on the pressure roller.

• Checking
- Check for stain and damage on the fuser and pressure rollers, and clean if necessary.
- Check the separation guide and fingers and check for chipped tips.
- Check the thermistors for proper contact with the pressure roller.
- Check the fused and fixed condition of the toner.
- Check the gap between the entrance guide and pressure roller.
- Check the fuser roller for proper rotation.

• Cleaning procedure
When fuser roller and pressure roller become dirty, they will cause jamming. If this happens, wipe
the surface clean with a piece of soft cloth. For easier cleaning, clean the roller while they are still
warm.
Notes:
Be careful not to rub the fuser roller and pressure roller surface with your nails or hard objects
because it can be easily damaged. Do not use silicone oil on the fuser roller and pressure roller.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 30
7.8.5 Checking and replacing the transfer roller
• Handling precautions
- Wear gloves to avoid touching the drum surface with your bare hands.
- Do not allow oil or fingerprints to come in contact with the surface.
- Do not hit or scratch the surface.
- Make sure you do not get any bits of thread, etc. on the surface.
- Do not allow solvent, such as thinner, to come in contact with the surface.
- Keep away from a source of heat.

• Cleaning procedure
If bits of thread or similar adhere to the surface, remove them with gloves or a pair of tweezers. Be
careful that the roller surface is not damaged by the points of the tweezers.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 31
7.9 Operational Items in Machine Refreshing
Machine refreshing each equipment in the following timing.

• 2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2323A: When the number of output pages has reached 144,000 or 5 years
have passed from the start of use (Whichever comes earlier)

• 2323AM: When the number of output pages has reached 132,000 or 5 years have passed from the
start of use (Whichever comes earlier)

• 2829A: When the number of output pages has reached 156,000 or 5 years have passed from the
start of use (Whichever comes earlier)

(1) Check the components in the drive section (gears, pulleys, timing belts, etc.). Replace them with
new ones if they are damaged.
(2) Check all the adhesives such as tape and Mylar if they are damaged or have become unstuck.
Replace them with new ones if necessary.
(3) Check the performance of all the switches and sensors. Replace them with new ones if
necessary.
(4) Clean inside the equipment thoroughly.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE (PM)
7 - 32
8. ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING

8.1 General Descriptions

This chapter explains the procedures for solving troubles occurring in the equipment.
When a trouble occurs, check if an error code is displayed on the LCD screen of the control panel first.
If displayed, refer to  P. 8-7 “8.2 Error Code List” to figure out the classification and contents of the
error, and then refer to  P. 8-13 “8.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code” to remove its
cause.
If not displayed and the equipment does not operate properly or images are not printed properly, refer
to  P. 8-58 “8.4 Troubleshooting for the Image” to remove its cause.

The cause of a trouble in the equipment may be a minor failure. Check the items below first.

1. Is there any problem with the power cable?

* Check if the power cable is inserted securely. When it is almost removed or not inserted securely,
power voltage may become unstable, causing a trouble in the equipment.
2. Are the connectors connected securely?
* Reconnect them securely. Even if they are apparently inserted, there may be a contact failure.
Carefully check if the connection is secured especially after the disassembly or replacement of
parts.

Notes: 8
If unusual odor is detected or if smoke or fire comes out of the equipment, immediately turn the
power OFF.
Even in the cases other than the above, fully observe safety precautions.
If any PC board shall be replaced, refer to  P. 9-1 “9. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-1
8.1.1 If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting.
If a problem continues even after performing all troubleshooting and technical tips, report the problem
to the appropriate Toshiba service center along with the following information. This information will help
the service center understand your problem and take quick action to find the solution.

1. Serial Number
2. List Print
- Refer to the appropriate Service Manual for the detailed procedure to obtain a List Print.
- Enter the value given below to obtain a List Print by printing it out.
9S-101: 05 code
9S-102: 08 code
9S-103: PM support mode
9S-106: Error history (maximum 30 cases)
9S-108: Firmware update log (maximum 5 cases)
3. For image-related problems, collect image samples with the problem areas and the feeding direction
marked first. Then provide information about the media type and weight, and the print data / spool
files for duplicating the problem.
4. For abnormal acoustic noise, describe the situation in as much detail as possible.
5. For hardware-related problems, provide photos of any broken parts, paper jams, etc.
In case of paper jams, include the type of paper and its manufacturer.
6. For software-related problems, provide list prints, and the detailed procedure needed to duplicate
the problem.
* This is the minimum information required to report a complaint. It would be appreciated if you could
obtain additional information.
* Follow the directions of the service center if they request additional information as each issue is
unique to some degree.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-2
8.1.2 Collection of debug logs with a USB device

[ 1 ] General description
The purpose of collecting debug log data is to acquire the information needed for analyzing problems
by following the procedure below only when a phenomenon requiring an investigation has occurred
during the MFP's operation. If such a phenomenon occurs, you can collect debug log data into a USB
device by inserting it into the MFP and operating the buttons on the control panel.
Notes: Precautions for collecting debug log data with a USB device
• Be sure to obtain the customer’s agreement before you collect the setting information of the MFP into a
USB device.
• Debug log data to be collected include the internal behavior of the MFP, job histories, memory usage
information, etc. in binary data.
• Since the collected setting information of the MFP is output in a CSV format, handle and manage it with
care.
• Manage the collected setting information of the MFP properly to avoid loss or its leaking.
• Do not use the collected setting information of the MFP for purposes other than the enhancement of
maintenance, product quality or services.
• If the customer requests the presentation of the data, do so promptly.
• Do not remove the USB device while data are being stored.

When the debug logs are collected, do so also for the information from 1 to 4 below since investigation
may be difficult using only the debug logs.

1. List print mode ([9]+[START]) [300: All CSV files]

8

2. When printing data, acquire information below.

- 9S-101: Adjustment mode (05) (Example: [101] → [START] → [0] → [START] → [9999] →
[START])
- 9S-102: Setting mode (08) (Example: [102] → [START] → [0] → [START] → [9999] → [START])
- 9S-103: PM support mode
- 9S-106: Error history (maximum 30 events)
- 9S-108: Firmware update log (maximum 5 events)
- 9S-111: Version list
- 9S-403: 13 code list (when the FAX unit is installed)

3. Problem occurrence time

Or the time when the customer called if it is difficult to work out when it occurred.

4. Status of when you collected the debug logs

As in the example below, check the status to know if the problem occurred at the debug log
collection or how the customer recovered it.
E.g.:
- You checked the problem and connected a USB device to the equipment.
- No problem occurred when an attempt to collect the debug logs was made; however, the
customer did turn the main power switch OFF when the problem occurred, so the logs may have
been collected.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-3
[ 2 ] Collection procedure

1. Precaution
Be sure to obtain the customer’s agreement before you collect debug log data.

2. Acceptable USB devices

Important:
The file system of a USB device must be FAT32 or FAT16. USB devices formatted in an NTFS
system cannot be operated. The file system of a USB device can be confirmed by opening its
property using Windows Explorer or such.

3. Procedure for collecting debug log data

(1) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(2) Key in “3997” and then press the [START] button.
(3) Key in “1” and then press the [START] button.
(4) Reboot the equipment.
(5) Insert a USB device [1] into a USB port [2] on the side of the MFP after it has started.

[2]

[1]

Fig.8-1

(6) The LED of the USB device starts blinking.

(7) Remove the USB device from the MFP when the LED goes OFF.
Notes:
If the USB device is one that does not show the status by the blinking of the LED, wait 30
seconds after step 2 above. Then remove the USB device from the MFP.
(8) When the collection of the debug log data is finished, a debug log file is created in a directory
immediately under the USB device.
File name: USBDISK_DebugMsg.txt (Approx. 100 KB)
Notes:
• Do not remove the USB device from the MFP while the LED of the device is blinking, for this means
debug log data are being collected. (If the USB device is one that does not show the status by the
blinking of the LED, do not remove it and wait 30 seconds.)
• If the debug log file “USBDISK_DebugMsg.txt” is not created after debug log data have been collected,
try again from step 1 above using another USB device.
• Insert the USB device after the MFP has fully started up. (Debug log data cannot be collected if the USB
device is inserted while the MFP is booting.)

4. Closing procedure for collecting debug log data

(1) Turn OFF the power.
(2) Turn ON the power while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
(3) Key in “3997” and then press the [START] button.
(4) Key in “0” and then press the [START] button.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-4
5. Collected debug log data
After the debug log data have been collected, send them to each service center as well as the
occurrence status report.

8.1.3 Traceability label

A traceability label on which a management No. at the manufacturing has been printed is attached to
some units. If a problem occurs in a unit, report it to the appropriate Toshiba service center along with
the traceability label information to help them to understand it.

[ 1 ] Management No.
A management No. consists of 13 digits with letters of the alphabet and numbers. The following shows
the meaning of each block.

From the 1st to 4th digits: Classification

From the 5th to 10th digits: Production date
From the 11th to 13th digits: Sequential numbers
Classification Production date Sequential
numbers

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 (digits)
1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4 5 6 1 2 3
8
[ 2 ] Applicable units
A traceability label is attached to the following units.

No. Unit Remarks

1 MAIN board
2 Fuser unit
3 Cleaner unit
4 Developer unit
5 Laser optical unit

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-5
[ 3 ] Label attachment position
1 2

Fig.8-2

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-6
8.2 Error Code List
The following error codes is displayed at the upper right of the screen when the “CLEAR PAPER” or
“CALL SERVICE” symbol is blinking.

8.2.1 Jam

2523A/
Error Trouble- 2523AD/
Classification Contents 2329A/2829A
code shooting 2323AM/
2823AM
E010 Paper exit jam Jam not reaching the exit sensor P. 8-14 Y Y
E020 Stop jam at the exit sensor P. 8-14 Y Y
E030 Other jam Power-ON jam P. 8-32 Y Y
E061 Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer P. 8-33 Y Y
E062 Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer P. 8-33 Y Y
E063 Incorrect paper size setting for 3rd drawer P. 8-33 - Y
E064 Incorrect paper size setting for 4th drawer P. 8-33 - Y
E065 Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray P. 8-33 Y Y
E090 Image data delay jam P. 8-33 Y Y
E110 Paper ADU misfeeding (Paper not reaching the P. 8-23 Y Y
misfeeding registration sensor)
E120 Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the P. 8-24 Y Y
8
registration sensor)
E130 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching P. 8-24 Y Y
the registration sensor)
E140 2nd drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching P. 8-25 Y Y
the PFU paper feed sensor)
E150 3rd drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching P. 8-27 - Y
the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)
E160 4th drawer misfeeding (Paper not reaching P. 8-28 - Y
the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)
E210 Paper transport 2nd drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-15 Y Y
jam reaching the registration sensor)
E300 3rd drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-15 - Y
reaching the registration sensor)
E310 3rd drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-16 - Y
reaching the PFU feed sensor)
E330 4th drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-15 - Y
reaching the registration sensor)
E340 4th drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-16 - Y
reaching the PFU feed sensor)
E360 4th drawer transport jam (Paper not P. 8-22 - Y
reaching the PFP upper drawer feed
sensor)
E400 Cover open jam Right cover open jam P. 8-29 Y Y
E410 Toner supply cover open jam P. 8-29 Y Y
E420 PFP side cover open jam P. 8-30 - Y
E430 ADU open jam P. 8-31 Y Y
E440 PFU jam access cover open jam P. 8-31 Y Y
E510 Paper transport Jam not reaching the ADU sensor P. 8-17 Y Y
jam
(ADU section)
E550 Other jam Paper remaining jam on the transport path P. 8-33 Y Y
(when printing is finished)
E552 Paper remaining jam on the transport path P. 8-35 Y Y
(when the cover is closed)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-7
 2523A/
Error Trouble- 2523AD/
Classification Contents 2329A/2829A
code shooting 2323AM/
2823AM
E714 RADF jam Feed signal reception jam P. 8-37 Y Y
E721 Jam not reaching the read sensor P. 8-37 Y Y
E725 Stop jam at the read sensor P. 8-38 Y Y
E726 Stop jam at the exit sensor P. 8-38 Y Y
EAD0 Other jam Print end command time-out jam P. 8-36 Y Y
EB50 Paper transport Paper remaining jam on the transport path P. 8-18 Y Y
EB60 jam Paper remaining jam on the transport path P. 8-21 Y Y
(redetection after no jam is detected at
EB50)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-8
8.2.2 Service call

2523A/
Error Trouble- 2523AD/
Classification Contents 2329A/2829A
code shooting 2323AM/
2823AM
C010 Drive system Main motor abnormality P. 8-39 Y Y
related service
call
C040 Paper feeding PFP motor abnormality P. 8-40 - Y
C150 system related 3rd drawer tray abnormality P. 8-41 - Y
C160 service call 4th drawer tray abnormality P. 8-41 - Y
C260 Scanning Peak detection error P. 8-42 Y Y
C270 system related CIS home position detection error P. 8-43 Y Y
service call
C411 Fuser unit Heater abnormality at power-ON (not P. 8-47 Y Y
related service reached 40°C) [first-time occurrence]
C412 call Heater abnormality at power-ON (not P. 8-47 Y Y
reached 40°C) [continuous occurrence]
C413 Heater abnormality at power-ON (not P. 8-47 Y Y
reached 100°C)
C414 Heater abnormality at power-ON (not P. 8-47 Y Y
reached the temperature of the ready state)
C415 Low WAIT abnormality P. 8-47 Y Y
C447 Fusing temperature abnormality during the P. 8-47 Y Y 8
ready state and printing
C449 Fusing temperature abnormality (high P. 8-47 Y Y
temperature)
C452 Fusing temperature abnormality when P. 8-48 Y Y
reaching the ready state temperature
C4B0 Fusing counter abnormality P. 8-49 Y Y
C911 Circuit related Toner cartridge PC board access P. 8-50 Y Y
service call abnormality
C916 Sub-CPU access abnormality P. 8-50 Y Y
C940 Engine-CPU abnormality P. 8-50 Y Y
C950 Error for distinction between engine P. 8-51 Y Y
firmware and MAIN board
C970 Process related High-voltage transformer abnormality P. 8-45 Y Y
service call
CA10 Laser optical Polygonal motor abnormality P. 8-46 Y Y
CA20 unit related H-Sync detection error P. 8-46 Y Y
service call
CE50 Process related Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality P. 8-44 Y Y
CE90 service call Drum thermistor abnormality P. 8-44 Y Y
CFB0 Process related PM counter reach error P. 8-45 Y Y
service call
F070 Communication Communication error between System- P. 8-52 Y Y
related service CPU and Engine-CPU
call
F090 Circuit related Memory abnormality on the MAIN board. P. 8-51 Y Y
service call
F901 Other service Engine speed error P. 8-53 Y Y
call

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8-9
8.2.3 Error in E-mail / Scanning Function
1. E-mail related error

2523A/2523AD/
Error code Contents Troubleshooting 2329A/2829A
2323AM/2823A
1C69 SMTP server connection error P. 8-54 - Y
1C71 SMTP authentication error P. 8-54 - Y
1C72 POP before SMTP error P. 8-54 - Y

2. File sharing related error

2523A/2523AD/
Error code Contents Troubleshooting 2329A/2829A
2323AM/2823A
2D31 File creation failure P. 8-54 - Y
2D62 File server connection error P. 8-55 - Y
2D63 Invalid network path P. 8-55 - Y
2D64 Login failure P. 8-55 - Y
2D67 FTP service not available P. 8-55 - Y
2D68 File sharing service not available P. 8-55 - Y
2E31 File creation failure in USB storage P. 8-56 - Y
2E33 File access failure in USB storage P. 8-56 - Y
2E66 HDD full failure during USB storage P. 8-56 - Y

3. E-mail reception related error

2523A/2523AD/
Error code Contents Troubleshooting 2329A/2829A
2323AM/2823A
3E10 Destination address error P. 8-57 - Y
5011 Communication error P. 8-57 - Y
5018 Incorrect DNS Address P. 8-57 - Y

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 10
8.2.4 Error history
When 106 is entered after bootup with 9S mode, 30 error histories are printed.

Display example

E010 01234567 xxxx xx xx xx xx xx 064 064 2362_1000_0000_0

Error code Total YYYY MM DD HH MM SS MMM NNN ABCD_EFHI_JLOP_Q
counter
4 digits 8 digits 14 digits 3 digits 3 digits 13 digits

A Drawer
0: Not selected, 1: Bypass, 2: LCF, 3: Upper drawer, 4: Lower drawer, 5: Upper PFP,
6: PFP lower, 7: Not used, 8: Not used
B Original size
0: A5/ST, 1:A5-R, 2: LCF, 3: LT, 4: A4, 5: B5-R, 6: LT-R, 7: A4-R, 8: OTHER/UNIV, 9: B5,
A: FOLIO/COMP, B: LG, C: B4, D: LD, E: A3, F: 13"LG, G: Not used, H: A6-R, I: Post card, J: 8.5SQ,
K: A3 wide, L: LD wide, M: 8K, N: 16K-R, O: 16K, P-T: Not used, U: SRA3(320×450),
V: SRA3(320×460), Z: Not used
C Sort mode/staple mode
0: Non-sort/Non-staple, 1: Group, 2: Sort, 7: Front staple, 8: Double staple, 9: Rear staple,
A: Saddle stitch 8
D RADF mode
0: Unused, 1: AUTO FEED (SADF), 2: STACK FEED
E APS/AMS mode
0: Not selected, 1: APS, 2: AMS
F Duplex mode
Copy:
0: Single-sided/Single-sided, 1: Book, 2: Double-sided/Single-sided, 4: Double-sided/Duplex copying,
8: Single-sided/Duplex copying

Printer
0: Single-sided, 8: Double-sided

FAX
0: Single-sided, 8: Double-sided

e-Filing
0: Single-sided, 8: Double-sided

List printing
0: Single-sided -
G Not used
H Image shift
0: Not used, 1: Book, 2: Left, 3: Right, 4: Top, 5: Bottom, 6: Book+Top, 7: Book+Bottom, 8: Left+Top,
9: Left+Bottom, A: Right+Top, B: Right+Bottom
I Editing
0: Not used, 1: Masking, 2: Trimming, 3: Mirror image, 4: Positive/negative reverse, 5: Not used
J Edge erase/Dual-page
0: Not used, 1: Edge erase, 2: Dual-page, 3: Edge erase & Dual-page
K Not used
L Function
0: Not used, 1: Copying, 2: FAX/Internet FAX transmission,
3: FAX/Internet FAX/E-mail reception printing, 4: Not used, 5: Printing/List print,
6: Scan/E-mail transmission
MMM Primary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Mx256)+(Mx16)+M

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 11
 NNN Secondary scanning reproduction ratio (Display in hexadecimal)
(Nx256)+(Nx16)+N
O Mode
0: Auto color, 1: Full color, 2: Black, 3: Not used, 4: Unused, 5: Gray scale,
6: Not used, 7: Not used
P Media type
0: Plain paper, 1: Thick 1, 2: Thick 2, 3: Thick 3, 4: Thick 4, 5: Special paper 1, 6: Special paper 2,
7: Recycled paper, 8: Plain paper 1, 9: Plain paper 2, A: Thin paper, B: OHP film, C: Thick 1/ reverse,
D: Thick 2/ reverse, E: Thick 3/ reverse, F: Thick 4/ reverse, G: Special paper 1/ reverse,
H: Special paper 2/ reverse, I: Envelope, J: Tab paper, Z: Not used
Q RADF size mixed
0: Unused, 1: Size mixed, 2: Single-size document

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 12
8.3 Diagnosis and Prescription for Each Error Code

8.3.1 Check item

Check item Contents

Sensor check • Check the sensor in the test mode.
• Check that there is no dust on the sensor.
• Check that the actuator is correctly operated.
Connector check • Check that the connector is not disconnected.
• Check that the pins are not deformed and do not come off.
• Disconnect and reconnect the connector.
Harness check Check if the harnesses are open circuited.
Motor check • Check the motor in the test mode.
• Check that there is no abnormality in the driving section.
• Check that there is no abnormality in the roller.
Board check Check if the board is short circuited or open circuited.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 13
8.3.2 Paper exit jam
[E010] Jam not reaching the exit sensor
[E020] Stop jam at the exit sensor

Classification Error contents

Paper exit jam [E010] The paper which has passed through the fuser unit does not
reach the exit sensor.
[E020] The trailing edge of the paper does not pass the exit sensor
after its leading edge has reached this sensor.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Has multiple feeding Yes • If multiple feeding has occurred, check the
occurred? condition of the separation pad or the separation
roller in the paper source. Replace it if it is worn
out.
• Check if the transparent sheet attached near to
the separation pad or the separation roller is
deformed. Replace it if it is deformed.
No 2
2 Open the right cover. Is Yes Remove the paper.
there any paper on the No 3
transport path?
3 Is the exit sensor working? Yes 4
(Perform the input check No • Check if the connector of the exit sensor is
in the test mode: 03-[A]/ disconnected.
[B]) • Check if the connector CN8 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the exit sensor
• Replace the MAIN board
4 Is the registration roller clutch Yes 5
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration roller
(Perform the output check in clutch is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-108/158) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration roller clutch.
• Replace the MAIN board.
5 Registration roller Check the registration roller. Replace it if it is worn
out.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Exit sensor
MAIN board
Registration roller clutch
Registration roller

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 14
8.3.3 Paper transport jam
[E210] 2nd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching the registration sensor)
[E300] 3rd drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor)
[E330] 4th drawer transport jam (Paper not reaching the registration sensor)

Classification Error contents

Paper transport jam [E210] The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has
passed the PFU paper feed sensor.
[E300] The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has
passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
[E330] The paper does not reach the registration sensor after it has
passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the right cover. Is there Yes Remove the paper.
paper in front of the No 2
registration sensor?
2 Is the registration sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected 8
and the harnesses are open circuited
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Are the clutches (PFU Yes 4
transport clutch (H) / PFU No • Check if the connectors of the transport clutches
transport clutch (L)) working? (PFU transport clutch (H) / PFU transport clutch
(Perform the output check in (L)) are disconnected.
the test mode: 03-203, 205) • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the transport clutches (PFU transport
clutch (H) / PFU transport clutch (L)).
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 Feed roller • Check the condition of the feed roller, separation
Separation roller roller and pickup roller of each paper source, and
Pickup roller replace them if they are worn out.
Transfer roller • Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn
out.
5 Is paper placed If the side guides press against the paper strongly,
appropriately? adjust them.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Registration sensor
MAIN board
PFU transport clutch (H) / PFU
transport clutch (L)
Feed roller
Separation roller
Pickup roller
Transfer roller

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 15
[E310] 3rd drawer transport jam (paper not reaching the PFU paper feed sensor)
[E340] 4th drawer transport jam (paper not reaching the PFU paper feed sensor)

Classification Error contents

Paper transport jam [E310] The paper does not reach the PFU paper feed sensor after it
has passed the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
[E340] The paper does not reach the PFU paper feed sensor after it
has passed the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the PFU jam access Yes Remove the paper. 2
cover. Is there paper in front No
of the PFU paper feed
sensor?
2 Is the PFU paper feed sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector of the PFU paper feed
(Perform the input check in sensor is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[4]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFU paper feed sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Are the PFU transport Yes 4
clutches (H / L) working? No • Check if the connectors of the PFU transport
(Perform the output check in clutches (H / L) are disconnected.
the test mode: 03-203, 205) • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFU transport clutches (H / L).
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 Is the PFP transport clutch Yes 5
working? (Perform the output No • Check if the connector of the PFP transport
check in the test mode: 03- clutch is disconnected.
225) • Check if any of the connectors CN410 and
CN413 on the PFP board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP transport clutch.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
5 Feed roller • Check the condition of the feed roller, separation
Separation roller roller and pickup roller of each paper source, and
Pickup roller replace them if they are worn out.
Transport roller • Check the transport roller. Replace it if it is worn
out.
6 Is paper placed If the side guides press against the paper strongly,
appropriately? adjust them.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 16
 Parts to be replaced Remark
PFU paper feed sensor
PFU transport clutch (H) / PFU
transport clutch (L)
PFP transport clutch
MAIN board
PFP transport roller
PFP feed roller
PFP separation roller
PFP pickup roller

[E510] Jam not reaching the ADU sensor

Classification Error contents

Paper transport jam (ADU section) Paper does not reach the ADU sensor after it is switchbacked in the
exit section.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the right cover. Is there Yes Remove the paper. 8
any paper in front of the ADU No 2
transfer sensor?
2 Is the ADU sensor working? Yes 3
(Perform the input check in No • Check if the connector of the ADU sensor is
the test mode: 03-[1]/[C]) disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN17 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the MAIN
board are short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the ADU sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Is the exit motor (rotating in Yes 4
reverse) working? No • Check if the connector of the exit motor is
(Perform the output check in disconnected.
the test mode: 03-121/171) • Check if the connector CN7 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Replace the exit motor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 ADU Check the rollers in the ADU and the exit roller of the
equipment. Replace them if they are worn out.

Parts to be replaced Remark

ADU sensor
MAIN board
Exit motor
Rollers in the ADU
Exit roller

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 17
[EB50] Paper remaining jam on the transport path

Classification Error contents

Paper transport jam The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of
upcoming paper.

When the paper is fed from the 1st drawer:

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the right cover. Is there Remove paper if there is any on the transport path. 2
any paper on the transport
path?
2 Is the registration sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Feed roller Yes Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out
Separation pad No 4
Transport roller
Registration roller
4 MAIN board • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected or
the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the MAIN
board are short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Registration sensor
MAIN board
Rollers on the transport path

When the paper is fed from the bypass tray:

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the right cover. Is there Remove paper if there is any on the transport path. 2
any paper on the transport
path?

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 18
 Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
2 Is the registration sensor Yes 3
working?
(Perform the input check in
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A])
No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Feed roller Yes Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out
Separation pad No 4
Registration roller
4 MAIN board • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected or
the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the MAIN
board are short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the MAIN board.
8
Parts to be replaced Remark
MAIN board
Registration sensor
Rollers on the transport path

When the paper is fed from the PFU

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 PFU jam access cover Open the PFU jam access cover and remove paper 2
if there is any on the transport path.
2 Is the PFU feed sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[4]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFU feed sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
• PFU board
3 Is the registration sensor Yes 4
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 19
 Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
4 MAIN board • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board 5
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected or
the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the MAIN
board are short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the MAIN board.
5 PFU paper feed roller • Check the condition of the paper feed roller and
PFU separation pad separation pad, and then replace them if they are
Transport roller worn out.
Registration roller • Check the transport roller and registration roller.
Replace it if it is worn out.

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board
Rollers on the transport path
PFU paper feed sensor
Registration sensor

When the paper is fed from the PFP

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Feed cover Open the feed cover and remove paper if there is 2
any on the transport path.
2 Is the PFU feed sensor Yes Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out
working? (Perform the input No 3
check: 03-[2]/[C])
3 MAIN board, PFU feed • Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board 4
sensor is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected or
the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the MAIN
board are short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the 2nd transport sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 Is the registration sensor Yes 5
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
5 Feed roller • Check the condition of the paper feed roller and
Separation roller separation roller, and then replace them if they
Transport roller are worn out.
Registration roller • Check the transport roller and registration roller.
Replace it if it is worn out.

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board
PFU feed sensor
Rollers on the transport path
Registration roller

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 20
[EB60] Paper remaining jam on the transport path (re-detection after no jam is detected at EB50
error)

Classification Error contents

Paper transport jam The multiple feeding of preceding paper caused the misfeeding of
upcoming paper

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the right cover. Is Yes Remove the paper.
there any paper on the No 2
transport path?
2 Is the registration sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Roller Check the rollers. Replace them if they are worn out. 8

Parts to be replaced Remark

Registration sensor
MAIN board
Rollers on the transport path

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 21
[E360] Paper fed from the PFP lower drawer not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor

Classification Error contents

Paper transport jam Jam not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the PFP side cover. Is Yes Remove the paper.
there any paper in front of the No 2
PFP upper drawer feed
sensor?
2 Is the PFP upper drawer feed Yes 3
sensor working? No • Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer
(Perform the input check in feed sensor is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[1]/[E]) • Check if the connector CN410 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Is the PFP feed clutch Yes 4
working? (Perform the output No • Check if the connector of the PFP transport
check in the test mode: 03- clutch is disconnected.
226) • Check if the connector CN410 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP transport clutch.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 Feed roller • Check the condition of the feed roller, separation
Separation roller roller and pickup roller of each paper source, and
Pickup roller replace them if they are worn out.
PFP transfer roller • Check the PFP transport roller. Replace it if it is
worn out.

Parts to be replaced Remark

PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP board
MAIN board
PFP transport clutch
Feed roller
Separation roller
Pickup roller
PFP transport roller

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 22
8.3.4 Paper misfeeding
[E110] ADU misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

Classification Error contents

Paper misfeeding The paper which has passed through ADU does not reach the registration
sensor during duplex printing.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the ADU. Is there any Yes Remove the paper.
paper in front of the No 2
registration sensor?
2 Is the registration sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the 1st registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Is the ADU clutch working? Yes 4 8
(Perform the output check in No • Check if the connector of the ADU clutch is
the test mode: 03-222) disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN7 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the ADU clutch.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 Rollers in the ADU Check the rollers in the ADU. Replace them if they
are worn out.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Registration sensor
ADU clutch
MAIN board
Rollers in the ADU

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 23
[E120] Bypass misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

Classification Error contents

Paper misfeeding The paper fed from the bypass tray does not reach the registration sensor.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the right cover. Is there Yes Remove the paper.
any paper on the transport No 2
path?
2 Is the bypass feed clutch Yes 3
working? (Perform the output No • Check if the connector of the bypass feed clutch
check in the test mode: 03- and bypass paper sensor are disconnected.
204) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
Is the bypass paper sensor is disconnected.
working? (Perform the input • Check if the connector pins are disconnected
check in the test mode: 03- and the harnesses are open circuited.
[4]/[F]) • Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the bypass feed clutch and bypass
paper sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Is the registration sensor Yes 4
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 Bypass feed roller Bypass Check the bypass feed roller and bypass separation
separation pad pad. Replace them if they are worn out.

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board
Bypass feed clutch
Bypass paper sensor
Bypass feed roller
Separation pad
Registration sensor

[E130] 1st drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the registration sensor)

Classification Error contents

Paper misfeeding The paper fed from the 1st drawer does not reach the registration sensor.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the right cover. Is Yes Remove the paper.
there any paper on the No 2
transport path?

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 24
 Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
2 Is the drawer feed Yes 3
clutch working? No • Check if the connector of the drawer feed clutch
(Perform the output check is disconnected.
in the test mode: 03-201) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the drawer feed clutch.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Is the registration sensor Yes 4
working? No • Check if the connector of the registration sensor
(Perform the input check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[A]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN14 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the registration sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 Drawer feed roller • Check the drawer feed roller and separation pad.
Separation pad • Replace them if they are worn out. 8

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board
Drawer feed clutch
Registration sensor
Drawer feed roller
Separation pad

[E140] 2nd drawer misfeeding

Classification Error contents

Paper misfeeding Jam not reaching the PFU paper feed sensor

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the feed cover. Is there Yes Remove the paper.
any paper on the transport No 2
path?
2 Is the PFU paper feed sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector of the PFU paper feed
(Perform the input check in sensor is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[4]/[A]) • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFU paper feed sensor.
• Replace the MAIN board.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 25
 Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
3 Is the PFU pickup clutch Yes 4
working? No • Check if the connector of the PFU pickup clutch
(Perform the output check in is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-202) • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFU pickup clutch.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 PFU paper feed roller Check the PFU paper feed roller and separation 5
Separation pad pad. Replace them if they are worn out.
5 Is paper placed If the side guides press against the paper strongly,
appropriately? adjust them.

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board
PFU pickup feed clutch
PFU paper feed roller
PFU separation pad

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 26
[E150] PFP upper drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor)

Classification Error contents

Paper misfeeding Jam not reaching the PFP upper drawer feed sensor

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the PFP side cover. Is Yes Remove the paper.
there any paper in front of the No 2
PFP upper drawer feed
sensor?
2 Is the PFP upper drawer feed Yes 3
sensor working? No • Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer
(Perform the input check in feed sensor is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[1]/[E]) • Check if the connector CN410 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP upper drawer feed sensor.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board. 8
3 Is the PFP upper drawer feed Yes 4
clutch working? No • Check if the connector of the PFP upper drawer
(Perform the output check in feed clutch is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-227) • Check if the connector CN410 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP upper drawer feed clutch.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 PFP upper drawer feed roller Check the PFP upper drawer feed roller, separation 5
Separation roller roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
Pickup roller worn out.
5 Is paper placed If the side guides press against the paper strongly,
appropriately? adjust them.

Parts to be replaced Remark

PFP upper drawer feed sensor
PFP board
MAIN board
PFP upper drawer feed clutch
PFP upper drawer feed roller
Separation roller
Pickup roller

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 27
[E160] PFP lower drawer misfeeding (paper not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor)

Classification Error contents

Paper misfeeding Jam not reaching the PFP lower drawer feed sensor

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the PFP side cover. Is Yes Remove the paper.
there any paper in front of the No 2
PFP lower drawer feed
sensor?
2 Is the PFP lower drawer feed Yes 3
sensor working? No • Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer
(Perform the input check in feed sensor is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[2]/[C]) • Check if the connector CN410 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Is the PFP lower drawer feed Yes 4
clutch working? No • Check if the connector of the PFP lower drawer
(Perform the output check in feed clutch is disconnected.
the test mode: 03-228) • Check if the connector CN410 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP lower drawer feed clutch.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
4 PFP lower drawer feed roller Check the PFP lower drawer feed roller, separation 5
Separation roller roller and pickup roller. Replace them if they are
Pickup roller worn out.
5 Is paper placed If the side guides press against the paper strongly,
appropriately? adjust them.

Parts to be replaced Remark

PFP lower drawer feed sensor.
PFP board
MAIN board
PFP lower drawer feed clutch
PFP lower drawer feed roller,
Separation roller
Pickup roller

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 28
8.3.5 Cover open jam
[E400] Right cover open jam

Classification Error contents

Cover open jam The right cover has opened during printing.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the right cover open? Yes Remove paper if there is any, then close the cover.
No 2
2 Is the right cover opening/ Yes 3
closing interlock switch No • Check if the connector for right cover opening/
working? (Perform the input closing interlock switch.
check in the test mode: 03- • Check if the connector on the MAIN board is
[6]/[A]) disconnected. (CN21: 2329A/2829A, CN19:
2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM)
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the right cover opening/closing interlock
switch.
3 MAIN board Replace the MAIN board. 4
4 Connector When ADU is installed, check if the connector for the 8
ADU is disconnected.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Right cover opening/closing interlock
switch
MAIN board

[E410] Toner supply cover open jam

Classification Error contents

Cover open jam The toner supply cover has opened during printing.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the toner supply cover Yes Close the cover.
open? No 2
2 Is the toner supply cover Yes 3
opening/closing interlock No • Check if the connector of the toner supply cover
switch working? opening/closing interlock switch is disconnected.
(Perform the input check in • Check if the connector on the MAIN board is
the test mode: 03-[A]/[D]) disconnected. (CN21: 2329A/2829A, CN19:
2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM)
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the toner supply cover opening/closing
interlock switch.
• Replace the MAIN board.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 29
 Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
3 Is the voltage of 24V being Yes 4
supplied from the power No • Check if the connector for 24 V power supply is
supply unit? disconnected.
(Perform the input check in • Check if the connector on the MAIN board is
the test mode: 03-[6]/[A]) disconnected. (CN21: 2329A/2829A, CN19:
2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM)
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
4 MAIN board Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Toner supply cover opening/closing
interlock switch
MAIN board

[E420] PFP side cover open jam

Classification Error contents

Cover open jam PFP side cover opened during printing

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the PFP side cover open? Yes Remove the paper if there is any, then close the
cover.
No 2
2 Is the PFP side cover Yes 3
opening/closing switch No • Check if the connector of the PFP side cover
working? opening/closing switch is disconnected.
(Perform the input check in • Check if either of the connectors CN410 on the
the test mode: 03-[1]/[D]) PFP board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP side cover opening/closing
switch.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 Replacing board • Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

PFP side cover opening/closing switch
PFP board
MAIN board

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 30
[E430] ADU open jam

Classification Error contents

Cover open jam The ADU has opened during printing.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the ADU open? Yes Remove paper if there is any, then close the ADU.
No 2
2 Is the voltage of 24V being Yes 3
supplied from the power No • Check if the connector for 24 V power supply is
supply unit? (Perform the disconnected.
input check in the test mode: • Check if the connector CN21 on the MAIN board
03-[6]/[A]) is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the right cover opening/closing switch.
3 MAIN board Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Right cover opening/closing interlock
switch
8
MAIN board

[E440] PFU jam access cover open jam

Classification Error contents

Cover open jam The PFU jam access cover has opened during printing.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the PFU jam access cover Yes Remove the paper if there is any, then close the
open? cover.
No 2
2 Is the PFU jam access cover Yes 3
opening/closing switch No • Check if the connector of the PFU jam access
working? cover opening/closing switch is disconnected.
(Perform the input check in • Check if the connector CN16 on the MAIN board
the test mode: 03-[A]/[E]) is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFU jam access cover opening/
closing switch.
3 Replacing board Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

PFU jam access cover opening/closing
switch
MAIN board

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 31
8.3.6 Other jam
[E030] Power-ON jam

Classification Error contents

Other jam The paper is remaining on the paper transport path when power is
turned ON.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the cover of the unit/ Yes Remove the paper.
area whose picture is blinking No 2
on the control panel. Is there
any paper on the transport
path? (Refer to the following
table.)
2 Is the sensor in the jamming Yes 3
area working? (Perform the No • Check if the connector of the sensor is
input check in the test mode: disconnected.
refer to the following table.) • Check if any of the connectors on the MAIN
board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the sensor
3 MAIN board Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Sensor Refer to the following table
MAIN board

Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers
(If a jam is occurring in the PFU / PFP check the board in each unit.)

Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode / Input check

Registration area Right cover Registration sensor 03-[A]/[A]
Exit area Right cover Exit sensor 03-[A]/[B]
ADU Right cover ADU sensor 03-[1]/[C]
PFU PFU jam access PFU paper feed sensor 03-[4]/[A]
cover
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[1]/[E]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[2]/[C]

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 32
[E061] Incorrect paper size setting for 1st drawer
[E062] Incorrect paper size setting for 2nd drawer
[E063] Incorrect paper size setting for 3rd drawer
[E064] Incorrect paper size setting for 4th drawer
[E065] Incorrect paper size setting for bypass tray

Classification Error contents

Other jam [E061] The size of paper in the 1st drawer differs from size setting of the
equipment.
[E062] The size of paper in the 2nd drawer differs from size setting of the
equipment.
[E063] The size of paper in the 3rd drawer differs from size setting of the
equipment.
[E064] The size of paper in the 4th drawer differs from size setting of the
equipment.
[E065] The size of paper in the bypass tray differs from size setting of the
equipment.

Check item Measures

Paper size If any paper remains in the equipment or drawer, remove it. Match the
paper size of the drawer setting and the one in the drawer.
For the bypass tray, set the paper size to the same as that for paper placed
on the tray.

8
[E090] Time out jam: Image data to be printed cannot be prepared.

Classification Error contents

Other jam Image data to be printed cannot be prepared.

Check item Measure

Paper path Remove the paper remained in front of the registration sensor.
Power Check if the error is cleared by turning the power OFF and then back ON.
MAIN board Connector check
Board check
Flash memory Check if the flash memory is correctly connected to the connector on the
MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remarks

MAIN board
Flash memory

[E550] Paper remaining on the transport path

Classification Error contents

Other jam The paper is remaining on the transport path when printing is finished
(caused by a multiple paper feeding).

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Open the cover of the unit/ Yes Remove the paper.
area whose picture is blinking No 2
on the control panel. Is there
any paper on the transport
path?

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 33
 Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
2 Is the sensor in the jamming Yes 3
area working? (Perform the No • Check if the connector of the sensor is
input check in the test mode: disconnected.
refer to the following table) • Check if any of the connectors on the MAIN
board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the sensor.
3 MAIN board Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Sensor Refer to the following table
MAIN board

Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers
(If a jam is occurring in the PFU/PFP check the board in each unit.)

Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode/Input check

Registration area Right cover Registration sensor 03-[A]/[A]
Exit area Right cover Exit sensor 03-[A]/[B]
ADU Right cover ADU sensor 03-[1]/[C]
PFU PFU jam access PFU paper feed sensor 03-[4]/[A]
cover
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[1]/[E]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[2]/[C]

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 34
[E552] Paper remaining jam on the transport path (when the cover is closed)

Classification Error contents

Other jam Paper remaining on the transport path when printing is finished (when the
cover is closed).

Next
Step Check Item Result Measure
Step
Jamming transport path Open the cover of the unit/area whose
1 picture is flashing on the control panel and
remove any paper on the transport path.
Sensor in the jamming area • Sensor check (Refer to the table below)
2 • Harness check
• Connector check
MAIN board • Harness check
• Connector check
3 • Board check
Notes:
If the jam is occurring in the PFU, check the board in each unit.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Sensor in the jamming area Refer to the table below.
MAIN board 8

Relation between the jamming area and the corresponding sensors and covers (If a jam is occurring in
the PFU/PFP check the board in each unit.)

Jamming area Cover Sensor Test mode/Input check

Registration area Right cover Registration sensor 03-[A]/[A]
Exit area Right cover Exit sensor 03-[A]/[B]
ADU Right cover ADU sensor 03-[1]/[C]
PFU PFU side cover PFU paper feed sensor 03-[4]/[A]
PFU PFU jam access PFU drawer feed sensor 03-[4]/[A]
cover
PFP PFP side cover PFP upper drawer feed sensor 03-[1]/[E]
PFP lower drawer feed sensor 03-[2]/[C]

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 35
[EAD0] Print end command time-out jam

Classification Error contents

Other jam Jam occurred because print operation did not finish normally due to
communication error on MAIN board.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the main motor working? Yes 2
(Perform the output check in No Replace the main motor.
the test mode: 03-101/151)
2 Replacing the PC board Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main motor
MAIN board

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 36
8.3.7 RADF jam
[E714] Feed signal reception jam

Classification Error contents

RADF jam The feed signal is received even no original exists on the original feeding
tray.

Check item Measures

Original empty sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[8]/[B])
• Lever check
• Connector check
• Harness check
RADF board • Board check
• Connector check (PA5)
• Harness check
MAIN board • Harness check
• Connector check
• Board check

Parts to be replaced Remark

Original empty sensor
RADF board
8
[E721] Jam not reaching the read sensor

Classification Error contents

RADF jam The original does not reach the read sensor after it has passed the
registration sensor (when scanning obverse side) or the reverse sensor
(when scanning reverse side).

Check item Measures

Transport roller-1 / Transport Clean the transport roller-1 and transport roller-2 if they are stained.
roller-2
Read sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[8]/[G])
• Connector check
• Harness check
RADF board • Board check
• Connector check (PA4)
• Harness check
Original feed motor • Harness check
• Connector check
• Output check: 03-281/03-282
MAIN board • Harness check
• Connector check
• Board check

Parts to be replaced Remark

Read sensor
RADF board
Transport roller-1 Replace it if it is worn out.
Transport roller-2
Original feed motor

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 37
[E725] Stop jam at the read sensor

Classification Error contents

RADF jam The trailing edge of the original does not pass the read sensor after its
leading edge has reached this sensor.

Check item Measures

Transport roller-2 Clean the transport roller if it is stained.
Read sensor • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[8]/[G])
• Connector check
• Harness check
RADF board • Board check
• Connector check (PA4)
• Harness check
MAIN board • Harness check
• Connector check
• Board check

Replace parts Remarks

Read sensor
RADF board
Transport roller-2 Replace it if it is worn out.

[E726] Jam not reaching the original intermediate transport sensor

Classification Error contents

RADF jam The trailing edge of the original does not pass the exit sensor after its
leading edge has reached this sensor.

Check item Measures

Exit/reverse roller Clean the exit/reverse roller if it is stained.
Original intermediate transport • Sensor check (Perform the input check: 03-[8]/[E])
sensor • Connector check
• Harness check
RADF board • Board check
• Connector check (PA4)
• Harness check
MAIN board • Harness check
• Connector check
• Board check

Parts to be replaced Remark

Original intermediate transport
sensor
RADF board
Exit/reverse roller Replace it if it is worn out.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 38
8.3.8 Drive system related service call
[C010] Main motor is abnormal

Classification Error contents

Drive system related service call The main motor is not rotating normally.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the main motor working? Yes 2
(Perform the output check in No • Check if the connector of the main motor is
the test mode: 03-101/151) disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN12 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the main
motor board and MAIN board are short circuited
or open circuited.
• Replace the main motor.
2 Are there any damage or Yes 3
scratches on the main motor No • Check if the connector pins are disconnected
board? and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the main
motor board and MAIN board are short circuited 8
or open circuited.
• Replace the main motor.
3 MAIN board • Check if the PLL lock signal CN12-B7 output
from the MAIN board is always level “L”?
• Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

Main motor
MAIN board

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 39
8.3.9 Paper feeding system related service call
[C040] PFP motor is abnormal

Classification Error contents

Paper feeding system related service The PFP motor is not rotating normally.
call

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the PFP motor working? Yes 2
(Perform the output check in No • Check if the signal line connector CN502, CN503
the test mode: 03-109/159) of the PFP motor is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN411 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN410 on the PFP board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
motor board, PFP board and MAIN board are
short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFP motor.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
2 Is the LED on the PFP motor Yes 3
board lit without flickering? No • Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
motor board, PFP board and MAIN board are
short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the PFP motor.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 PFP board • Check if the PLL lock signal CN411-8 output
MAIN board from the PFP board is always “L” level.
• Check if the voltage supplied to the
microcomputer input terminal IC5-17 is always
“L” level.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

PFP motor
PFP board
MAIN board

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 40
[C150] 3rd drawer tray is abnormal
[C160] 4th drawer tray is abnormal

Classification Error contents

Paper feeding system related service The PFP upper drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the 3rd drawer
call tray is not moving normally.
The PFP lower drawer tray-up motor is not rotating or the 4th drawer
tray is not moving normally.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Does the tray go up? Yes 2
(Perform the output check in No • Check if the connector of the tray-up motor is
the test mode: 03-278/280) disconnected.
• Check if any of the connectors CN410, CN413
on the PFP board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the tray-up motor
• Is there any dent, damage or deformation on the
gears of the tray-up motor? Replace the gears of 8
the gears.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
2 Is the tray-up sensor Yes 3
working? No • Check if the connector of the sensor is
(Perform the input check in disconnected.
the test mode: 03-[1]/[G], 03- • Check if any of the connectors CN410, CN414
[2]/[E]) and CN415 on the PFP board is disconnected.
• Check if the connector CN15 on the MAIN board
is disconnected.
• Check if the slit reaches the sensor.
• Check if the connector pins are disconnected
and the harnesses are open circuited.
• Check if the conductor patterns on the PFP
board and MAIN board are short circuited or
open circuited.
• Replace the PFP board.
• Replace the MAIN board.
3 MAIN board • Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

PFP board
MAIN board
Tray-up motor
Tray-up sensor

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 41
8.3.10 Scanning system related service call
[C260] Peak detection error

Classification Error contents

Scanning system related service call White reference is not detected when power is turned ON.

Proced
Check item Measure
ure
1 Shading correction plate Check if there is any scratch or stain on the shading correction plate.
2 CIS • Perform the light volume adjustment (05-3219).
- When an error has occurred, turn the power OFF and then back
ON and reattempt 05-3219.
- If the error still persists, check if the harness is connected
properly.
• Check if the harness is scratched or open circuited.
• Replace the CIS.
3 MAIN board • Check if the harness of the MAIN board is connected properly.
• Check if 24 V on the MAIN board is short circuited.
• Check if 24 V is supplied to the MAIN board.
• Check if 3.3 V on the MAIN board is short circuited.
• Check if 3.3 V is supplied to the MAIN board.
• Check if the mounted parts on the MAIN board are damaged or
abnormal.

Parts to be replaced Remark

CIS harness
CIS When replacing the CIS, be sure to perform the light volume adjustment
(05-3219).
MAIN board When replacing the board, be sure to perform the light volume adjustment
(05-3219).
Scan motor

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 42
[C270] CIS home position detection error

Classification Error contents

Scanning system related service call CIS home position cannot be detected within a specified period of time.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Does the CIS shift from its Yes It shifts. 2
home position? No It does not shift. 3
(Output check: 03-261)
2 CIS • Check if the correct CIS is installed.
• Check if the light source of the CIS lights up while the CIS is
shifting to the left.
• Check if the harness of the CIS is connected properly.
• Check if the harness is scratched or open circuited.
MAIN board • Check if the harness of the MAIN board is connected properly.
(CN4)
• Check if the mounted parts on the MAIN board are damaged or
abnormal.
3 MAIN board • Check if the harness of the MAIN board is connected properly.
CN11 (2329A/2829A)
CN6 (2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM)
• Check if 24 V on the MAIN board is short circuited.
• Check if 24 V is supplied to the MAIN board.
• Check if 3.3 V on the MAIN board is short circuited. 8
• Check if 3.3 V is supplied to the MAIN board.
• Check if the mounted parts on the MAIN board are damaged or
abnormal.
Scan motor • Check if the belt and the pulley come off.
• Check if the harness of the motor is caught or open circuited.

Parts to be replaced Remark

CIS harness
CIS When replacing the CIS, be sure to perform the light volume adjustment
(05-3219).
MAIN board When replacing the board, be sure to perform the light volume adjustment
(05-3219).
Scan motor

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 43
8.3.11 Process related service call
[CE50] Temperature/humidity sensor abnormality

Classification Contents
Process related service call The output value of this sensor is out of a specified range.

Check Item Result Measure

Is the connector CN24 on the MAIN Yes Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
board or the connector of the No • Replace the temperature/humidity sensor.
temperature/humidity sensor • Replace the MAIN board.
disconnected?
Is the harness between the MAIN
board and the temperature/humidity
sensor disconnected?

Replacement part Remark

Temperature/humidity sensor
MAIN board

[CE90] Drum thermistor abnormal

Classification Contents
Process related service call The output value of the drum thermistor is out of a specified range.

Check Item Result Measure

Is the connector CN24 on the MAIN Yes Connect the connector securely. Replace the harness.
board or the connector of the drum No • Replace the drum thermistor.
thermistor disconnected? • Replace the MAIN board.
Is the harness between the MAIN
board and the drum thermistor sensor
disconnected?

Replacement part Remark

Drum thermistor
MAIN board

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 44
[CFB0] PM counter reach error

Classification Contents
Process related service call Although the value of the PM counter has reached the number of
output pages for PM, the equipment continues being used without any
replacement of the parts.

Check Item Measure

Display contents on the LCD screen 1. Check the 4-digit number displayed under the error code.
check
CALL FOR SERVCE CFB0
0188
XXXXXXXX

2. By following the number, replace the corresponding PM parts.

3. Clear the PM counters for the replaced PM parts.
Remarks:
1st digit: PM parts of the process unit (0008)
2nd digit: Developer material (0080)
3rd digit: Parts other than the PM parts of the process unit
(0100)
If multiple parts have reached the maintenance time, the sum of
the corresponding code values listed above is displayed in 8
hexadecimal numbers. For example, if the process unit,
developer material and peripheral parts of the process unit
reach the maintenance time, the 4-digit hexadecimal number
code will be “0188”: 0008+0080+0100=0188

Replacement part Remark

PM parts Replace the corresponding PM parts.

[C970] High-voltage transformer abnormality

Classification Contents
Process related service call High-voltage transformer abnormality

Check Item Measure

Parts • Is the main charger installed securely?
• Check if the spring of high-voltage supply contact point is
deformed.
• Check if the needle electrode is broken or the main charger grid is
deformed.
• Check if any foreign matters is on the needle electrode or the main
charger grid.
• Check if the transfer roller and the separation needle are installed
securely.
• Check if the transfer roller or the separation needle is removed.
• Check if there is any foreign matter attached on the transfer roller
or the separation needle.
• Replace the parts if there is any abnormality.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 45
8.3.12 Laser optical unit related service call
[CA10] Polygonal motor is abnormal

Classification Error contents

Laser optical unit related service call The polygonal motor is not rotating normally

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Is the polygonal motor Yes • Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
rotating? (Output check: 03- board is short circuited or open circuited.
103/153) • Replace the MAIN board.
• Replace the laser optical unit.
No • Check if the connector of the harness is
disconnected between MAIN board (CN32) and
the laser optical unit. Reconnect it securely if so.
Even if the connector is not apparently
disconnected, it may be connected loosely.
Therefore check carefully that it is secure.
• Check if the harness is open circuited and the
connector pin is disconnected.
• Check if the conductor pattern on the MAIN
board is short circuited or open circuited.
• Replace the laser optical unit.
• Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board
Laser optical unit

[CA20] H-Sync detection error

Classification Error contents

Laser optical unit related service call H-Sync detection PC board cannot detect laser beams.

Proced Next
Check item Result Measure
ure Step
1 Are the harness open Yes Even if the connector is not apparently
circuited and the connectors disconnected, it may be connected loosely.
disconnected between the Therefore check carefully that it is secure.
MAIN board (CN24) and the No Replace the MAIN board.
laser optical unit?
2 H-sync mirror Check if the H-sync mirror stained with toner. Clean
the mirror if it is dirty with dry cloth.
3 Laser optical unit Replace the laser optical unit.

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board
Laser optical unit

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 46
8.3.13 Fuser unit related service call
Notes:
Be sure to turn OFF the power and unplug the power cable beforehand when checking the
heater.
The fuser unit itself or the part of the unit remains heated and the capacitors are still charged
after a while the power cable is unplugged. So make sure the unit is cooled down enough before
checking.

[C411] Heater abnormality at power-ON (not reached 40°C) [first-time occurrence]

[C412] Heater abnormality at power-ON (not reached 40°C) [continuous occurrence]
[C413] Heater abnormality at power-ON (not reached 100°C)
[C414] Heater abnormality at power-ON (not reached the temperature of the ready state)
[C415] Low WAIT abnormality
[C447] Fusing temperature abnormality during the ready state and printing
[C449] Fusing temperature abnormality (high temperature)

Classification Error contents

Fuser unit related service call [C411] [C412] [C413] [C414] The temperature of the fuser roller does
not rise to the preset value when the power is turned ON.
[C415] The printing operation cannot be restarted even if the preset
time has passed after the equipment has entered the lower WAIT state
during printing.
[C447] The fusing temperature during the ready state and printing is
40°C or below. 8
[C449] The fusing temperature is 240°C or higher.

Check item Measure

Error check Perform the self-diagnostic code to find the thermistor with the
abnormality.
08-4570-0: Center thermistor
08-4570-1: Side thermistor
08-4570-2: Edge thermistor
08-4570-5: Error counter
Thermistor check • Check if the connector is disconnected.
• Check if the thermistors (center, side, edge) firmly contact the
surface of the fuser roller.
• Check if there is any deformation or dirt on the thermistors (center,
side, edge).
• Check if the connectors and harnesses of the thermistors (center,
side, edge) are open circuited.
• Replace the thermistors (center, side, edge).
Heater check • Check if the heater lamp is open circuited.
• Check if the connector of the heater lamp is disconnected.
• Check if the harness is properly connected to the terminal of the
heater lamp.
• Check if the thermostat is blown.
• Replace the heater lamp.
• Replace the thermostat.
Connection check of the fuser roller • Check if the fuser unit is tightly secured with the screw on the
grounding equipment so that there is no gap.
• Check if there is any contact failure due to the deformation of the
grounding leaf spring of the fuser roller.
Power supply check • Check if the power voltage is normal.
• Check if the connector is disconnected.
• Replace the switching regulator.
MAIN board check • Check if the connector (CN10) is disconnected.
• Check if there is any abnormality such as an open circuit or a short
circuit on the board.
• Check if the connector and the harness between the MAIN board
and the fuser unit are open circuited.
• Replace the MAIN board.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 47
 Check item Measure
Counter clear After the error has been cleared, perform the following items.
1. Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
2. Key in “2002” and press the [START] button.
3. Change the displayed counter value (*1) to “0” and press the [OK]
button.
4. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the
equipment enters the ready state.
(*1): C411: 1, C412: 2, C413: 3, C414: 4, C415: 5, C447: 7, 24, C449:
9, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 27, 29, 45

Parts to be replaced Remark

Thermistor
Heater lamp
Thermostat
Fuser roller grounding
MAIN board
Switching regulator

[C452] Fusing temperature abnormality when reaching the ready state temperature

Classification Error contents

Fuser unit related service call The difference between the center thermistor and the edge thermistor
is 70°C or more when reaching the ready state temperature.

Check item Measure

Error check Perform the self-diagnostic code to find the thermistor with the
abnormality.
08-4570-0: Center thermistor
08-4570-2: Edge thermistor
08-4570-5: Error counter
Thermistor check • Check if the connector is disconnected.
• Check if the thermistors (center, edge) firmly contact the surface of
the fuser roller.
• Check if there is any deformation or dirt on the thermistors (center,
edge).
• Check if the connectors and harnesses of the thermistors (center,
edge) are open circuited.
• Replace the thermistors (center, edge).
Heater check • Check if the heater lamp is open circuited.
• Check if the connector of the heater lamp is disconnected.
• Check if the harness is properly connected to the terminal of the
heater lamp.
• Check if the thermostat is blown.
• Replace the heater lamp.
• Replace the thermostat.
MAIN board check • Check if the connector (CN10) is disconnected.
• Check if there is any abnormality such as an open circuit or a short
circuit on the board.
• Check if the connector and the harness between the MAIN board
and the fuser unit are open circuited.
• Replace the MAIN board.
Switching regulator check • Check if there is any abnormality in the switching regulator.
• Replace the switching regulator.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 48
 Check item Measure
Counter clear After the error has been cleared, perform the following items.
1. Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
2. Key in “2002” and press the [START] button.
3. Change the displayed counter value (*1) to “0” and press the [OK]
button.
4. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the
equipment enters the ready state.
(*1): C452: 62

Parts to be replaced Remark

Thermistor
Heater lamp
Thermostat
MAIN board
Switching regulator

[C4B0] Fusing counter abnormality

Classification Error item

Fuser unit related service call Data abnormality in the RAM (An abnormal value has been included in
the error counter.)
8
Check item Measures
MAIN board check • Check if there is any abnormality such as an open circuit or a short
circuit on the board.
• Check if the flash memory (IC) is installed properly.
- 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: IC10
- 2329A/2829A: IC11
• Replace the MAIN board.
Counter clear After the error has been cleared, perform the following items.
1. Turn the power ON while [0] and [8] are pressed simultaneously.
2. Key in “2002” and press the [START] button.
3. Change the displayed counter value to “0” and press the [OK]
button.
4. Turn the power OFF and then back ON. Make sure that the
equipment enters the ready state.

Replace parts Remarks

MAIN board

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 49
8.3.14 Circuit related service call
[C911] Toner cartridge PC board access abnormality

Classification Contents
Circuit related service call Abnormal access to the toner cartridge IC chip

Proced Next
Check item Result Contents
ure Step
1 Does the recommended Yes Use the recommended Toshiba toner cartridge. 2
toner cartridge display No
appear when the toner supply
cover is opened and closed?
2 Toner cartridge • Check the phenomenon by removing the toner
cartridges and reinserting them.
• Check that the CTRG board of the cartridge is
installed properly.
• Avoid touching the contact point.
• Wipe the contact point with a soft cloth if it's
stained.
3 Contact point on the Check that the spring of the contact point is not
equipment side deformed.
4 Is the spring of the contact Yes
point returned when it is No • Check that the CTIF board is installed properly. 7
pushed lightly? • Board check
5 MAIN board • Connector check (CN15)
• Board check
6 Harness • Connector check (CN15: Main board, CN150:
CTIF board)
• Harness check
7 CTIF board • Check that the board is installed properly.
• Board check

Replacement part Remark

Toner cartridge
MAIN board
Harness
CTIF board

[C916] Sub-CPU access abnormality

[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality

Classification Contents
Circuit related service call [C916] Failed to access to the sub-CPU
[C940] Engine-CPU abnormality

Check item Measures

MAIN board • Check if there is no abnormality in the MAIN board.
• Check if the conductor pattern of the MAIN board is short circuited
or open circuited.
• Replace the MAIN board.

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 50
[C950] The abnormalities in a MAIN board

Classification Error contents

Other service call The engine firmware being downloaded to the MAIN board is not the
same as the machine.

Check Item Measure

MAIN board Check that the wrong board is not installed, if it is wrong, replace it.
Engine firmware Check that the model of the machine is correct, if it is wrong, download
the data again.

Replacement part Measure

MAIN board

[F090] Memory abnormality on the MAIN board

Classification Contents
Circuit related service call Memory abnormality on the MAIN board

Check Item Measure

1. Turn the power off, and start up the Setting Mode (08). 8
2. When “TEST MODE D” is displayed on the control panel, key in
code: 9080 and press the [START] key.
Notes:
Code: 9080 cannot be keyed in except when 08-9010 is ON. To
set the 08-9010, if this is the case, key in 08-9010 → [START]
→ [CLEAR] → key in [1] → [OK].
3. When “SELECT DESTINATION” is displayed, use the keys
to select a direction and press the [OK] key.
4. When “MC=9080” is displayed on the control panel, press the [OK]
key. To cancel, press the [CANCEL] key.
5. If flash memory clear ends normally, “INITIALIZE=OK” is displayed
on the control panel, it automatically changes to the initial screen of
the 08 mode.
6. Perform the initialization after the software version upgrade (08-
9030).
7. Display the serial number (08-9601) and check the serial number.
Key in the correct serial number using 08-9601 if the serial number
is different from the serial number on the identification plate on the
back cover.
8. Set the 08-9010 to “0”.
9. Check if the fax function is installed and then set the 08-9063
accordingly.
0: Not installed
1: Installed
10. Turn the power off and then on, if the error is not corrected, replace
the flash memory on the MAIN board.

Replacement part Remark

Memory on the MAIN board. 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: IC10
2329A/2829A: IC11

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 51
8.3.15 Communication related service call
[F070] Communication error between system CPU and main CPU

Classification Error contents

Communication related service Communication error between system CPU and main CPU
call

Check item Measure

Check ROM version • Check the firmware version and confirm if the combination of the
system ROM and engine ROM is correct.
• If the version number is not displayed, upgrade the engine ROM and
system ROM.
MAIN board Board check (Check if there is any abnormality in the appearance of parts
mounted on the MAIN board)

Parts to be replaced Remark

MAIN board

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 52
8.3.16 Other service call
[F901] Engine speed error

Classification Error contents

Other service call The speed information of the MAIN board is damaged.
A MAIN board not corresponding to the equipment model is installed.

Check item Measure

Harness Check if there is no problem in the harness for connecting to the following
connector.
MAIN board: CN15
MAIN board Check if the installed MAIN board corresponds to the equipment model.
Check if the label color of the MAIN board (indicated in the figure with the
arrow) corresponds to the equipment model (indicated on the rating label).
2523A: White
2323AM: Blue
2823AM: Green
2523AD: Gray
2329A: Red
2329A(NAD): Purple
2829A: Yellow
2829A(NAD): Brown

Position of the label to be checked

8

If they are not corresponding correctly, replace the MAIN board with the
correct one by referring to the procedures described below.
Reference:  P. 9-1 “9.1.1 MAIN board (MAIN)”

Parts to be replaced Remark

Harness
MAIN board

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 53
8.3.17 Error in E-mail / Scanning Function

[ 1 ] E-mail related error

[1C69] SMTP server connection error

Classification Error item

E-mail related error SMTP server connection error

Check item Measures

Setting • Reset the login name and password of SMTP server and perform
the job again.
• Check if the SMTP server is operating properly.
LAN cable Check that the LAN cable is connected.

[1C71] SMTP authentication ERROR

Classification Error item

Internet FAX related error SMTP authentication ERROR

Check item Measures

Setting Check that SMTP authentication method, login name and password
are correct, then perform authentication again.

[1C72] POP Before SMTP ERROR

Classification Error item

Internet FAX related error POP Before SMTP ERROR

Check item Measures

Setting Check that both the POP Before SMTP setting and POP3 setting are
correct, then perform authentication again.

[ 2 ] File sharing related error

[2D31] File creation failure

Classification Error item

File sharing related error File creation failure

Check item Measures

Setting • Check if the access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
• Check if the server or local disk has a sufficient space in disk
capacity.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 54
[2D62] File server connection error

Classification Error item

File sharing related error File server connection error

Check item Measures

Setting • Check the IP address or path of the server.
• Check if the server is operating properly.

[2D63] Invalid network path

Classification Error item

File sharing related error Invalid network path

Check item Measures

Setting • Check the network path.
• If the path is correct, turn the power OFF and then back ON, and
perform the job again.

[2D64] Login failure

8
Classification Error item
File sharing related error Login failure

Check item Measures

Setting • Reset the login name and password. Perform the job.
• Check if the account of the server is properly set up.

[2D67] FTP service not available

Classification Error item

File sharing related error FTP service not available

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the setting of FTP service is valid.

[2D68] File sharing service not available

Classification Error item

File sharing related error File sharing service not available

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the setting of SMB is valid.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 55
[2E31] File creation failure in USB storage / mobile device

Classification Error item

File sharing related error File creation failure in USB storage / mobile device

Check item Measures

Setting • Check if access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
• Check if the USB storage or mobile device has sufficient space in
its disk capacity.

[2E33] File access failure in USB storage / mobile device

Classification Error item

File sharing related error File access failure in USB storage / mobile device

Check item Measures

Setting • Check if access privilege to the storage directory is writable.
• Check if the USB storage or mobile device has sufficient space in
its disk capacity.

[2E66] HDD full failure in USB storage / mobile device

Classification Error item

File sharing related error HDD full failure in USB storage / mobile device

Check item Measures

Setting • Delete the job in progress or being set or in the HOLD/PRIVATE/
PROOF/INVALID, and perform it again.
• Reduce the number of inserting pages and perform the job
again.
• Check that there is enough space in the USB memory or mobile
device.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 56
[ 3 ] E-mail reception related error
[3E10] POP3 server connection error

Classification Error item

E-mail reception related error POP3 server connection error

Check item Measures

Setting Check if the IP address or domain name of the POP3 server set for
this equipment is correct, or check if POP3 server to be connected is
operating properly.

[5011] Communication error

Classification Error item

E-mail reception related error Communication error

Check item Measures

LAN cable • Check that the LAN cable is connected.
• If the LAN cable connection defect is detected twice or more, the
error display will be changed from 5011 to 1C69 (SMTP server
connection error). So if it is not changed, check “2”.
SMTP server • Send the E-mail by dividing it. (Change the file size in the 8
[Setting items] menu.)
• Check if the memory in the SMTP server is sufficient. (If not, add
memory to the SMTP server.)

[5018] Invalid DNS error

Classification Error item

E-mail reception related error Invalid DNS error

Check item Measures

Setting • Set the correct DNS address.
• If any setting is needed in DNS, consult your administrators.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 57
8.4 Troubleshooting for the Image

8.4.1 Abnormality of image density / Gray balance

Image density Gray balance

Feeding direction

Fig.8-3

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Density/Gray balance 1 Check the density/gray balance. Adjust the density.

Printer section 2 Check test print image (04-114). Go to step 4 if there is any problem
on image.
Scanner 3 Are the original glass and CIS unit Clean them.
dirty?
Printed image 4 Is the image faded? Perform troubleshooting for faded
image.
5 Is background fogging occurring? Perform troubleshooting for
background fogging.
6 Is there a blotch on the image? Perform troubleshooting for blotched
image.
7 Is the image transferred normally? Perform troubleshooting for
abnormal transfer.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 58
8.4.2 Background fogging

Feeding direction

Fig.8-4
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.
Background reproduction 2 Check the background reproduction. Adjust the background.
Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-114). Go to step 4 if there is any problem
on image.
Scanner 4 Are the original glass and CIS unit Clean them.
dirty?
Auto-toner 5 Is the auto-toner sensor normal? Check the performance of the auto-
toner sensor and readjust.
6 Is the toner supplied normally? Check the motor and circuits.
High-voltage transformer 7 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger / Developer output defective? transformer.
bias)
Developer unit 8 Is the contact between the drum and Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap and
developer material normal? polarity.
Developer material/Toner/ 9 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material,
Drum material, toner and drum? toner and drum.
10 Have the developer material and Replace the developer material and
drum reached their PM life? drum.
11 Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in the
toner cartridge 35°C less without environment within specification.
dew?
Drum cleaning blade 12 Is the drum cleaned properly? Check the pressure of the drum
cleaning blade.
Toner dusting 13 Is toner heaped on the seal of the Remove the toner and clean the
developer unit? developer unit.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 59
8.4.3 Moire/lack of sharpness

A B
Feeding direction

Fig.8-5

Moire

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.

Parameter adjustment 2 Check the image processing Check the adjustment value for
value parameters. sharpness.

Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-114). When defects occur, perform the
corresponding troubleshooting
procedure.

Lack of sharpness

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Density reproduction 1 Check the reproduction of the image Adjust the density.
density.

Parameter adjustment 2 Check the image processing Check the adjustment value for
value parameters. sharpness.

Printer section 3 Check test print image (04-114). When defects occur, perform the
corresponding troubleshooting
procedure.

4 Check the image processing Check the encircled areas A and B in

parameters. the image, and change the
sharpness intensity in the sharpness
adjustment mode.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 60
8.4.4 Toner offset

Approx.72mm

Feeding direction
Fig.8-6 8
Toner offset (Shadow image appears approx.72mm toward the dark image.)

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Density 1 Is the density too high? Adjust the density.

Fuser unit 2 Is the pressure of the fuser roller Check the pressure releasing parts and
normal? pressurization mechanism.
3 Is the thermistor in contact with the fuser Contact the thermistor with the fuser
roller? roller.
4 Is there a scratch on the fuser roller Replace the fuser roller.
surface?
5 Has the fuser roller reached its PM life? Replace the fuser roller.
6 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the adjustment values of fuser
roller normal? roller temperature?
08-2010, 2009, 2100
7 Is the power supplied between the fuser Check if the power supply bracket of the
unit entrance guide and the registration fuser unit is installed properly.
roller on the equipment side?
Paper 8 Has the appropriate paper type been Select a proper mode.
selected?
9 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller in each paper type normal? (08-2049, 2050, 2051, 2194)
10 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.
Developer material 11 Using the specified developer material? Use the specified developer material and
toner.
Scanner 12 Are the original glass (especially the Clean them.
position of shading correction plate) and
CIS unit dirty?

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 61
8.4.5 Blurred image

Feeding direction

Fig.8-7

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Paper 1 Is the paper in the drawer damp? Change paper. Avoid storing paper in
damp place.

Bedewed scanner 2 Is the scanner bedewed? Clean the scanner.

Drum 3 Is the drum surface wet or dirty? Wipe the drum with a piece of dry
cloth.
* Do not use alcohol or other
organic solvents.

Ozone exhaust 4 Is the exhaust fan operating Check the connection of connector.
properly? Replace the ozone exhaust fan.

5 Is the ozone filter stained or Replace the ozone filter.

damaged?

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 62
8.4.6 Poor fusing

Feeding direction

Fig.8-8
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Heater electric power 1 Check if the connector contacts Correct it.

properly.

2 Is the heater shorted or open Replace the heater.

circuited?

Pressure between fuser 3 Are the pressure springs working Check and adjust the pressure
roller and pressure roller properly? springs.

Fuser roller temperature 4 Is the temperature of the fuser roller Check the setting and correct it.
normal? 08-2010, 2009, 2100

Developer material/Toner 5 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material
material and toner? and toner.

Paper 6 Is the paper in the drawer damp? Avoid storing paper in damp place.

7 Is the paper type corresponding to its Use the proper type of paper or
mode? select the proper mode.

8 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller in each paper type normal? (08-2049, 2050, 2051, 2194)

9 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 63
8.4.7 Blank copy

Feeding direction

Fig.8-9

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Transfer roller unit 1 Is the power supplying spring of the Check the power supplying spring
transfer roller installed securely? (Is it and reinstall it.
almost detached?)
High-voltage transformer 2 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Transfer roller unit, output defective? transformer.
Developer bias)
3 Are the connectors of the high- Reconnect the harness securely.
voltage harness securely connected? Replace the high-voltage harness.
Is the harness open circuited?
Developer unit 4 Is the developer unit installed Check and correct the engaging
properly? condition of the developer unit gears.
5 Do the developer sleeve and mixers Check and fix the drive system of the
rotate? developer unit.
6 Is the developer material smoothly Remove the foreign matter from the
transported? developer material.
7 Has the magnetic brush phase been Adjust the developer polarity.
shifted?
8 Is the doctor blade positioned Adjust it using the doctor-sleeve jig.
properly?
Drum 9 Is the drum rotating? Check the drive system of the drum.
MAIN board and 10 Are the connectors securely Connect the connectors securely.
harnesses connected? Replace the harness.
Check if the harnesses connecting
the boards are open circuited.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 64
8.4.8 Solid copy

Feeding direction

Fig.8-10
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Scanner 1 Does the exposure lamp light? Check if the connector contacts with
the MAIN board and CIS unit
terminal.

Scanner 2 Is there any foreign matter on the Remove it.

light path?

Bedewed scanner and 3 Is the scanner or drum bedewed? Clean the CIS unit and drum.
drum Keep the power cord plugged in all
trough the day and night.
(For the model with damp heater)

Main charger 4 Is the main charger securely Install it securely.

installed?

5 Is the needle electrode broken? Replace the needle electrode.

High-voltage transformer 6 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger) output defective? transformer.

7 Are the connectors of the high- Reconnect the harness securely.

voltage harness securely connected? Replace the high-voltage harness.
Is the harness open circuited?
MAIN board and 8 Are the connectors securely Connect the connectors securely.
harnesses connected? Replace the harness.
Check if the harnesses connecting
the boards are open circuited.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 65
8.4.9 White banding or white void (in the feeding direction)

Feeding direction

Fig.8-11

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Scanner 1 Is there a foreign matter on the light Remove the foreign matter.
path?
2 Are the original glass (especially the Clean them.
position of shading correction plate)
and CIS unit dirty?
Transport path 3 Does the toner image contact with Remove the foreign matter.
any foreign matter before the paper
enters the fusing section after the
separation?
Discharge LED 4 Is any of the discharge LEDS off? Replace the discharge LED.
Cleaner 5 Is there any foreign matter, which Remove the foreign matter.
contacts the drum on the cleaner
stay?
Toner cartridge 6 Is the adhered foreign matter Remove the foreign matter.
blocking the laser light path?
Developer unit 7 Is the floated lid of the developer Check the lid and place it properly.
bottle blocking the laser light path?
8 Is the developer material transported Remove the foreign matter if there is
properly? any.
9 Is there any foreign matter between Remove the foreign matter.
the doctor blade and the developer
sleeve?
10 Is there a foreign matter or dew on Remove the foreign matter or dew.
the drum seal?
11 Is the upper drum seal of the Correct the position of the drum seal
developer unit in contact with the or replace it.
drum?

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 66
 Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Drum 12 Is there a foreign matter on the drum Replace the drum. If there is a
surface? convex foreign matter adhering to the
drum surface, it indicates that the
blade edge at this area is worn out. In
this case, replace both the drum and
the drum cleaning blade.
13 Is there any foreign matter around Remove the foreign matter.
the aperture on the laser incoming
side of the process unit?
Laser light path 14 Is there any foreign matter on frame Remove the foreign matter.
of the slit window of the metal plate
between the laser optical unit and the
process unit?
Laser optical unit 15 Dose any foreign matter blocking the Remove the foreign matter.
laser light path adhere on the frame
of the laser outgoing window?

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 67
8.4.10 White banding (at right angle with the feeding direction)

Feeding direction

Fig.8-12

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Main charger 1 Is there a foreign matter on the Remove the foreign matter.
charger?

2 Is the connector in proper contact Clean or adjust the terminal.

with the terminal?

Drum 3 Is there any abnormality on the drum Replace the drum.

surface?

Discharge LED 4 Does the discharge LED light Replace the discharge LED or check
normally? the harness and the circuit.

Developer unit 5 Is the developer sleeve rotating Check the drive system of the
normally? developer unit, or clean the sleeve
Is there any abnormality on the surface.
sleeve surface?
Drive system 6 Are the drum and scanner jittering? Check each drive system.

High-voltage transformer 7 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger / Developer output defective? transformer.
bias / Transfer roller unit)
Transfer roller unit 8 Is there any foreign matter adhering Remove the foreign matter from the
to the transfer roller? Is there any roller surface. Replace the roller if
abnormality in the appearance of the there is any abnormality in its
roller? Has the number of output appearance. Also replace the roller if
pages exceeded the threshold for the the number of output pages has
life of the transfer roller? exceeded the threshold of its life.

Feed system 9 Is the aligning amount proper? Adjust the aligning amount.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 68
8.4.11 Skew (inclined image)

Feeding direction

Fig.8-13
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Drawers 1 Is the drawer properly installed? Install the drawer properly.

2 Is there too much paper in the Reduce paper to 250 or fewer sheets
drawer? in the drawer.

3 Is the corner of the paper folded? Change the direction of the paper
and set it again.

4 Are the side guides of the drawer Adjust the position of the side guides.
properly installed?

Feed roller 5 Is the surface of the feed roller dirty? Clean the feed roller surface with
alcohol, or replace the roller.

Rollers 6 Are the roller and shaft secured? Check and tighten the E-rings, pins,
clips and setscrews.

Registration roller 7 Is the spring detached from the Attach the spring correctly. Clean the
registration roller? roller if it is dirty.

Pre-registration guide 8 Is the pre-registration guide properly Correct it.

installed?

CIS unit 9 Is the CIS unit slanted? Replace the CIS case.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 69
8.4.12 Black banding (in the feeding direction)

Feeding direction

Fig.8-14

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Scanner 1 Is there a foreign matter on the light Clean the CIS.
path?
Shading correction plate 2 Is there dust or stains on part of the Clean the plate.
original glass where the shading
correction plate is placed.
Main charger 3 Is there a foreign matter on the main Remove the foreign matter.
charger grid?
4 Is the main charger grid dirty or Clean or replace the main charger
deformed? grid.
5 Is there a foreign matter on the main Remove the foreign matter.
charger?
6 Is the needle electrode dirty or Clean or replace the needle
deformed? electrode.
7 Is there a foreign matter inside the Remove the foreign matter.
main charger case?
8 Is the inside of the main charger case Clean the inside of the main charger
dirty? case.
Cleaner 9 Is there paper dust sticking to the Clean or replace the cleaning blade.
drum cleaning blade edge?
10 Is the drum cleaning blade working Check the pressurization of the drum
properly? cleaning blade.
11 Has the used toner been recovered Clean the toner recovery auger.
properly?
Fuser unit 12 Is the fuser roller surface dirty or Clean or replace the fuser roller.
damaged?
13 Is the thermistor dirty? Clean the thermistor.
Drum 14 Are there scratches on the drum Replace the drum.
surface?

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 70
8.4.13 Black banding (at right angle with the feeding direction)

Feeding direction

Fig.8-15
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Main charger 1 Is the needle electrode dirty or Clean or replace the needle
deformed? electrode.

Fuser unit 2 Are the fuser roller, fuser roller Clean them.
separation finger and thermistor
dirty?

3 Has the fuser roller and fuser roller Replace them.

separation finger reached their PM
life?

High-voltage transformer 4 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger / Developer output defective? transformer.
bias / Transfer roller unit)

Drum 5 Is there a deep scratch on the drum Replace the drum if the scratch has
surface? reached the aluminum base.

6 Is there thin scratch (drum pitting) on Check and adjust the contact
the drum surface? condition of the cleaning blade and
recovery blade.

Scanner 7 Is there foreign matter on the CIS Clean them.

rail?

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 71
8.4.14 White spots

Feeding direction

Fig.8-16

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Developer unit, 1 Is the toner density in the developer Check and correct the auto-toner
Toner cartridge material appropriate? sensor and toner supply operation.
Check if the amount of the toner is
sufficient in the toner cartridge.

2 Is the doctor-sleeve gap proper? Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.

Developer material, Toner, 3 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material,
Drum material, toner and drum? toner and drum.

4 Have the developer material and Replace the developer material and
drum reached their PM life? drum.

5 Is the storage environment of the Use the toner cartridge stored in the
toner cartridge 35°C or less without environment with specification.
dew?
6 Is there any dent on the drum Replace the drum.
surface?

7 Is there any film forming on the Clean or replace the drum.

drum?

Main charger 8 Is there any foreign matter on the Remove it.

charger?

9 Is the needle electrode dirty or Clean or replace the needle

deformed? electrode.

High-voltage transformer 10 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Main charger / Developer output defective? transformer.
bias / Transfer roller unit)
Transfer roller unit 11 Is there any foreign matter such as Clean the transfer roller and
fiber in the paper transport area of separation needle.
the transfer roller unit?

12 Is there any foreign matter on the Remove the foreign matter or replace
transfer roller? Is there any the transfer roller.
abnormality on its appearance?

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 72
8.4.15 Poor image transfer

Feeding direction

Fig.8-17
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Paper 1 Is the paper in the drawer curled? Reinsert the paper with the reverse
side up or change the paper.

2 Is the paper in the drawer damp? Change paper. Avoid storing paper in
damp place.

3 Is the paper type corresponding to its Select the proper mode.

mode?

4 Using the recommended paper? Use the recommended paper.

Transfer roller unit 5 Is the transfer roller contacting with Check them and reinstall if required.
the drum? Are the charger pushing-
spring and the transfer roller
pressure spring installed properly?

Registration roller 6 Is there any abnormality related to Clean the roller if it is dirty. Securely
the registration roller or with the roller attach the springs if they are
itself? detached. Replace the clutch if it is
defective. Adjust the rotation speed
of the roller.

High-voltage transformer 7 Is the high-voltage transformer Adjust the output, or replace the
(Transfer roller unit) output defective? transformer.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 73
8.4.16 Uneven image density

Feeding direction

Fig.8-18

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Main charger 1 Is the main charger dirty? Clean or replace the needle
electrode and main charger grid.

Transfer roller unit 2 Is the transfer roller contacting with Check them and reinstall if required.
the drum? Are the charger pushing-
spring and the transfer roller
pressure spring installed properly?

Laser optical unit 3 Is there dirt on the fθ lens? Remove the foreign matter or stain.

Discharge LED 4 Are the connectors of discharge LED Reconnect the harness securely.
harness securely connected?

5 Is the discharge LED dirty? Clean the discharge LED.

6 Is any of the discharge LEDs off? Replace the discharge LED.

Developer unit 7 Is the magnetic brush in proper Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap.
contact with the drum?

8 Is the developer sleeve Check the mechanism.

pressurization mechanism working?

9 Is the developer material transported Remove foreign matters if there is

normally? any.

Scanner 10 Is the original cover or RADF Close the original cover or RADF.
opened?

11 Are the original glass (especially the Clean them.

position of shading correction plate)
and CIS unit dirty?

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 74
8.4.17 Faded image (low density, abnormal gray balance), The exit paper
surface feels rough like sand is adhering to it (carrier offset)

Feeding direction

Fig.8-19 8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Toner empty 1 Is “ADD TONER” symbol lit? Replace the toner cartridge.
Auto-toner circuit 2 Is there enough toner in the Check the performance of the auto-
cartridge? toner circuit.
3 Is the toner density in the developer
material too low?
Toner motor 4 Is the toner motor working normally? Check the toner motor and the motor
drive.
Toner cartridge 5 Is there any problem with the toner Replace the toner cartridge.
cartridge?
Developer material 6 Has the developer material reached Replace the developer material.
its PM life?
Developer unit 7 Is the magnetic brush in proper Check the installation of the
contact with the drum? developer unit.
Adjust the doctor-sleeve gap and
polarity.
8 Is the developer sleeve Check the mechanism.
pressurization mechanism working?
Main charger 9 Is the main charger dirty? Clean it or replace the needle
electrode and main charger grid.
Drum 10 Is “film-forming” occurring on the Clean or replace the drum.
drum surface?
11 Has the drum reached its PM life? Replace the drum.
Transfer roller unit 12 Is the transfer roller contacting with Check them and reinstall if required.
the drum? Is the transfer roller
pressure spring installed properly?
High-voltage transformer 13 Is the setting for the high-voltage Adjust the output from the high-
transformer proper? voltage transformer.
14 Are the connectors of the high- Reconnect the harness securely.
voltage harness securely connected? Replace the high-voltage harness.
Is the harness open circuited?

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 75
 Defective area Step Check items Prescription
Power supplying spring 15 Is the power supplying spring of the Check the power supplying spring
developer and the transfer roller and reinstall it.
installed securely? (Is it almost Replace the power supplying spring.
detached?) (Fig.8-20)
Discharge LED 16 Are the connectors of discharge LED Reconnect the harness securely.
harness securely connected?

[1] Power supplying spring of the developer

[2] Power supplying spring of the transfer roller

[2] [1]

Fig.8-20

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 76
8.4.18 Image dislocation in feeding direction

Feeding direction

Fig.8-21
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Scanner/Printer 1 Have the printed images been Adjust the position of the leading
adjustment dislocated in the same manner? edge of paper in the Adjustment
Mode.

Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller dirty, or the Clean the registration roller with
spring detached? alcohol.
Securely attach the springs.

3 Is the registration roller working Adjust or replace the gears if they are
properly? not engaged properly.

Feed clutch 4 Is the feed clutch working properly? Check the circuit or feed clutch, and
replace them if necessary.

Pre-registration guide 5 Is the pre-registration guide installed Install the guide properly.
properly?

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 77
8.4.19 Jittering image

Feeding direction

Fig.8-22

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

— 1 Is the toner image on the drum If normal, perform steps 2 to 4.

normal? Perform step 5 and followings in case
the image is abnormal.

Registration roller 2 Is the registration roller rotating Check the registration roller area and
normally? springs for installation condition.

Fuser roller and pressure 3 Are the fuser roller and pressure Check the fuser roller area.
roller roller rotating normally? Replace the rollers if necessary.

Drum 4 Is there a big scratch on the drum? Replace the drum.

CIS 5 Is there any problem with the CIS Replace the CIS case.
case?

6 Is the tension of the timing belt Adjust the tension.

normal?

7 Is there any problem with the drive Check the drive system of the CIS.
system of the CIS?

8 Is the CIS unit secured? Secure it.

Drum drive system 9 Is there any problem with the drive Check the drive system of the drum.
system of the drum? Clean or replace the gears if they
have stains or scratches.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 78
8.4.20 Poor cleaning

Feeding direction

Fig.8-23
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Developer material 1 Using the specified developer Use the specified developer material
material? and toner.

Cleaner 2 Is the cleaning blade in proper Check the cleaning blade.

contact with the drum?

3 Has the cleaning blade been turned Replace the cleaning blade.
up? Check and replace drum if
necessary.

Toner recovery auger 4 Is the toner recovered normally? Clean the toner recovery auger.
Check the pressure of the cleaning
blade.
Check if the toner recovery auger is
rotated properly.

Fuser unit 5 Are there bubble-like scratches on Replace the fuser roller. Check and
the fuser roller (74 mm pitch on the adjust the temperature control circuit.
image)?

6 Has the fuser roller reached its PM Replace the fuser roller.
life?

7 Is the pressure of the fuser roller Check and adjust the mechanism.
normal?

8 Is the setting temperature of the fuser Check the setting and correct it.
roller normal? 08-2010, 2009, 2100

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 79
8.4.21 Uneven light distribution

Feeding direction

Fig.8-24

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Original glass 1 Is the original glass dirty? Clean the original glass.

Main charger 2 Are the needle electrode, main Clean or replace them.
charger grid and main charger case
dirty?

Discharge LED 3 Is the discharge LED dirty? Clean the discharge LED.

4 Is any of the discharge LEDs off? Replace the discharge LED.

Scanner 5 Are the original glass (especially the Clean them.

position of shading correction plate)
and CIS unit dirty?

6 Is the CIS unit degraded? Replace the CIS unit.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 80
8.4.22 Blotched image

Feeding direction

Fig.8-25
8

Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Paper 1 Is the paper type corresponding to its Check the paper type and mode.
mode?

2 Is the paper too dry? Change the paper.

Transfer roller unit 3 Is the power supplying spring of the Check the power supplying spring
transfer roller installed securely? (Is it and reinstall it.
almost detached?)
High-voltage transformer 4 Is the output from the high-voltage Adjust the output. Replace the
(Transfer roller unit) transformer normal? transformer if necessary.

Separation 5 Is the output from the separation Adjust the output, from the
charger too high? separation charger.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 81
8.4.23 Toner scattering at the trailing edge on the back side of the paper

Feeding direction

Fig.8-26

If a paper with a high resistance is used, the toner will be moved to the white area and toner scattering
may occur as a result.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 82
 Defective area Step Check items Prescription

Paper 1 Does the setting of the paper type Set the correct paper type.
match the paper which is used?

2 Is the recommended paper used? If not, use the recommended paper.

3 Is the setting value proper? If the use of the recommended paper

is not possible due to the user’s
reasons, change the following setting
values.
08-2931-2: When duplex printing
08-2928-2: When printing on the
back side of paper whose front side
has already been printed
Recommended setting value: Add
15-bit to the default value.
(Recommended setting range: +10-
bit to +20-bit)
Notes:
• If a value larger than the
recommended setting range
is set, white spots may occur.
Therefore, perform
adjustment while checking the 8
image.
• If toner scattering has
occurred at the leading edge
of the paper, change the
following setting values.
08-2931-0: When duplex
printing
08-2928-0: When printing on
the back side of paper whose
front side has already been
printed
• If toner scattering has
occurred at the center of the
paper, change the following
setting values.
08-2931-1: When duplex
printing
08-2928-1: When printing on
the back side of paper whose
front side has already been
printed
• When the setting value is
changed, the occurrence of
toner scattering may be
decreased. However,
depending on the paper,
enough effect may not be
obtained.
• If the problem still persists,
use the recommended paper.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 83
8.5 Other Errors

8.5.1 When “SET FUSER UNIT” is displayed.

When the signal for installing the fuser unit cannot be detected with the MAIN board, “SET FUSER
UNIT” appears.
In this case, check the following.
1. Check that the screw fixing the fuser unit is not loose.
2. Check for conductivity between CN11's pins 4 and 9.
3. Replace the MAIN board.

8.5.2 Countermeasure to “BIOS MODE” displayed on Control Panel

If the MFP stops operating while “BIOS MODE” is being displayed on the control panel, take the
countermeasure described in this procedure.

[ 1 ] Phenomenon
• “BIOS MODE” appears on the control panel as shown below and the MFP stops operating.
• Once this appears, it will not disappear even after the power is turned OFF and then back ON.

*BIOS MODE* *BIOS MODE*

20XX/XX/XX V0.XX WAIT FIRMWARE UPDATE

Fig.8-27

Notes:
“*BIOS MODE*” is displayed on the upper line, and “Date and firmware version” and “WAIT
FIRMWARE UPDATE” are alternately displayed on the lower line.

[ 2 ] Countermeasure
First, reinstall the system ROM using the PC update tool. Then reinstall the engine ROM and Fax ROM
using the PC update tool or a USB device.
Procedure:
(1) While “BIOS MODE” is being displayed, connect the MFP and PC with a USB cable.
(2) Reinstall the system ROM using the PC update tool.
(3) After the reinstallation is completed, turn OFF the power of the MFP.
(4) Next, reinstall the engine ROM and the FAX ROM.
Refer to  P. 11-2 “11.2 Firmware Updating with USB Device”
Refer to  P. 11-5 “11.3 Firmware Updating with PC Update Tool”
(5) After the reinstallation is completed, turn OFF the power of the MFP and disconnect the USB
cable or the USB device. Turn ON the power of the MFP and check that it starts correctly.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 84
8.5.3 Precautions for image missing width on the paper trailing edge at
enlargement copying

[ 1 ] Phenomenon
The bottom margin may disappear and the image is sometimes missing if an A4-size original is copied
to an A3-size sheet by enlarging the size.
The range of the bottom margin at actual-size copying is 2.0 mm +/- 1.0 mm (measured value).
However, if this tolerance is located in the minus direction (bottom margin: 1 mm or 0 mm), this
phenomenon will easily occur.

[ 2 ] Countermeasure
When this phenomenon has occurred during enlargement copying, adjust the image dimension using
the following procedure.
Procedure:
(1) Perform image dimensional adjustment (bottom margin adjustment) by aligning the value to the
center one (2.0 mm).
* The value must be aligned to the center one. No tolerance value +/- 1.0 mm is included.
Refer to  P. 6-23 “[H] Bottom margin”
(2) Adjust the secondary scanning data laser writing start position by aligning the value to the center
one (52 mm) in 05-4058 (drawer) and 05-4061 (bypass tray).
* The value must be aligned to the center one. No tolerance value +/- 0.5 mm is included.
Refer to  P. 6-13 “[D] Secondary scanning data laser writing start position” 8

8.5.4 Precautions for incorrect Operation of Automatic Original Size

Detection

[ 1 ] Phenomenon
When the APS mode is selected and an original is scanned after it has been placed on the original
glass, the automatic paper size detection sometimes works incorrectly.
• When copying: “SET CORRECT DRAWER. PRESS [START]” is displayed even though the size of
the set paper and that of the original is the same.
• When scanning/fax: A scan/fax job is sent with a size larger than the one for the original.

[ 2 ] Cause
The original size is detected incorrectly caused by lights from a ceiling lighting which directly applying to
the CIS sensor.
The original size detection function detects the width of an original by lighting the optical source while
the original cover is being closed.
During scanning of the original size while the original cover is being closed, lights from a lighting device
sometimes directly apply to the CIS sensor through an area which is not covered by the original. As a
result, the size may be detected as one larger than the actual one.
• A4 series: No misdetection occurs with A3 and A4 originals. A size larger than the actual one may
be detected with A4-R, A5-R, B4, B5, B5-R, 8K, 16K and 16K-R originals.
• LT series: No misdetection occurs with LT and LD originals. A size larger than the actual one may be
detected with ST, ST-R, LT-R and LG originals.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 85
<Position relation of the equipment and lighting device>
Misdetection may occur as a result of the relationship between the equipment (CIS location) and
lighting devices installation positions as shown below.

A: Position of the lighting device: Misdetection will occur.

B: Position of the lighting device: Detection works properly.
A B B A

CIS
CIS

Fig.8-28

[ 3 ] Countermeasure
Misdetection will occur caused by lights being applied to the area indicated by the red dot.
Be sure to locate the equipment in a place where no ceiling lights are installed above the area within 50
cm around the red dot. (The area indicated by the red frame below shows the prohibited zone.)
If a concealed lighting is used, be sure to adjust it so that lights from it are not directly applied to the
area indicated by the red dot.

For the 2329A/2829A model, this phenomenon can be solved by increasing the adjustment value of the
original detection timing in the self-diagnostic code without moving the equipment's installation position.
Refer to  P. 6-36 “6.7.2 Adjustment of Start Timing for Original Detection <2329A/2829A only>”

Fig.8-29

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 86
8.5.5 When the error code “F014” is displayed
When the error code “F014” is displayed, perform Assist Mode (3C) or Flash Memory Clear Mode (6C).

• Performing of Assist Mode (3C)

Refer to  P. 5-13 “5.8 Assist Mode (3C)”

• Performing of Flash Memory Clear Mode (6C)

Refer to  P. 5-28 “5.10 Flash Memory Clear Mode (6C)”

8.5.6 When “FAX Error” is displayed

[ 1 ] Phenomenon
This message appears in the equipment with the Fax unit installed under the following conditions.
• No paper is loaded in the fax drawer which is specified at the fax reception.
• The fax drawer is not installed in the equipment or is installed improperly.
• The fax drawer is set to OFF and no paper is loaded in any drawers.

<Example of error message>

• When copying

FAX : ERROR
100 % 1 A4 1 8

AUTO EXPOSURE
TEXT / PHOTO

Fig.8-30

• When setting of scanning

FAX : ERROR
E-MAIL
FILE
USB
Fig.8-31

[ 2 ] Countermeasure
• Load the paper in the fax drawer which is specified at the fax reception.
• Install the drawer which is specified for the fax in the equipment properly.
• Select OFF for the setting of the fax drawer while paper is loaded in any of the drawers.

Remarks:
Setting a fax drawer:
A drawer exclusive for fax can be set for the fax reception. In this setting, only the paper in the
fax drawer is used for printing received data.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 87
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
ERROR CODE AND TROUBLESHOOTING
8 - 88
9. REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS

9.1 Disassembly and Replacement of PC Boards

Notes:
If the PC board has to be replaced due to an operational defect, this may have been caused by a
contact failure of the connector. Before replacing the board, disconnect and then reconnect the
connector to check if this action eliminates the operational defect.

9.1.1 MAIN board (MAIN)

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Disconnect all connectors on the MAIN board.
[3]: Flash memory

[3]

Fig. 9-1

(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the MAIN board [2].

[2]

Fig. 9-2

Notes:
• When replacing the MAIN board, also attach the flash memory [3] to the new MAIN board from the old
MAIN board.
• Be sure to perform “05-3219” with the original cover or the RADF closed after replacing the MAIN board.
• Be sure to check the direction of the electrode when the flat harness is connected.
• When installing the flash memory [3], be sure that its pins are attached in the correct direction and not
misaligned.
• Do not touch the pins of the flash memory [3] with your bare hands. (Be careful of static electricity.)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-1
 • The MAIN board to be installed differs depending on the models. Due to this, before replacing, be sure
to check the color of the identification label[4] on the MAIN board to install the corresponding one in the
equipment.
- 2523A: White
- 2323AM: Blue
- 2823AM: Green
- 2523AD: Gray
- 2329A: Red
- 2329A (NAD): Purple
- 2829A: Yellow
- 2829A (NAD): Brown
- GA-1350L: Red
- GA-1350H/HC: Yellow

[4]

Fig. 9-3

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-2
9.1.2 Switching regulator (LVPS)

Notes:
• Be sure to unplug the power cable before starting this work.
• Electric charge may remain in the capacitors on the switching regulator even if the main power is turned
off and the plug is disconnected.
• Since there is a risk of an electric shock, pay full attention not to touch the board and mounted parts
while handling the switching regulator.

(1) Take off the rear cover.

 P. 4-6 “4.1.8 Rear cover <Except NAD/TWD>”
 P. 4-6 “4.1.9 Rear cover <NAD/TWD Only>”
(2) Disconnect all connectors on the LVPS (6 pcs.).

9
Fig. 9-4

(3) Remove 4 screws and take off the LVPS [1].

[1]

Fig. 9-5

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-3
9.1.3 High-voltage transformer (HVPS)
Notes:
Be sure to unplug the power cable before starting this work.

(1) Take off the right front cover.

( P. 4-2 “4.1.3 Right front cover”)
(2) Take off the left front cover.
( P. 4-4 “4.1.4 Left front cover”)
(3) Remove 2 screws and take off the bracket [1].

[1]

Fig. 9-6

(4) Remove 4 screws and take off HVPS [2]. Then disconnect flat harness [3].

[3]

[2]

Fig. 9-7

Notes:
When installing the HVPS, be careful not to deform the 7 springs.

Fig. 9-8

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-4
9.2 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing MAIN
Board
The procedure for replacing the MAIN board is as follows.
Remarks:
• If the adjustment values in the Flash memory can be viewed, print them out in the list print mode before
replacing the Flash memory.
 P. 5-15 “5.9 List Print Mode (9S)”
• This procedure should be performed not only when the MAIN board is replaced but also when the
GA-1350L/H/HC (PostScript) (option) is set up.

(1) Install the memory * to the new MAIN board (from the old MAIN board).
* 2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: IC10
2329A/2829A: IC11

(2) Update the version of System ROM and Engine ROM.

See  P. 11-1 “11. FIRMWARE UPDATING” for the details of System ROM / Engine ROM
update.
Notes:
Be sure to check the version of the firmware after it is updated.

(3) Be sure to perform “05-3219” with the original cover or the RADF closed after replacing the MAIN
board.

(4) Start with the setting mode (08).

9
(5) Perform the 08-9090 (Clearing all printers).

(6) Set the 08-9010 to “0”.

(7) Set the setting value.

Set the setting values of the following codes according to the list printed out in advance.
(If the setting values could not be printed out because of Flash memory damage or any other
reason, enter the values on the list output at the time of the last maintenance.)

08-6194 (Current K-PM counter value)

08-6195 (Current K-PM time counter value)
08-5568 (Current value of PM counter for developer material (K))
08-5569 (Current value of PM time counter for developer material (K))
08-5576 (Parts PM counter current value)
08-5577 (Parts PM time counter current value)
08-6250-0 (Photoconductive drum (K) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6250-3 (Photoconductive drum (K) (Current driving time))
08-6258-0 (Drum blade cleaner (K) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6258-3 (Drum blade cleaner (K) (Current driving time))
08-6272-0 (Drum Separation finger (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6272-3 (Drum Separation finger (Current driving time))
08-6274-0 (Charger grid (K) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6274-3 (Charger grid (K) (Current driving time))
08-6282-0 (Charger (wire/needle) (K) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6282-3 (Charger (wire/needle) (K) (Current driving time))
08-6298-0 (Ozone filter (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6298-3 (Ozone filter (Current driving time))
08-6300-0 (Developer (K) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6300-3 (Developer (K) (Current driving time))
08-6314-0 (Transfer (Wire/Belt/Roller) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6314-3 (Transfer (Wire/Belt/Roller) (Current driving time))
08-6346-0 (Fuser roller (Current number of sheets printed))
© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-5
 08-6346-3 (Fuser roller (Current driving time))
08-6350-0 (Press roller (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6350-3 (Press roller (Current driving time))
08-6368-0 (Fuser roller Separation finger (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6368-3 (Fuser roller Separation finger (Current driving time))
08-6398-0 (Paper feed roller (1st drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6406-0 (Separation roller (1st drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6416-0 (Separation pad (SFB) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6424-0 (Paper feed roller (SFB) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6436-0 (Drum recovery blade (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6436-3 (Drum recovery blade (Current driving time))
08-6470-0 (Fuser roller bushing (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6470-3 (Fuser roller bushing (Current driving time))

When PFU (MY-1043) is installed:

08-6400-0 (Paper feed roller (2nd drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6408-0 (Separation roller (2nd drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))

When PFP (KD-1039) is installed:

08-6412-0 (Separation roller (3rd drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6414-0 (Separation roller (4th drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6420-0 (Paper feed roller (3rd drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6422-0 (Paper feed roller (4th drawer) (date when it was replaced last time))
08-6428-0 (Pickup roller (3rd drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))
08-6430-0 (Pickup roller (4th drawer) (Current number of sheets printed))

Also, set the adjustment values which have been changed for servicing.

(8) Turn the power OFF and then start with the adjustment mode (05).

(9) Set the adjustment value of 05-2001 (Auto toner sensor manual adjustment (heat source ON)).
Set the adjustment values of the codes according to the list printed out in advance.
(If the adjustment values could not be printed out because of Flash memory damage or any other
reason, enter the values on the list output at the time of the last maintenance. If there is no list in
which the values are printed, entering of the setting value is not necessary.)

(10) Turn the power OFF.

(11) Pull out the toner cartridge and open the right cover.
Disconnect 1 connector of the process unit.
See the following sections.
 P. 4-47 “4.7.1 Process unit”

(12) Close the right cover. Start up the adjustment mode (05).

(13) Set the following adjustment values.

Set the adjustment values of the following codes according to the list printed out in advance.
(If the adjustment values could not be printed out because of Flash memory damage or any other
reason, enter the values on the list output at the time of the last maintenance. If there is no list in
which the values are printed, entering of the setting value is not necessary.)

05-2020 (Developer bias DC output adjustment)

05-2040 (Main charger grid bias output adjustment)
05-2052 (Transfer transformer DC output adjustment (C))
05-2078 (Separation transformer DC output adjustment (C))
05-2083 (Transfer cleaning bias adjustment (Positive))
05-2084 (Transfer cleaning bias adjustment (Negative))
05-2250 (Laser power adjustment)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-6
 Also, set the adjustment values which have been changed for servicing.

(14) Turn the power OFF.

(15) Open the right cover and connect 1 connector of the process unit
Close the right cover.

(16) Insert the toner cartridge. Turn the power ON.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-7
9.3 Precautions, Procedures and Settings for Replacing the Flash
Memory
* If the adjustment values in the Flash memory can be viewed, print them out in the list print mode
before replacing the Flash memory.

(1) Turn the power OFF. Take off the MAIN board from the equipment.

(2) Take off the Flash from the socket on the MAIN board.

(3) Install the new Flash memory to the MAIN board, and the MAIN board to the equipment. Be
careful that the flash memory is oriented correctly.

(4) Start with the setting mode (08).

(5) Set the 08-9010 to “1”.

(6) Perform the 08-9080, and set the destination (0: MJD, 1:N AD, 3: AUD, 4: CND, 6: TWD, 9: ASD,
10: ARD).

(7) Perform the 08-9601, and set the serial number.

(8) Check if the fax function is installed and then set the 08-9063 accordingly.
0: Not installed
1: Installed

(9) Turn the power OFF and then start with the adjustment mode (05).

(10) Be sure to perform “05-3219” with the original cover or the ADF closed.

(11) Set the adjustment value.

Set the adjustment values of the following codes according to the list printed out in advance.
(If the adjustment values could not be printed out because of Flash memory damage or any other
reason, enter the values on the list output at the time of the last maintenance. If there is no list,
enter the default values.)

05-4001 (Adjustment of primary scanning direction reproduction ratio (printer))

05-4006 (Adjustment of primary scanning laser writing start position (printer))
05-4018-0 (Adjustment of 1st Drawer sideways deviation)
05-4009 (Adjustment of secondary scanning direction reproduction ratio)
05-4058 (Adjustment of secondary scanning laser writing start position (drawer))
05-4061 (Adjustment of secondary scanning laser writing start position (bypass tray))
05-4000 (Reproduction ratio adjustment of the primary scanning direction)
05-3030 (Image position adjustment of the primary scanning direction)
05-3032 (Reproduction ratio adjustment of the secondary scanning direction)
05-3031 (Image position adjustment of the secondary scanning direction)
05-4050 (Top margin adjustment (blank area at the leading edge of the paper))
05-4051 (Left margin adjustment (blank area at the left of the paper along the paper feeding
direction))
05-4052 (Right margin adjustment (blank area at the right of the paper along the paper feeding
direction))
05-4053 (Bottom margin adjustment (blank area at the trailing edge of the paper))
05-4018-5 (Adjustment of sideways deviation (bypass feeding))

When PFU is installed:

05-4018-1 (Sideways deviation adjustment (2nd drawer)
05-4059 (Adjustment of secondary scanning laser writing start position (PFU))

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-8
 When PFP is installed:
05-4018-2 (PFP upper drawer sideways deviation (for the field adjustment))
05-4018-3 (PFP lower drawer sideways deviation (for the field adjustment))
05-4060 (Adjustment of secondary scanning laser writing start position (PFP))

When ADU is installed:

05-4062 (Adjustment of secondary scanning laser writing start position (ADU))
05-4019-0 (Adjustment of primary scanning data laser writing start position at duplexing (long
size))

When RADF is installed:

05-3042 (Fine adjustment of the RADF transport speed)
05-3043 (RADF sideways deviation adjustment)
05-3044 (RADF leading edge position adjustment)
05-3045 (RADF leading edge position adjustment)
05-3046 (Adjustment of the position of the CIS when scanning from the RADF (in black mode))
05-3047 (Adjustment of the position of the CIS when scanning from the RADF (in color mode))

Also, set the adjustment values which have been changed for servicing.

(12) Perform 05-7165/7167 (Automatic gamma adjustment).

(13) When RADF is installed, perform 05-3050/3051 (Adjustment of the RADF tray volume).

(14) Turn the power OFF and then start with the setting mode (08).
9
(15) Set the setting value.
Set the setting values of the following codes according to the list printed out in advance.
(If the adjustment values could not be printed out because of the Flash memory damage or any
other reason, enter the values on the list output at the time of the last maintenance. If there is no
list, enter the default values.)

When RADF is installed:

08-6382-0 (Pickup roller (RADF) (Number of current reading sheets of paper)
08-6382-1 (Pickup roller (RADF) (Recommended number of replacing reading sheets of paper)
08-6382-2 (Pickup roller (RADF) (Number of previous reading sheets of paper)
08-6382-8 (Pickup roller (RADF) (Number of times replaced)
08-6384-0 (Paper feed roller (RADF) (Number of current reading sheets of paper)
08-6384-1 (Paper feed roller (RADF) (Recommended number of replacing reading sheets of
paper)
08-6384-2 (Paper feed roller (RADF) (Number of previous reading sheets of paper)
08-6384-8 (Paper feed roller (RADF) (Number of times replaced)
08-6386-0 (Separation roller (RADF) (Number of current reading sheets of paper)
08-6386-1 (Separation roller (RADF) (Recommended number of replacing reading sheets of
paper)
08-6386-2 (Separation roller (RADF) (Number of previous reading sheets of paper)
08-6386-8 (Separation roller (RADF) (Number of times replaced)

(16) Check that the setting value for 08-9010 is “0”. If it is “1”, change it to “0”.

(17) Start the equipment in the normal mode and set the time and date.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9-9
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
REPLACEMENT OF PC BOARDS
9 - 10
10. REMOTE SERVICE
There are the following functions as Remote Service.
Service Notification: This function notifies the service technician of the status of the equipment by E-
mail.
Supply Notice: When “toner near-empty” is detected, this function notifies the service technician of it by
E-mail or FAX.

10.1 Service Notification

10.1.1 Outline
This function automatically notifies the status of the equipment to the service technician by E-mail. The
items to be notified are below.

• Total Counter Transmit

When this function is effective, it notifies each counter information periodically (on the set date and
time every month).

• Service Call Transmission

When this function is enabled, information such as the error code corresponding to the service call
is notified by E-mail.

• PM Counter Transmit
When this function is effective, it notifies that the PM timing has come when the present PM count
has reached to its setting value.

• Toner near-empty Transmit 10

When “Toner near-empty” transmission is enabled, it notifies you that the toner has reached the
near-empty status.

Notes:
Transmission of the PM counter is done according to the following timing.
• When the power is turned on
• When copying or printing is done (if the PM counter reaches the set value during printing or copying)

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 1
10.1.2 Setting

[A] Setting items

Notes:
• Service notification setting (08-9793) and service notification display (08-9604) must be set to “1”.
• When using this function, it is required that sending and receiving E-mails are available. Confirm the
details to the administrator.
• This function will not be performed even if all settings are turned ON (valid) while the power of the
equipment is turned OFF or the equipment is in the Sleep mode during the specified time.
To use this function, do not turn the power of the equipment OFF in the specified time or do not set the
time for this function during the Sleep mode set period.

Set the Service Notification setting in the following setting mode(08).

Items⁄ 08 code Contents

0: OFF (Invalid)
Service Notification setting 9793
1: ON (Valid)
9795 0: OFF (Invalid)
Total Counter Transmit setting
1: ON (Valid)
9881 0: OFF (Invalid)
1: Saturday
2: Friday
4: Thursday
Total counter transmission “day of the 8: Wednesday
week” setting 16: Tuesday
32: Monday
64: Sunday
Multiple days of the week can be set by setting the
SUM of the values for the day of the week.
Service notification display 9604 Displays “SERVICE NOTIFICATION” in the
INITIAL SETUP menu. When “1” is set, operation
and setting are made available for users.
0: OFF
1: ON
Service call transmission 9605 When this function is enabled, it notifies the error
code corresponding to the service call by E-mail.
0: OFF
1: ON
Total counter transmission interval setting 9606 00:00-23:59
(Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute)
PM Counter Transmit setting 9797 0: OFF (Invalid)
1: ON (Valid)
Total counter transmission date setting 1 9796 0: OFF (Invalid)
1 to 31: Date
Total counter transmission date setting 2 9880 0: OFF (Invalid)
1 to 31: Date
Toner near-empty Transmit 8538 0: OFF (Invalid)
1: ON (Valid)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 2
[B] E-mail address setting
<Operation flow>
[USER FUNCTIONS] [GENERAL] [SERVICE NOTIFY]

Network initializing

E-mail transmission

E-mail address setting Registration Input the address

[email protected]

Customer name, Tel number and E-mail address setting Registration Input

Fig.10-1
10
Notes:
This menu does not appear if the service notification display (08-9604) is not set to “1”.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 3
10.1.3 Items to be notified

The items to be notified are shown below.

(1) Total Counter Transmit / PM Counter Transmit by E-mail (CSV file attached to E-mail has also
the same format.)
Subject: Counter Notification
(In case of the PM Counter Transmit, it is shown as “Periodical Maintenance Notification”.)

1 Date : MM/DD/YYYY
2 Machine Model : TOSHIBA e-STUDIOxxx
3 Serial Number : 1234567890
4 Total Counter : 00300000

5 Customer:
Name : ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZA
Tel Number : 123456789012345678901234567
E-Mail : ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZA

ChargeCounterFormat:
6 LargeSizeChargeCount 1
7 LargeSizeChargePaperDefinition 1

PMCounterFormat:
8 LargeSizePMCount 1
9 LargeSizePMPaperDefinition 1

Charge Counter:
Large Small
<Print Counter>
10 Copy 00000000 00000000
11 Print 00000000 00000000
(*1)
12 List 00000000 00000000
13 FAX 00000000 00000000

<Scan Counter>
FULL COLOR
14 Net Scan 00000000 00000000
BLACK
15 Copy Scan 00000000 00000000
16 Fax Scan 00000000 00000000
17 Net Scan 00000000 00000000

<FAX Counter>
18 Transmit 00000000 00000000
19 Receive 00000000 00000000

Periodical Maintenance Counter:

20 Set PM 00000000
21 Current PM 00000000

22 Printer Error History:

Date Time ErrorCode

05/18/2013 16:44 C01

05/15/2013 22:28 E01 (*2)
05/15/2013 22:23 E01

Fig.10-2

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 4
1. Date
2. Machine model name
3. Serial number
4. Total counter value
*1: Total value of 10 to 13
5. Customer information
6. Count setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter) (08-6010)
7. Definition setting of large-sized paper (Fee charging system counter) (08-6011)
8. Count setting of large-sized paper (PM) (08-6012)
9. Definition setting of large-sized paper (PM) (08-6013)
10.Number of output pages in the Copier Function
11. Number of output pages in the Printer Function
12.Number of output pages at the List Print Mode
13.Number of output pages in the FAX Function (when Fax unit installed)
14.Number of scanning pages in the Color Network Scanning Function
15.Number of scanning pages in the Copier Function
16.Number of scanning pages in the FAX Function (when Fax unit installed)
17.Number of scanning pages in the Black Network Scanning Function
18.Number of transmitted pages in the FAX Function (when Fax unit installed)
19.Number of received pages in the FAX Function (when Fax unit installed)
20.PM count setting value (08-6190)
21.PM count present value (08-6194)
22.History of error
*2: The latest 30 errors are displayed.

10

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 5
10.2 Supply Notice

10.2.1 Outline
“Supply Notice” is a function which automatically notifies users one of “toner near-empty” status for a
cartridge to previously registered fax numbers or E-mail addresses.
If the notice is sent to a fax number, the Fax unit must be installed to the equipment.

10.2.2 Setting

<Operation flow>

[USER FUNCTIONS] [GENERAL] [SUPPLY NOTICE]

Registering the fax number or E-mail address of the customer (destination)

Registering a fax number
Registering an E-mail address

Setting up the function

Disabling the function

Enabling the function

Registering customer information

Registering a customer number (maximum 20 digits)

Registering the contact name of the customer (maximum 40 letters)
Registering the customer's phone number (maximum 32 digits)
Registering the customer's name (maximum 40 letters)
Registering the customer's address (maximum 84 letters)
Fig.10-3

Notes:
• This menu does not appear if the supply notice display (08-9783) is not set to “0”.
• Only a fax number or an E-mail address can be registered for “DESTINATION SETUP”.
• The Supply Notice function is enabled only when “AUTO DETECT” is set to “ON”.
• “AUTO DETECT” cannot be set if no fax number or E-mail address is registered for “DESTINATION
SETUP”.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

REMOTE SERVICE
10 - 6
11. FIRMWARE UPDATING

11.1 General Description

When you want to update the firmware to the latest one or the equipment becomes inoperable due to
some defect in the firmware, updating can be performed as follows.

• Updating with the USB device

 P. 11-2 “11.2 Firmware Updating with USB Device”

• Firmware Updating with PC Update Tool

 P. 11-5 “11.3 Firmware Updating with PC Update Tool”

• Firmware Updating with BIOS mode

 P. 11-9 “11.4 Firmware Updating with BIOS Mode”

Notes:
Be sure to check the version of the firmware after it is updated.

11

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 1
11.2 Firmware Updating with USB Device
This MAIN board of this equipment is mounted with a USB device written with firmware data. This
firmware can be updated by connecting the USB device to the USB port and turning ON the power.
The type of firmware which can be updated with this method are as follows in the table below.

Model Firmware Stored Model folder Data file

2323AM/2823AM System ROM Main PC board 2323AM_2823AM TT01SY0Z***
(include BIOS (MAIN board)
firmware)
Engine ROM TK151MWW***
2523A/2523AD System ROM 2523A_2523AD TT02SY0Z***
(include BIOS
firmware)
Engine ROM TK151MWW***
2329A/2829A System ROM 2329A_2829A TT03SY0Z***
(include BIOS
firmware)
Engine ROM TK151MWW***
*** Indicates the version number.

Important:
• Only the USB device which meets the following conditions should be used for updating. Be careful since
updating with any device other than the above is never guaranteed.
- A USB device which complies with the following standards regulated by USB-IF (USB
Implementers Forum)
Class number: 8 (=08h) (Mass-storage class)
Sub-class number: 6 (=06h) (SCSI transfer command set)
Protocol number: 80 (=50h) (Bulk-Only)
* Most common USB devices are complied with the specification above and can be used
for updating. However, the operation in all the Multi Functional Digital Systems is not
necessarily guaranteed since the most of these devices are developed based on the
use in PC environment (Windows or Macintosh). Therefore, confirm thoroughly that the
device is operational in the equipment for which the updating will be performed when
purchasing the device.
• The data file for updating is stored in the model specific folder.
Never change the model specific folder name since it is used for discriminating the data file when the
updating data files for multiple models are stored in the USB device.
• Store the model specific folder in the root directory of the USB device.
• The USB device complied with USB1.1 and USB2.0 can be used for updating. However, the update is
performed in the speed of USB1.1 when the device complied with USB2.0 is used.
• Do not update the firmware by any storage device other than a flash memory (such as a USB connection
type memory card reader, CD/DVD drive or hard disk) since it is never guaranteed.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 2
[A] System/Engine/FAX ROM update procedure
Important:
• The file system of the USB device should be formatted in FAT32,16. Note that one formatted in FAT or
NTFS will not be operated. The file system can be confirmed on the properties in applications such as
Explorer of Windows.
• Do not turn OFF the power during the update. The data could be damaged and not able to be operated
properly.
• Since the fax ROM is included in the system ROM, there is no fax specific firmware or data file.

(1) Connect the USB device to a PC and write the model specific folder in which the data file is
stored.
• Confirm the model specific folder name and data file name before writing the data
( P. 11-2 “11.2 Firmware Updating with USB Device”).

(2) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

(3) Connect the USB device [1] to the USB port [2].

[2]

[1]

Fig.11-1
11
(4) Turn the power ON while pressing the [4] and [9] buttons simultaneously.

(5) Enter the password, and then press the [OK] button.
(If the Enter Password is blank, this step is unnecessary.)

(6) Select “SYSTEM FW, ENGINE FW or ALL”, and then press the [OK] button.
Update starts. This will change to “COMPLETED” when the update is completed.
Notes:
• When “ALL” is selected, updating is carried out in order of SYSTEM and ENGINE. When the update is
completed appropriately, “ALL COMPLETED” is displayed.
• Do not turn the power OFF before “ALL COMPLETED” is displayed.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 3
 FW UPDATE MODE FW UPDATE MODE FW UPDATE MODE
ALL SYSTEM FW SYSTEM FW

WAIT WAIT

FW UPDATE MODE FW UPDATE MODE

ENGINE FW ALL

COMPLETED
Fig.11-2

Notes:
• The firmware update operation cannot be canceled when it is in progress.
• Do not perform any other operations while the firmware is being updated.
• If the USB device is not recognized normally, “USB NOT DETECTED” will be displayed. In this case,
turn OFF the power of the equipment, reconnect the USB device properly, and then restart the
procedure from step (3).

FW UPDATE MODE
USB NOT DETECTED
RESTART THE MFP

Fig.11-3

Remarks:
It takes approx. 4 minutes to complete updating all items (“SYSTEM FW / ENGINE FW / ALL”).
Update time varies approx. ±30% depending on the rotation speed of the USB device and the
status of the Flash ROM in the equipment.

(7) Turn OFF the power and remove the USB device.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 4
11.3 Firmware Updating with PC Update Tool
Notes:
Use the PC update tool to do updates if it cannot be done referring to  P. 11-2 “11.2 Firmware
Updating with USB Device”.

11.3.1 General description

The PC update tool is used for upgrading the version of the system ROM and the engine ROM for the
equipment. Save the tool to your computer, and connect it to the equipment with a USB cable, then you
can update the system ROM.

11.3.2 System requirements

Tools introduced in this manual shall be operated under the following systems:

Windows 7 SP1 (x86 / x64)

Windows 8.1 (x86 / x64)
Windows 10 (x86 / x64)

11.3.3 Preparation
(1) Before using a PC update tool, install the scanner driver of the equipment in a PC.

(2) Add the “.bin” extension to the file name of the firmware to be updated.

Notes:
Be sure to update the BIOS firmware before upgrading the system and engine ROM.

Model Firmware File name

2323AM/2823AM System ROM TT01SY0Z***.bin
(include BIOS firmware)
11
Engine ROM TK151MWW***.bin
2523A/2523AD System ROM TT02SY0Z***.bin
(include BIOS firmware)
Engine ROM TK151MWW***.bin
2329A/2829A System ROM TT03SY0Z***.bin
(include BIOS firmware)
Engine ROM TK151MWW***.bin
*** Indicates the version number.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 5
11.3.4 Update procedure
(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment, and connect it and the PC with a USB cable.

(2) Turn the power ON while pressing the [4] and [9] buttons simultaneously. (Start the equipment
with the Firmware update mode)

(3) Confirm that the Firmware update mode has started from the LCD panel of the equipment.
Notes:
• Proceed to the next step after you check the display.
• Updating with the PC update tool should not be performed at a normal startup (power ON). Be sure to
start the equipment by turning ON the power while the [4] button and [9] button are pressed
simultaneously.

(4) Double-click the icon “UpdateFW.exe” to start up the PC update tool.

Fig.11-4

(5) Click the [Browse] button.

Fig.11-5

(6) Select the file you want to update.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 6
 (7) Click the [Update] button.
The update starts and a status bar appears on the operating panel of the equipment.
Remarks:
• From 1 to 2 minutes are required to update the system ROM, and about 3 minutes are required for the
engine ROM.

Fig.11-6

• The following message appears if the program data is not transmitted correctly.

Fig.11-7 11

(8) When the program data transmission is completed, the message shown below appears.

FIRMWARE UPDATE
FIRMWARE UPDATE OK
MACHINE POWER OFF/ON

Fig.11-8

(9) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

Notes:
It is not possible to update the system ROM and the engine ROM at the same time. Do the
updates separately.

(10) If you update the system ROM, initialize the updated data.
• Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “9030”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press the [OK] button.

(11) When the update is finished, remove the USB cable.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 7
11.3.5 When firmware updating fails
Refer to the following.
 P. 11-12 “11.4.5 When firmware updating fails”

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 8
11.4 Firmware Updating with BIOS Mode
Notes:
• Use the BIOS mode if firmware updating cannot be done with either a USB device or a PC update tool.
• Firmware updating with the BIOS mode is available only for the system ROM and not for the engine
ROM.

11.4.1 General description

The BIOS mode can upgrade the version of the system ROM only while this mode is being operated by
connecting your PC and the equipment with a USB cable by means of a PC update tool.

11.4.2 System requirements

Tools introduced in this manual shall be operated under the following systems:

Windows 7 SP1 (x86 / x64)

Windows 8.1 (x86 / x64)
Windows 10 (x86 / x64)

11.4.3 Preparation
(1) Before using a PC update tool, install the scanner driver of the equipment in your PC.

(2) Add the “.bin” extension to the file name of the firmware to be updated.

11.4.4 Update procedure

(1) Turn OFF the power of the equipment, and connect it and the PC with a USB cable.

(2) Turn the power ON while pressing the [OK] button simultaneously.
(Start the equipment with the BIOS mode)
11
(3) Confirm that the BIOS mode has started from the LCD panel of the equipment.

SERVICE CALL
*BIOS MODE*
20XX/XX/XX V0.XX

Fig.11-9

Notes:
Proceed to the next step after you check the display.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 9
 (4) Double-click the icon “UpdateFW.exe” to start up the PC update tool.

Fig.11-10

(5) Click the [Browse] button.

Fig.11-11

(6) Select the file you want to update.

Model Firmware File name

2323AM/2823AM System ROM TT01SY0Z***.bin
2523A/2523AD System ROM TT02SY0Z***.bin
2329A/2829A System ROM TT03SY0Z***.bin
*** Indicates the version number.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 10
 (7) Click the [Update] button.
The update starts and a status bar appears on the operating panel of the equipment.
Remarks:
From 1 to 2 minutes are required to update.

Fig.11-12

(8) The following message appears if the program data is not transmitted correctly.

Fig.11-13
11
(9) When the program data transmission is completed, the message shown below appears.

FIRMWARE UPDATE
FIRMWARE UPDATE OK
MACHINE POWER OFF/ON

Fig.11-14

(10) Turn OFF the power of the equipment.

(11) If you update the system ROM, initialize the updated data.
• Turn ON the power while [0] button and [8] button are pressed simultaneously.
• Key in “9030”, and then press the [START] button.
• Press the [OK] button.

(12) When the update is finished, remove the USB cable.

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 11
11.4.5 When firmware updating fails
When an error indication appears while firmware is being updated, confirm the following items.

(1) When “Device is not ready!” and then “Transfer Failed!” appears on the PC:

Fig.11-15

• Since the USB cable may not be connected properly, confirm the connecting status of the
equipment and the PC, and then retry updating.
• Since the equipment may not have been started properly, turn the power OFF and then back
ON, and then retry updating.

(2) When “SERVICE CALL F/W VER. ERROR” appears on the equipment:

SERVICE CALL
F/W VER. ERROR

Fig.11-16

• Since an incorrect firmware file (that of another model) may have been used, check it and
then retry updating making sure it is the one corresponding to this equipment.
• Since the data of the file may have an abnormality, check the file and then retry updating
making sure it is the normal one.

(3) When “CHECK SUM ERROR” appears on the equipment:

SERVICE CALL
CHECK SUM ERROR

Fig.11-17

• Since updating the engine firmware with the PC update tool may have been done with other
than the [4]+[9] startup mode, reattempt updating according to the procedure.
• Since the data of the file may have an abnormality, check the file and then retry updating
making sure it is the normal one.
 P. 11-6 “11.3.4 Update procedure”
Notes:
If updating still fails even if the above procedures have been done, check if there is any damage
on the MAIN board and replace it with a new one if necessary.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 12
11.5 Confirmation of the updated data
After the updating is completed, check each data version in Setting Mode (08) to confirm that the data
were overwritten properly.

Firmware Check Method Remarks

BIOS firmware [OK]+POWER BIOS firmware version
System ROM 08-9900 System ROM version
(System firmware)
Updating Engine ROM 08-9901 Engine ROM version
(Engine firmware)
Notes:
Since the fax ROM for the 2329A/2829A models is included in the system ROM, there is no fax
specific firmware or data file.

The installed ROM versions can be confirmed in the list print mode following the procedure below.

(1) Turn the power ON using the main power switch while pressing the digital key [9] and the
[START] button simultaneously.

(2) Select “Enter the code” using the arrow button.

(3) After pressing the [OK] button, press the [1] button three times, and then press the [START]
button.

(4) “VERSION LIST” is printed out.

* It is recommended to keep this list for future reinstallation such as the replacement of the
Main board.

(5) Turn OFF the power.

11

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 13
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
FIRMWARE UPDATING
11 - 14
12. EXTERNAL COUNTERS

12.1 Outline
This specification describes the interface between external counters, such as Coin Controller and Card
Counter.

12.2 Signal

12.2.1 Pin Layout

1. Connector on the MAIN board: CN25 (Coin Controller)

Pin
I/O Signal name Function Voltage level Port Remarks GQ-1131
No.
1 Power 24VCOV- 24V line DC24V±10% When cover In use
OFF opened: OFF
2 Out CTRON Total Counter On Open Collector CPU L: ON In use
Signal PD0
3 In KCTRC Counter Connection L=0V, H=DC5V CPU L: Connected In use
Signal PD3 Connected to SG
with harness
4 Out MCRUN Ready to Copy Open Collector CPU L: Operating In use
Signal PD1
5 Out EXTCTR Exit Sensor On Open Collector CPU L: ON In use
Signal PD2
6 GND PG Power ground 0V In use
7 - - - - - - -
8 - - - - - - -
9 GND SG Signal ground 0V In use
10 - - - - - - -
11 - - - - - - - 12
12 - - - - - - -
13 - - - - - - -
14 Power 5V 5V line DC5.1V±3% In use
15 In CTRON-EN Counter enabled L=0V, H=DC5V CPU L: Enabled In use
signal PD4
16 Out L/S-SIZE Paper size (large/ Open Collector SoC L: Large size In use
small) signal GP_M6 H: Small size

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
12 - 1
12.2.2 Details of the signals
• CTRON signal (output signals)
The signal is a count signal synchronized with an electronic counter for the equipment. This signal is
turned to a low level (ON) every time the counter counts up. This output signal also drives each
mechanical counter directly. The signal is used for coin controllers.

• KCTRC signal (input signals)

This signal is a connection signal that detects whether each counter is installed or not. The counter
is installed when this signal is at a low level. When this signal is at a high level, copying with the
counter is disabled.

• MCRUN signal (output signal)

This signal is turned to a low level while the equipment performs copying.
When copying is interrupted due to forcible toner supply or another reason, however, this signal
remains at a high level until the equipment becomes ready for copying again.

• EXTCTR signal (output signal)

This signal is turned ON, since it is synchronized with the turning OFF of the exit sensor.
A coin controller counts up the degree of usage of copy cards by means of this signal.

• CTRON-EN signal (input signal)

This signal enables copying with each counter. Copying is enabled when this signal is at a low level.
Copying is disabled when it is at a high level.

• L/S signal (output signal)

This signal is turned to a low level immediately when large-sized paper is selected or when the
paper size is not specified for bypass feeding. The signal is at a high level in other cases.
The definition of large-sized paper can be set in the setting code 08-6011.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
12 - 2
12.3 Notices

12.3.1 Setting code

Each signal will be enabled by configuring the setting code “08-9016” (Counter installed externally).

08-9016
0: No external counter (Default)
1: Coin controller installed

12.3.2 Setting value change and restrictions when using the coin
controller
• Setting value
- 08-9016 (Counter installed externally): Set to “1” (Coin controller).
- 08-9017 (Setting for counter installed externally): Select “1” (Copy) for the job to count up.

• Restrictions
For 08-6011 (Definition of large-sized paper), set to “0” when A3, LD and CUSTOM are specified as
the large size, and set to “1” when B4, LG, FOLIO, COMP, 8K and 13"LG are specified as the large
size in addition to A3, LD and CUSTOM.

12.3.3 Installation of External Counter

It is not allowed to install more than one external counter. Physically, the multiple external counters
cannot be installed together since the output signals are used in common.

12.3.4 Restrictions when installing the coin controller

If the department management (08-9120 / 0: Disabled, 1: Enabled) of the 08 setting code is enabled, its
screen will appear prior to others. Therefore, be sure not to enable the department management when
the coin controller is installed.

12

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

EXTERNAL COUNTERS
12 - 3
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
EXTERNAL COUNTERS
12 - 4
13. WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS

13.1 AC Wire Harness

Main switch
(SW1)
CN200 CN202
ACMAIN-L MAINSW-IN-L MAINSW-OUT-L
A 1 1
INLET B CN201 CN203
(AC-IN) ACMAIN-N MAINSW-IN-N MAINSW-OUT-N
C 1 1

FG

CN101
1
CN100
1

Fuser unit
Center heater lamp (LAMP1)
AC-LAMP1-IN (N)
1 3 3
LVPS
Optional: NAD
Side heater lamp (LAMP2)
Standard: ARD, AUD, ASD, AC-LAMP2-IN (N)
2 2 2
TWD, JPD CN105
None: MJD 1
AC-LAMP-I N (L)
1 1
J242 1 CN103 J227 Fuser center Fuser front
Damp Heater thermostat thermostat
switch (THMO1) (THMO2)

J243 2
AC-DHT-N
AC-DHT-L

2 1 CN120 Optional (NAD/MJD)

CN121
AC (N)
FUS board
1
3
AC (L)
B A
1 1
2 2
Drum damp heater 13
J568
Drum dump heater
thermostat
(THMO3)

(JPD only)
J563
PFU damp heater

J433
PFP damp heater

Fig.13-1

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
13 - 1
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
13 - 2
 CN14 J210
RGTCL
1 3
+24VD NC RGST-CLT
Main Board 2 2
2329A/2829A (CLT1)
1
CN107 CN21 J211
+24VS +24VS SG
1 1 3 3
PG PG RGTSW RGST-SNR
2 2 4 2 (S2)
PG PG +3.3VFUSE
3 3 5 1
+24VA +24VA
4 4 CN1 CN4 J212
CN109 PG PG GND CFCLT
J207 5 5 1 1 6 3
+24VD-OUT PG PG Option for 2523A/2523AD/2323AM VOUT2 +24VD NC CST-L-FEED-
FRNT-COV-INTLCK- A 1 6 6 2 2 7 2
SW (SW3) NC +24VD GND CLT (CLT2)
B 7 7 CN7 J241 3 3 1
+24VD +24VD A VOUT1
NC 8 8 1 1 4 4 J253 J212
2 PS-ACC +24VD NC AB GND SG
J206 9 9 2 5 5 5 8 3 1 3
(LVPS) BB VOUT0 CSTEMP EMP-SNR
SIDE-COV-INTLCK- A
NC 10
3 6 EXIT-MOT 6 6 9 2 2 2 (S5)
SW (SW2) +24VD-IN B M GND +3.3VFUSE
B 3 4 2 (M6) 7 7 10 1 3 1
CN110 CN17 NC VCC
5 3 8 8 J216 J210
13.2 DC Wire Harness

PWREN NC VCC SFBCLT

1 1 4 9 9 11 7 1 3
SYSEN VREF +24VD SFB-CLT
2 2 10 10 12 6 2 2
SG TR (CLT3)
3 3 CN11 J231 CIS 11 11 1
PWRON +24VD (CIS) SEL
4 4 1 3 12 12 J211
HRT1ON ADU-CLU GND SG
5 5 2 13 13 13 5 3 3
HTRRLYOFF ADUCL-H0A (CLT4) CLK SFBEMP SFB-SNR
6 6 2 1 14 14 14 4 4 2 (S6)
7 HRT2ON 7 GND +3.3VFUSE
J230 J254 J233 15 15 15 3 5 1
SG SG LED-R1
3 5 1 3 16 16 J217
ADUSW-1 ADUSW-1 ADU-TR-SNR LED-G1 VCMFN
4 4 2 2 17 17 16 2 6 2 SUC-F-MOT
3.3V FUSE 3.3V FUSE (S8) LED-B1 +24VD (M5) M
5 3 3 1 18 18 17 1 7 1
ADUCNT-0 ADUCNT-0 LED-R2
6 2 4 19 19 J228
2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM SG SG LED-G2 CST-SW
7 1 5 20 20 18 2 DRA-SW
CN107 CN19 LED-B2 SG (SW6)
21 21 19 1
+24VS +24VS Anode
1 1 22 22
PG PG
2 2
PG PG
3 3 CN12 J219
+24VA +24VA DRTH-1A
4 4 A1 THMS-DRM
CN109 PG PG SG (THMS4)
J207 5 5 A2
+24VD-OUT PG PG J300 CN24
FRNT-COV-INTLCK- A 1 6 6 +5VD J222
SW (SW3) NC +24VD 14 1 TEMP-1A
B 7 7 +5VD A3 4
+24VD +24VD 13 2 SG
NC 8 8 A4 3 TEMP/HUMI-
2 PS-ACC +24VD 12
LPWR 3
HMS-1A
J206 9 A5 2 SNR (S1)
(LVPS) 11
GND 4
+5VA
SIDE-COV-INTLCK- A A6 1
SW (SW2) +24VD-IN 10
BDIN 5
B 3 GND 6 J229
CN102 CN17 9
PWREN PWA-H-LDRS PIDT 7 A7 PUFAN-0A 2 SUC-FAN-MOT
1 1 8 (M5) M
SYSEN (LDR) PIDT/ 8 A8 24VD 1
2 2 7
SG 6
GND 9
MJD-0
3 3 A9
PWRON Option (2329A/2829A only) 5
WRAPC 10
SG
4 4 A10
HRT1ON 4
+5VD 11
5 5 J208
HTRRLYOFF CN15 CN410 3
SHDWN 12
MMTRBK-0A
6 6 +24VD B1 10
HRT2ON 7 1 1 2
GND 13
+24VD
7 +24VD B2 9
2 2 1
GND 14
+24VD
SCSWC B3 8
3 3 PG
SCSWB B4 7
4 4 PG
PFPRST B5 6 MAIN-MOT
5 5 NC M
GAIN B6 5 (M3)
CN30 CN9 6 6 MMTRPLL-0
HVTVR PFPCK B7 4
OUT1 1 1 7 7 MMTRCCW-1A
+24VD +5V B8 3
Charger bias (Needle electrode) 1 1 2 2 8 8 MMTRCK-1A
HVDVR SG B9 2
OUT2 3 3 9 9 (PFP) MMTRON-0A
+24VD D[1] B10 1
Charger bias (Grid) 1 1 4 4 10 10
HVTT D[1] J250 CN23
OUT3 5 5 11 11 +24VD
HVTTCHG D[2] 5 1
Developer bias 1 1 6 6 12 12 GND
HVTGB D[3] 4 2
OUT4 7 7 13 13 M/DC-POL POLON
HVSDWN D[4] M 3 3 CN10 J150
Separation bias 1 1 PS-HVT 8 8 14 14 (M4) POLPLL SG
HVSAV D[5] 2 4 1 4
OUT5 (HVPS) 9 9 15 15 POLCLK TNRSDA
HVAVR D[6] 1 5 2 3 PWA-F-CTIF
16 16
Main Board

Transfer bias 1 1 10 10 D[7] TNRSCL

HVCLK 17 17 3 2 (CTIF)
OUT6 11 11 PG +3.3VFUSE
PG 18 18 4 1
Transfer guide bias 1 1 12 12 PG
PG 19 19 Option (2329A/2829A/2323AM/2823AM only) J1000
13 13 PGPCNT DEVIN
HVMVR 20 20 CN25 5 2 DEV-SW
Transfer guide bias (Registration roller) 1 14 14 +24VD SG (SW5)
HVTMG 1 6 1
15 15 CTRON
HVTAC FG FG 2 J218
16 16 KCTRC ERSLP
3 7 LP-ERS
MCRUN +24VD (ERS)
4 8
EXTCTR
5 J220
PG DEVCNT
6 9

13 - 3
Option NC ATSVR
7 10
CN604 CN5 CN16 NC +24VD
ESV-LED CN221 Coin controller 8 11 ATTNR-SNR
1 31 PFUCNT-0 SG ATS (S4)
LED1 1 15 9 12
2 30 SG NC PG
LED2 2 14 10 13
3 29 +5V NC SG
LED-WR 3 13 11 14
4 28 PFUSIDECOV-0 NC
GND 4 12 12 J209
5 27 PFUFEDSW-0 NC +24VD
+3.3VS 5 11 13 15 TNR-MOT
6 26 PFUCSTSW-0 +5VA TNRMTRON M
6 10 14 16 (M2)
ESV-KEY PFUEMP-0
7 25 7 9 CTRON-EN
GND NC 15 J226
8 24 8 8 PFU L/S-SIZE FCOVSW
LCD-A0 PFUFEDCLT-L0 16 17 2 FRNT-COV-

Main Board
9 23 9 7 SG
LCE-/CS PFUPSOL-0 18 1 SW (SW4)
10 22 10 6
LCD-/WR PFUFEDCLT-H0
11 21 11 5
ERR-LED +24V
12 20 12 4
LCD-RST +24V CN29 CN8 J223 J224
13 19 13 3
PG 1 VBUS GND
GND 14 2 1 1 3 3
14 18 PG EXT-SW EXIT-SNR
+3.3VA 15 1 USB connector 2 D- 2 2 2 2 (S3)
15 17 +3.3V
PWA-H-PNL +3.3VA (Device) 3 D+ 3 3 1 1
16 16 FG FG
(HPNL) GND 4 SG J225
17 15 FUSCNT
LCD-D0 4 8 1
18 14 MTH+
LCD-D1 5 7 2 THMS-C-HTR
19 13 MTH- (THMS1)
LCD-D2 6 6 3
20 12
LCD-D3 Option CN31
21 11 ETH+
LCD-D4 1 VBUS 7 5 4 THMS-S-
22 10 CN27 CN400 ETH- HTR (THMS2)
LCD-D5 3.3VA USB connector 2 D- 8 4 5
23 9 1 1 (Host-1)
LCD-D6 SG 3 D+
24 8 2 2 3.3V
LCD-D7 3.3VS 4 SG 9 3 6
25 7 3 3 STH+
+5VA INT 10 2 7 THMS-EDG-
26 6 4 4 STH- HTR (THMS3)
KEY-RD0 TX 11 1 8
27 5 5 5
KEY-RD1 HOOK
28 4 6 6 Option (2329A/2829A only)
KEY-RD2 RX
29 3 7 7
KEY-RD3 SG CN22 CN31
30 2 8 8 +5VA
KEY-RD4 CLK 2 1 PWA-F-FUS
31 1 9 9 SG
CI1 1 2 (FUS)
10 10 (FAX)
CS
11 11 CN11 (2329A/2829A)
CI2
12 12 CN6 (2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM)
CN30
Option A+
CN3 1 VBUS 1
SENSOR1 CN38 A-
1 RST USB connector 2 D- 2 SCAN-MOT
PHASE1 1 13 Wireless LAN B- (M1) M
2 RING (Host-0) 3 D+ 3
SENSOR2 2 14 B+
3 BUZZER 4 SG 4
I01 3 15
4 LOAD
SENSOR3 4 16
5 HRL 2329A/2829A only
I11 5 17
6 PCI
VR 6 18
7 5VA
GND 7 19 A4 model
8 SG
RS 8 20
9 CN1 J246
PHASE2 3.3V
10 1 1
DP 11 FG FG PLTN PLTN-SNR
2 2 (S7)
I02 SG
12 3 3
D0C 13
RADF
ADF J244
I12 SG
14 4 3
COVER APS-1 APS-R
15 5 2 (S9)
VREF-C 16 +5V-APS
2329A/2829A/2323AM/2823AM only 6 1
+3.3VA CN26 CN401 JPD only
17 +24VA CN28
GND 1 FG
18 RING-RLY 1 LT model
SOL 2 NC
19 RING-ACT FAX SPEAKER 2
GND 3 TXN CN2 J246
20 PG 3 3.3V
+24VA 21 4 TXP 1 1
10/100BASE-TX 4 PLTN PLTN-SNR
PG TXCT 2 2 (S7)
22 Fast Ethernet 5 SG
+24VA RXCT 3 3
23 6
PG RXN J244
24 7 SG
RXP 4 3
8 APS-1 APS-R
5 2 (S9)
+5V-APS
6 1
ARD/AUD/MJD/ASD/CND only CN39
PSFAN J245
1 SG
PS-FAN 7 3
M (M8) +5V APS-2 APS-C
2 8 2 (S10)
+5V-APS
9 1
13.3 Electric Parts Layout
[A] Scanner unit, control panel [B] Power supply, developer unit [C] Laser unit, fuser unit, toner cartridge [D] Developer unit

S9 M1 CTIF THMS4 SW5 ERS

S10 S3
M2 LAMP1 M5
LVPS
S7 LAMP2
HPNL SW2
M8
CIS
CTRG

LDRS
HVPS THMS3

SW1 THMO1 FUS

SW3
THMS1
SW4 THMO2 DH1
M4
THMS2 THMO3
S4

[E] Drive unit [F] Bypass feed unit [G] Drawer unit [H] Automatic duplexing unit, transfer unit, exit unit

M3

CLT1 M6 CLT4

MAIN S6 S8

CLT2 CLT3

S1 M7
S2
SW6 S5

Motors Sensors and switches PC boards Thermistors and thermostats

Wire harness Wire harness Wire harness Wire harness
Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure Symbol Name Figure
location location location location
SCAN-MOT TEMP/HUMI-SNR PWA-F-MAIN THRMO-FSR-C
M1 [A] S1 [E] MAIN [E] THMO1 [C]
Scan motor Temperature/humidity sensor Main PC board (MAIN board) Fuser center thermostat
TNR-MOT RGST-SNR PWA-F-CTIF THRMO-FSR-F
M2 [C] S2 [E] CTIF [C] THMO2 [C]
Toner motor Registration sensor Toner cartridge interface PC board (CTIF board) Fuser front thermostat
MAIN-MOT EXIT-SNR PWA-F-CTRG THRMST-CS-L
M3 [E] S3 [C] CTRG [C] THMO3 [D]
Main motor Exit sensor Toner cartridge PC board (CTRG board) Drum damp heater thermostat
M/DC-POL ATTNR-SNR PWA-F-FUS THMS-C-HTR
M4 [C] S4 [D] FUS [D] THMS1 [C]
Polygonal motor Auto-toner sensor Fuse PC board (FUS board) Center thermistor
SUC-FAN-MOT EMP-SNR PWA-F-HPNL THMS-S-HTR
M5 [D] S5 [G] HPNL [A] THMS2 [C]
Suction fan Paper empty sensor Control panel PC board (HPNL board) Side thermistor
EXIT-MOT SFB-SNR PWA-F-LDRS THMS-EDG-HTR
M6 [C] S6 [F] LDR [C] THMS3 [C]
Exit motor Bypass paper sensor Laser driving PC board (LDRS board) Edge thermistor
ADU-FAN PLTN-SNR THMS-DRM
M7 [D] S7 [A] Lamps and heaters THMS4 [D]
ADU fan Platen sensor Drum thermistor
PS-FAN ADU-TR-SNR Wire harness
M8 [B] S8 [H] Symbol Name Figure
Switching regulator cooling fan ADU sensor location Others
APS-R DRM-DH Wire harness
S9 [A] DH1 [D] Symbol Name Figure
Automatic original detection sensor-1 Drum damp heater location

APS-C LP-ERS CIS

S10 [A] ERS [D] CIS [A]
Automatic original detection sensor-2 Discharge LED Contact image sensor unit

MAIN-SW HTR-LAMP PS-HVT

SW1 [B] LAMP1 [C] HVPS [B]
Main switch Center heater lamp High-voltage transformer

SIDE-COV-INTLCK-SW SIDE-LAMP PS-ACC

SW2 [B] LAMP2 [C] LVPS [B]
Right cover opening/closing interlock switch Side heater lamp Switching regulator

SIDE-COV-INTLCK-SW
SW3 [B]
Right cover opening/closing interlock switch
FRNT-COV-INTLCK-SW
SW4 Toner supply cover opening/closing interlock [B]
switch
DEV-SW
SW5 [G]
Developer cartridge detection switch
DRW-SW
SW6 [D]
Drawer detection switch

Electromagnetic clutches
Wire harness
Symbol Name Figure
location
RGST-CLT
CLT1 [E]
Registration roller clutch
CST-L-FEED-CLT
CLT2 [E]
Drawer feed clutch
SFB-CLT
CLT3 [H]
Bypass feed clutch
ADU-CLT
CLT4 [H]
ADU clutch

13 - 4
 13

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
13 - 5
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
WIRE HARNESS CONNECTION DIAGRAMS
13 - 6
14. SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)

14.1 Input check (Test mode 03)

Items to be checked and the condition of the equipment when the buttons [A] to [H] are highlighted are listed.

Contents Model
Highlighted Normal
Digital display display
Button Items to check e.g. e.g. 2523A/ 2323AM/ 2329A/
key
2523AD 2823AM 2829A

A PFP connection Not connected Connected - - Y

B ADU connection Not connected Connected Y Y Y
C ADU entrance sensor Paper present No paper Y Y Y
PFP side cover
D Cover opened Cover closed - - Y
opening/closing switch
[1] PFP upper drawer
E Paper present No paper - - Y
feed sensor
PFP upper drawer Drawer not
F Drawer present - - Y
detection switch installed
PFP upper drawer Tray at upper Other than upper
G - - Y
tray-up sensor limit position limit position
H - - - - - -
PFP upper drawer
A No paper Paper present - - Y
empty sensor
PFP motor rotation Abnormal
B Normal rotation - - Y
status rotation
PFP lower drawer
C Paper present No paper - - Y
feed sensor
PFP lower drawer Drawer not
[2] D Drawer present - - Y
detection switch installed
PFP lower drawer Tray at upper Other than upper
E - - Y
tray-up sensor limit position limit position
F - - - - - -
PFP lower drawer
G No paper Paper present - - Y
empty sensor
H - - - - - -

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 1 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 Contents Model
Highlighted Normal
Digital display display
Button Items to check e.g. e.g. 2523A/ 2323AM/ 2329A/
key
2523AD 2823AM 2829A

A - - - - - -
B - - - - - -
Upper drawer empty
C No paper Paper present Y Y Y
sensor
[3] D - - - - - -
E - - - - - -
F - - - - - -
G - - - - - -
H - - - - - -
PFU drawer feed
A Paper present No paper Y Y Y
sensor
B - - - - - -
PFU drawer empty
C No paper Paper present Y Y Y
sensor
[4] D - - - - - -
PFU drawer detection Drawer not
E Drawer present Y Y Y
sensor installed
F Bypass feed sensor No paper Paper present Y Y Y
G - - - - - -
H - - - - - -
A - - - - - -
B - - - - - -
C - - - - - -
Externally counter
D Not connected Connected - Y Y
[5] connection
E Developer unit switch Not connected Connected Y Y Y
F Fuser unit switch Connected Not connected Y Y Y
G - - - - - -
H - - - - - -

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 2 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 Contents Model
Highlighted Normal
Digital display display
Button Items to check e.g. e.g. 2523A/ 2323AM/ 2329A/
key
2523AD 2823AM 2829A

A 24V power supply Power ON Power OFF Y Y Y

High-voltage power
B Normal Abnormal Y Y Y
supply abnormality
Main motor rotation Abnormal
C Normal rotation Y Y Y
status rotation
Polygonal motor Abnormal
D Normal rotation Y Y Y
[6] rotation status rotation
E RADF connection Connected Not connected Y Y Y
F Platen SW detection Opened Closed - - Y
G - - - - - -
Developer material
H cartridge installation Installed Not installed Y Y Y
detection
A - - - - - -
B - - - - - -
C - - - - - -
D APS sensor R Original present No original - - Y
[7] APS sensor C
E Connected Not connected - - Y
(NAD only)
F Platen SW detection Opened Closed - - -
G - - - - - -
H - - - - - -
A RADF tray sensor Original present No original Y Y Y
B RADF empty sensor Paper present No paper Y Y Y
RADF cover opening/
C Cover opened Cover closed Y Y Y
closing sensor
RADF opening/closing
[8] D RADF opened RADF closed Y Y Y
sensor
E RADF exit sensor Original present No original Y Y Y
F - - - - - -
G RADF read sensor Original present No original Y Y Y
H - - - - - -

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 3 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 Contents Model
Highlighted Normal
Digital display display
Button Items to check e.g. e.g. 2523A/ 2323AM/ 2329A/
key
2523AD 2823AM 2829A

A - - - - - -
B - - - - - -
C - - - - - -
D - - - - - -
[9/0]
E - - - - - -
F - - - - - -
G - - - - - -
H - - - - - -
A Registration sensor Paper present No paper Y Y Y
B Exit sensor Paper present No paper Y Y Y
C - - - - - -
Toner supply cover
D Cover opened Cover closed Y Y Y
opening/closing switch
[A] PFU side cover
E Cover opened Cover closed Y Y Y
opening/closing switch
F - - - - - -
Judgement for
G acceptable USB Acceptable Not acceptable Y Y Y
media *1
H - - - - - -

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 4 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 Contents Model
Highlighted Normal
Digital display display
Button Items to check e.g. e.g. 2523A/ 2323AM/ 2329A/
key
2523AD 2823AM 2829A

Tray volume
A ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit7)
Tray volume
B ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit6)
Tray volume
C ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit5)
Tray volume
D ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit4)
[B]
Tray volume
E ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit3)
Tray volume
F ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit2)
Tray volume
G ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit1)
Tray volume
H ON OFF Y Y Y
sensor(bit0)
*1
• Be sure to install the USB media to the equipment and check if the device can be used with this code.
• Be sure to turn OFF the write protection (the function to prevent data from erasure by the accidental recording or deleting) of the USB media before performing the
check, otherwise this code cannot be used.
• It may take some time (2 sec. to 10 sec.) before this check is completed depending on the USB media.

Notes:
• Be sure to check the [8] A, where RADF is closed.
• Be sure to check the [8] B, where cover is closed.
• How to enter the alphabet characters such as MC=A or MC=B in the Test Mode 03:
To enter “A”, press the [*] button and then the [0] button. To enter “B”, press the [*] button and then the [1] button.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 5 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
14.2 Output check (test mode 03)

Model
2523A/
Code Function Procedure 2523AD/ 2329A/
2323AM/ 2829A
2823AM
101 Main motor ON 1 Y Y
102 Toner motor ON 1 Y Y
103 Polygonal motor ON (600 dpi) 1 Y Y
108 Registration roller clutch ON 1 Y Y
109 PFP motor ON 1 - Y
118 Laser ON 1 Y Y
120 Exit motor ON (normal rotation) 1 Y Y
121 Exit motor ON (reverse rotation) 1 Y Y
151 Main motor OFF 1 Y Y
152 Toner motor OFF 1 Y Y
153 Polygonal motor OFF (600 dpi) 1 Y Y
158 Registration roller clutch OFF 1 Y Y
159 PFP motor OFF 1 - Y
168 Laser OFF 1 Y Y
170 Exit motor OFF (normal rotation) 1 Y Y
171 Exit motor OFF (reverse rotation) 1 Y Y
201 Upper drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3 Y Y
202 PFU drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3 Y Y
203 PFU transport clutch (high speed) ON/OFF 3 Y Y
204 Bypass feed clutch ON/OFF 3 Y Y
205 Transport clutch (low speed) ON/OFF 3 Y Y
218 Coin control counter count up 2 Y Y
222 ADU clutch ON/OFF 3 Y Y
225 PFP transport clutch ON/OFF 3 - Y
226 PFP1 drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3 - Y
228 PFP2 drawer feed clutch ON/OFF 3 - Y
235 Discharge lamp ON/OFF 3 Y Y
236 Suction fan ON/OFF (low speed) 3 Y Y
237 Suction fan ON/OFF (high speed) 3 Y Y
249 Developer bias [-DC1] ON/OFF 3 Y Y

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 6 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 Model
2523A/
Code Function Procedure 2523AD/ 2329A/
2323AM/ 2829A
2823AM
250 Developer bias [AC] ON/OFF 3 Y Y
252 Main charger ON/OFF 3 Y Y
253 Separation charger ON/OFF 3 Y Y
255 Transfer guide bias ON/OFF 3 Y Y
256 Transfer charger (positive/center) ON/OFF 3 Y Y
257 Transfer charger (positive/high) ON/OFF 3 Y Y
258 Transfer charger (negative) ON/OFF 3 Y Y
Scan motor ON (Automatically stops at limit
261 position; speed can be changed with the 2 Y Y
[ZOOM] button
278 PFP1 drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2 - Y
280 PFP2 drawer tray-up motor ON (tray up) 2 - Y
281 RADF feed motor ON/OFF (normal rotation) 3 Y Y
282 RADF feed motor ON/OFF (reverse rotation) 3 Y Y
289 Developer cooling fan ON/OFF (high speed) 3 Y Y
302 Modem test 14.4KBPS(V17) 2 - Y
303 Modem test 9.6KBPS(V29) 2 - Y
304 Modem test 4.8KBPS(V27) 2 - Y
311 Modem test 33.6KBPS(V.34) 2 - Y
Dial test 10PPS
315 5 - Y
(Send 0~9 automatically)
Dial test 20PPS
316 5 - Y
(Send 0~9 automatically)
Dial test PB
317 5 - Y
(Send 0~9,*,# automatically)
Dial test PB
323 5 - Y
(Send 0~9,*,# based on operation)
324 Modem test OFF-HOOK 2 - Y
325 Modem test ON-HOOK 2 - Y

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 7 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
14.3 Test print mode (test mode 04)

Model
2523A/
Code Types of test pattern Remarks Remarks Output from 2523AD/ 2329A/
2323AM/ 2829A
2823AM
Main scanning direction 33 Error diffusion
111 1 Y Y
gradation steps
Secondary scanning direction Error diffusion
114 1 Y Y
17 gradation steps
Grid pattern Pattern width: 2 dots,
142 1 Y Y
Pitch: 10 mm

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 8 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
14.4 Adjustment Mode (05) Codes

2523 2323 2329

Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Process Developme 2000 Auto toner sensor auto - - - As the value increases, the sensor output 17 Y Y Y
ment nt adjustment (heater ON) increases correspondingly.
mode
05 Adjust Process Developme 2001 Auto toner sensor 165 0~255 M Corrects the control value of the auto-toner sensor 3 Y Y Y
ment nt manual adjustment setup in 05-2000.
mode (heater ON) * Selection is disable when developer unit is not
installed.
05 Adjust Process Developme 2020 Developer bias DC 131 0~255 M As the value increases, the transformer output 3 Y Y Y
ment nt output adjustment increases correspondingly.
mode
05 Adjust Process Charger 2040 Main charger grid bias 123 0~255 M As the value increases, the transformer output 3 Y Y Y
ment output adjustment increases correspondingly.
mode
05 Adjust Process Transfer 2052 Transfer transformer 138 78~255 M As the value increases, the transformer output 3 Y Y Y
ment DC output adjustment increases correspondingly. (Main motor, main
mode (Center) charger, discharge LED, transfer ON)
05 Adjust Process Separation 2078 Separation transformer 52 0~255 M As the value increases, the transformer output 3 Y Y Y
ment DC output adjustment increases correspondingly. (Main motor, discharge
mode (Center) LED, separation DC / separation AC ON)
05 Adjust Process Transfer 2083 Transfer cleaning bias 118 78~255 M The larger the setting value is, the higher the value 3 Y Y Y
ment adjustment (Positive) of the current (more positive) is.
mode
05 Adjust Process Transfer 2084 Transfer cleaning bias 66 0~77 M The larger the setting value is, the higher the value 3 Y Y Y
ment adjustment (Negative) of the current (more negative) is.
mode
05 Adjust Process Image 2192 Relative humidity latest 50 0~100 M Displays the humidity value detected by 2 Y Y Y
ment control value temperature/humidity sensor.
mode
05 Adjust Process Image 2194 Temperature latest 25 0~50 M Displays the temperature value detected by 2 Y Y Y
ment control value temperature/humidity sensor.
mode
05 Adjust Process Image 2196 Drum temperature 25 0~100 M (Unit: degrees C) 2 Y Y Y
ment control latest value
mode
05 Adjust Process Image 2250 Laser power 118 0~255 M When the value increases, the laser output 3 Y Y Y
ment control adjustment increases correspondingly.
mode
05 Adjust Process Image 2382 Reverse time of the 13 0~255 M 1 Y Y Y
ment control drum
mode
05 Adjust Process Image 2390 Forced performing of - - M Perform this adjustment before the replacement of 6 Y Y Y
ment control idling for toner recycle the developer material. (The toner is forcibly
mode removed from the cleaner.)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner Image location 3030 Primary scanning 120 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment direction by approx. 0.0423 mm toward the front side of the
mode paper.
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner Image location 3031 Secondary scanning 120 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment direction by approx. 0.13013 mm toward the trailing edge of
mode the paper.
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner Reproduction ratio 3032 Secondary scanning 116 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment direction ratio in the secondary scanning direction (vertical
mode to paper feeding direction) increases by approx.
0.025%.
* For 2323AM/2823AM, perform the adjustment
within a range between 0 to 177.
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner Shading position 3034 Original glass 117 92~165 SYS 0.13013mm/step 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment
mode

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 9 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner Shading position 3035 RADF 133 92~165 SYS 0.13013mm/step 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment
mode
05 Adjust Scanner RADF Adjustment of RADF 3040 Single sided original 12 0~30 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment paper alignment
mode
05 Adjust Scanner RADF Adjustment of RADF 3041 Double sided original 12 0~30 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment paper alignment
mode
05 Adjust Scanner RADF 3042 Fine adjustment of the 50 0~100 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment RADF transport speed
mode
05 Adjust Scanner RADF 3043 RADF sideways 128 0~255 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment deviation adjustment
mode
05 Adjust Scanner RADF RADF leading edge 3044 Single sided original 50 0~100 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment position adjustment
mode
05 Adjust Scanner RADF RADF leading edge 3045 Double sided original 50 0~100 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment position adjustment
mode
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3046 Carriage position 128 0~255 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment during
mode scanning from RADF
(black)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3047 Carriage position 128 0~255 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment during
mode scanning from RADF
(color)
05 Adjust Scanner RADF 3050 Adjustment of the 20 0~255 SYS This is used for improving the detection accuracy 6 Y Y Y
ment RADF tray volume of the width of the original set on the original tray.
mode (minimum) The condition of the sensor when the tray width is
minimized is memorized. The appropriate range of
the adjustment value is between 0 and 100.
05 Adjust Scanner RADF 3051 Adjustment of the 220 0~255 SYS This is used for improving the detection accuracy 6 Y Y Y
ment RADF tray volume of the width of the original set on the original tray.
mode (maximum) The condition of the sensor when the tray width is
maximized is memorized. The appropriate range
of the adjustment value is between 200 and 255.
05 Adjust Scanner RADF 3052 Adjustment for DF 115 0~255 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment trailing edge tolerance
mode (black)
05 Adjust Scanner RADF 3053 Adjustment for DF 128 0~255 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment trailing edge tolerance
mode (Color 600 dpi)
05 Adjust Scanner RADF 3054 Adjustment for DF 132 0~255 SYS 1 Y Y Y
ment trailing edge tolerance
mode (Color 300 dpi)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner LED 3219 Light volume - - SYS Light volume adjustment of LED is performed. 6 Y Y Y
ment adjustment (color/ Adjustment for color scans is performed after the
mode black) adjustment for a black scan.
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner LED 3220 Light volume - - SYS Light volume adjustment of LED is performed. 6 Y Y Y
ment adjustment (black) Only adjustment for black scans is performed.
mode
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner LED 3221 Light volume - - SYS Light volume adjustment of LED is performed. 6 Y Y Y
ment adjustment (color) Only adjustment for color scans is performed.
mode
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3222 1 Final result of the peak 0 0~32767 SYS It is dark when a value is small. 10 Y Y Y
ment detection black level It is bright when a value is large.
mode adjustment (CH1)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3222 2 Final result of the peak 0 0~32767 SYS It is dark when a value is small. 10 Y Y Y
ment detection black level It is bright when a value is large.
mode adjustment (CH2)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 10 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3222 3 Final result of the peak 0 0~32767 SYS It is dark when a value is small. 10 Y Y Y
ment detection black level It is bright when a value is large.
mode adjustment (CH3)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3223 1 Final result of the peak 0 0~32767 SYS It is dark when a value is small. 10 Y Y Y
ment detection white level It is bright when a value is large.
mode adjustment (CH1)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3223 2 Final result of the peak 0 0~32767 SYS It is dark when a value is small. 10 Y Y Y
ment detection white level It is bright when a value is large.
mode adjustment (CH2)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3223 3 Final result of the peak 0 0~32767 SYS It is dark when a value is small. 10 Y Y Y
ment detection white level It is bright when a value is large.
mode adjustment (CH3)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3224 LED (R1) current 60 0~255 SYS This is setting value of LED (R1), for light quantity 1 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting adjustment in case of monochrome scan.
mode (monochrome It will become bright if a value is enlarged.
scanning)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3225 LED (G1) current 60 0~255 SYS This is setting value of LED (G1), for light quantity 1 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting adjustment in case of monochrome scan.
mode (monochrome It will become bright if a value is enlarged.
scanning)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3226 LED (B1) current 60 0~255 SYS This is setting value of LED (B1), for light quantity 1 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting adjustment in case of monochrome scan.
mode (monochrome It will become bright if a value is enlarged.
scanning)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3230 Threshold adjustment 128 0~255 SYS 1st detection performance threshold adjustment 1 - - Y
ment of the 1st document
mode size detection
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3231 Threshold adjustment 128 0~255 SYS 2nd detection performance threshold adjustment 1 - - Y
ment of the 2nd document
mode size detection
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3233 Document size 128 0~255 SYS Uses for adjusting the detection range of each 1 - - Y
ment detection adjustment original size
mode (Primary scanning
direction)
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3234 Carriage standby 200 0~255 SYS 255: 25.5mm from a reading starting position 1 - - Y
ment position adjustment of 100: 10.0mm from a reading starting position
mode document size 0: 0.0mm from a reading starting position
detection
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3235 Detection operating 15 0~255 SYS Adjustment of the time for detective start. 1 - - Y
ment time adjustment of 1st 255:The minimum operating time plus 2040ms
mode document size 0:The minimum operating time
detection
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3236 Detection operation 128 0~255 SYS Adjustment of the lamp lighting time. 1 - - Y
ment lamp lighting time 255: The minimum lamp lighting time plus 2040ms
mode adjustment of 1st 0: The minimum lamp lighting time
document size
detection
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3306 0 LED (R1) current 128 0~255 SYS It will become bright if a value is enlarged. 4 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting The light is put out by 0.
mode (color scanning)
600/400dpi
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3306 1 LED (R1) current 128 0~255 SYS It will become bright if a value is enlarged. 4 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting The light is put out by 0.
mode (color scanning)
300/200/150dpi
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3307 0 LED (G1) current 128 0~255 SYS It will become bright if a value is enlarged. 4 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting The light is put out by 0.
mode (color scanning)
600/400dpi
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3307 1 LED (G1) current 128 0~255 SYS It will become bright if a value is enlarged. 4 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting The light is put out by 0.
mode (color scanning)
300/200/150dpi

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 11 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3308 0 LED (B1) current 128 0~255 SYS It will become bright if a value is enlarged. 4 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting The light is put out by 0.
mode (color scanning)
600/400dpi
05 Adjust Scanner Scanner 3308 1 LED (B1) current 128 0~255 SYS It will become bright if a value is enlarged. 4 Y Y Y
ment effective value setting The light is put out by 0.
mode (color scanning)
300/200/150dpi
05 Adjust Scanner Original 3312 Detection start timing 10 0~255 SYS The larger the value is, the start timing of the 1 - - Y
ment size adjustment original size detection becomes backward.
mode detection The smaller the value is, the start timing of the
original size detection becomes forward.
05 Adjust Printer Laser Copy Reproduction ratio 4000 Fine adjustment of 125 0~255 SYS 1Step0.05%. 1 Y Y Y
ment correction value in image writing If this value is 128, frequency is same as 05-4001.
mode primary scanning frequency If it is not 128, that difference is added to 05-4001.
direction If the value increases, magnification also
increases (the dimension E will be longer).(0.6mm/
4 steps)
05 Adjust Printer Laser Print Reproduction ratio 4001 Fine adjustment of 125 0~255 SYS 1Step0.05% 1 Y Y Y
ment correction value in polygonal motor If the value increases, magnification of the
mode primary scanning rotation speed dimension A becomes bigger (longer).(0.4mm/4
direction steps)
05 Adjust Printer Laser Copy 4005 Laser writing start 150 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the writing start 1 Y Y Y
ment position position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423
mode mm.
05 Adjust Printer Laser Print 4006 Laser writing start 150 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the writing start 1 Y Y Y
ment position position shifts to the front side by approx. 0.0423
mode mm.
05 Adjust Printer Image Copy/Print Reproduction ratio in 4009 Fine adjustment of the 126 0~255 M When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction 1 Y Y Y
ment the secondary rotational speed of the ratio
mode scanning direction (For main motor of secondary scanning direction increases by
resolutions in inches) approx. 0.14mm/step.
05 Adjust Printer Image FAX Reproduction ratio in 4010 Fine adjustment of the 128 0~255 M When the value increases by “1”, the reproduction 1 - - Y
ment the secondary rotational speed of the ratio
mode scanning direction (For main motor of secondary scanning direction increases by
FAX resolutions in approx. 0.14mm/step.
millimeters)
05 Adjust Printer Image Copy/Print For resolutions in inch 4013 Fine adjustment of the 128 0~255 M 1 Y Y Y
ment rotational speed of the
mode exit motor
05 Adjust Printer Image FAX For FAX resolutions in 4014 Fine adjustment of the 128 0~255 M 1 - - Y
ment millimeters rotational speed of the
mode exit motor
05 Adjust Printer Image Adjustment of drawer 4018 0 Upper drawer 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 4 Y Y Y
ment sideways deviation toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Adjustment of drawer 4018 1 Lower drawer (PFU) 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 4 Y Y Y
ment sideways deviation toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Adjustment of drawer 4018 2 PFP upper drawer 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 4 - - Y
ment sideways deviation toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Adjustment of drawer 4018 3 PFP lower drawer 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 4 - - Y
ment sideways deviation toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Adjustment of drawer 4018 5 Bypass feeding 128 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 4 Y Y Y
ment sideways deviation toward the front side by 0.0423 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Adj. of primary scan. Duplex feeding 4019 0 Long size 148 0~255 SYS If the value increases, the dimension B becomes 4 Y Y Y
ment writing start longer.(about 0.5mm/10 steps)
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Adj. of primary scan. Duplex feeding 4019 1 Short size 148 0~255 SYS If the value increases, the dimension B becomes 4 Y Y Y
ment writing start longer.(about 0.5mm/10 steps)
mode

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 12 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Copy 4050 Top margin 60 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Copy 4051 Left margin 50 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Copy 4052 Right margin 55 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Copy 4053 Bottom margin 75 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Print 4054 Top margin 24 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Print 4055 Left margin 0 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Print 4056 Right margin 0 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Margin adjustment Print 4057 Bottom margin 0 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 1 Y Y Y
ment becomes wider by approx. 0.042 mm.
mode
05 Adjust Printer Image Leading edge position 4058 Upper drawer 28 0~40 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx.
mode 0.54 mm.
05 Adjust Printer Image Leading edge position 4059 Lower drawer (PFU) 8 0~15 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx.
mode 0.54 mm.
05 Adjust Printer Image Leading edge position 4060 PFP 8 0~15 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 1 - - Y
ment adjustment toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx.
mode 0.54 mm.
05 Adjust Printer Image Leading edge position 4061 Bypass feeding Refer to 0~15 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment contents toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx.
mode 0.54 mm.
<Default value>
2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: 7
2329A/2829A: 8
05 Adjust Printer Image Leading edge position 4062 Duplexing feeding 8 0~15 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the image shifts 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment toward the trailing edge of the paper by approx.
mode 0.54 mm.
05 Adjust Printer Image Bottom margin 4064 0 Void adjustment 29 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 4 Y Y Y
ment adjustment / Reverse becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
mode side at duplexing
05 Adjust Printer Image Right margin 4064 1 Void adjustment 0 0~255 SYS When the value increases by “1”, the blank area 4 Y Y Y
ment adjustment / Reverse becomes wider by approx. 0.0423 mm.
mode side at duplexing
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Upper drawer 4100 0 Plain paper; Long size 48 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Upper drawer 4100 1 Plain paper; Middle 48 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Upper drawer 4100 2 Plain paper; Short size 48 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 13 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Lower drawer (PFU) 4101 0 Plain paper; Long size 46 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Lower drawer (PFU) 4101 1 Plain paper; Middle 46 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Lower drawer (PFU) 4101 2 Plain paper; Short size 46 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4102 0 Thin paper; Long size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4102 1 Thin paper; Middle size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4102 2 Thin paper; Short size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4102 3 Thin paper; Postcard 44 0~63 M Paper length: postcard 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4103 0 Plain paper; Long size 49 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4103 1 Plain paper; Middle 49 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4103 2 Plain paper; Short size 47 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4104 0 Thick paper; Long size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4104 1 Thick paper; Middle 44 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4104 2 Thick paper; Short size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4105 0 Thick1 paper; Long 44 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4105 1 Thick1 paper; Middle 44 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4105 2 Thick1 paper; Short 44 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 14 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4106 0 Thick2 paper; Short 44 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4106 1 Thick2 paper; Short 44 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4106 2 Thick2 paper; Short 44 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4107 0 OHP film; Long size 37 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4107 1 OHP film; Middle size 37 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4107 2 OHP film; Short size 37 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount PFP1 (Upper drawer) 4108 0 Plain paper; Long size 51 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 - - Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount PFP1 (Upper drawer) 4108 1 Plain paper; Middle 51 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 - - Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount PFP1 (Upper drawer) 4108 2 Plain paper; Short size 41 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 - - Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount PFP2 (Lower drawer) 4109 0 Plain paper; Long size 51 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 - - Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount PFP2 (Lower drawer) 4109 1 Plain paper; Middle 51 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 - - Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount PFP2 (Lower drawer) 4109 2 Plain paper; Short size 41 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 - - Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount ADU 4110 0 Plain paper; Long size 27 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount ADU 4110 1 Plain paper; Middle 27 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment size
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount ADU 4110 2 Plain paper; Short size 27 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Adjustment of paper 4112 0 Plain paper 0 0~20 M 4 Y Y Y
ment system / pushing amount at
mode Paper bypass feeding
transport

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 15 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Adjustment of paper 4112 1 Postcard 8 0~20 M 4 Y Y Y
ment system / pushing amount at
mode Paper bypass feeding
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Adjustment of paper 4112 3 Envelope 8 0~20 M 4 Y Y Y
ment system / pushing amount at
mode Paper bypass feeding
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Adjustment of paper 4112 4 Thick paper 0 0~20 M 4 Y Y Y
ment system / pushing amount at
mode Paper bypass feeding
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Adjustment of paper 4112 5 Thick paper 1 0 0~20 M 4 Y Y Y
ment system / pushing amount at
mode Paper bypass feeding
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Adjustment of paper 4112 6 Thick paper 2 8 0~20 M 4 Y Y Y
ment system / pushing amount at
mode Paper bypass feeding
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Adjustment of paper 4112 7 OHP film 8 0~20 M 4 Y Y Y
ment system / pushing amount at
mode Paper bypass feeding
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4405 0 Envelope; Long size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 330 mm or longer 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4405 1 Envelope; Middle size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 220 to 329 mm 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount Bypass feeding 4405 2 Envelope; Short size 44 0~63 M Paper length: 219 mm or shorter 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper aligning amount 4828 0 Plain paper 0 0~32 M To re-start of the resist roller 4 Y Y Y
ment system / adjustment Time the paper feed roller starts to move ahead
mode Paper
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper feed roller at the 4828 1 Postcard 8 0~32 M To re-start of the resist roller 4 Y Y Y
ment system / time of registration Time the paper feed roller starts to move ahead
mode Paper roller restart
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper feed roller at the 4828 3 Envelope 8 0~32 M To re-start of the resist roller 4 Y Y Y
ment system / time of registration Time the paper feed roller starts to move ahead
mode Paper roller restart
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper feed roller at the 4828 4 Thick paper 0 0~32 M To re-start of the resist roller 4 Y Y Y
ment system / time of registration Time the paper feed roller starts to move ahead
mode Paper roller restart
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper feed roller at the 4828 5 Thick paper 1 0 0~32 M To re-start of the resist roller 4 Y Y Y
ment system / time of registration Time the paper feed roller starts to move ahead
mode Paper roller restart
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper feed roller at the 4828 6 Thick paper 2 8 0~32 M To re-start of the resist roller 4 Y Y Y
ment system / time of registration Time the paper feed roller starts to move ahead
mode Paper roller restart
transport
05 Adjust Printer Feeding Paper feed roller at the 4828 7 OHP film 8 0~32 M To re-start of the resist roller 4 Y Y Y
ment system / time of registration Time the paper feed roller starts to move ahead
mode Paper roller restart
transport

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 16 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Copy/Scan (black) 7025 RADF 105 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d offset background becomes darker. As the adjustment
mode adjustment value becomes smaller, the background becomes
lighter.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Scan (color) 7026 RADF 105 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d offset background becomes darker. As the adjustment
mode adjustment value becomes smaller, the background becomes
lighter.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Copy 7033 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d background becomes darker. As the adjustment
mode adjustment value becomes smaller, the background becomes
lighter.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Copy 7034 Text 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d background becomes darker. As the adjustment
mode adjustment value becomes smaller, the background becomes
lighter.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Copy 7043 Photo 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d background becomes darker. As the adjustment
mode adjustment value becomes smaller, the background becomes
lighter.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Copy 7056 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment image becomes sharper. As the adjustment value
mode becomes smaller, the image becomes softer.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Copy 7057 Text 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment image becomes sharper. As the adjustment value
mode becomes smaller, the image becomes softer.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Copy 7058 Photo 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment image becomes sharper. As the adjustment value
mode becomes smaller, the image becomes softer.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Copy 7063 Back ground erase 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment image becomes sharper. As the adjustment value
mode becomes smaller, the image becomes softer.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Copy Background offset 7107 Back ground erase 128 0~255 SYS As the adjustment value becomes larger, the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d adjustment background becomes darker. As the adjustment
mode adjustment value becomes smaller, the background becomes
lighter.
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Manual density 7114 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value is, the darker the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment: center becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Manual density 7115 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value is, the darker the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment: center becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Manual density 7116 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value is, the darker the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment: center becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Automatic density 7123 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value is, the darker the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Automatic density 7124 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value is, the darker the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Automatic density 7125 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value is, the darker the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Auto density 7142 Back ground erase 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image density 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment becomes. The smaller the value, the lighter the
mode image density becomes.
05 Adjust Image Density Copy Manual density 7143 Back ground erase 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image density 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment becomes. The smaller the value, the lighter the
mode image density becomes.
05 Adjust Image Automatic Copy Text/Photo, Text, 7165 Tone pattern reading - - - Execute a gamma adjustment 7 Y Y Y
ment Processing gamma Background erase (error diffusion for
mode adjustment black)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 17 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Image Automatic Copy Photo 7167 Tone pattern reading - - - Execute a gamma adjustment 7 Y Y Y
ment Processing gamma (binary dithering for
mode adjustment black)
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Text/Photo 7190 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Text/Photo 7190 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Text/Photo 7190 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Text 7191 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Text 7191 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Text 7191 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Photo 7192 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Photo 7192 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Copy Photo 7192 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text/Photo 7218 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text/Photo 7218 1 Beam level 1/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text/Photo 7218 2 Beam level 2/4 5 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text/Photo 7218 3 Beam level 3/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text/Photo 7218 4 Beam level 4/4 7 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text 7219 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text 7219 1 Beam level 1/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text 7219 2 Beam level 2/4 5 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text 7219 3 Beam level 3/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Text 7219 4 Beam level 4/4 9 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 18 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Photo 7220 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Photo 7220 1 Beam level 1/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Photo 7220 2 Beam level 2/4 5 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Photo 7220 3 Beam level 3/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Photo 7220 4 Beam level 4/4 8 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Back ground erase 7223 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Back ground erase 7223 1 Beam level 1/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Back ground erase 7223 2 Beam level 2/4 5 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Back ground erase 7223 3 Beam level 3/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Copy Back ground erase 7223 4 Beam level 4/4 9 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print GDI 7300 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y -
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print GDI 7300 1 Beam level 1/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y -
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print GDI 7300 2 Beam level 2/4 5 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y -
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print GDI 7300 3 Beam level 3/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y -
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print GDI 7300 4 Beam level 4/4 7 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y -
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Gamma Print PCL / smooth / 600 dpi 7317 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the density in the low 4 - - Y
ment Processing balance density area increases. As the value becomes
mode adjustment smaller, the density in the low density area
decreases.
05 Adjust Image Gamma Print PCL / smooth / 600 dpi 7317 1 Middle density 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the density in the low 4 - - Y
ment Processing balance density area increases. As the value becomes
mode adjustment smaller, the density in the low density area
decreases.
05 Adjust Image Gamma Print PCL / smooth / 600 dpi 7317 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the density in the low 4 - - Y
ment Processing balance density area increases. As the value becomes
mode adjustment smaller, the density in the low density area
decreases.
05 Adjust Image Gamma Print PCL / detail / 600 dpi 7318 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the density in the low 4 - - Y
ment Processing balance density area increases. As the value becomes
mode adjustment smaller, the density in the low density area
decreases.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 19 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Image Gamma Print PCL / detail / 600 dpi 7318 1 Middle density 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the density in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing balance medium density area increases. As the value
mode adjustment becomes smaller, the density in the medium
density area decreases.
05 Adjust Image Gamma Print PCL / detail / 600 dpi 7318 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the density in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing balance high density value increases. As the value
mode adjustment becomes smaller, the density in the high density
value decreases.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode 7350 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level OFF primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode 7350 1 Beam level 1/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level OFF primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode 7350 2 Beam level 2/4 5 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level OFF primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode 7350 3 Beam level 3/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level OFF primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode 7350 4 Beam level 4/4 8 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level OFF primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode ON 7352 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode ON 7352 1 Beam level 1/4 2 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode ON 7352 2 Beam level 2/4 3 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode ON 7352 3 Beam level 3/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Toner saving mode ON 7352 4 Beam level 4/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Test print 7355 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Test print 7355 1 Beam level 1/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Test print 7355 2 Beam level 2/4 5 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Test print 7355 3 Beam level 3/4 6 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting Print Test print 7355 4 Beam level 4/4 8 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Scan (black) 7430 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes.
mode The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes and the less moire appears.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Scan (black) 7431 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes.
mode The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes and the less moire appears.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 20 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Scan (black) 7432 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes.
mode The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes and the less moire appears.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Scan (black) 7433 Grayscale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes.
mode The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes and the less moire appears.
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Manual adjustment / 7444 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment Center value center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Manual adjustment / 7445 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment Center value center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Manual adjustment / 7446 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment Center value center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Manual adjustment / 7447 Grayscale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment Center value center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Automatic density 7456 Text/Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Automatic density 7457 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Automatic density 7458 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (black) Automatic density 7459 Grayscale 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Text/Photo 7485 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Text/Photo 7485 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Text/Photo 7485 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Text 7486 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Text 7486 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Text 7486 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Photo 7487 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Photo 7487 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Photo 7487 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Grayscale 7488 0 Low density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 21 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Grayscale 7488 1 Medium density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Gamma Scan (black) Grayscale 7488 2 High density 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image of the 4 Y Y Y
ment Processing balance area surrounding the target area becomes.
mode adjustment
05 Adjust Image Density FAX Manual density 7533 Text/photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 - - Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment / center center value becomes.
mode value
05 Adjust Image Threshold FAX Adjustment of the 7534 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 - - Y
ment Processing adjustment threshold value for center value becomes.
mode simple binarization /
center value
05 Adjust Image Density FAX Manual density 7535 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 - - Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment / center center value becomes.
mode value
05 Adjust Image Density FAX Automatic density 7542 Text/photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 - - Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Density FAX Automatic density 7543 Photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the darker the image at the 1 - - Y
ment Processing adjustment adjustment center value becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Setting FAX 7595 0 Beam level 0/4 0 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting FAX 7595 1 Beam level 1/4 2 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting FAX 7595 2 Beam level 2/4 3 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting FAX 7595 3 Beam level 3/4 4 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Setting FAX 7595 4 Beam level 4/4 8 0~10 SYS As the value becomes smaller, the beam in the 4 - - Y
ment Processing beam level primary scanning direction becomes narrower, and
mode conversion the dot is reproduced in a smaller size accordingly.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Scan (color) 8309 Text/photo 128 0~255 SYS The background level of background center value 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d is adjusted. The smaller the value, the lighter the
mode adjustment background becomes.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Scan (color) 8310 Text 128 0~255 SYS The background level of background center value 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d is adjusted. The smaller the value, the lighter the
mode adjustment background becomes.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Scan (color) 8311 Photo (developing 128 0~255 SYS The background level of background center value 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d paper) is adjusted. The smaller the value, the lighter the
mode adjustment background becomes.
05 Adjust Image Fine Scan (color) 8314 Text/photo 1 0~4 SYS The larger the value, the darker the black side of 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment the image becomes.
mode of black
density
05 Adjust Image Fine Scan (color) 8315 Text 0 0~4 SYS The larger the value, the darker the black side of 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment the image becomes.
mode of black
density
05 Adjust Image Fine Scan (color) 8316 Photo (developing 0 0~4 SYS The larger the value, the darker the black side of 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment paper) the image becomes.
mode of black
density
05 Adjust Image RGB Scan (color) 8319 Text/photo 0 0~3 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing conversion 0: sRGB
mode method 1: AppleRGB
selection 2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 22 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust Image RGB Scan (color) 8320 Text 0 0~3 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing conversion 0: sRGB
mode method 1: AppleRGB
selection 2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB
05 Adjust Image RGB Scan (color) 8321 Photo (developing 0 0~3 SYS Sets the color space format of the output image. 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing conversion paper) 0: sRGB
mode method 1: AppleRGB
selection 2: ROMMRGB
3: AdobeRGB
05 Adjust Image Saturation Scan (color) 8324 Text/photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the brighter the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Saturation Scan (color) 8325 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the brighter the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Saturation Scan (color) 8326 Photo (developing 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the brighter the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment paper) becomes.
mode
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Scan (color) 8335 Text 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes.
mode The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes and the less moire appears.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Scan (color) 8336 Photo (developing 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment paper) becomes.
mode The smaller the value, the softer the image
becomes and the less moire appears.
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (color) Density adjustment 8339 Text/photo 128 0~255 SYS Adjusts the center density and the variation of 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment (center value) density adjustment buttons. The larger the value,
mode the darker the image becomes.
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (color) Density adjustment 8340 Text 128 0~255 SYS Adjusts the center density and the variation of 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment (center value) density adjustment buttons. The larger the value,
mode the darker the image becomes.
05 Adjust Image Density Scan (color) Density adjustment 8341 Photo (developing 128 0~255 SYS Adjusts the center density and the variation of 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment (center value) paper) density adjustment buttons. The larger the value,
mode the darker the image becomes.
05 Adjust Image Sharpness Scan (color) 8354 Text/photo 128 0~255 SYS The larger the value, the sharper the image 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing adjustment becomes. The smaller the value, the softer the
mode image becomes and the less moire appears.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Scan (black) Automatic density 8400 Text/photo 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the more 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d offset adjustment background is removed. As the value becomes
mode adjustment smaller, the less background is removed.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Scan (black) Automatic density 8402 Photo 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the more 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d offset adjustment background is removed. As the value becomes
mode adjustment smaller, the less background is removed.
05 Adjust Image Backgroun Scan (black) Automatic density 8403 Grayscale 128 0~255 SYS As the value becomes larger, the more 1 Y Y Y
ment Processing d offset adjustment background is removed. As the value becomes
mode adjustment smaller, the less background is removed.
05 Adjust System Maintenanc 9043 Equipment number - - SYS If this code is performed, 08-9601 is performed. 7 11 Y Y Y
ment e (serial number) display digits out of 9 digits can be entered except for
mode upper 2 digits (fixed digits).
05 Adjust System LCD 9963 Adjustment of LCD 128 118~138 SYS It becomes dark when add an adjustment value. 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment display contrast center It becomes bright when reduce an adjustment
mode value value.
05 Adjust System Density Copy 9964 Automatic density 2 0~4 SYS It becomes dark when add an adjustment value. 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment adjustment/Center It becomes bright when reduce an adjustment
mode value value.
0:-2
1:-1
2:0 (Default)
3:1
4:2

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 23 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
05 Adjust System Density Copy 9965 Manual density 2 0~4 SYS It becomes dark when add an adjustment value. 1 Y Y Y
ment adjustment adjustment/Center It becomes bright when reduce an adjustment
mode value value.
0:-2
1:-1
2:0 (Default)
3:1
4:2

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 24 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
14.5 Setting Mode (08) Codes

2523 2323 2329

Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser 2002 Fuser unit error status 0 0~62 M 0: No error 1: C411 error 2: C412 error 3: C413 1 Y Y Y
mode counter error 4: C414 error 5: C415 error 7: C447 error 9:
C449 error 19: C449 error 21: C449 error 22:
C449 error 23: C449 error 24: C447 error 25:
C449 error 27: C449 error 45: C449 error 62:
C452 error
Than the above: C4B0
08 Setting Process Fuser 2009 Fuser roller 8 0~12 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature on C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
standby (Center degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser 2010 Fuser roller 8 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Center degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor/Plain paper) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2028 Thick paper 2 13 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Center degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser 1st printing pre-running 2031 Thick paper 2 12 0~15 M 0: Invalid 1: 1sec 2: 2sec 3: 3sec 4 : 4sec 5: 5sec 1 Y Y Y
mode operating time 6: 6sec 7: 7sec 8: 8sec 9: 9sec 10: 10sec 11:
12sec 12: 14sec 13 : 16sec 14: 18sec 15: 20sec
08 Setting Process Fuser 2040 Drop control when 1 0~2 M 0: Invalid, 1: Valid, 2: Invalid in low temperature 1 Y Y Y
mode ready
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2041 0 The first drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2041 1 The second drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2041 2 The third drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2041 3 The fourth drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller Energy Saving Mode 2042 Center thermistor 0 0~13 M 0: OFF 1: 40 degrees C 2: 50 degrees C 3: 60 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature degrees C 4: 70 degrees C 5: 80 degrees C 6: 90
degrees C 7: 100 degrees C 8: 110 degrees C 9:
120 degrees C 10: 130 degrees C 11: 140 degrees
C 12: 150 degrees C 13: 160 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2049 Thick paper 8 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Center degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2050 Thick paper 1 13 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Center degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 25 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2051 OHP film 8 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Center degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser 1st printing pre-running 2052 OHP film 0 0~15 M 0: Invalid 1: 1sec 2: 2sec 3: 3sec 4 : 4sec 5: 5sec 1 Y Y Y
mode operating time 6: 6sec 7: 7sec 8: 8sec 9: 9sec 10: 10sec 11:
12sec 12: 14sec 13 : 16sec 14: 18sec 15: 20sec
08 Setting Process Fuser 1st printing pre-running 2053 Plain paper-low temp. 0 0~15 M 0: Invalid 1: 1sec 2: 2sec 3: 3sec 4 : 4sec 5: 5sec 1 Y Y Y
mode operating time environment 6: 6sec 7: 7sec 8: 8sec 9: 9sec 10: 10sec 11:
12sec 12: 14sec 13 : 16sec 14: 18sec 15: 20sec
08 Setting Process Fuser 1st printing pre-running 2054 Thick paper 10 0~15 M 0: Invalid 1: 1sec 2: 2sec 3: 3sec 4 : 4sec 5: 5sec 1 Y Y Y
mode operating time 6: 6sec 7: 7sec 8: 8sec 9: 9sec 10: 10sec 11:
12sec 12: 14sec 13 : 16sec 14: 18sec 15: 20sec
08 Setting Process Fuser 1st printing pre-running 2055 Thick paper 1 12 0~15 M 0: Invalid 1: 1sec 2: 2sec 3: 3sec 4 : 4sec 5: 5sec 1 Y Y Y
mode operating time 6: 6sec 7: 7sec 8: 8sec 9: 9sec 10: 10sec 11:
12sec 12: 14sec 13 : 16sec 14: 18sec 15: 20sec
08 Setting Process Fuser 2075 Ready and preheat pre- 4 0~6 M 0: Not controlled 1: 0.5h 2: 1.0h 3: 1.5h 4: 2.0h 5: 1 Y Y Y
mode running operating 2.5h 6: 3.0h
frequency
08 Setting Process Fuser 2090 Printing temperature 1 0~6 M 0: Invalid 1 Y Y Y
mode drop control 1: (Normal temperature / Low temperature) Plain
paper and Thick paper 1 Valid
2: (Normal temperature / Low temperature) Valid
(except for Envelope)
3: (Normal temperature) Plain paper and Thick
paper 1 Valid
4: (Normal temperature / Low temperature)Plain
paper
5: (Normal temperature) Plain paper
6: (Normal temperature) Valid (except for
Envelope)
08 Setting Process Fuser 2100 Temperature setting of 5 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode warming-up (Center C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
thermistor) degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser 2101 Temperature setting of 5 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode warming-up (Side C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
thermistor) degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser 2111 Pre-running time 0 0~18 M 0: Disabled 1: 1 sec. 2: 2 sec. 3: 3 sec. 4: 4 sec. 5: 1 Y Y Y
mode (Normal temperature) 5 sec. 6: 6 sec. 7: 7 sec. 8: 8 sec. 9: 9 sec. 10: 10
sec. 11: 15 sec. 12: 20 sec. 13: 25 sec. 14: 30 sec.
15: 40 sec. 16: 50 sec. 17: 60 sec. 18: 150 sec.
08 Setting Process Fuser 2120 Fuser roller 8 0~12 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature in ready C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
status (Side thermistor) degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2121 0 The first drop 4 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2121 1 The second drop 4 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2121 2 The third drop 4 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2121 3 The fourth drop 4 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting in ready status -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 26 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2133 0 The first drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2133 1 The second drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2133 2 The third drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2133 3 The fourth drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2134 0 The first drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2134 1 The second drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2134 2 The third drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Ready temperature 2134 3 The fourth drop 10 1~60 M Setting value x 1 min.: from 1 to 60 min. later 4 Y Y Y
mode drop switching time
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2140 Plain paper 8 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Side degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2141 Thick paper 8 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Side degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2142 Thick paper 1 11 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Side degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2143 OHP film 8 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Side degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2190 0 The first drop 1 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2190 1 The second drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2190 2 The third drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2190 3 The fourth drop 3 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2191 0 The first drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 27 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2191 1 The second drop 3 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2191 2 The third drop 4 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2191 3 The fourth drop 5 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2192 Thick paper 2 11 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Side degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2194 Envelope 13 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Center degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Fuser roller 2195 Envelope 11 0~14 M 0: 140 degrees C 1: 145 degrees C 2: 150 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature during C 3: 155 degrees C 4: 160 degrees C 5: 165
printing (Side degrees C 6: 170 degrees C 7: 175 degrees C 8:
thermistor) 180 degrees C 9: 185 degrees C 10: 190 degrees
C 11: 195 degrees C 12: 200 degrees C 13: 205
degrees C 14: 210 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2198 0 The first drop 20 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds later: from 0 to 1000 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting seconds
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2198 1 The second drop 30 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds later: from 0 to 1000 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting seconds
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2198 2 The third drop 40 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds later: from 0 to 1000 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting seconds
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2198 3 The fourth drop 75 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2199 0 The first drop 4 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds later: from 0 to 1000 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting seconds
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2199 1 The second drop 30 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds later: from 0 to 1000 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting seconds
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2199 2 The third drop 40 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds later: from 0 to 1000 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting seconds
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2199 3 The fourth drop 75 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2200 0 The first drop 1 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2200 1 The second drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 28 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2200 2 The third drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2200 3 The fourth drop 3 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Center thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2201 0 The first drop 2 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2201 1 The second drop 3 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2201 2 The third drop 4 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop Thick paper 2201 3 The fourth drop 5 0~10 M Setting value x -5 degrees C: from 0 degrees C to 4 Y Y Y
mode setting during printing -50 degrees C
(Side thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Plain paper 2205 0 Center thermistor 8 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit (at ordinary C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
temperature) degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Plain paper 2205 1 Side thermistor 5 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit (at ordinary C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
temperature) degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Plain paper 2206 0 Center thermistor 8 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit (at Low C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
temperature) degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Plain paper 2206 1 Side thermistor 5 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit (at Low C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
temperature) degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control OHP film 2207 0 Center thermistor 7 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control OHP film 2207 1 Side thermistor 5 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Thick paper 2208 0 Center thermistor 8 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Thick paper 2208 1 Side thermistor 6 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Thick paper 1 2209 0 Center thermistor 11 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 29 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Thick paper 1 2209 1 Side thermistor 9 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Thick paper 2 2210 0 Center thermistor 11 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Thick paper 2 2210 1 Side thermistor 9 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Envelope 2211 0 Center thermistor 11 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature control Envelope 2211 1 Side thermistor 9 0~12 M 0: 130 degrees C 1: 135 degrees C 2: 140 degrees 4 Y Y Y
mode lower limit C 3: 145 degrees C 4: 150 degrees C 5: 155
degrees C 6: 160 degrees C 7: 165 degrees C 8:
170 degrees C 9: 175 degrees C 10: 180 degrees
C 11: 185 degrees C 12: 120 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2212 0 The first drop 20 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2212 1 The second drop 30 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2212 2 The third drop 40 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2212 3 The fourth drop 75 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Center
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2213 0 The first drop 4 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2213 1 The second drop 30 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2213 2 The third drop 40 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Temperature drop 2213 3 The fourth drop 75 0~200 M Setting value x 5 seconds: from 0 to 1000 seconds 4 Y Y Y
mode switching time setting later
during printing (Side
thermistor)
08 Setting Process Fuser Energy Saving Mode Fuser roller 2250 Side thermistor 0 0~13 M 0: OFF 1: 40 degrees C 2: 50 degrees C 3: 60 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature degrees C 4: 70 degrees C 5: 80 degrees C 6: 90
degrees C 7: 100 degrees C 8: 110 degrees C 9:
120 degrees C 10: 130 degrees C 11: 140 degrees
C 12: 150 degrees C 13: 160 degrees C
08 Setting Process Fuser 2282 Pre-running time for 12 0~15 M 0: Invalid 1: 1sec 2: 2sec 3: 3sec 4 : 4sec 5: 5sec 1 Y Y Y
mode first printing (Envelope) 6: 6sec 7: 7sec 8: 8sec 9: 9sec 10: 10sec 11:
12sec 12: 14sec 13: 16sec 14: 18sec 15: 20sec

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 30 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process 2827 Developer bias AC 1 0~2 M 0: ON 1: ON-OFF 2: OFF 1 Y Y Y
mode control ON/OFF
08 Setting Process 2835 Switching of recycled 0 0~1 M 0: Switched 1: Not switched 1 Y Y Y
mode toner saving control
08 Setting Process 2837 Correction by 0 0~3 M Sets the correction by temperature/humidity. 1 Y Y Y
mode temperature/humidity 0: All valid
1: All invalid
2: Valid only in auto-toner sensor
3: All valid except separation
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias PCL 2920 0 Print 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2920 1 Print 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Toner execution value.)
saving mode)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2920 2 Copy 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2920 3 Copy 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Text) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2920 4 Copy 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Photo) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias GDI 2920 5 Print 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2920 6 FAX 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 - - Y
mode Hi1correction execution value.)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias PCL 2921 0 Print 108 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 - - Y
mode Hi1correction (Normal / execution value.)
OHP film)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2921 1 Print 108 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Toner execution value.)
saving mode / OHP
film)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2921 2 Copy 108 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Normal / execution value.)
OHP film)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2921 3 Copy 108 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Text / execution value.)
OHP film)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias 2921 4 Copy 108 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Photo / execution value.)
OHP film)
08 Setting Process Developer Developer bias GDI 2921 5 Print 108 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode Hi1correction (Normal / execution value.)
OHP film)
08 Setting Process Developer 2922 Developer bias 123 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 1 Y Y Y
mode Hi2correction execution value.)
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias PCL 2926 0 Print 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias 2926 1 Print 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction (Normal / execution value.)
Toner saving mode)
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias 2926 2 Copy 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias 2926 3 Copy 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction (Text) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias 2926 4 Copy 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction (Photo) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias GDI 2926 5 Print 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction (Normal) execution value.)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 31 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias 2926 6 FAX 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 - - Y
mode correction (FAX) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Charger Main charger bias 2927 1 Print 98 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction (Toner execution value.)
saving mode / OHP
film)
08 Setting Process Transfer 2928 0 Transfer transformer 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode DC correction (H) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Transfer 2928 1 Transfer transformer 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode DC correction (C) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Transfer 2928 2 Transfer transformer 110 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode DC correction (L) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Transfer 2929 0 Transfer correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
Thick paper
08 Setting Process Transfer 2929 1 Transfer correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
Thick paper
08 Setting Process Transfer 2929 2 Transfer correction 122 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
Thick paper
08 Setting Process Transfer 2930 0 Transfer correction 134 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
Thick paper 1
08 Setting Process Transfer 2930 1 Transfer correction 134 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
Thick paper 1
08 Setting Process Transfer 2930 2 Transfer correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
Thick paper 1
08 Setting Process Transfer 2931 0 Transfer correction 138 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
Duplex printing Corrects the print density by amending the transfer
DC output value adjusted by 05-2052 (Transfer
transformer DC output adjustment (Center)) for the
leading edge, center and trailing edge of the
paper.
Use the above default value, unless otherwise
required.
08 Setting Process Transfer 2931 1 Transfer correction 126 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
Duplex printing Corrects the print density by amending the transfer
DC output value adjusted by 05-2052 (Transfer
transformer DC output adjustment (Center)) for the
leading edge, center and trailing edge of the
paper.
Use the above default value, unless otherwise
required.
08 Setting Process Transfer 2931 2 Transfer correction 126 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
Duplex printing Corrects the print density by amending the transfer
DC output value adjusted by 05-2052 (Transfer
transformer DC output adjustment (Center)) for the
leading edge, center and trailing edge of the
paper.
Use the above default value, unless otherwise
required.
08 Setting Process Transfer 2932 0 Transfer correction 116 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
OHP film
08 Setting Process Transfer 2932 1 Transfer correction 112 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
OHP film

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 32 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Transfer 2932 2 Transfer correction 118 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
OHP film
08 Setting Process Transfer 2933 0 Transfer correction 134 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
Envelope
08 Setting Process Transfer 2933 1 Transfer correction 134 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
Envelope
08 Setting Process Transfer 2933 2 Transfer correction 132 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
Envelope
08 Setting Process Separation 2934 0 Separation correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Separation 2934 1 Separation correction 117 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Separation 2934 2 Separation correction 106 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Separation 2935 0 Separation correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
Duplex printing
08 Setting Process Separation 2935 1 Separation correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
Duplex printing
08 Setting Process Separation 2935 2 Separation correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
Duplex printing
08 Setting Process Separation 2936 0 Separation correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
OHP film
08 Setting Process Separation 2936 1 Separation correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
OHP film
08 Setting Process Separation 2936 2 Separation correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
OHP film
08 Setting Process Laser Print PCL 2940 0 Laser power correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Laser Print 2940 1 Laser power correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode (Toner saving mode) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Laser Copy 2940 2 Laser power correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Laser Copy 2940 3 Laser power correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode (Text) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Laser Copy 2940 4 Laser power correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode (Photo) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Laser Print GDI 2940 5 Laser power correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode (Normal) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Laser FAX 2940 6 Laser power correction 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 - - Y
mode (FAX) execution value.)
08 Setting Process Separation 2961 0 Transfer correction 134 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (H) execution value.)
Thick paper 2
08 Setting Process Separation 2961 1 Transfer correction 134 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (C) execution value.)
Thick paper 2
08 Setting Process Separation 2961 2 Transfer correction 122 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode value (L) execution value.)
Thick paper 2

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 33 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Transfer 2963 0 Transfer leading edge 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction value execution value.)
(H)
Thin paper
08 Setting Process Transfer 2963 1 Transfer center output 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode correction value (C) execution value.)
Thin paper
08 Setting Process Transfer 2963 2 Transfer trailing edge 128 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction value execution value.)
(L)
Thin paper
08 Setting Process Separation ALL 2966 0 Separation leading 135 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode edge output correction execution value.)
value (H)
Thin paper
08 Setting Process Separation ALL 2966 1 Separation center 135 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction value execution value.)
(C)
Thin paper
08 Setting Process Separation ALL 2966 2 Separation trailing 135 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode edge output correction execution value.)
value (L)
Thin paper
08 Setting Process Developer 2978 Switching of 0 0~8 M 0: No correction 1 Y Y Y
mode development contrast 1: Correction amount - small (-30V), correction
life correction length - short (0 to 0.7k sheets)
2: Correction amount - medium (-60V), correction
length - short (0 to 5k sheets)
3: Correction amount - large (-90V), correction
length - middle (0 to 11k sheets)
4: Correction amount - small (-30V), correction
length - middle (0 to 5k sheets)
5: Correction amount - medium (-60V), correction
length - long (0 to 12k sheets)
6: Correction amount - large (-90V), correction
length - long (0 to 13k sheets)
7: Correction amount - medium (-60V), correction
length - middle (0 to 10k sheets)
8: Correction amount - large (-85V), correction
length - short (0 to 7k sheets)
08 Setting Process Transfer 2987 Transfer bias output 94 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 1 Y Y Y
mode correction between execution value.)
sheets of paper
08 Setting Scanner 3080 Select original size 0 Refer to SYS 0: Two-step detection method by the time control 1 - - Y
mode detection method contents 3: One-step detection method
08 Setting Scanner 3127 Light intensity control 0 0~6 SYS Displays the status of the light intensity adjustment 1 Y Y Y
mode status (Black) control results in black.
0 : Normal end
1 : R1 level abnormality
2 : G1 level abnormality
3 : B1 level abnormality
4 : R2 level abnormality
5 : G2 level abnormality
6 : B2 level abnormality
08 Setting Scanner 3128 Light intensity control 0 0~6 SYS Displays the status of the light intensity adjustment 1 Y Y Y
mode status (Color) control results in color.
0 : Normal end
1 : R1 level abnormality
2 : G1 level abnormality
3 : B1 level abnormality
4 : R2 level abnormality
5 : G2 level abnormality
6 : B2 level abnormality

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 34 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Scanner 3130 Peak detection black 0 0~255 SYS Displays the status when the error occurred when 1 Y Y Y
mode level control status adjusting the black level at the time of peak
detection.
bit0 = 1: CH1 black level abnormality
bit1 = 1: CH2 black level abnormality
bit2 = 1: CH3 black level abnormality
bit3 = 1: CH4 black level abnormality
bit4 = 1: CH5 black level abnormality
bit5 = 1: CH6 black level abnormality
bit6 = 1: Time over
08 Setting Scanner 3131 Peak detection white 0 0~255 SYS Displays the status when the error occurred when 1 Y Y Y
mode level control status adjusting the white level of detection at peak of
(Black) black mode.
bit0 = 1: CH1 white level abnormality
bit1 = 1: CH2 white level abnormality
bit2 = 1: CH3 white level abnormality
bit3 = 1: CH4 white level abnormality
bit4 = 1: CH5 white level abnormality
bit5 = 1: CH6 white level abnormality
bit6 = 1: Time over
08 Setting Scanner 3132 Peak detection white 0 0~255 SYS Displays the status when the error occurred when 1 Y Y Y
mode level control status adjusting the white level of detection at peak of
(Color) color mode.
bit0 = 1: CH1 white level abnormality
bit1 = 1: CH2 white level abnormality
bit2 = 1: CH3 white level abnormality
bit3 = 1: CH4 white level abnormality
bit4 = 1: CH5 white level abnormality
bit5 = 1: CH6 white level abnormality
bit6 = 1: Time over
08 Setting System General 3612 Date of unpacking - - SYS Year/month/date/day/hour/minute/second 11 Y Y Y
mode Example: 03 07 0 13 13 27 48
“Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday
through
Saturday from “1” to “6”.
08 Setting System General 3615 List print USB storage 0 0~1 SYS 0: Enable (USB storage available) 1 Y Y Y
mode setting 1: Disable (USB storage not available)
08 Setting System General 3619 Clearing of service - - SYS Initializes the service history list file. 3 Y Y Y
mode history list file
08 Setting System 3667 Addition of the QR Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 Y Y Y
mode code to the total contents 1: Enabled
counter list <Default value>
JPD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting System Self- 3673 In one-go setting from a - - SYS When processing is carried out, a setting file is 16 Y Y Y
mode diagnostic USB storage device read from a USB storage device and the setting
codes in values of the self-diagnostic codes listed in the
one-go setting file are written sequentially.
setting
08 Setting System General 3754 Switching DPWS 1 1~2 NIC DPWS Printer function is switched. 12 - - Y
mode Printer setting 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3767 Switching IPv6 setting 2 1~2 NIC IPv6 function is switched. 12 - Y Y
mode 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3768 IPv6 Address 2 1~3 NIC IP (IPv6) Address Acquisition setting is switched. 12 - Y Y
mode Acquisition 1: Manual
2: Stateless
3: Stateful
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3770 IPv6 Address - - - Displays IPv6 address. Maximum 40 characters 12 - Y Y
mode (byte).
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3771 Prefix display setting - - - Sets the length of the displayed prefix. Maximum 3 12 - Y Y
mode characters (byte).
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3772 Default Gateway - - - Sets the default gateway for IPv6 address. 12 - Y Y
mode setting Maximum 40 characters (byte).

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 35 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Network 3774 DHCP Options Enable/ 2 1~2 NIC DHCPv6 Option is switched when the Manual is 12 - Y Y
mode Disable for Manual set.
1: Enabled 2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3781 Primary DNS Server - - - Registration of Primary DNS Server Address. 12 - Y Y
mode Address Registration Maximum 40 characters (byte).
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3782 Secondary DNS - - - Registration of Secondary DNS Server Address. 12 - Y Y
mode Server Address Maximum 40 characters (byte).
Registration
08 Setting System Network 3793 Switching LLTD setting 1 1~2 NIC LLTD function is switched. 12 - Y Y
mode 1: Enabled 2: Disabled
08 Setting System General USB media direct 3802 Paper size Refer to 0~13 SYS 0: LD 1: LG 2: LT 3: COMPUTER 4: ST 5: A3 6: A4 1 Y Y Y
mode printing contents 7: A5 9: B4 10: B5 11: FOLIO 12: 13"LG 13:
8.5"x8.5"
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Others: 6
08 Setting System General USB media direct 3803 Disabled/enabled 1 0~1 SYS Sets the USB media direct printing function. 1 Y Y Y
mode printing 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3820 Function setting 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 - Y Y
mode CloudConn 1: Enabled
ect
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3822 Function setting of 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 - Y Y
mode CloudConn Proxy Server 1: Enabled
ect
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3823 IP Address setting of Refer to Refer to SYS <Default value> 11 - Y Y
mode CloudConn Proxy Server contents contents 0.0.0.0
ect <Acceptable value>
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3824 Port number setting of 80 1~65535 SYS 1 - Y Y
mode CloudConn Proxy Server
ect
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3825 Account ID setting of - Refer to SYS Maximum 30 characters. 11 - Y Y
mode CloudConn Proxy Server contents
ect
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3826 Account password - Refer to SYS Maximum 30 characters. 11 - Y Y
mode CloudConn setting of Proxy Server contents
ect
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3827 Connection server at Refer to Refer to SYS Sets the URL of the server to be connected at 11 - Y Y
mode CloudConn ECC starting contents contents ECC starting.
ect Maximum 259 characters (ASCII)
<Default value>
AUD: https://gsidevice-ap.toshiba-
solutions.com:443
CND: https://eccdevice.toshiba-tec.com.cn:443
Others: Blank
* When no value is set, the standard server of
ECC will be connected.
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3828 Limitation in connection Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not to permit the connection of an 1 - Y Y
mode CloudConn to another ECC server contents ECC server set in 08-3827 or the connection of a
ect server other than the standard one.
0: Connection not permitted
1: Connection permitted
<Default value>
AUD/CND: 0
Others: 1
* When the setting value is “0” (Connection not
permitted), the server in the URL other than that
set in 08-3827 is not connected.
* When you want to change the setting value from
“1” to “0”, be sure to do so before registering the
MFP in ECC.
08 Setting System Fax 3847 Machine name/PC 1 0~2 SYS FAX mistransmission prevention function is 1 - - Y
mode name listed in the body switched. When “0 (OFF)” is set, fax transmission
of the event notification can be done manually.
0: OFF 1: Confirm 2: Input

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 36 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Fax 3848 Prohibition of selection 0 0~1 SYS Availability of destination selection from the 1 - - Y
mode of an address from the Telephone Book is switched as one of FAX
telephone book mistransmission prevention functions when setting
FAX destinations.
0: OFF 1: ON
08 Setting System Fax 3849 Prohibition of direct 0 0~1 SYS Availability of direct entry is switched as one of 1 - - Y
mode entry of a destination FAX mistransmission prevention functions when
setting FAX destinations.
0: OFF 1: ON
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3921 SSID Refer to Refer to SYS Sets SSID for the wireless LAN AP mode. 11 - - Y
mode LAN contents contents Maximum 32 characters.
<Default value>
NetBIOS name
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3922 Passphrase Refer to Refer to SYS Sets the passphrase for the wireless LAN AP 11 - - Y
mode LAN contents contents mode.
Maximum 64 characters.
<Default value>
Wired MAC address
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3923 DHCP Server setting 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether to enable or disable the DHCP 12 - - Y
mode LAN server function for the wireless LAN AP mode.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3924 Address release period 3 0~5 SYS Sets the address release period of the DHCP 12 - - Y
mode LAN server for the wireless LAN AP mode.
0: 1 hour
1: 4 hours
2: 12 hours
3: 1 day
4: 4 days
5: 8 days
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3925 Connection setting 1 1~2 SYS Sets the connection method for the wireless LAN 12 - - Y
mode LAN AP mode.
1: SSID/SECURITY
2: WPS
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3928 WPS 0 0~2 SYS Sets the WPS connection method for the wireless 12 - - Y
mode LAN LAN AP mode.
0: PBC
1: PIN-DISPLAY
2: PIN-INPUT
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3930 0 Channel 1 1~11 SYS Sets the channel for the wireless LAN AP mode. 4 - - Y
mode LAN 1 (1 channel) to 11 (11 channels)
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3930 1 IP Address Refer to Refer to SYS Sets the IP address for the wireless LAN AP 4 - - Y
mode LAN contents contents mode.
<Default value>
192.168.100.100
<Acceptable value>
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
08 Setting System Wireless AP mode 3930 2 Subnet mask Refer to Refer to SYS Sets the subnet mask for the wireless LAN AP 4 - - Y
mode LAN contents contents mode.
<Default value>
255.255.255.0
<Acceptable value>
0.0.0.0~255.255.255.255
08 Setting System e-BRIDGE 3931 0 Certificate file 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 4 - Y Y
mode CloudConn confirmation setting 1: Enabled
ect
08 Setting System Fax 3951 Restriction on the use 0 0~1 SYS The following is restricted. 1 - - Y
mode of the Telephone book 0: OFF
1: Telephone Book
2: E-Mail
3: Both Telephone Book and E-Mail
08 Setting System Fax 3952 When FAX data is 0 0~1 SYS 0: Not blink 1 - - Y
mode stored in memory [FAX] 1: Blink
button blink or not

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 37 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System General 3954 Automatic Transition to 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 Y Y Y
mode Sleep Mode after 1: Enabled
Printing
08 Setting System ALL 3955 LCD Contrast 3 0~6 SYS 0: -3 1 Y Y Y
mode 1: -2
2: -1
3: 0
4: +1
5: +2
6: +3
08 Setting System ALL 3956 Short Cut (Left button) Refer to 0~14 SYS 0: Exposure 1 Y Y Y
mode contents 1: Original mode
2: Drawer
3: Zoom
4: Finishing
5: 2-sided
6: 2IN1/4IN1
7: ID Card
8: Edge erase
9: Dual Page
10: Image shift
11: Annotation
12: Omit Blank Page
13: Image Direction
14: Mixed-Size Original
<Default value>
TWD/CND: 5, Others: 1
08 Setting System ALL 3957 Short Cut (Right button) Refer to 0~14 SYS 0: Exposure 1 Y Y Y
mode contents 1: Original mode
2: Drawer
3: Zoom
4: Finishing
5: 2-sided
6: 2IN1/4IN1
7: ID Card
8: Edge erase
9: Dual Page
10: Image shift
11: Annotation
12: Omit Blank Page
13: Image Direction
14: Mixed-Size Original
<Default value>
ASD/TWD/CND: 7, Others: 0
08 Setting System ALL 3958 2IN1/4IN1 Original size Refer to 0~14 SYS 0: A3 1 Y Y Y
mode (default value) contents 1: A4
2: A5
3: B4
4: B5
5: FOLIO
6: 8K
7: 16K
8: LD
9: LG
10: LT
11: COMP
12: 13"LG
13: ST
14: 8.5SQ
<Default value>
NAD: 10, Others: 1
08 Setting System ALL 3960 2IN1/4IN1 Original 0 0~1 SYS 0: Portrait 1 Y Y Y
mode orientation (default 1: Landscape
value)
08 Setting System ALL 3961 Page layout (2 IN 1) Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: Left to Right 1 Y Y Y
mode contents 1: Right to Left
<Default value>
JPD: 1, Others: 0

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 38 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System ALL 3962 Page layout (4 IN 1) Refer to 0~3 SYS 0: Left to Right 1 Y Y Y
mode contents 1: Left to Right by Column
2: Right to Left
3: Right to Left by Column
<Default value>
JPD: 2, Others: 0
08 Setting System General 3963 Access management 0 0~1 SYS When access management (08-3963) is set to 1 Y Y Y
mode ON(1), the ACCESS CODE menu on the [USER
FUNCTIONS] menu appears ([USER
FUNCTIONS] button -> GENERAL -> ACCESS
CODE).
If access management (08-3963) is set to ON(1),
be sure to use the ACCESS CODE menu to set
the ACCESS CODE and MASTER CODE.
If the ACCESS CODE and MASTER CODE are
unknown, set access management (08-3963) to
OFF(0), when it is set to ON(1) again, the
ACCESS CODE and MASTER CODE are cleared.
After clearing the codes, be sure to set the
ACCESS CODE and MASTER CODE.
- ACCESS CODE: Department code, only one can
be set
- MASTER CODE: Admin. password
- The MASTER CODE can be entered in the
ACCESS CODE menu.

0: OFF 1: ON
08 Setting System Image 3965 Magazine sort (original Refer to 0~14 SYS 0: A3 1 Y Y -
mode size) contents 1: A4
2: A5
3: B4
4: B5
5: FOLIO
6: 8K
7: 16K
8: LD
9: LG
10: LT
11: COMP
12: 13"LG
13: ST
14: 8.5SQ
<Default value>
NAD: 10, Others: 1
08 Setting System General 3966 Magazine sort (2 sides) 0 0~1 SYS 0: 1 side -> 2 sides 1 Y Y Y
mode default 1: 2 sides -> 1 side
08 Setting System General 3967 Default back ground 5 0~9 SYS 1: -4 2: -3 3: -2 4: -1 5: 0 6: +1 7: +2 8: +3 9: +4 1 Y Y Y
mode adjustment
08 Setting System Wireless Infrastructure 3968 Connection setting 1 1~2 SYS Sets the connection method for the wireless LAN 1 - - Y
mode LAN INFRASTRUCTURE mode.
1: SSID/SECURITY
2: WPS
08 Setting System Wireless Infrastructure 3969 WPS 1 1~2 SYS Sets the WPS connection method for the wireless 1 - - Y
mode LAN LAN INFRASTRUCTURE mode.
1: PBC
2: PIN
08 Setting System Wireless Infrastructure 3970 WPS PIN - Refer to SYS Sets the PIN code of WPS for the wireless LAN 11 - - Y
mode LAN contents INFRASTRUCTURE mode.
Maximum 32 characters.
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3971 Availability of DNS 1 1~2 SYS 1: Enable 1 - Y Y
mode (IPv6) 2: Disable
08 Setting System Network IPv6 3972 MIB function (IPv6) 1 1~2 SYS 1: Enable 1 - Y Y
mode 2: Disable

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 39 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System General 3974 Time setting for 15 0~255 SYS Sets the time to distinguish factors, such as SNMP 1 - Y Y
mode recovering from the and the [ENERGY SAVER] button, for recovering
sleep mode from the sleep mode.
When an unintended sleep mode is recovered by
SNMP communication, the time for judging the
communication is set. The longer the time is set,
the longer the recovering time becomes, even by a
factor other than SNMP.
Unit: Second
08 Setting System 3975 0 Time setting to start 0 0~30 SYS Sets the time to start printing from the printer/fax 4 Y Y Y
mode printing from the after button operations or cover opening/closing is
printer/Fax done or immediately after the power is turned ON.
Unit: seconds
08 Setting System 3975 1 Time setting to start 0 0~30 SYS Sets the time to start scanning after button 4 Y Y Y
mode scanning operations or cover opening/closing is done or
immediately after the power is turned ON.
Unit: seconds
08 Setting System Paper 3976 Default setting of the Refer to 0~20 - 0: A3 12 Y Y Y
mode feeding paper size for the contents 1: A4
bypass tray 2: A4-R
3: B4
4: B5
5: B5-R
6: A5-R
7: FOLIO
8: 8K
9: 16K
10: 16K-R
11: LD
12: LG
13: LT
14: LT-R
15: COMP
16: 13"LG
17: ST-R
18: 8.5SQ
19: CARD
20: Not use
<Default value>
NAD: 11
Other: 0
08 Setting System Paper 3977 Keeping the current Refer to 0~1 - Sets whether or not to keep the paper size set for 12 Y Y Y
mode feeding paper size for the contents the bypass feed even after the paper is removed
bypass tray or the power is turned OFF. If this code is enabled,
08-3976 will be disabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
<Default value>
CND: 1
Other: 0
08 Setting System ID card 3981 Print position setting Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the print position of output images for ID card 1 Y Y Y
mode copy contents copying.

0: Left-Top
1: Center-Center
2: Center-Top (Not Use)
3: Left-Center (Not Use)

CND: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting System ID card 3982 Scan range setting Refer to 0~3 SYS Sets the scan range for ID card copying. 1 Y Y Y
mode copy contents
0: 106mm * 74mm
1: 120mm * 90mm
2: 140mm * 100mm
3: 200mm * 140mm

TWD: 1
CND: 3
Others: 0

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 40 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Fax TX/RX mode setting 3983 Easy manual TX/RX Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the TX/RX mode of the fax function. 1 - - Y
Mode mode contents
0: EASY MODE
1: ADVANCED MODE

<Default value>
CND: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting System General Setting for recovering 3985 Enabled/disabled Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not to recover the equipment 1 Y Y Y
Mode from the Sleep mode contents which is in the Sleep mode when USB a
connection is performed.
0: Recovering from the Sleep mode - Disabled
1: Recovering from the Sleep mode - Enabled
If “1” (Enabled) is selected, the equipment which is
in the Sleep mode will be recovered when a USB
connection is performed.
<Default value>
2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM: 1
2329A/2829A: 0
08 Setting System Paper Setting for continuous For copying 3989 0 Enabled/disabled 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not to perform continuous 4 Y Y Y
Mode feeding scanning of 150 sheets scanning of 150 sheets when the RADF is used
when the RADF is used (for copying).
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
If “0” (Enabled) is selected, the setting is applied
when the copying function is performed.
08 Setting System Paper Setting for continuous For scanning 3989 1 Enabled/disabled 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not to perform continuous 4 Y Y Y
Mode feeding scanning of 150 sheets scanning of 150 sheets when the RADF is used
when the RADF is used (for scanning).
0: Enabled
1: Disabled
If “0” (Enabled) is selected, the setting is applied
when the scanning function is performed.
08 Setting System 3990 Print performance Refer to 0~2 SYS Sets the print performance at custom print. 1 Y Y Y
Mode setting at custom print contents 0: Printing is interrupted when the paper size is
changed. (Default)
1: Printing is not interrupted when the paper size is
Custom for both the paper set on the equipment
and the setting in a PC.
2: Printing is not interrupted regardless of the
paper size set in a PC.
08 Setting System 3992 Status setting after the 0 0~1 SYS Sets the status (Sleep mode or recover from the 1 - Y Y
Mode period set for Sleep mode) into which the equipment enters after
recovering from the the period set in 08-3974 (time setting for
Sleep mode has recovering from the Sleep mode) has passed.
passed 0: Sleep
1: Startup (recovering from the Sleep mode)
08 Setting System Fax 3993 Transmission setting of 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not to send a notification mail 1 - - Y
Mode a fax job notification when fax reception forwarding fails.
mail 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
When “1” (Enabled) is selected, a notification mail
will be sent if fax reception forwarding has failed.
08 Setting System 3994 Switch the CSV / XML 1 0~1 SYS Setting for switching the format of the attached file 1 - - Y
Mode of the Notification of Counter Notification.
0: XML
1: CSV
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled Service Notification 3995 Notification setting 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not to send a service notification 1 - - Y
mode e service when replacing the when a new toner is detected.
toner 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Maintenanc 3996 Stop setting when the 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not to make the MFP stop when 1 Y Y Y
mode e maintenance time is the maintenance time is reached. When “1”
reached (Enabled) is set to this code, a service call will
occur when the maintenance time is reached.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 41 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Maintenanc 3997 Debug log output 0 0~1 SYS Stores a debug log in a USB device. 1 Y Y Y
mode e 0: OFF
1: ON
08 Setting System DF Copy 3998 0 A4-R/Legal switching Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets which size is adopted for the detection when 4 Y Y Y
mode setting contents an A4-R or Legal original is scanned from the DF
during copying.
0: A4-R
1: Legal
<Default value>
NAD: 1, Others: 0
08 Setting System DF Scan 3998 1 A4-R/Legal switching Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets which size is adopted for the detection when 4 Y Y Y
mode setting contents an A4-R or Legal original is scanned from the DF
during scanning.
0: A4-R
1: Legal
<Default value>
NAD: 1, Others: 0
08 Setting Printer Paper 4010 Default setting of paper 0 0~4 SYS 0: A4/LT 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding source 1: Drawer 1 (Upper)
2: Drawer 2 (Lower)
3: PFP Drawer 1 (Upper)
4: PFP Drawer 2 (Lower)
* Except 2329A/2829A, 08-4010 is enabled only
when the RADF is used. The upper drawer is
selected when it is not.
08 Setting Printer Laser 4012 Pre-running rotation of 0 0~2 SYS Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor 1 Y Y Y
mode polygonal motor from the standby rotation to the normal rotation
when the original is set on the RADF or the original
cover is opened.
0: Enabled (RADF / Original cover)
1: Disabled
2: Enabled (RADF only)
08 Setting Printer Laser 4013 Polygonal motor 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not switching the polygonal motor 1 Y Y Y
mode rotational status from the normal rotation to the standby rotation at
switching at the Auto the Auto Clear Mode.
Clear Mode 0: Valid
1: Invalid
08 Setting Printer Laser 4015 Polygonal motor stop 3 0~6 SYS Switches the polygonal motor to the standby 1 Y Y Y
mode period rotation when a certain period of time has passed
from the prerunning.
At this code, the period to switch the status to the
standby rotation is set.

0: 15sec, 1: 20sec, 2: 25sec, 3: 30sec, 4: 35sec, 5:

40sec, 6: 45sec
08 Setting Printer Paper Automatic change of When a drawer is 4016 0 Copy Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets whether the automatic change of paper 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding paper source specified contents source is performed or not if the drawer or bypass
tray is specified as the paper source and the paper
in it runs out when coping.
0: Does not change the paper source
automatically
1: Changes the paper source automatically
<Default value>
CND: 1, Others: 0
08 Setting Printer Paper Automatic change of When a drawer is 4016 1 Print Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets whether the automatic change of paper 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding paper source specified contents source is performed or not if the drawer or bypass
tray is specified as the paper source and the paper
in it runs out when printing.
0: Does not change the paper source
automatically
1: Changes the paper source automatically
<Default value>
CND: 1, Others: 0
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number Upper drawer (1st 4020 0 Plain paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting drawer) the Upper drawer (1st drawer).
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 42 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number Upper drawer (1st 4020 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting drawer) the Upper drawer (1st drawer).
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number Lower drawer (PFU) 4021 0 Plain paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting the lower drawer (2nd drawer: PFU).
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number Lower drawer (PFU) 4021 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting the lower drawer (2nd drawer: PFU).
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number PFP upper drawer 4022 0 Plain paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 - - Y
mode feeding setting the PFP upper drawer.
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number PFP upper drawer 4022 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 - - Y
mode feeding setting the PFP upper drawer.
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number PFP lower drawer 4023 0 Plain paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 - - Y
mode feeding setting the PFP lower drawer.
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number PFP lower drawer 4023 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 - - Y
mode feeding setting the PFP lower drawer.
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number Bypass feed 4024 0 Plain paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting the bypass tray.
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Feeding retry number Bypass feed 4024 1 Other paper 5 0~5 M Sets the number of times feeding retry occurs from 4 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting the bypass tray.
0: 0 times, 1: 1 time, 2: 2 times, 3: 3 times, 4: 4
times, 5: 5 times
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4100 Upper drawer size Refer to 0~255 M A3 (19) 9 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting contents A4 (4)
A4-R (20)
A5-R (21)
B4 (52)
B5 (37)
B5-R (53)
LD (81)
LG (82)
LT (64)
LT-R (80)
FOLIO (85)
COMP (84)
ST-R (83)
13"LG (86)
8.5SQ (87)
8K (144)
16K (129)
16K-R (145)

<Default value>
NAD: 64, MJD: 4, Others: 4, JPD: 4

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 43 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4101 Second drawer size Refer to 0~255 M A3 (19) 9 Y Y Y
mode feeding setting (PFU) contents A4 (4)
A4-R (20)
A5-R (21)
B4 (52)
B5 (37)
B5-R (53)
LD (81)
LG (82)
LT (64)
LT-R (80)
FOLIO (85)
COMP (84)
ST-R (83)
13"LG (86)
8.5SQ (87)
8K (144)
16K (129)
16K-R (145)

<Default value>
NAD: 81, MJD: 19, Others: 19, JPD: 19
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4102 PFP upper drawer size Refer to 0~255 M A3 (19) 9 - - Y
mode feeding setting contents A4 (4)
A4-R (20)
A5-R (21)
B4 (52)
B5 (37)
B5-R (53)
LD (81)
LG (82)
LT (64)
LT-R (80)
FOLIO (85)
COMP (84)
ST-R (83)
13"LG (86)
8.5SQ (87)
8K (144)
16K (129)
16K-R (145)

<Default value>
NAD: 80, MJD: 20, Others: 20, JPD: 20
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4103 PFP lower drawer size Refer to 0~255 M A3 (19) 9 - - Y
mode feeding setting contents A4 (4)
A4-R (20)
A5-R (21)
B4 (52)
B5 (37)
B5-R (53)
LD (81)
LG (82)
LT (64)
LT-R (80)
FOLIO (85)
COMP (84)
ST-R (83)
13"LG (86)
8.5SQ (87)
8K (144)
16K (129)
16K-R (145)

<Default value>
NAD: 82, MJD: 4, Others: 4, JPD: 52
08 Setting Printer Paper 4105 PFP installation 0 0~3 M 0: Automatic 1 - - Y
mode feeding 1: PFP single-drawer type installed
2: PFP dual-drawer type installed
3: Not installed
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4106 Paper size (A3-R) 420/297 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 420 x 297

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 44 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4107 Paper size (A4-R) 297/210 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 297 x 210
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4108 Paper size (A5-R) 210/148 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 210 x 148
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4109 Paper size (B4-R) 364/257 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 364 x 257
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4110 Paper size (B5-R) 257/182 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 257 x 182
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4111 Paper size (LT-R) 279/216 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 279 x 216
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4112 Paper size (LD) 432/279 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 432 x 279
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4113 Paper size (LG) 356/216 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 356 x 216
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4114 Paper size (ST-R) 216/140 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 216 x 140
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4115 Paper size 356/257 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding (COMPUTER) feeding/ 140~297 356 x 257
widthwise
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4116 Paper size (FOLIO) 330/210 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 330 x 210
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4117 Paper size (13" LG) 330/216 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 330 x 216
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4118 Paper size (8.5"x8.5") 216/216 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 216 x 216
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4120 Paper size (K8-R) 390/270 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 390 x 270
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4121 Paper size (K16-R) 270/195 182~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 140~297 270 x 195
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4123 Paper size (A6-R) 148/105 148~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 105~297 148 x 105
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4124 Paper size (#10-R) 241/105 148~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 105~297 241 x 105
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4127 Paper size (DL-R) 220/110 148~432 / M Value of feeding / widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding feeding/widthwise 105~297 220 x 110
08 Setting Printer Paper 4131 Feeding retry setting 0 0~1 M 0: ON 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding 1: OFF
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4143 Paper size (Envelope: 191/98 148~432/ M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding Monarch-R) feeding/ 98~297
widthwise direction
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4144 Paper size (Envelope: 235/ 148~432/ M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding CHO-3-R) feeding/ 120 105~297
widthwise direction
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4145 Paper size (Envelope: 235/ 148~432/ M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding YOU-4-R) feeding/ 105 105~297
widthwise direction
08 Setting Printer Paper Paper size setting 4206 Paper size (Japanese- 148/ 148~432/ M Value of feeding/widthwise direction 10 Y Y Y
mode feeding Postcard) feeding/ 100 105~297
widthwise
08 Setting Printer Paper 4450 Switching of paper 0 0~1 M Switches pushing process by the transport roller 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding pushing amount/lower when paper loaded from the lower drawer starts to
drawer be transported from the registration section.
0: The paper is pushed until its trailing edge
reaches the position where the 2nd transport
sensor is turned OFF.
1: If the length of the paper is more than 297 mm,
it is pushed by the transport roller for a specified
time.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 45 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Printer Feeding 4542 Switching for incorrect 0 0~1 M 0: Enabled 1 Y Y Y
mode system / size jam detection 1: Disabled
Paper
transport
08 Setting Printer Process Conditions at the 4570 0 Retention of the fuser 0 0~255 M Output value of thermistor 4 Y Y Y
mode occurrence of fuser unit error status
related error ( Fuser roller center
temperature)
08 Setting Printer Process Conditions at the 4570 1 Retention of the fuser 0 0~255 M Output value of thermistor 4 Y Y Y
mode occurrence of fuser unit error status
related error ( Fuser roller side
temperature)
08 Setting Printer Process Conditions at the 4570 2 Retention of the fuser 0 0~255 M Output value of thermistor 4 Y Y Y
mode occurrence of fuser unit error status
related error (Press roller center
temperature)
08 Setting Printer Process Conditions at the 4570 5 Retention of the fuser 0 0~255 M 1-3: Fusing error when warm-up-40-degrees C 4 Y Y Y
mode occurrence of fuser unit error status detected
related error (Error counter) 4-10: Fusing error when warm-up-100-degrees C
detected
11-25: Fusing error when ready from warm-up
50-55: Fusing error at ready
100-111: Fusing error at printing
150-153: Fusing error in the prewarming/JAM/
cover open/adjustment mode
08 Setting Printer Paper 4675 Paper output setting at 2 0~2 M When “0” is set for 08-4542, the equipment will 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding paper jamming caused operate as below.
by an incorrect paper
size Setting value: 0 or 1
An E06* error (paper jams) will occur when the
setting of the paper size differs from the actual
one.

Setting value: 2 (default)

- When printing a received fax:
An E06* error (paper jams) will occur when the
setting of the paper size differs from the actual
one.
- When printing other than a received fax:
An E06* error (paper jams) will occur when the
setting of the paper size differs from the actual
one. After the jam has been released, if printing is
restarted without the paper size being changed or
the paper is being altered to one which matches
the corresponding setting, one sheet of paper will
exit and a warning message will appear.
08 Setting Printer Paper 4691 Switching of the display 1 0~1 M 0: Disabled 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding of jam location in the 1: Enabled
drawer when paper
feed jam occurs
08 Setting Printer Feeding Copy 4714 Switching of the 100 0~999 M 0: No restrictions 1 Y Y Y
mode system / restriction number of 1 to 999: Restriction number of the ejection sheets
Paper the ejection sheets
transport
08 Setting Printer Feeding Print GDI 4715 Switching of the 0 0~999 M 0: No restrictions 1 Y Y -
mode system / restriction number of 1 to 999: Restriction number of the ejection sheets
Paper the ejection sheets
transport
08 Setting Printer Feeding Print 4716 Switching of the 0 0~999 M 0: No restrictions 1 - - Y
mode system / restriction number of 1 to 999: Restriction number of the ejection sheets
Paper the ejection sheets
transport
08 Setting Printer Feeding FAX 4717 Switching of the 0 0~999 M 0: No restrictions 1 - - Y
mode system / restriction number of 1 to 999: Restriction number of the ejection sheets
Paper the ejection sheets
transport

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 46 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Process 5001 0 Print job end cleaning 0 0~9 M In the cleaning operation of the transfer roller at 4 Y Y Y
mode bias polarity switching the end of printing, the cleaning bias, in which the
frequency (Maximum polarity is switched from positive to negative, is
width) output so that the toner adhering to the transfer
roller is returned to the photoconductive drum.
This code is used to set the cleaning bias
switching frequency. Perform adjustment when
there is any stain on the back side of the printed
paper (leading edge) caused by the transfer roller.
Note that the drum driving time will increase if the
setting value of the cleaning bias switching
frequency is too large. The setting code differs
depending on the operation status of the
equipment when there is any stain on the back
side of the printed paper. Select the code from 08-
5001 to 08-5003 according to the operation status.
Set this code when there is any stain on the back
side of the printed paper (leading edge) caused by
the transfer roller in normal printing.

0: 1 time 1: 2 times 2: 3 times 3: 4 times 4: 5 times

5: 6 times 6: 7 times 7: 8 times 8: 9 times 9: 10
times
08 Setting Process Process 5001 1 Print job end cleaning 3 0~9 M Set this code when there is any stain on the back 4 Y Y Y
mode bias polarity switching side
frequency of the printed paper (leading edge) caused by the
(Bypass/non-standard) transfer roller in printing non-standard paper from
the bypass tray.

0: 1 time 1: 2 times 2: 3 times 3: 4 times 4: 5 times

5: 6 times 6: 7 times 7: 8 times 8: 9 times 9: 10
times
08 Setting Process Process 5001 2 Print job end cleaning 3 0~9 M Set this code when there is any stain on the back 4 Y Y Y
mode bias polarity switching side of the printed paper (leading edge) caused by
frequency the transfer roller in printing maximum size paper
(Mass printing of small after printing a large amount of small size paper (1
size paper) to 9).

0: 1 time 1: 2 times 2: 3 times 3: 4 times 4: 5 times

5: 6 times 6: 7 times 7: 8 times 8: 9 times 9: 10
times
08 Setting Process Process 5002 Job end cleaning bias 3 0~9 M Set this code when there is any stain on the back 1 Y Y Y
mode polarity switching side of the printed paper (leading edge) caused by
frequency (When not the transfer roller after the warming-up, forced
printing) toner supply or auto-toner adjustment.

0: 1 time 1: 2 times 2: 3 times 3: 4 times 4: 5 times

5: 6 times 6: 7 times 7: 8 times 8: 9 times 9: 10
times
08 Setting Process Process 5003 Job end cleaning bias 3 0~9 M Sets when there is any stain on the back side of 1 Y Y Y
mode polarity switching the printed paper (leading edge) caused by the
frequency (At jam transfer roller after a paper jam is cleared.
recovery)
0: 1 time 1: 2 times 2: 3 times 3: 4 times 4: 5 times
5: 6 times 6: 7 times 7: 8 times 8: 9 times 9: 10
times
08 Setting Process Transfer 5005 Transfer bias between 0 0~1 M 0: Positive polarity 1 Y Y Y
mode papers switching 1: Negative polarity
08 Setting Process Transfer 5016 Thin paper transferred 0 0~2 M 0: All valid 1 Y Y Y
mode paper / Environment / 1: All invalid
Life correction 2: Width of paper correction only
switching
08 Setting Process Transfer 5075 0 Paper width transfer 152 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction (High) execution value.)
(Middle)
08 Setting Process Transfer 5075 1 Paper width transfer 150 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction execution value.)
(Center)
(Middle)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 47 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Transfer 5075 2 Paper width transfer 160 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction (Low) execution value.)
(Middle)
08 Setting Process Transfer 5076 0 Paper width transfer 168 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction (High) execution value.)
(Small)
08 Setting Process Transfer 5076 1 Paper width transfer 172 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction execution value.)
(Center)
(Small)
08 Setting Process Transfer 5076 2 Paper width transfer 179 0~255 M Correction value (GAP from 128 is given to an 4 Y Y Y
mode output correction (Low) execution value.)
(Small)
08 Setting Process Developme Toner near empty 5155 Toner near empty 1 0~3 M 0: The period from the appearance of the toner 1 Y Y Y
mode nt threshold setting near-empty sign to the actual complete
consumption of the toner is set to long.
1: Normal (Default)
2: The period from the appearance of the toner
near-empty sign to the actual complete
consumption of the toner is set to short.
3: No detection
4: Toner near-empty status threshold value: (%)*
* The toner near-empty status is displayed if the
remaining amount of toner is equal to or less than
the amount set in 08-5810.
08 Setting Process Developme Toner near empty 5156 3 Fine adjustment of 100 50~150 M Adjusts the threshold value for displaying 4 Y Y Y
mode nt threshold for displaying remaining amount of toner and toner near empty.
remaining toner and Display threshold value = default threshold value x
toner near empty setting value/100 (unit: %)

50: Setting value x 0.5

100: Setting value x 1.0
150: Setting value x 1.5
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing correction 5210 0 Temperature correction 2 0~10 M 0: Disable 1: 1 min. 2: 2 min. 3: 3 min. 4: 4 min. 5: 4 Y Y Y
mode control time 5 min. 6: 6 min. 7: 7 min. 8: 8 min. 9: 10 min. 10:
immediately after 15 min.
warming-up
08 Setting Process Fuser Fusing correction 5210 1 Maximum time of lamp 2 0~10 M 0: Disable 1: 1 min. 2: 2 min. 3: 3 min. 4: 4 min. 5: 4 Y Y Y
mode control time ON 5 min. 6: 6 min. 7: 7 min. 8: 8 min. 9: 10 min. 10:
immediately after 15 min.
warming-up
08 Setting Process Fuser Correction of 5337 0 Ready 0 0~15 M 0: 0oC 1: -1oC 2: -2oC 3: -3oC 4: -4oC 5: -5oC 6: - 14 Y Y Y
mode temperature rising 6oC 7: -7oC 8: -8oC 9: -9oC 10: -10oC 11: -11oC
prevention (Latest 12: -12oC 13: -13oC 14: -14oC 15: -15oC
value)
08 Setting Process Fuser Correction of 5337 1 Printing 0 0~15 M 0: 0oC 1: -1oC 2: -2oC 3: -3oC 4: -4oC 5: -5oC 6: - 14 Y Y Y
mode temperature rising 6oC 7: -7oC 8: -8oC 9: -9oC 10: -10oC 11: -11oC
prevention (Latest 12: -12oC 13: -13oC 14: -14oC 15: -15oC
value)
08 Setting Process Fuser 5469 Low power 1 0~1 M This code is used when using low power 1 Y Y Y
mode consumption control consumption control. Note that inconsistent fusing
may occur if the fuser roller temperature is low.
Use the above default value, unless otherwise
required.

0: Invalid, 1: Valid
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 0 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center)
Setting value x 100 msec
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 1 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side)
Setting value x 100 msec

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 48 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 2 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center)
Setting value x 100 msec
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 3 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side)
Setting value x 100 msec
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 4 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center)
Setting value x 100 msec
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 5 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side)
Setting value x 100 msec
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 6 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center)
Setting value x 100 msec
08 Setting Process Fuser 5497 7 Low power 10 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp ON time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum ON value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side)
Setting value x 100 msec
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 0 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 23, 25/28ppm: 22
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 1 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 23, 25/28ppm: 22
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 2 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 21, 25/28ppm: 20
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 3 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 21, 25/28ppm: 20
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 4 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 23, 25/28ppm: 22
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 5 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 23, 25/28ppm: 22

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 49 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 6 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Center) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 21, 25/28ppm: 20
08 Setting Process Fuser 5498 7 Low power Refer to 1~50 M This code is used to set a Lamp OFF time on Low 4 Y Y Y
mode consumption control: contents power consumption control. Use the above default
Lamp maximum OFF value, unless otherwise required.
time (Side) Setting value x 100 msec
<Default value>
23ppm: 21, 25/28ppm: 20
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5554 PM counter setting Refer to 0~600000 M Sets the number of printed sheets to display the 1 Y Y Y
mode e value for developer contents message that prompts the PM of developer
material (K) material.
<Default value>
JPD: 0
Others:
23ppm: 59000, 25ppm: 61000, 28ppm: 64000
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5555 PM time counter setting 115000 0~600000 M Sets the accumulated driving time to display the 1 Y Y Y
mode e value for developer message that prompts the PM of developer
material (K) material.
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5562 Parts PM counter set Refer to 0~600000 M Sets the number of printed sheets to display the 1 Y Y Y
mode e value contents message that prompts the PM of part.
<Default value>
JPD: 0
Others:
23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5563 Parts PM time counter 345000 0~600000 M Sets the accumulated driving time to display the 1 Y Y Y
mode e set value message that prompts the PM of part.
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5568 Current value of PM 0 0~600000 M Displays the current number of printed sheets. 1 Y Y Y
mode e counter for developer Counts up by turning on the registration sensor.
material (K)
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5569 Current value of PM 0 0~600000 M Displays the current driving time. 1 Y Y Y
mode e time counter for
developer material (K)
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5576 Parts PM counter 0 0~600000 M Displays the current number of printed sheets. 1 Y Y Y
mode e current value Counts up by turning on the registration sensor.
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5577 Parts PM time counter 0 0~600000 M Displays the current driving time of fuser. 1 Y Y Y
mode e current value
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5581 Switching of output 0 0~2 M 0: Pages 1: driving count 2: Whichever comes 1 Y Y Y
mode e pages/driving counts at faster
PM/developer material
(K)
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc 5585 Parts Switching 0 0~2 M 0: Pages 1: driving count 2: Whichever comes 1 Y Y Y
mode e between No. of sheets faster
and time for PM
08 Setting Process Maintenanc Toner near empty 5810 Arbitrary setting of the 3 1~99 M Sets an arbitrary setting of the threshold for 1 Y Y Y
mode e threshold for displaying displaying remaining toner and toner near empty.
remaining toner and Threshold value (unit: %)
toner near empty
08 Setting Counter Double For fee charging Paper size 6010 Large-sized paper 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Y Y Y
mode count 1: Counted as 2
08 Setting Counter Double For fee charging Paper size 6011 Definition setting of 0 0~1 M 0: A3/LD 1 Y Y Y
mode count large sized paper 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP/8K/13'LG
08 Setting Counter Double For PM Paper size 6012 Large-sized paper 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Y Y Y
mode count 1: Counted as 2
08 Setting Counter Double For PM Paper size 6013 Definition setting of 1 0~1 M 0: A3/LD 1 Y Y Y
mode count large sized paper 1: A3/LD/B4/LG/FOLIO/COMP/8K/13'LG
08 Setting Counter Double For PM Paper type 6014 Thick paper 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Y Y Y
mode count 1: Counted as 2
08 Setting Counter Double For PM Paper type 6015 OHP film 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Y Y Y
mode count 1: Counted as 2

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 50 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter Double For PM Paper type 6016 Envelope 1 0~1 M 0: Counted as 1 1 Y Y Y
mode count 1: Counted as 2
08 Setting Counter Printer Print 6064 0 Large size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of output pages in the Printer 14 Y Y Y
mode 9 Function according to its size (large/small).
08 Setting Counter Printer Print 6064 1 Small size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of output pages in the Printer 14 Y Y Y
mode 9 Function according to its size (large/small).
08 Setting Counter Fax Print 6066 0 Large size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of output pages in the FAX 14 - - Y
mode 9 Function according to its size (large/small).
08 Setting Counter Fax Print 6066 1 Small size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of output pages in the FAX 14 - - Y
mode 9 Function according to its size (large/small).
08 Setting Counter Scan Full color 6068 0 Large size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of output pages in the 14 Y Y Y
mode 9 Scanning Function according to its size (large/
small).
08 Setting Counter Scan Full color 6068 1 Small size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of output pages in the 14 Y Y Y
mode 9 Scanning Function according to its size (large/
small).
08 Setting Counter Copy Scan 6070 0 Large size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of scanning pages in the 14 Y Y Y
mode 9 Copier Function according to its size (large/small).
08 Setting Counter Copy Scan 6070 1 Small size 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of scanning pages in the 14 Y Y Y
mode 9 Copier Function according to its size (large/small).
08 Setting Counter Double For fee charging Paper type 6083 1 Thick/Back Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Y Y Y
mode count Thick1/Back contents per page. Scan counter and fax counter are not
Thick2/Back influenced.
0: Single
1: Double

<Default value>
JPD/FJP: 0, CND: 0, Other: 1
08 Setting Counter Double For fee charging Paper type 6083 3 OHP film Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Y Y Y
mode count contents per page. Scan counter and fax counter are not
influenced.
0: Single
1: Double

<Default value>
JPD/FJP: 0, CND: 0, Other: 1
08 Setting Counter Double For fee charging Paper type 6083 4 Envelope Refer to 0~1 SYS Sets the weight of fee charging count for printing 4 Y Y Y
mode count contents per page. Scan counter and fax counter are not
influenced.
0: Single
1: Double

<Default value>
JPD/FJP: 0, CND: 0, Other: 1
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6110 Upper drawer 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of sheets fed from upper 2 Y Y Y
mode Paper feed drawer.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6111 Lower drawer (PFU) 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of sheets fed from lower 2 Y Y Y
mode Paper feed drawer (PFU).
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6112 SFB 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of sheets fed from bypass 2 Y Y Y
mode Paper feed feed.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6114 PFP upper drawer 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP upper 2 - - Y
mode Paper feed drawer.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6115 PFP lower drawer 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of sheets fed from PFP lower 2 - - Y
mode Paper feed drawer.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6116 ADU 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of output pages of duplex 2 Y Y Y
mode Paper feed printing.
08 Setting Counter Counter of 6117 RADF 0 0~9999999 SYS Counts the number of originals fed from RADF. 2 Y Y Y
mode Paper feed 9

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 51 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc PM counter K 6190 Setting value Refer to 0~600000 M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for 1 Y Y Y
mode e contents PM timing. [Unit: page]
0: Not displayed
<Default value>
JPD: 0
Others:
23ppm: 59000, 25ppm: 61000, 28ppm: 64000
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc PM drive counter K 6191 Setting value 115000 0~600000 M Sets the threshold for displaying a message for 1 Y Y Y
mode e PM timing. [Unit: count]
0: Not displayed
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc PM counter K 6194 Current value 0 0~600000 M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1 Y Y Y
mode e [Unit: page]
0: clear
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc PM drive counter K 6195 Current value 0 0~600000 M Counts the drum driving time. [Unit: 1 count = 2 1 Y Y Y
mode e seconds]
0: clear
08 Setting Counter Maintenanc PM counter K 6198 Switching of output 0 0~2 M Selects the reference to notify the PM timing. 1 Y Y Y
mode e pages/ driving counts at 0: PM counter
PM 1: PM drive counter
2: Whichever comes faster
08 Setting Counter Counter Number of output 6225 Thick paper 0 0~600000 M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1 Y Y Y
mode pages the thick paper mode. [Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Counter Number of output 6226 Thick paper 1 0 0~600000 M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1 Y Y Y
mode pages the thick paper 1 mode. [Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Counter Number of output 6227 Thick paper 2 0 0~600000 M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1 Y Y Y
mode pages the thick paper 2 mode. [Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Counter Number of output 6228 OHP film 0 0~600000 M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON in 1 Y Y Y
mode pages the OHP film mode. [Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter 6230 Upper drawer 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding from the upper drawer.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter 6231 Lower drawer (PFU) 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding from the lower drawer.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter 6232 PFP upper drawer 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 - - Y
mode feeding from the PFP upper drawer.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter 6233 PFP lower drawer 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 - - Y
mode feeding from the PFP lower drawer.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter 6234 Bypass feed 0 0~600000 M Counts the number of times of the feeding retry 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding from the bypass tray.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter Upper limit value 6236 Upper drawer 0 0~600000 M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding 6234) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry
will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry
continues regardless of the counter setting value.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter Upper limit value 6237 Lower drawer (PFU) 0 0~600000 M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding 6234) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry
will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry
continues regardless of the counter setting value.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter Upper limit value 6238 PFP upper drawer 0 0~600000 M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1 - - Y
mode feeding 6234) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry
will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry
continues regardless of the counter setting value.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter Upper limit value 6239 PFP lower drawer 0 0~600000 M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1 - - Y
mode feeding 6234) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry
will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry
continues regardless of the counter setting value.
08 Setting Counter Paper Feeding retry counter Upper limit value 6240 Bypass feed 0 0~600000 M When the number of feeding retry (08-6230 to 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding 6234) exceeds the setting value, the feeding retry
will not be performed subsequently. In case “0” is
set as a setting value, however, the feeding retry
continues regardless of the counter setting value.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 52 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter Counter Number of output 6247 Envelope 0 0~600000 M Counts up when the registration sensor is ON. 1 Y Y Y
mode pages [Unit: page]
08 Setting Counter Toner Toner refill motor 6249 Backup counter for 0 0~600000 M The rotation time of toner refill motor is stored 2 Y Y Y
mode rotation time when the toner cartridge becomes empty.
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 59000, 25ppm: 61000, 28ppm: 64000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 4 Recommended driving 115000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6250 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Photoconductive drum 6251 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 59000, 25ppm: 61000, 28ppm: 64000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 4 Recommended driving 115000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6258 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum cleaning blade 6259 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 53 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6272 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum Separation finger 6273 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 59000, 25ppm: 61000, 28ppm: 64000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 4 Recommended driving 115000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6274 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Charger grid 6275 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6282 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Needle electrode 6283 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 54 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6298 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Ozone filter 6299 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 59000, 25ppm: 61000, 28ppm: 64000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 4 Recommended driving 115000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6300 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Developer material 6301 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 59000, 25ppm: 61000, 28ppm: 64000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 4 Recommended driving 115000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 55 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6314 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Transfer roller 6315 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6346 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller 6347 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6350 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pressure roller 6351 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 56 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 3 Present driving counts 0 0~345000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~345000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~345000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 7 Present driving counts 0 0~345000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6368 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser separation finger 6369 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (RADF) 6382 0 Number of current 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode reading sheets of paper 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (RADF) 6382 1 Recommended number 150000 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode of replacing reading 9
sheets of paper
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (RADF) 6382 2 Number of previous 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode reading sheets of paper 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (RADF) 6382 8 Number of times 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Pickup roller (RADF) 6383 Date of previous 0 - SYS (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (RADF) 6384 0 Number of current 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode reading sheets of paper 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (RADF) 6384 1 Recommended number 150000 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode of replacing reading 9
sheets of paper
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (RADF) 6384 2 Number of previous 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode reading sheets of paper 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (RADF) 6384 8 Number of times 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Feed roller (RADF) 6385 Date of previous 0 - SYS (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 0 Number of current 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode (RADF) reading sheets of paper 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 1 Recommended number 150000 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode (RADF) of replacing reading 9
sheets of paper
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 2 Number of previous 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode (RADF) reading sheets of paper 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6386 8 Number of times 0 0~9999999 SYS 4 Y Y Y
mode (RADF) replaced 9
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller 6387 Date of previous 0 - SYS (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode (RADF) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6398 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper drawer) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6398 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper drawer) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6398 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper drawer) pages at the last
replacement

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 57 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6398 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper drawer) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6399 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode (Upper drawer) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6400 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower drawer: PFU) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6400 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower drawer: PFU) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6400 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower drawer: PFU) pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6400 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower drawer: PFU) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller 6401 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode (Lower drawer: PFU) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6406 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper Drawer) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6406 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper Drawer) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6406 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper Drawer) pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6406 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Upper Drawer) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6407 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode (Upper Drawer) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6408 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower Drawer: PFU) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6408 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower Drawer: PFU) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6408 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower Drawer: PFU) pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6408 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode (Lower Drawer: PFU) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation pad 6409 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode (Lower Drawer: PFU) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6412 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP upper output pages
drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6412 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP upper of output pages for
drawer) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6412 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP upper pages at the last
drawer) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6412 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP upper replaced
drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6413 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 - - Y
mode roller (PFP upper replacement (Max. 8 characters)
drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6414 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP lower output pages
drawer)

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 58 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6414 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP lower of output pages for
drawer) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6414 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP lower pages at the last
drawer) replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6414 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode roller (PFP lower replaced
drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer separation 6415 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 - - Y
mode roller (PFP lower replacement (Max. 8 characters)
drawer)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass separation pad 6416 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass separation pad 6416 1 Recommended number 50000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass separation pad 6416 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass separation pad 6416 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass separation pad 6417 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6420 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6420 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6420 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6420 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6421 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 - - Y
mode upper drawer) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6422 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6422 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6422 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6422 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drawer feed roller (PFP 6423 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 - - Y
mode lower drawer) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass feed roller 6424 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass feed roller 6424 1 Recommended number 50000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass feed roller 6424 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass feed roller 6424 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 59 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Bypass feed roller 6425 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6428 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6428 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6428 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6428 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode upper drawer) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6429 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 - - Y
mode upper drawer) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6430 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6430 1 Recommended number 80000 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) of output pages for
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6430 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6430 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 - - Y
mode lower drawer) replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Separation roller (PFP 6431 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 - - Y
mode lower drawer) replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6436 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Drum recovery blade 6437 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 0 Present number of 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode output pages
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 1 Recommended number Refer to 0~600000 M <Default value> 4 Y Y Y
mode of output pages for contents 23ppm: 177000, 25ppm: 183000, 28ppm: 192000
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 2 Number of output 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode pages at the last
replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 3 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 60 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 4 Recommended driving 345000 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode counts to be replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 5 Driving counts at the 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode last replacement
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 6 Present output pages 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 7 Present driving counts 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode for control
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6470 8 Number of times 0 0~600000 M 4 Y Y Y
mode replaced
08 Setting Counter PM counter Fuser roller bushing 6471 Date of previous 29991231 - M (YYYYMMDD)YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date 2 Y Y Y
mode replacement (Max. 8 characters)
08 Setting Counter Process Toner cartridge usage 6977 0 Latest 0 0~9999999 M 1 digit: Production location indicated. 4 Y Y Y
mode history (Lot. No.) 9 -0: Cartridge not installed
-1: TESS cartridge
-2: TABS cartridge
-3: TEIS cartridge
-6: Cartridge not detected (when the IC chip
information cannot be detected)
8 digits: Lot No. indicated
08 Setting Counter Process Toner cartridge usage 6977 1 1 cartridge earlier 0 0~9999999 M 1 digit: Production location indicated. 4 Y Y Y
mode history (Lot. No.) 9 -0: Cartridge not installed
-1: TESS cartridge
-2: TABS cartridge
-3: TEIS cartridge
-6: Cartridge not detected (when the IC chip
information cannot be detected)
8 digits: Lot No. indicated
08 Setting Counter Process Toner cartridge usage 6977 2 2 cartridges earlier 0 0~9999999 M 1 digit: Production location indicated. 4 Y Y Y
mode history (Lot. No.) 9 -0: Cartridge not installed
-1: TESS cartridge
-2: TABS cartridge
-3: TEIS cartridge
-6: Cartridge not detected (when the IC chip
information cannot be detected)
8 digits: Lot No. indicated
08 Setting Counter Process Toner cartridge usage 6977 3 3 cartridges earlier 0 0~9999999 M 1 digit: Production location indicated. 4 Y Y Y
mode history (Lot. No.) 9 -0: Cartridge not installed
-1: TESS cartridge
-2: TABS cartridge
-3: TEIS cartridge
-6: Cartridge not detected (when the IC chip
information cannot be detected)
8 digits: Lot No. indicated
08 Setting Counter Process Toner cartridge usage 6977 4 4 cartridges earlier 0 0~9999999 M 1 digit: Production location indicated. 4 Y Y Y
mode history (Lot. No.) 9 -0: Cartridge not installed
-1: TESS cartridge
-2: TABS cartridge
-3: TEIS cartridge
-6: Cartridge not detected (when the IC chip
information cannot be detected)
8 digits: Lot No. indicated
08 Setting Image Image Clearing of adjustment 7000 Copy - - SYS Clears the adjustment values of the following 05 3 Y Y Y
mode Processing values of all image clear codes: 05-7025 to 7223 After executing this code.
process (Copy) related
05 codes
08 Setting Image Image Clearing of all gamma 7001 Copy - - SYS Clears all the gamma correction table values in the 3 Y Y Y
mode Processing correction table values clear copy related areas of the memory.
(Copy related areas
only)
08 Setting Image Image Error diffusion and 7014 Photo mode 1 0~1 SYS Sets the image reproduction method at photo 1 Y Y Y
mode Processing dither setting mode.
0: Error diffusion 1: Dither

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 61 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting Image Maintenanc 7036 Calibration 0 0~1 SYS Records whether gamma calibration has been 2 Y Y Y
mode Processing e performance flag performed or not at the time of unpacking.
0: Not performed
1: Performed
08 Setting Image Automatic Last updated date and Copy 7051 TEXT 0 0~4212312 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 2 Y Y Y
mode Processing tone time 359 correction data. (YYYYMMDDHHMM)
correction YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date,HH: Hour: MM:
data Minute
08 Setting Image Automatic Last updated date and Copy 7052 Photo 0 0~42123:1 SYS Last updated date and time of automatic tone 2 Y Y Y
mode Processing tone time 2359 correction data. (YYYYMMDDHHMM)
correction YYYY: Year, MM: Month, DD: Date,HH: Hour: MM:
data Minute
08 Setting Image Image Clearing of adjustment 7300 Print - - SYS Clears the adjustment values of the following 05 3 Y Y Y
mode Processing values of all image clear codes: 05-7317 to 7355 After executing this code.
process (Network
printer) related 05
codes
08 Setting Image Image Clearing of adjustment 7400 Scan - - SYS Clears the adjustment values of the following 05 3 Y Y Y
mode Processing values of all image clear codes: 05-7430 to 7488, 05-8309 to 8403 After
process (network scan) executing this code.
related 05 codes
08 Setting Image Image Clearing of adjustment 7500 FAX - - SYS Clears the adjustment values of the following 05 3 - - Y
mode Processing values of all image clear codes: 05-7533 to 7595 After executing this code.
process (Fax) related
05 codes
08 Setting Image Image Change of FAX TX 7510 FAX 0 0~1 SYS Enabling / Disabling of FAX TX image parameter 1 - - Y
mode Processing image parameter 0: Disable (default)
1: Enable (Countermeasure of foggy)
08 Setting System User Screen setting 8523 Toner near-empty 1 0~1 SYS 0: ON 1 Y Y Y
mode interface status Message 1: OFF
08 Setting System User Screen setting 8538 Toner Near Empty 0 0~1 SYS 0:Disable 1 - - Y
mode interface Transmission setting 1:Enable
08 Setting System User Counter 8549 Hardware key control 0 0~1 SYS 0: No control 1 - Y Y
mode interface when external counter 1: Mode switch key is disabled.
is installed
08 Setting System User 8603 Special usage of 0 0~1 SYS 0: Coin controller 1 - Y Y
mode interface external options I/F 1: Card controller
08 Setting System Fax 8700 Secret reception setting 0 0~2 SYS 0: Always Off 1 - - Y
mode 1: Always On
2. -
08 Setting System User 8712 Display setting of the 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the drawer button in USER 1 Y Y Y
mode interface drawer setting button FUNCTIONS is displayed or not.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
08 Setting System User 8721 Automatic FAX sending 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the job is sent or canceled when 1 - - Y
mode interface at Auto Clear when Auto Clear is executed on the interruption screen
scanning original put on to confirm the next original displayed after
the glass scanning the original put on the glass. Use this
code to cancel job when the equipment is left
unattended while the interruption screen is
displayed.
0: Sends job
1: Cancels job
08 Setting System User 8725 Display setting of 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the [CHANGE LANGUAGE] button 1 Y Y Y
mode interface [USER FUNCTIONS]-> accessed from [USER FUNCTIONS] button is
CHANGE LANGUAGE displayed or not. Use this code to prohibit users
button from changing the language displayed on the
control panel. Administrators can change the
language.
0: Not displayed
1: Displayed
08 Setting System General 8737 Restart behavior when 0 0~1 SYS 0: Automatically restarted 1 Y Y Y
mode the out of paper is 1: Restarted by pressing [START] button
solved

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 62 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Network 8800 Enabling / Disabling of 2 1~2 NIC 1: Enabled 12 - Y Y
mode 802.1X 2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network 8804 Enabling / Disabling of 2 1~2 SYS 1: Enabled 1 - Y Y
mode IP filtering 2: Disabled
08 Setting System Network 8805 Enabling / Disabling of 2 1~2 SYS 1: Enabled 1 - Y Y
mode MAC address filtering 2: Disabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 0 Copy 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the Copier function is enabled or 4 Y Y Y
mode function disabled.
setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 2 FAX 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the Fax function is enabled or 4 - - Y
mode function disabled.
setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 4 Email 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the email function is enabled or 4 - - Y
mode function disabled.
setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 8 Save to USB Media 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the function that saves scanned data 4 Y Y Y
mode function of originals to USB media is enabled or disabled.
setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 9 Save as FTP 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the function that saves scanned data 4 - - Y
mode function of originals to FTP server is enabled or disabled.
setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 11 Save as SMB 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the function that saves scanned data 4 - Y Y
mode function of originals to the SMB server is enabled or
setting disabled.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 14 Twain Scanning 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the remote scanning function is 4 Y Y Y
mode function (Remote Scan) enabled or disabled.
setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 16 Network FAX 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether the Network Fax function is enabled 4 - - Y
mode function or disabled.
setting 0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 21 Mobile Print(USB) 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether to enable or disable the printing 4 Y Y Y
mode function function by connecting a mobile terminal with a
setting USB cable.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System MFP 8914 22 Mobile Scan(USB) 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether to enable or disable the scanning 4 Y Y Y
mode function function by connecting a mobile terminal with a
setting USB cable.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
08 Setting System Security 8919 Service password - - SYS Sets the password to log into the self-diagnostic 11 Y Y Y
mode mode. It must be 6 characters or more. (Maximum
65 characters)
08 Setting System Department 8921 Clearing of the user/ 1 0~1 SYS 0: Not allowed 1 Y Y Y
mode manageme department counter 1: Allowed
nt
08 Setting System Department 8926 Clearing of all - - SYS In cases when the administrator has prohibited the 3 Y Y Y
mode manageme department counters clearing of department counter data, a service
nt technician can clear the data using this code.
08 Setting System User SSL 8933 SSL setting (SSL 2 1~2 NIC 1: Enabled (accepts all server certificates) 12 - - Y
Mode interface SMTP Client Off/On) 2: Disabled
08 Setting System User SSL 8934 SSL setting (SMTP 1 1~2 NIC 1: STARTTLS 12 - - Y
Mode interface Client SSL/TLS) 2: Over SSL

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 63 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System User 8935 Remote Scanning 1 0~1 NIC 0: Disabled 12 Y Y Y
mode interface 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Maintenanc Notification of 8996 Email address 1 for - - SYS Maximum 192 characters. 11 - - Y
mode e equipment information notification
08 Setting System Maintenanc Notification of 8997 Email address 2 for - - SYS Maximum 192 characters. 11 - - Y
mode e equipment information notification
08 Setting System Maintenanc Notification of 8998 Email address 3 for - - SYS Maximum 192 characters. 11 - - Y
mode e equipment information notification
08 Setting System General 9000 Destination selection Refer to 0~2 M 0: EUR 1: UC 2: JPN 1 Y Y Y
mode contents
<Default value>
NAD: 1
JPD: 2
Others: 0
08 Setting System Fax 9001 Destination setting Refer to 0~30 SYS 0: Japan 1: Asia 1 - - Y
mode contents 2: Australia 3: Hong Kong
4: US 5: Germany
6: UK 7: Italy
8: Belgium 9: Netherlands
10: Finland 11: Spain
12: Austria 13: Switzerland
14: Sweden 15: Denmark
16: Norway 17: Portugal
18: France 19: Greece
20: Poland 21: Hungary
22: Czech 23: Turkey
24: South Africa 25: Taiwan
26: Canada 27: China
28: New Zealand 29: Malaysia
30: Singapore

<Default value>
NAD: 4
MJD: 5
SYD/ASD/ADU/ARD: 1
TWD: 25
CND: 27
JPD: 0
08 Setting System General 9010 Line adjustment mode 0 0~1 M 0: For factory shipment 1 Y Y Y
mode 1: For line Field: “0” must be selected
08 Setting System General 9012 Language selection to - 1~27 SYS Link with User function button. 9 Y Y Y
mode be displayed at power- 1: Simplified Chinese 2: English
ON 3: Traditional Chinese 4: French
5: Italian 6: German
7: Spanish 8: Swedish
9: Norwegian 10: Finnish
11: Danish 12: Dutch
13: Polish 14: Russian
15: Portuguese 16: Czech
17: Hungarian 18: Romanian
19: Slovakian 20: Lithuanian
21: Turkish 22: Latvian
23: Irish 24: Slovenian
25: Burgarian 26: Serbian
27: Japanese
<Default value>
TWD: 3, NAD/MJD/SYD/ASD/AUD/ARD: 2, CND:
1, JPN: 27

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 64 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System General 9015 Language selection to Refer to 0~17 SYS 0:Language1(ENG) 1 - Y Y
mode be displayed at Web contents 1:Language2(GER)
power-ON 2:Language3(FRE)
3:Language4(SP)
4:Language5(ITA)
5:Language6(JPD)
6:Not used
7:Language8(DAN)
8:Language9(FIN)
9:Language10(NOR)
10:Language11(SWE)
11:Not used
12:Language13(POL)
13:Language14(RUS)
14:Language15(CND)
15:Language16(TWN)
16:Language17(NTH)
17:Language18(TUR)
<Default value>
TWD: 15, NAD/MJD/SYD/ASD/AUD/ARD: 0,
CND: 14, JPN: 5
08 Setting System User 9016 Externally installed 0 Refer to M 0: No external counter 1 - Y Y
mode interface counter contents 1: Coin controller installed
5: Coin controller installed (supporting mixed-size
originals)
08 Setting System Counter 9017 Setting for counter 1 0~1 M Selects the job to count up for the external 1 - Y Y
mode installed externally counter.
0: Not selected (Does not count)
1: Copy
08 Setting System General 9022 Production process 99 0~99 SYS Perform this code when an error occurs during the 1 Y Y Y
mode management status for easy setup (unpacking manual adjustment) and
easy setup you want to finish the easy setup, or when you
want to restart the unpacking manual adjustment
from the beginning. Only 0 to 2 and 99 are
available for this code.
0: Packing mode completed (before starting to
unpack)
1: Auto toner adjustment completed
2: Installation of toner cartridge completed
99: Unpacking and adjustment completed
08 Setting System Initialization 9030 Initialization after - - SYS Perform this code when the software in this 3 Y Y Y
mode software version up equipment has been upgraded.
08 Setting System User External counter 9037 Job handling-short 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether pause or stop the printing job when it 1 - Y Y
Mode interface paid-coin controller is short paid using a coin controller.
0: Pause the job
1: Stop the job
08 Setting System 9060 Destination display at Refer to Refer to SYS 2523A/2523AD: 4:CND, 9:ASD 2 Y Y Y
mode flash memory contents contents 2323AM: 0:MJD, 4:CND
initialization 2823AM: 0:MJD, 1:NAD, 4:CND, 10:ARD
2329A: 0:MJD, 1:NAD, 2:JPD, 3:AUD, 9:ASD,
10:ARD
2829A: 0:MJD, 1:NAD, 4:CND, 6:TWD, 9:ASD,
10:ARD
<Default value>
MJD:0, NAD:1, JPD:2, AUD:3, CND:4, TWD:6,
ASD:9, ARD:10
08 Setting System General 9063 Presence of the fax 0 0~1 SYS 0: The fax board is not attached 1 - - Y
mode board 1: The fax board is attached
08 Setting System General 9081 Initialization of - - SYS Initializing of the department management 3 Y Y Y
mode department information.
management
information
08 Setting System Initialization 9083 Initialization of NIC - - SYS Returns the value to the factory shipping default 3 - Y Y
mode information value.
08 Setting System All clear 9090 Printer all clear - - M Initializes all the self-diagnosis 05/08 codes with 3 Y Y Y
mode “M” in the “RAM” field.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 65 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System General 9100 Date and time setting - - - YYMMDD Day of the week HHMMSS (Year/ 11 Y Y Y
mode month/date/day/hour/minute/second)
Example:
03 07 01 3 13 27 48
“Day” - “0” is for “Sunday”. Proceeds Monday
through Saturday from “1” to “6”.
08 Setting System User 9102 Date format 2 0~2 SYS 0: YYYY.MM.DD 1 Y Y Y
mode interface 1: DD.MM.YYYY
2: MM.DD.YYYY
<Default value>
MJD: 1
JPD: 0
Others: 2
08 Setting System General 9103 Time differences Refer to Refer to SYS 0: +12.0h 2: +11.0h 4: +10.0h 5: +9.5h 6: +9.0h 8: 1 - Y Y
mode contents contents +8.0h 10: +7.0h 11: +6.5h 12: +6.0h 13: +5.5h 14:
+5.0h 15: +4.5h 16: +4.0h 17: +3.5h 18: +3.0h 20:
+2.0h 22: +1.0h 24: 0.0h 26: -1.0h 28: -2.0h 30: -
3.0h 31: -3.5h 32: -4.0h 34: -5.0h 36: -6.0h 38: -
7.0h 40: -8.0h 42: -9.0h 44: -10.0h 46: -11.0h
<Default value>
MJD: 24
NAD: 40
JPD: 6
AUD: 4
ARD: 30
Others: 8
* After this code has been set, doing so for 08-
9105 is required accordingly. For details of the
setting, see “Appendix-1”.
08 Setting System General 9105 Area setting for time Refer to Refer to SYS Sets the destination corresponding to the time 1 - Y Y
mode zone contents contents zone.
<Default value>
ASD/AUD/ARD: 2
TWD: 4
Others: 0
* After 08-9103 has been set, doing so for this
code is required accordingly. For details of the
setting, see “Appendix-1”.
08 Setting System User 9110 Auto-clear timer setting 3 0~10 SYS Timer to return the equipment to the default 1 Y Y Y
mode interface settings when the [START] button is not pressed
after the function and the mode are set
0: Infinitive (Disabled)
1 to 10: Set value x15 seconds
08 Setting System User 9111 Auto power save mode 4 0~15 SYS Timer to automatically switch to the auto power 1 Y Y Y
mode interface timer setting save mode when the equipment has not been
used
0: Disable
1 to 3: (Reserved)
4: 1min
5: 2min (Reserved)
6: 3min 7: 4min 8: 5min
9: 7min 10: 10min 11: 15min
12: 20min 13: 30min 14: 45min
15: 60min
08 Setting System User 9112 Auto Shut Off timer 21 0~21 SYS Timer to automatically switch to the auto sleep 1 Y Y Y
mode interface setting (Sleep Mode) mode when the equipment has not been used
0: 3min 1: 5min 2: 10min
3: 15min 4: 20min 5: 25min
6: 30min 7: 40min 8: 50min
9: 60min 10: 70min 11: 80min
12: 90min 13: 100min 14: 110min
15: 120min 16: 150min 17: 180min
18: 210min 19: 240min 20: None
21: 1min
08 Setting System User Department setting 9120 Department 0 0~1 SYS 0: Invalid 1 Y Y Y
mode interface management 1: Valid
08 Setting System User Department setting 9121 Print setting without 2 Refer to SYS 0: Printed forcibly 1 Y Y Y
Mode interface department code contents 2: Deleted forcibly

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 66 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System User External counter Coin controller 9129 Duplex print setting 1 0~1 SYS Sets whether duplex printing is allowed or not 1 - Y Y
Mode interface (only permitting single printing) when a coin
controller is used.
0: Invalid (printing only one side)
1: Valid (printing both sides)
08 Setting System User Default setting of Default setting 9132 Selection of the higher 0 0~2 SYS 0: Copier 1 Y Y Y
mode interface screen (Function) priority screen 1: Fax
2: Scan
08 Setting System User 9133 Default setting for APS/ 0 0~2 SYS 0: APS (Automatic Paper Selection) 1 Y Y Y
mode interface AMS 1: AMS (Automatic Magnification Selection)
2: Not selected
08 Setting System User 9135 Book type original 0 0~1 SYS 0: Left page to right page 1 Y Y Y
mode interface priority 1: Right page to left page
08 Setting System User 9136 Maximum number of 1 1~3 SYS 1: 999 1 Y Y Y
mode interface copy volume 2: 99
3: 9
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting 9137 Setting for automatic 0 0~3 SYS 0: Invalid 1 Y Y Y
mode interface duplexing mode 1: Single-sided to duplex copying
2: Two-sided to duplex copying
3: User selection
08 Setting System User 9143 Time lag before auto 10 0~10 SYS Sets the time taken to add paper feeding when 1 Y Y Y
mode interface start of bypass feeding paper in the bypass tray has run out during the
bypass feed copying.
0: Paper is not drawn in unless the [START] button
is pressed.
1-10: Setting value x 0.5sec.
08 Setting System User 9150 Automatic sort mode 2 Refer to SYS 0: Invalid 1 Y Y Y
mode interface contents 2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
08 Setting System User 9151 Default setting of Sorter 0 Refer to SYS 0: NON-SORT 1 Y Y Y
mode interface Mode contents 2: SORT
3: GROUP
4: ROTATE SORT
08 Setting System User 9155 Magazine sort setting 0 0~1 SYS 0: Left page to right page 1 Y Y Y
mode interface 1: Right page to left page
08 Setting System User Paper Feed setting 9164 Auto-start setting for 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether or not feeding a paper automatically 1 Y Y Y
mode interface bypass feed printing into the equipment when it is placed on the bypass
tray.
0: OFF (Press the [START] button to start feeding.)
1: ON (Automatic feeding)
08 Setting System User FAX 9183 Application of paper 0 0~1 SYS 0: Not subjected for APS judgment 1 - - Y
mode interface source 1: Subjected for APS judgment
08 Setting System Network Retention period 9193 Web data retention 10 0~30 SYS When a certain period of time has passed without 1 - Y Y
mode time operation after accessing TopAccess, the data
being registered is automatically reset. This period
is set at this code.
(Unit: minute)
08 Setting System Scanning E-mail 9210 Default setting of partial 0 0~6 SYS Sets the default value for the partial size of E-mail 1 - - Y
mode size when transmitting to be transmitted when creating a template. (Unit:
E-mail KB)
0: Not divided
1: 64 2: 128
3: 256 4: 512
5: 1024
6: 2048
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting (Scan) 9213 Default setting for 0 Refer to SYS 0: Automatic density 1 Y Y Y
mode interface density adjustment contents 2: Step -4
(Black) 3: Step -3
4: Step -2
5: Step -1
6: Step 0 (center)
7: Step +1
8: Step +2
9: Step +3
10: Step +4

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 67 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting (Scan) 9215 Color mode 0 0~3 SYS 0: Black 1 Y Y Y
mode interface 1: Gray Scale
2: Unused
3: Full Color
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting of 9216 Full Color 1 0~4 SYS 0: Not used 1: 150dpi 2: 200dpi 3: 300dpi 4: 1 Y Y Y
mode interface resolution (Scan) 400dpi
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting of 9217 Gray Scale 1 0~5 SYS 0: Not used 1: 150dpi 2: 200dpi 3: 300dpi 4: 1 Y Y Y
mode interface resolution (Scan) 400dpi 5: 600dpi
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting of 9218 Black 0 0~4 SYS 0: 150dpi 1: 200dpi 2: 300dpi 3: 400dpi 4: 600dpi 1 Y Y Y
mode interface resolution (Scan)
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting (Scan) 9219 Original mode (Full 0 0~2 SYS 0: Text 1 Y Y Y
mode interface color) 1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting (Scan) 9220 Original mode (Black) 0 0~2 SYS 0: Text 1 Y Y Y
mode interface 1: Text/Photo
2: Photo
08 Setting System User Default mode setting 9221 Default setting of 0 0~1 SYS 0: Single 1: Duplex 1 Y Y Y
mode interface scanning mode
08 Setting System User 9222 Default setting of 0 0~1 SYS 0: 0 degree 1: 90 degrees 1 Y Y Y
mode interface rotation mode
08 Setting System User Default setting of filing E-mail 9227 Black (Gray Scale) 1 0~4 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1 - - Y
Mode interface format 1: PDF (Multi)
2: JPG (Not use)
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
08 Setting System User Default setting of filing Storing files 9228 Color 1 0~4 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1 Y Y Y
Mode interface format 1: PDF (Multi)
2: JPG
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
08 Setting System User Default setting of filing Storing files 9229 Black (Gray Scale) 1 0~4 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1 Y Y Y
Mode interface format 1: PDF (Multi)
2: JPG (Not use)
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
08 Setting System Paper Size conversion 9306 LT<->A4 / LD<->A3 0 0~1 SYS Sets whether the data is printed on the different 1 Y Y Y
mode feeding but similar size paper or not when the paper of
corresponding size is not available.
0: Valid (The data is printed on A4/A3 when LT/LD
is selected or vice versa.)
1: Invalid (The message to use the selected paper
size is displayed.)
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9308 Duplex print setting 1 0~1 SYS 0: Enabled 1 - - Y
mode 1: Disabled
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9309 Paper size setting Refer to 0~13 SYS 0:ledger 1:legal 2:letter 1 - - Y
mode contents 3:computer 4:statement 5:A3
6:A4 7:A5 8:A6
9:B4 10:B5 11:Folio
12:Legal13" 13:LetterSquare
<Default value>
NAD: 2
Other: 6
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9310 Paper type setting 0 0~5 SYS 0: Plain paper 1 - - Y
mode 1: Thick
2: Thick1
3: Thick2
4: Transparency
5: Thin paper
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9311 Paper orientation 0 0~1 SYS 0: Portrait 1 - - Y
mode setting 1: Landscape
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9314 Numbers of form lines 1200 500~12800 SYS 500 to 12800 (numbers of form lines) 1 - - Y
mode
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9315 PCL font pitch 1000 44~9999 SYS 44 to 9999 (PCL font pitch) 1 - - Y
mode

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 68 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9316 PCL font size 1200 400~99975 SYS 400 to 99975 (PCL font size) 1 - - Y
mode
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9317 PCL font number 0 0~9999 SYS 1 - - Y
mode
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9334 PCL line termination 0 0~3 SYS 0: Automatic 1 - - Y
mode setting 1: CR=CR, LF=LF
2: CR=CR+LF, LF=LF
3: CR=CR, LF=CR+LF
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9338 Drawer setting 0 0~4 SYS 0: Automatic 1 - - Y
mode 1: Upper drawer
2: Lower drawer (PFU)
3: PFP upper drawer
4: PFP lower drawer
08 Setting System General Raw Print 9339 PCL symbol set 0 0~39 SYS 0:Roman-8 1:ISO 8859/1 Latin 1 1 - - Y
mode selection 2:ISO 8859/2 Latin 2 3:ISO 8859/9 Latin 5
4:PC-8,Code Page 437 5:PC-8 D/N, Danish/
Norwegian
6:PC-850,Multilingual 7:PC-852, Latin2
8:PC-8 Turkish 9:Windows 3.1 Latin 1
10:Windows 3.1 Latin 2 11:Windows 3.1 Latin 5
12:DeskTop 13:PS Text
14:Ventura International 15:Ventura US
16:Microsoft Publishing 17:Math-8
18:PS Math 19:Ventura Math
20:Pi Font 21:Legal
22:ISO 4: United Kingdom 23:ISO 6:ASCII
24:ISO 11 25:ISO 15: Italian
26:ISO 17 27:ISO 21: German
28:ISO 60: Danish/Norwegian 29:ISO 69: French
30:Windows 3.0 Latin 1 31:MC Text
32:PC Cyrillic 33:ITC Zapf Dingbats
34:ISO 8859/10 Latin 6 35:PC-775
36:PC-1004 37:Symbol
38:Windows Baltic 39:Wingdings
08 Setting System User Binding margin setting 9341 0 Left binding front (Right 7 0~100 SYS Sets the binding margin displayed as default on 4 Y Y Y
mode interface binding back) the setting screen for the top/bottom/left/right
binding function when copying. (Unit: mm)
08 Setting System User Binding margin setting 9341 1 Left binding back (Right 7 0~100 SYS Sets the binding margin displayed as default on 4 Y Y Y
mode interface binding front) the setting screen for the top/bottom/left/right
binding function when copying. (Unit: mm)
08 Setting System User 9352 Display of paper size Refer to 0~1 SYS 0: Not displayed 1: Displayed 1 Y Y Y
mode interface setting by installation contents <Default value>
operation of drawers JPD/MJD/CND: 0, Other: 1
08 Setting System Image 9353 Default sharpness 5 1~9 SYS 1: -4 2: -3 3: -2 4: -1 5: 0 6: +1 7: +2 8: +3 9: +4 1 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting System User Paper Feed setting 9359 Printing resume after 1 0~1 SYS 0: Auto resume 1 Y Y Y
mode interface jam releasing 1: Resume by users
08 Setting System User Default setting of filing E-mail 9384 Color 1 0~4 SYS 0: TIFF (Multi) 1 - - Y
Mode interface format 1: PDF (Multi)
2: JPG
3: TIFF (Single)
4: PDF (Single)
08 Setting System Network Notification of scan job 9386 1 On error 0 0~1 SYS Sets the notification method of scan job 4 - - Y
mode completion.
0: Invalid
1: Valid
08 Setting System Network Scanning 9387 File name format of 0 0~6 SYS Sets the file naming method for “Save as file” and 1 - - Y
mode “Save as file” and Email Email transmission.
transmission 0: [FileName]-[Data]-[Page]
1: [FileName]-[Page]-[Data]
2: [Data]-[FileName]-[Page]
3: [Data]-[Page]-[FileName]
4: [Page]-[FileName]-[Data]
5: [Page]-[Data]-[FileName]
6: [HostName]_[Data]-[Page]

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 69 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Network Scanning 9388 Date display format of 0 0~5 SYS Sets the data display format of the file for “Save as 1 - - Y
mode the file name of “Save file” and Email transmission.
as file” and Email 0: [YYYY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS]
transmission 1: [YY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS]
2: [YYYY][MM][DD]
3: [YY][MM][DD]
4: [HH][mm][SS]
5: [YYYY][MM][DD] [HH][mm][SS][mm]
08 Setting System Network Scanning 9390 Page number display 4 3~6 SYS Sets the digit of a page number attached on the 1 - - Y
mode format of the file of file.
“Save as file” and Email 3-6: 3-6 digits
transmission
08 Setting System Network Scanning 9391 Extension (suffix) 3 3~6 SYS Sets the extension digits of the file to be saved. 1 - - Y
mode format of the file of 3: Automatic
“Save as file” 4: 4 digits
5: 5 digits
6: 6 digits
08 Setting System Network Ethernet 9403 Communication speed 1 1~5 - 1: Automatic (100) 12 - Y Y
mode and settings of Ethernet 2: 10MBPS Half Duplex
3: 10MBPS Full Duplex
4: 100MBPS Half Duplex
5: 100MBPS Full Duplex
08 Setting System Network TCP/IP 9406 Method for acquiring IP 2 1~3 NIC 1: Fixed IP address 12 - Y Y
mode address 2: Dynamic IP address (DHCP)
3: Dynamic IP address (DHCP) without Automatic
IP
08 Setting System Network TCP/IP 9408 IP address Refer to Refer to NIC <Default value> 12 - Y Y
mode contents contents 0.0.0.0
<Acceptable value>
0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255
08 Setting System Network TCP/IP 9409 Subnet mask Refer to Refer to NIC <Default value> 12 - Y Y
mode contents contents 0.0.0.0
<Acceptable value>
0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255
08 Setting System Network TCP/IP 9410 Gateway Refer to Refer to NIC <Default value> 12 - Y Y
mode contents contents 0.0.0.0
<Acceptable value>
0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255
08 Setting System Network DNS 9417 Availability of DNS 1 1~2 NIC 1: Available 2: Not available 12 - Y Y
mode
08 Setting System Network DNS 9418 IP address to DNS - Refer to NIC <Acceptable value> 12 - Y Y
mode server (Primary) contents 000.000.000.000-255.255.255.255
08 Setting System Network DNS 9419 IP address to DNS - Refer to NIC <Acceptable value> 12 - Y Y
mode server (Secondary) contents 0.0.0.0-255.255.255.255
08 Setting System Network HTTP 9430 Availability of HTTP 1 1~2 NIC 1: Available 12 - Y Y
mode server 2: Not available
08 Setting System Network SMTP 9437 Availability of SMTP 1 1~2 NIC 1: Available 12 - - Y
mode client 2: Not available
08 Setting System Network SNMP 9463 Availability of MIB 1 1~2 NIC 1: Valid 12 - Y Y
mode function 2: Invalid
08 Setting System Network Raw TCP 9473 Availability of Raw/TCP 1 1~2 NIC 1: Valid 12 - Y Y
mode 2: Invalid
08 Setting System Network LPD 9475 Availability of LPD 1 1~2 NIC 1: Valid 12 - Y Y
mode client 2: Invalid
08 Setting System Network IPP 9478 Availability of IPP 1 1~2 NIC 1: Valid 12 - - Y
mode 2: Invalid
08 Setting System Network IPP 9481 IPP printer name MFPserial - NIC Maximum 127 letters 12 - - Y
mode The network-related serial number of the
equipment appears at “serial”
08 Setting System Network 9525 Display of MAC - - - (**: **: **: **: **: **) 2 - Y Y
mode address The address is displayed as above. 6-byte data is
divided by colon.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 70 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Network DHCP 9581 Enabling server's IP 1 1~2 - NetBIOS over TCP/IP Name Server option (44) = 12 - Y Y
mode address acquired by Primary and Secondary Wins NAME
DHCP 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
This value is used only when DHCP is enabled.
08 Setting System Network SMTP 9584 SMTP Server Option 2 1~2 - OFF/ON 12 - - Y
mode (69) Simple Mail Server 1: Valid
Address 2: Invalid
08 Setting System Network POP3 9585 POP3 Server Option 2 1~2 - OFF/ON 12 - - Y
mode (70) Post Office Server 1: Valid
Address 2: Invalid
08 Setting System Maintenanc General 9601 Equipment number - 9 digits SYS Fist digit: Production country (fixed) 11 Y Y Y
mode e (serial number) display Second digit: Model (fixed)
Third digit: Month (variable)
Fourth to ninth digit: serial number (variable)
This can be also entered with 05-9043.
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9604 Enabling/disabling a 1 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 - - Y
mode e service service notification 1: Enabled
<Default value>
NAD/MJD: 1
Others: 0
08 Setting System Maintenanc RDMS 9605 Sending error contents 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 - - Y
mode e of equipment 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9606 Setting total counter - - SYS (Hour/Hour/Minute/Minute) 1 - - Y
mode e service transmission interval
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9607 Email destination - - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 - - Y
mode e service address 2
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9608 Email destination - - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 - - Y
mode e service address 3
08 Setting System Wireless 9630 Wireless function 1 1~2 SYS Sets to turn the wireless function ON or OFF. 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver setting 1: OFF
2: ON
08 Setting System Wireless 9631 SSID - Refer to SYS Sets SSID for wireless LAN communication. 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver contents Maximum 32 characters.
08 Setting System Wireless 9632 Network type 1 Refer to SYS Sets the network type for wireless LAN 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver contents communication.
1: INFRASTRUCTURE
3: AP mode
08 Setting System Wireless 9633 Security 4 Refer to SYS Sets the security for wireless LAN communication. 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver contents 1: WPA2PSK
3: WEP
4: NONE
8: WPA2/WPA-PSK
08 Setting System Wireless 9640 WEP bit number 1 1~2 SYS Sets the WEP bit number for wireless LAN 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver communication.
1: 64
2: 128
08 Setting System Wireless 9641 WEP key entry method 2 1~2 SYS Sets the WEP key entry method for wireless LAN 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver communication.
1: Hex
2: ASCII
08 Setting System Wireless 9642 WEP key value - Refer to SYS Sets the WEP key for wireless LAN 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver contents communication.
Maximum 32 characters.
08 Setting System Wireless 9643 WPAPSK Passphrase - Refer to SYS Sets the WPAPSK passphrase for wireless LAN 12 - - Y
mode LAN driver contents communication.
Maximum 64 characters.
08 Setting System Network DHCP 9694 Enabling server's IP 1 1~2 - DNS domain name Option (15) DNS domain name 12 - Y Y
mode address acquired by of the client
DHCP 1: Enabled
2: Disabled
This value is used only when DHCP is enabled.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 71 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Maintenanc General 9700 Service technician 0 - SYS A telephone number can be entered up to 32 11 Y Y Y
mode e telephone number digits.
Use the [*] button to change the character mode,
and then use the [#] button to enter a hyphen(-).
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9751 Service technician FAX - - SYS FAX destination 11 - - Y
mode e number
Max. 32 digits
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9752 Service technician E- - - SYS Max. 192 characters 11 - - Y
mode e mail address
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled Service Notification 9756 User's name - - SYS Maximum 50 letters 11 - - Y
mode e service
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled Service Notification 9757 User's telephone - - SYS A telephone number can be entered up to 32 11 - - Y
mode e service number digits.
Use the [*] button to change the character mode,
and then use the [#] button to enter a hyphen(-).
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled Service Notification 9758 User's E-mail address - - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 - - Y
mode e service List: 256 digits
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9759 Location of the - - SYS Max. 100 characters 11 - - Y
mode e customer
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9760 Service number - - SYS Max. 5 digits 11 - - Y
mode e
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9761 Name of the service - - SYS Max. 50 characters 11 - - Y
mode e personnel
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9762 Phone number of the - - SYS Max. 32 digits 11 - - Y
mode e service personnel (Use the [TEMPLATE] button to enter a hyphen.)
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9763 Email address of the - - SYS Max. 192 characters 11 - - Y
mode e service personnel
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9764 Name of the supplier - - SYS Max. 50 characters 11 - - Y
mode e
08 Setting System Maintenanc General Auto supply order 9765 Location of the supplier - - SYS Max. 100 characters 11 - - Y
mode e
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled Supply Notice 9783 Display function Refer to 0~1 SYS Enabling/disabling Supply Notice to be displayed 1 - - Y
mode e service contents 0: Enabled
1: Disabled
<Default value>
NAD: 0
Others: 1
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled Service Notification 9793 Service Notification 0 0~1 SYS 0: Disabled 1 - - Y
mode e service setting 1: Enabled
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9794 Destination E-mail - - SYS Maximum 192 letters 11 - - Y
mode e service address 1
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9795 Total counter 0 0~1 SYS 0: Invalid 1 - - Y
mode e service information 1: Valid
transmission setting
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9796 Total counter 0 0~31 SYS 0 to 31 1 - - Y
mode e service transmission date
setting
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9797 PM counter notification 0 0~1 SYS 0: Invalid 1 - - Y
mode e service setting 1: Valid
08 Setting System 9798 Temporal - - SYS Sets a password for temporary communication 11 - - Y
mode communication within 5 to 10 digits. (Minimum: 5 digits, Maximum:
password setting 10 digits)
08 Setting System Process 9804 Forcible mode change 1 0~2 SYS 0: SLEEP MODE 1 Y Y Y
mode in toner empty status 1: AUTO POWER SAVE
2: READY
08 Setting System Laser 9805 Polygonal motor 3 0~9 SYS 0: 0 sec. (current setting) (Polygonal motor ready 1 Y Y Y
mode standby rotation Shift rotation at job end)
waiting time at job end 1 to 9: Setting value x 5sec.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 72 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 2523 2323 2329
Save Proc
05/ Sub Cod Sub- Default Acceptabl A/ AM/ A/
Mode Element Item Sub item Details locati Contents edur
08 element e code value e value 2523 2823 2829
on e AD AM A
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9880 Total counter 0 0~31 SYS 0 to 31 1 - - Y
mode e service transmission date
setting (2)
08 Setting System Maintenanc Remote-controlled 9881 Day of total counter 0 0~127 SYS 1 byte 00000000(0)-01111111(127) 1 - - Y
mode e service data transmission From the 2nd bit - Sunday, Monday, Tuesday,
Wednesday, Thursday, Friday, Saturday
08 Setting System User Screen setting 9891 Warning message 1 0~1 SYS 0: No warning notification 1 Y Y Y
mode interface when PM time has 1: Display warning notification
come
08 Setting System Version System software 9900 System software ROM - - - 2 Y Y Y
mode version
08 Setting System Version Engine 9901 Engine ROM version - - - 2 Y Y Y
mode
08 Setting System User Default mode setting Default setting (Copy) 9970 Original mode (Black) 0 0~6 SYS 0: Text/Photo 1 Y Y Y
mode interface 1: Text
2: Photo
3: -
4. -
5: -
6: Background Erase
08 Setting System User Default setting Image quality density 9971 Copy 0 0~1 SYS 0: Automatic 1 Y Y Y
mode interface 1: Manual
08 Setting System User Default setting Blank page judgment: 9972 Copy 0 -3~3 SYS The larger the value, the more the paper is judged 1 Y Y Y
mode interface Default setting as blank page.
The smaller the value, the less the paper is judged
as a blank page.
08 Setting System User Default setting Blank page judgment: 9973 Scan 0 -3~3 SYS The larger the value, the more the paper is judged 1 Y Y Y
mode interface Default setting as a blank page.
The smaller the value, the less the paper is judged
as a blank page.

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 73 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A 14 - 74 © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
SELF-DIAGNOSIS CODE (03/04/05/08 CODE)
 APPENDIX

DP-2523A/2523AD/2323AM/2823AM/2329A/2829A

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved

Maintenance Check List

1
DP-2523A
DP-2523AD
DP-2323AM
DP-2823AM
DP-2329A
DP-2829A

59k/80k
118k/160k
177k/240k
236k/320k
295k/400k
354k/480k
413k/560k

e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A
APPENDIX
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
APPENDIX
2
REVISION RECORD
Ver00

Ver00 <2019.07.05>
Page Contents
All Initial release

© 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A

REVISION RECORD
1
e-STUDIO2323AM/2523A/2523AD/2823AM/2329A/2829A © 2019 Toshiba Tec Corporation All rights reserved
REVISION RECORD
2
1-11-1, OSAKI, SHINAGAWA-KU, TOKYO, 141-8562, JAPAN